sae
979 mon
bikes)
vend
RNa ts wre,
er
pee
ate
ae
Coreen
oe
Pane
ae ae ey
OU Pet
as
ae
pd el ON into
’
Paztsirsirtas
z z 2 z ee
TITUTION NOILOLILSNI~ NVINOSHLIWS S3IY¥VUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN !
5 - ca ani
—= o : = wo — i)
= a \ 5 a 5 ka
: 2 Ne: 3 > 5
= zw A YAS bo] — w
- = \ \S - std a =
” Ne ” 2)
z m ~ AS = m =z a,
<= 7) < n = a8
yuvusit ~t! B RARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI _NVINOSHLINS, S34 1uVva wi
a = = = < = fy,
3 z a : 3 : Ua
< oO uw D B 2 w hip ay
© z = 2 ie hie |
= AN. > = > = >
” =. 7) 2 77) =z
NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
” 2 % wn > ”
as mz) Ba w a un
lead = oe = ae Sa
si e Fe c < oon
ow S cc = role =
m ro) : a re) a re}
= =z a 2 ae z
iINVYHNYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSN!I NVINOSHLIWS
2 5 = = ZO ae z
o = oO = o an 4
x 5 tit GF > 5 2 SN 5
; GM : : ENY =
2 a U, ras - = =
m 2 jl m Z2 m Loe :
TITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3IYWYSIT_LIBRARIES. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTE
: o” = n Zz ae ” = x.
Se ee = = =< G = = Xx
. = z = ZWNS 5S =z S
: at re) = 59 CR = 6 :
2 2 g ; ? ® \.. 8 2 4
2 = z iE SS =
2 2 S = NOs =
_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS s3aiuva |
a ws Z iw 2 &. U;
g aay a6 f Ms, 0G PES pa -_
: Eff 3 : : :
re) Fs Ye °o = ro) =
2 J = a z =)
TITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1¥vVuYdgIT LIBRARIES
z ee a Se
~_ ise] = ow — (‘fp wo
5 2 5 2 5 ly, Sa
= ee * E Lee
e 2 = 2 = OS Ki 2
” m m n°” m
= “ = n < 7) 1
iuvudgd rut B RARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI _NVINOSHLIWS S3 1uVvEg ,
, 7, < ¥ = z ‘ = < = yg
Wp = o z x = t z 4
be J 3 iG 8 Nw a id a
If = ™. = ae Pa ‘AW r Oo <x oO
= AS = E YQ Ss z = =,
Bre ie 5: :
EITUIOR NOLEN LUSNIT NVINGSHLNG 33 lyvuag I7_LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTI
= o a a = a PLD,
_ 4 = 4 = ~ ::
< CS . < c < _ =
e par) : ce par) a , +4
S ro) A OS ro} Be Oo .
ng 2 _ 2 a) = ie
1yvugi7z LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN EN sat Sere NOILNLILSNI NYINOSHLINS S31 uVUE
rm a i za iG
= Oo = Sealy ro} = Oe re)
iz) o — 47a “gs SN = ASX of S =
;
-
5
a ax
= LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN” INSTITUTION NOILALII
NVINOSHLINS S31luvugit
~ 3 fe)
and 2a =a
c z e = SEO z
ao » = ow =_ (3 ow =
2 \X® 2 Zz & $Y > 2
1} > MS fe > = 7 i> =
a WS - se ra YF fies =
: = WY 2 = ee ae Q
/ w fart = (27) = 77) =
ARIES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOJILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS, Saluvud 11 LIBRAR
= z 5 = < = Vi a
4 Pape = = = z= .
= s NAG ig 5 Uefia SX
2 E Lv" 2 iS Z, Ee ON
i #2 See ee : : ees
ALILSNI. NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLI
ae 7) = ” S w”
a = o = G zr
: & : < 3 :
s : sd = or =: re)
- 2 "S 3 S ant = ar
. 5 wd
RARIES SMITHSONIAN, INSTITUTION NOLLALILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sa1uvudi7_LIBRAR
z a & z iB
5 : = = : :
2)
ES = E = - z
a = = = . =
hee Z p ae a
JNVINOSHLINS, S31YVY E17 LIBRARIES, SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION,, NOILALI
Sf. Ne.
”n wD» ” WX - @ am ° SA D ¥f.
= 2 EWG 2 EWS 2 Z|
a z a . 2B = Fa
RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saluvugi7_l!BRAF
w” > “” S ee n” =
te) SS
= ae - . 72 4 pl = e ASS = a
a . aa 4 Hd -_ a -~ cS oS a ‘ SA a par
aif Z a < 2 WAS < c
« Gry = ce ear SS oe 4
a Y rat = = - om 5
Be vii a = < WANT * NOLLAL
INLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS ~°3 tyuvyuag Pte LIBRARI ES_ SMITHSONIAN, INSTITUTION = !
= . (@) =— Oo A = (e)
ow ‘ = o = (fp wo eS
cad ys 5 a 5 , My, ah 5
> VOW E > = F jp E
Ps] 3 YA ra Bs] cay Vf C4. wa ke
= AS SS wo par De * = a
m “aS z m z= m =z
4) ; = w = 77) =
IRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS SaluvadI7_LIBRAI
t 2 *
AN
= Pa X + = =a ws (7 [@) ;
NY Ae! rT ~W IANS Oo = SOG FN
sy z E XS = = = Ss,
} as So = 2 = ee ne
AMLULSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYAIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION Coe
z = 4 FA ul
“n = Ww Z =
c = = YG," =
eo + < YY fg Ii A <
c c “2° GS fe
5 = 3S = * Y fo 5 m
2 a 2 = z =
BRARIES SMITHSONIAN” INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNIT NVINOSHLINS Saluvadi7 LIBRA
<1HSON, 5 < auSON, S = NS = v 1150
Sao og Ce So oem a Os 8 CSD © Gan
ANNALS OF THE _ ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 81 BAND 81
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 81 BAND
THE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1980
@ SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA BY
THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG, CAPE
336
LIST OF CONTENTS
Page
CHALONER, W. G., Forey, P. L., GARDINER, B. G., Hitt, A. J. & YOunNG, V. T.
Devonian fish and plants from the Bokkeveld Series of South Africa. (Published
February 1980.) aa Ba ae aS ae ie a ras ned 27h
GRINE, F. E. see TOLLMAN, S. M.
Haun, B. D. see TOLLMAN, S. M.
HENDEY, Q. B.
Agriotherium (Mammalia, Ursidae) from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and
relationships of the genus. (Published February 1980.) .. ae as Me 1
KENNEDY, W. J. see KLINGER, H. C.
KLEIN, R. G.
Environmental and ecological implications of large mammals from Upper
Pleistocene and Holocene sites in southern Africa. (Published June 1980.) .. 223
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J.
The Umzamba Formation at its type section, Umzamba Estuary (Pondoland,
Transkei), the ammonite content and Se cee distribution.
(Published August 1980.) .. Ais at a ; Ko — ae 207,
Louw, E.
The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 10. Station data 1977,
1978, 1979. (Published April 1980.) oF ; a Si
TOLLMAN, S. M., GRINE, F. E. & HAHN, B. D.
Ontogeny and sexual dimorphism in Aulacephalodon eae Anomodontia).
(Published February 1980.) 56 ae = : ai ae ae tel
VAN DEN HEEVER, J. A.
On the validity of the Therocephalian oe asc ae paisa
(Published February 1980.) ; , 111
;
»
: *
ie
; 7
1 \
a 4
; ;
4
a }
,
. ro * A
) aia
;
a 2
7 a %
in
J *
a ‘ : Sass er, oe
y - os é 4 . ‘ om ; + a
ey ere ee wal Piya ghee a ala NS
; ’ 7 ) b Pear 4
i : Ses i oo. ‘
i it r ¥
a ay
2 , : :
‘
y
’ r
a » \ rf
?
3
, zs
i 1
_-
Ne
Dar
«
: , is
‘ ae oe
Uy a”
F
; ,
‘
es
mae 5
NEW GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME
Page
Barrydalaspis Chaloner, Forey, Gardiner, Hill & Young, 1980 ts ae a el 29
‘ 'v
; , “ 7 . i
ic
A
ye
‘ ab,
‘ ‘
7
r
ti
4 * ,
7
‘
i
5
“
iy
5 ? 7
: t
a ox ft he
q
a q en
. ru *
Re 4
z *
7
P
; y 4
\
roa? te yy On Me ns F i
Ri ‘ ‘ F
¢
‘ ; y i =
t
j
iy j
7
‘ |
f BS
a
f +t
pes Ne
é ‘
I»
J
5
‘
4
‘
~
OLUME 81 PART 1 FEBRUARY 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
ANNA
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN |
MUSEUM |
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
|. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author's(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out) _
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
{c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction : : :
(e) Subject-matier of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are-not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et a/. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGn, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed, London: Macmillan.
FIscHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 1960b, Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
Ture, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. Jn: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges, Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 81 Band
February 1980 Februarie
Part 1 Deel
AGRIOTHERIUM (MAMMALIA, URSIDAE) FROM
LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA, AND
RELATIONSHIPS OF THE GENUS
By
Q. B. HENDEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 84 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
AGRIOTHERIUM (MAMMALIA, URSIDAE) FROM LANGEBAANWEG,
SOUTH AFRICA, AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE GENUS
By
Q. B. HENDEY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 42 figures and 21 tables)
LMS. accepted 11 September 1979]
ABSTRACT
Agriotherium africanum from the latest Miocene/early Pliocene Varswater Formation at
Langebaanweg, and other relevant material indicate that Agriotherium was descended from
late Miocene Indarctos. Later Ursidae are divided into the subfamilies Ursavinae (Ursavus
spp), Agriotheriinae (tribes Agriotheriini and Ailuropodini), and Ursinae (Ursini and Tre-
marctini). ‘Ursavus’ depereti and Ailuropoda melanoleuca constitute the Ailuropodini, and
Indarctos and Agriotherium the Agriotheriini. The latter consist of a primary European lineage
from which branches in Africa, Asia and North America arose. Either all species of Indarctos,
or the later ones only, should perhaps be referred to Agriotherium.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : ; 1
The Langebaanweg Agriotherium ; 4
Material . : ; ; : : 4
The skull ‘ ; ‘ 9
The postcranial skeleton : : 29
Discussion . ¥ ‘ ; ‘ 51
Palaeoecology : ; : 53
Relationships of griotherium : ; 72
Nomenclature PUM Gees Soll fei as 98
Summary : 4 3 . 104
Acknowledgements saan . mr 106
References . ; ? : ; . 106
INTRODUCTION
Agriotherium africanum from the latest Miocene/early Pliocene Varswater
Formation exposed in a phosphate mine (‘E’ Quarry) at Langebaanweg, Cape
Province (Fig. 1), was the first member of its genus to be recorded in Africa,
and the first bear known from sub-Saharan Africa (Hendey 1972: Wolff et al.
1973). Although the first Agriotherium specimens were found in Europe at
least as long ago as 1809 (Stehlin 1907), and others have since been collected
at scattered localities through much of the Old World and North America, this
genus has remained relatively poorly known, being represented for the most
part by fragmentary material belonging to few individuals.
Initially this also applied to the Langebaanweg representative of the genus,
but later more material came to light and it is remarkable that ‘Agriotherium
africanum, the most recently described and most remote record of the genus,
is apparently also the best represented’ (Hendey 1977: 112). It is in the latter
1
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81 (1), 1980: 1-109, 42 figs, 21 tables.
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LOWER COURSE OF RIVER
DURING LATE MIOCENE/
EARLY PLIOCENE
ATLANTIC —
OCEAN
20 «kilometres
Fig. 1. The south-western Cape Province.
respect that A. africanum is particularly noteworthy. It provides the best indi-
cation yet that Agriotherium, like other bears, was characterized by appreciable
variation in its dentition and in size, the latter evidently being due to marked
sexual dimorphism.
A. africanum specimens are recorded from two stratigraphic horizons in
‘E’ Quarry, namely beds 3aS and 3aN of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member
(Hendey 1976). The bed 3aS sample, which includes the holotype, comprises
only a small part of the total assemblage. Most of the bed 3aN sample was
collected in a restricted area (the fossil accumulation at Locality 5—Dingle
et al. 1979, fig. 2). This material is from a river channel lag deposit, which was
laid down in the lee of a phosphate rock outcrop, while the remainder of the
bed 3aN sample was from lateral extensions of the lag deposit. Since this
material was probably accumulated during a very restricted period, the bed 3aN
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 3
A. africanum sample may represent remnants of a single population in a temporal
as well as a geographical sense. There is no reason to believe that the character
diversity observed in this sample can be ascribed to anything but normal intra-
specific variation.
On the other hand, there are differences between bed 3aS and bed 3aN
specimens which apparently reflect evolutionary changes, suggesting that the
time interval between deposition of these beds was of sufficient duration for
such changes to have occurred. The differences are, however, insufficient to
warrant formal nomenclatural recognition. A. africanum thus joins the growing
number of species which indicate that deposition of the Varswater Formation
took place over an appreciable period in time (see Hendey 1978; Gentry
1980). Langebaanweg is the only recorded locality where Agriotherium is
known to occur in more than one stratigraphic horizon.
A. africanum is also of interest since it is one of several species now known
from sub-Saharan Africa which indicate that towards the end of the Miocene
this region had closer faunal links with Eurasia (Hendey 1978). The present
study of Agriotherium has suggested that faunal interchange at this time was
between Africa and Europe, presumably by way of an Iberian/north-west
African connection, rather than, or in addition to, one between Africa and
Asia via the Middle East. Apart from A. africanum, the Langebaanweg car-
nivores, Plesiogulo monspessulanus and Dinofelis diastemata, also point to such
a connection, as have recent studies on other mammals (e.g. Forstén 1978).
Until the recent discovery of an agriotheriine at Sahabi in Libya (Boaz
et al. 1979), the Langebaanweg Agriotherium was the only African record of
the group, and its location at the southern continental extremity was evidence
that it had been widespread on this continent.
On a more mundane level, A. africanum has an appeal in that it is still
South Africa’s only known bear, living or fossil.
The material described below is housed in the South African Museum,
and catalogue numbers are prefixed SAM-PQ., which identifies the institution
and department concerned. This lettering is omitted from the text, and the
locality prefix (L) and serial numbers of specimens only are given. Modern
comparative material in this museum is distinguished by the prefix ZM.
Other institutional abbreviations used in the text are as follows:
BMNH-—British Museum (Natural History), London
GSI —Geological Survey of India, Calcutta
NMB —Naturhistorisches Museum, Basel
NMW —Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna
Originals and casts of Agriotherium and related taxa in, or from, the above
institutions were examined in the course of the present study. In addition,
skulls and skeletons of extant ursids in the South African Museum and the
British Museum (Natural History) were studied. Comparative data were other-
wise obtained from the publications cited.
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
THE LANGEBAANWEG AGRIOTHERIUM
MATERIAL
The available Agriotherium africanum specimens are listed below according
to the horizon from which they were derived, and, where possible, according
to sites or areas within ‘E’ Quarry.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aS
L2045—Left maxillary fragment with P* (holotype)
L1868—Left I,, right P°, fragments of right P* and M?
L1844, L3141—Left I, and I,, probably of the same individual (Wolff et al.
(1973) were incorrect in identifying L1844 as a right I,)
L12637—Incomplete left M! (Hendey (1972) was incorrect in identifying this
tooth as M?)
L2154—Incomplete proximal left ulna
The above specimens were described or discussed by Hendey (1972) and
Wolff et al. (1973).
L12561—Right M, (see Hendey 1972)
L12033, L41270—Right I*’s
L40031—Left hemimandible fragment and distal left humerus
L40030— Right metatarsal II and 2nd phalanx, probably of same individual as
L40031
L40002—Left femur and patella, and a thoracic vertebra, of one individual
L3433—Left humerus lacking proximal parts
L3994— Shaft of left humerus
L40040—Distal right humerus
L12383—Proximal right ulna
L40003—Left radius lacking distal parts
L41702—Left scapholunar
L41295— Right cuneiform
L12503—Right pisiform
L20998, L25862— Right metacarpals III
L41575— Right metacarpal IV
L40043, L40128— Proximal right and left femora
L40028, L40029— Proximal right tibiae
L41108—Proximal right metatarsal V
L10411—Proximal Ist phalanx
L42667—2nd phalanx
The above material represents at least three individuals, but since the
specimens were collected over a wide area and from different levels within
bed 3aS, the actual number is certainly much higher. Unless otherwise stated,
each catalogue number could represent a different individual, which makes a
total of 28.
It is not certain that those specimens in this series with numbers above
L40000 are all from bed 3aS (see p. 62).
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 5)
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—excavation LBW-E 1975/1 (site—
TCWW Prom)
L33160—Incomplete left manus, comprising scapholunar, unciform, magnum,
trapezoid and metacarpals II to V, the latter lacking distal ends and some
of the carpals incomplete
L33341, L34188—Incomplete right and left innominates
L30205—Left metatarsal III
L33557— Proximal left metatarsal V
The above material represents at least 2 individuals.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—excavation LBW-E 1976/1 (site—RP)
L33824—Crown of left C.
L33825—Left I,
L13826—Proximal right radius
L33828— Right metacarpal IV
L33830—Distal metapodial fragment
The above material represents at least one individual.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—excavation LBW-E 1976/2 (site—IWRP
or Locality 5 of Dingle et al. 1979)
L45062—Incomplete skull (partly restored) and mandible (restored), lacking
left I, right I°, left and right P', right lower incisors, and left P,
Associated postcranial bones, including: parts of at least 7 vertebrae
(some numbered L49048 and L49115); fragment of distal right humerus;
right ulna lacking distal parts; right scapholunar, cuneiform, pisiform,
unciform, magnum and trapezoid; proximal right metacarpal III; proximal
left humerus; left ulna with distal parts detached and fragmented; left
radius lacking part of shaft; right tibia and proximal fibula; right astragalus,
calcaneum, navicular and cuboid; right metatarsals II, IV and V; left
astragalus; left metatarsal III and proximal metatarsal II; 11 sesamoids,
five Ist phalanges, four 2nd phalanges and four 3rd phalanges
L45137—Right I?, C lacking root, and P* to M2; left C and P* to M2; some skull
fragments
L45114—Right hemimandible lacking ascending ramus, incisors, P,; and M3
The above specimens were briefly discussed by Hendey (1977).
146605, L48564, L48577—Left and right maxillary fragments with M?’s and
part of left M1
L46573—Crown of right I?
L47758/9—Right and left I°, probably of the same individual
L48851— Fragment of left I°
L46074—Right P*
L47698—Left M?
1L46563—Left M., probably of same individual as L45114
L48742— Fragment of mandibular condyle
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
L47449, L47701, L47830—Incomplete cervical vertebrae
L45063—Incomplete left forelimb, comprising humerus (partly restored), with
proximal end detached; ulna and radius (restored); scapholunar, cuneiform,
pisiform, unciform, magnum, trapezoid and trapezium; metacarpal, V,
and fragments of metacarpals I, III and IV; three sesamoids; three Ist
phalanges
L46602— Proximal left humerus
L48741, L48747—Proximal left radii
L47699 /700— Proximal left and right radii of one individual
L46076—Right ulna lacking distal end
L46134—Left scapholunar, right pisiform and metapodial fragment, probably
of one individual
L46132, L48021—Left and right scapholunars
L47074— Right magnum
L45448—Left metacarpal I and distal metapodial fragment, probably of one
individual
L48432—Right metacarpal IV
L49889— Distal left femur
L47533, L47910—Left and right astragali
L47387— Proximal right metatarsal I
L48572 /3— Right metatarsal V and left metatarsal II, probably of one individual
L46133, L46216, L48766—Metapodial fragments
L47358, L48533, L48730, L49888—1st phalanges
L48213, L48230—2nd phalanges
The above material represents at least five individuals.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—surface finds in the vicinity of LBW-E
1976 |2
L47242—Left premaxilla and right M? of one individual.
L50636—Right I?
L50981—Left M,
L42537—Proximal left ulna and distal femur, lacking epiphyses, of one
individual
L50635—Left scapholunar
L50638— Patella
L50637—Distal metapodial
L41468— Ist phalanx
The above material represents at least two individuals.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—dump 10 sample from deposits immedi-
ately north of LBW-E 1976/2
L55012—Left and right P*’s and right M? of one individual
L55015, L55016—Right I*’s
L55014—Left I*
|
|
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA if.
L55013—Crown of right C
L55017— Four anterior premolars of more than one individual
L55029— Right metacarpal I
L55019— Distal left fibula
L55021— Right navicular
L55022/28—Seven metapodial fragments
L55020—Sesamoid
L55030/35—Six Ist phalanges
L55036—2nd phalanx
L55037/43—Seven 3rd phalanges
The above material represents at least two individuals.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—dump 9 sample from deposits immedi-
ately west of LBW-E 1976/2
L50445—Incomplete left hemimandible with C and P,
L50453— Fragment of left P*
L50458— Right I,
L50446— Right M,
L50457— Left magnum
L50454— Distal metapodial fragment
L51592—2nd phalanx
L50455/6—Two 3rd phalanges
The above material represents at least one Gadiadnall
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—dump 8 sample from deposits immedi-
ately south of LBW-E 1976/2
L50003—Incomplete left hemimandible with P, and M,
L50004— Incomplete left hemimandible with P, and associated M, and M,
L50903— Fragments of right hemimandible with incomplete C
L50008—Incomplete right P*
L50005/6— Right and left M,’s
L50007— Right M,
Unnumbered teeth and tooth fragments, including right I’, I° and I,, a canine
and two anterior premolars
L50843 /54— Eleven vertebra fragments
L50857/8—Incomplete left and right scapulae
L50834/5/6/8/9—Humerii fragments of at least two individuals
L50806, L50816—Proximal left and right radii
L50807— Distal right radius fragment
L50777— Distal epiphysis of right radius
L50763—Left ulna lacking distal end
L50764— Left ulna fragment
L50840— Proximal ulna fragment
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
L50805, L50808— Distal right ulnae
L50767— Right scapholunar
L50813, L50819—Fragments of right and left scapholunars, probably of one
individual
L50786, L50795—Left and right cuneiforms
L50772, L50774— Right unciforms
L50791, L50794— Right magnums
L50775—Left metacarpal I
L50783, L50788—Left and right metacarpals II
L50810—Proximal right metacarpal III
L50855/6/9/60—Femora fragments of at least two individuals
L50841, L50833— Proximal and distal left tibia, probably of one individual
L50842—Proximal right tibia
L50769— Distal epiphysis of right tibia
L50815, L50828— Distal left and right fibulae
L50765/6—Left astragali
L50770, L50789— Right astragali
L50768— Right calcaneum lacking tuber calcis epiphysis
L50773—Left navicular
L50778, L50790— Right and left entocuneiforms
L50771, L50787—Left and right metatarsals I
L50824— Proximal left metatarsal IV
L50812, L50829— Proximal right metatarsals V
L50809/11/14/17/18/20/22/23 /25/26/30—Eleven metapodial fragments
L50802—Sesamoid
L50776/80/81 /84/93 /97—Six 1st phalanges
L50821/7—Two incomplete Ist phalanges
L50785/96/804—Three 2nd phalanges
L50782/98/99 /800/801—Five 3rd phalanges
L50831—Incomplete 3rd phalanx
The above material represents at least four individuals.
Pelletal Phosphorite Member, bed 3aN—carbonaceous deposit south of dump 8
area
L41404— Fragmented and incomplete skull, with only the left premaxilla and
maxilla largely intact, and with right ?P?, and left C (damaged), P*, M1 and
M? (see Hendey 1977)
L40044— Mandible fragment with associated right radius and fragments of ulna
L43126— Fragments of at least six thoracic and lumbar vertebrae.
The above material represents at least two individuals.
The minimum number of individuals represented in the combined bed 3aN
samples is eleven, although the actual number may be far higher. These samples
are from a single horizon of river channel and associated deposits, which were
exposed over a linear distance of about 200m, with sample areas either contiguous
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 9
or not far removed from one another. Elements of individual skeletons are
likely to be represented in more than one sample unit.
THE SKULL
Apart from L45062, the only other described skull of Agriotherium is one
belonging to A. sivalense from the Siwalik Hills in India (Falconer & Cautley
1836; Lydekker 1884). Both skulls are incomplete, and although L45062 is also
slightly distorted in parts, it is perhaps the more informative of the two speci-
mens. They are similar in overall size, and, in so far as comparisons are possible,
they are also similar in morphology.
Another skull which is remarkably like that of the Langebaanweg Agrio-
therium is of an Indarctos from Florida which was recently described by Wolff
(1978). Although the Langebaanweg and Florida skulls undoubtedly do belong
to Agriotherium and Indarctos as these genera are presently conceived, the
description of skull characters in the latter (Wolff 1978: 2-4) could, with only
slight modification, serve as a description of the Langebaanweg specimen. The
significance of this will be discussed later (see p. 93).
Other described skulls of Indarctos, of which there are two from Samos
(Helbing 1932; Thenius 1949, 1959) and one from Spain (Crusafont & Kurtén
1976), are less like the Langebaanweg specimen because they represent species
which are more primitive than that from Florida.
A summary account of the skull characters of L45062 has been given
elsewhere (Hendey 1977), but they are dealt with in more detail here.
The skull of A. africanum (Fig. 2) differs in certain aspects from those of
all living bears. Its most striking characteristic is its massive size (Table 1),
although in some dimensions it is matched, or even surpassed, by skulls of
male Kodiak bears (Ursus arctos middendorffi), which are amongst the largest
of living bears (Hendey 1977, table 1). A. africanum is otherwise most readily
distinguished from living bears by its relatively short and broad snout, while
the braincase, which is surmounted by a very high saggital crest, appears small
by comparison. The nuchal crest is also very prominent and dorsally projects
well behind the occipital condyles. The zygomatic arches are very stout and
strongly arched. They resemble those of the giant panda, Ailuropoda melano-
leuca, more than any other living ursid, and, amongst extinct ursids in which
the zygomata are known, they are closest to those of the Florida Indarctos and
North American Arctodus simus (Kurtén 1967).
In all these respects the skull of A. africanum is reminiscent of that of the
lion, Panthera leo, although the latter is far smaller, and, of course, very different
in detail (Fig. 3). The resemblances between the skulls of Agriotherium and P.
leo are probably due to their sharing adaptations to a carnivorous way of life.
By curious contrast, the A. africanum skull also resembles that of the most
herbivorous of all bears, Ailuropoda, as well as that of Indarctos, another
supposed herbivore (Wolff 1978). This may be an indication that the actual
nature of the diet is less important than the requirement in certain Carnivora
10
Fig. 2.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dorsal, lateral and ventral views of the Langebaanweg Agriotherium skull, L45062.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 11
,
TABLE 1
Dimensions of Langebaanweg Agriotherium skull and mandible.
SKULL L45062 141404
Basallength . : ete : ; ; ; ‘ : ; 4 c. 381,0 —
Condylobasal length . c. 420,0 —
Palate length (posterior alveolar ‘margin of Ps to posterior palatine
incisure) ; ak # Ay Sets : : : : : ; ‘ c. 165,0 —
Zygomatic width . : . i. : ; : , ¢ : c. 305,0 —
Rostral width (over _C’ C's). ‘ 3 ; 5 f ‘ ; ; c. 118,0 —
Width over M?’s_. ‘ : ite Re : ; F ; ; ; , 135,0 —
Interorbital width . : ¢ . : ; : : : : F c. 125,0 —
Width over postorbital processes , OPER. ona oP ROT Se Ss c. 150,0 —
Occiput width at base of mastoid processes eg see Woy eees cok icbic Bens c. 130,0 —
Condylar width veo, i Gt BES PRR aa ey ee c. 90,0 —
C-M? length at alveolar margin : : es : 5 iS Dek : 149.0 154,0
P=M* length at alveolar margin . -. . . . . +. . . 83,5 82,5
MANDIBLE 145062 145114 50003 150004
Length (C to condyle) . ; : : ; j 296,0 — = —
Height of ascending ramus . ; ; : , 142,0 = = =
Transverse diameter of condyle . : : : 71,0 = os ==
Depth below M, . é : : g : : 69,0 68,5 c. 74,0 —_
Breadth below M, . : 4 : d : : 26,9 26,8 24,7 —
Depth at diastema . 3 5 : 3 : 61,0 66,0 65,3 59,4
C—M,; length at alveolar margin ; : : F 174,0 c.190,0 c.190,0 —
P,-M; length at alveolar margin . : F : 104,0 =. 117,0 111,0 —
for unusually powerful jaw musculature, with consequent similar modification
of the masticatory apparatus.
There are also some similarities between the skulls of A. africanum and the
polar bear, Thalarctos maritimus, which is the most carnivorous of living
Ursinae. Like A. africanum, Thalarctos also has a relatively broad snout and a
relatively straight dorsal profile in lateral view. These, and other, resemblances
between Thalarctos and A. africanum will be discussed again later.
Although Thalarctos has a relatively broad snout, it is simply a modifica-
tion of the ‘long-faced’ ursine condition, and it is easily distinguished from
‘short-faced’ Tremarctinae, which in turn bear a greater resemblance to Agrio-
therium and Indarctos, and, amongst the latter, particularly the Florida specimen.
The relatively short and broad tremarctine snouts are, however, ursine-like
in having the posterior palatine incisure well posterior of the M?’s (see Kurtén
1966, 1967). By contrast, in A. africanum the posterior ends of the M?’s are in
line with this incisure. The situation in Jndarctos is similar (e.g. I. atticus from
Samos—Helbing 1932; Thenius 1959), except that in this instance the M?’s
project slightly more posteriorly because, unlike these teeth in Agriotherium,
they have a talon and are more anteroposteriorly elongated. Ailuropoda is
virtually identical to Indarctos in this respect. The situation of the posterior
palatine incisure relative to the M?’s sets Agriotherium, Indarctos and Ailuropoda
apart from all other later ursids.
It is worth noting here that Davis (1964: 50) believed that the lengthened
palate in Ursus relative to that in Ailuropoda ‘is an illusion created by the large
Fig. 3.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dorsal views of skulls. A. Thalarctos. B. Ailuropoda. C. The Langebaanweg
Agriotherium. D. Panthera leo. A-B after Gregory (1936, figs 13-14).
——
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 13
teeth of the latter’ and that relative ‘to the anterior end of the braincase, the
palate actually extends farther posteriorly in the panda.’ This is true, but Davis
makes no mention here of the great shortening of the posterior parts of the
Ailuropoda skull, which undoubtedly has an effect on the position of the palate
relative to the braincase.
The palate of L45062 is otherwise unremarkable, except that it lacks the
minor posterior palatine foramen which is present in all other later ursids.
In addition, it has a relatively small anterior median palatine foramen. In the
latter respect it resembles Indarctos and Ailuropoda, and differs from the Ursinae
and Tremarctinae. The minor posterior palatine foramen has apparently been
incorporated with the major one, probably as a result of shortening of the palate.
A vestige of the minor foramen is indicated on the posterior part of the major
foramen by a shelf of bone projecting from the lateral wall of the latter. Earlier
in the history of Agriotherium this shelf may well have extended to the medial
walls of the major foramen, thus forming a separate minor foramen posteriorly.
The infraorbital foramen is situated above the posterior part of P+, as in
Indarctos. This foramen is more posteriorly situated in Ursinae and some
Tremarctinae, but is more anteriorly situated in Ailuropoda. It is relatively
small compared with that in other Ursidae, and in those A. africanum specimens
in which it is preserved (L2045, L45062, L41404) it is in the form of a single
opening. In other ursids, such as the A. sivalense skull and some tremarctines,
there may be more than one opening. The latter condition is probably of no
great significance, since multiple infraorbital foramina have been observed in
other carnivores (e.g. Proteles cristatus).
There is a marked concavity of the maxilla above the reduced anterior
premolars, anteroventrally from the infraorbital foramen, which is caused by
the expansion of the maxilla over the massive root of the canine and over the
roots of the posterior cheek teeth. In anterior view the bulges over the canine
roots completely obscure the infraorbital foramina. Amongst the Ursinae a
similar tendency was observed in Thalarctos, although in this instance the
infraorbital foramina were only partly obscured. Wolff’s (1978: 2) description
of the snout of the Florida Jndarctos shows that it is essentially similar to
A. africanum. The latter is distinct only in having features such as the bulge
over the canine roots exaggerated, apparently because of the larger size of the
Langebaanweg species. Wolff unfortunately provided few measurements of the
Florida skull, and consequently most dimensions must be estimated from
illustrations.
The nasal aperture of L45062 does not recede as markedly towards the
nasals as it does in the Ursinae, and A. africanum resembles Indarctos and the
Tremarctinae in this respect. This feature is evidently due to relative shortening
of the snout.
Observations on the frontal region of L45062 are omitted, since there was
severe fragmentation of this part of the skull and the restoration is not neces-
sarily accurate. For example, the orbit appears smaller and the frontals more
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
inflated than in the skull of A. sivalense, in which this region is well preserved
and therefore certainly accurate. It is nevertheless clear that the post-orbital
processes of A. africanum are relatively less prominent than those of Ursinae,
and the former is probably more like Jndarctos (I. atticus) and Ailuropoda in
this respect.
In his description of the zygomatic arches of Ailuropoda, Davis (1964: 47)
stated that in dorsal view they ‘form nearly a perfect circle, compared with the
triangular outline in Ursus and other carnivores’. In A. africanum, which has
exceedingly stout zygomata, their shape approaches that in Ailuropoda. The
glenoid fossa and postglenoid process are also large, and in the postglenoid
region a wide shelf of bone extends over the external auditory meatus, linking
the zygomatic arch with the nuchal crest. The situation in Jndarctos and Ailuro-
poda is similar, although in the latter the shelf of bone is much shorter, owing
to the anteroposterior compression of the basicranial region in Ailuropoda. The
shelf of bone is less well developed in the Ursinae.
Amongst fossil specimens the zygomata which most closely resemble those
of L45062 belong to the Florida /ndarctos, and once again Wolff’s (1978: 2)
description also applies to the Langebaanweg skull. The latter differs in
apparently having zygomata of larger size, and in being more strongly arched
and thus more Ailuropoda-like.
The sagittal crest of L45062 is extremely well developed, reaching a height
of at least 50 mm, and, as in the Florida Indarctos (Wolff 1978: 2, 3), it has
‘a very conspicuous cleft between the parietals’. It is, however, slightly deeper
(up to 7 mm) and possibly longer (at least 70 mm) than that of the Florida skull.
A similar cleft is found in the sagittal crest of Ailuropoda (Davis 1964).
According to Wolff (1978: 3), ‘several large, rather irregularly sized and
positioned nutrient foramina appear on either side of the parietals just above
the temporal shelves near the posterior of the skull in several agriotheriine
specimens’, including the skull described by him. There are two such foramina
in L41404, one on either side of the sagittal crest, immediately adjacent to it
and close to its posterior limit. The same applies to L45062, but since this
region of the skull is incomplete, it is possible that there were more than two
such foramina.
The large size of the zygomata and enormous sagittal crest, together with
various rugosities for muscle attachments similar to those of the Florida Jndarc-
tos (Wolff 1978), indicate that the masticatory musculature of A. africanum
was exceptionally powerful, and in keeping with the massive canines and
posterior cheek teeth of this species.
The basicranial regions of L45062, L41404, and L45137 are unfortunately
poorly preserved and incomplete, although sufficient remains to show that they
are ursid-like. Amongst the living Ursidae there are similarities to both Ursinae
and Ailuropoda, while of described fossil specimens they closely resemble, and
in several respects are indistinguishable from, the Samos J. atticus (Thenius
1949, 1959) and the Florida Indarctos (Wolff 1978).
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 1S
As in Ailuropoda and Indarctos, the foramen rotundum and orbital fissure
form a single opening in both L45062 and L41404. There is a well-developed
horizontal division separating them a short distance posterior to the common
opening as in the Florida Jndarctos. In this respect Ailuropoda differs in that
there is at most ‘a paper-thin partition separating them’ (Davis 1964: 49).
A. africanum is also like Ailuropoda and Indarctos, and different from most,
if not all other Ursidae, in lacking an alisphenoid canal. In addition, A. afri-
canum, Indarctos, and Ailuropoda are similar in that the medial edge of the
glenoid fossa is closer to the foramen rotundum than is the case in the Ursinae,
evidently because of the greater transverse length of this fossa in these three
taxa.
The same applies in the case of the foramen ovale, which is preserved in
L45062, L41404, and L45137. This foramen opens opposite the posterior wall
of the glenoid fossa in these specimens, and they are similar to the Samos
I. atticus, and probably also the Florida Indarctos, in this respect. In the Ursinae
the foramen ovale is more posteriorly situated, while in Ailuropoda it is further
forward.
The postglenoid foramen in A. africanum is situated between the external
auditory meatus and the medial edge of the postglenoid process, but is closer
to the latter than is the case with living ursids. Amongst the latter, Ailuropoda
is the most distinct, since the postglenoid foramen is ‘more laterally situated
than in Ursus’ (Davis 1964: 52). The situation in the Florida Jndarctos and
I. atticus is similar to that in A. africanum, although the specimen described by
Thenius (1949) differs in having a double opening.
The external auditory meatus is incomplete in L45062, but it is evidently
similar in position and orientation to that in the Florida /ndarctos.
The anterior (squamosal) part of the mastoid process of L41404 is complete.
It had not yet fused to the posterior (periotic) portion of this process, nor to
the bone which caps this process. In size and orientation it is apparently similar
to the mastoid process of the Florida Jndarctos, and appears to have been more
laterally directed than that of later ursids. Both the mastoid and paroccipital
processes of L45062 are lost. The relative position of the bases of these processes
differs from that in later ursids in that the base of the mastoid process is only
slightly more laterally situated than that of the paroccipital process. The
mastoid process of L45062 apparently differed from that of L41404 in being
orientated ventrally.
Part of the lateral walls of the stylomastoid foramina, and the posterior
margins of the posterior lacerate foramina, are preserved in L45062. Their
positions relative to one another are as in the Ursinae and Jndarctos. The same
applies to the hypoglossal foramina and the anterior lacerate foramina.
Little of the bulla of L45062 remains. The posterior parts appear to have
been more inflated than in Ursus arctos, and in this respect the bulla may have
been more Jndarctos-like. In overall size the bullae of A. africanum and a
European U. arctos (ZM39056) were apparently similar, which is surprising in
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
view of the very much larger size of the A. africanum skull. In this respect
A, africanum is also Indarctos-like. Ailuropoda is remarkable in that ‘externally
there is no indication of a bulla’ (Davis 1964: 319, 320). .
This is but one of the peculiarities of the Ailuropoda skull, which has been
‘profoundly modified by the demands of mastication’ (Davis 1964: 46). In less
specialized ancestral forms the basicranial and other regions of the skull may
well have resembled their counterparts in Indarctos and Agriotherium more
closely than those in the Ursinae. The absence of the alisphenoid canal in
Indarctos, Agriotherium, and Ailuropoda is probably the single most important
basicranial character which distinguishes them from the Ursinae. This canal
is present in the Canidae and all other Ursidae (Wolff 1978), including the
Amphicyoninae (Ginsburg 1977; Hunt 1977) and, presumably, the
Hemicyoninae.
The occipital region of A. africanum is known from L45062 (ventral parts)
and L41404 (dorsal part and ventral part adjacent to, and including, the squa-
mosal part of the mastoid process). In posterior view it is relatively narrow and
steeply arched, rather like that of U. arctos and Indarctos. In L41404, which
represents a young adult with some sutures unfused, there is an indication of a
constriction above the mastoid process. In L45062, an older individual, the
nuchal crest is strongly developed, and instead of passing ventrally directly
on to the lateral side of the mastoid process, as in most living ursids, it is linked
anteriorly with the shelf of bone which projects posteriorly from the zygomatic
arch. The base of the mastoid process in L45062 is actually recessed beneath
this shelf of bone. In most of the available ursine comparative specimens, the
nuchal crest merges ventrally into a ridge of bone on the mastoid process,
which is more laterally situated than the shelf extending posteriorly from the
zygomatic arch. Only in Thalarctos does the arrangement approach that in
A. africanum. It is not clear from illustrations of J. atticus (Thenius 1959) and
the Florida Indarctos (Wolff 1978) which arrangement characterizes this genus.
The mandible is massive, its size being in keeping with that of the skull
(Figs 4-5). It is similar in shape to that of J. atticus and U. arctos, and is dis-
tinguished principally by the presence of a premasseteric fossa. This fossa is
deep in older individuals (e.g. L45062), but much less pronounced in immature
adults (e.g. L45114) (Fig. 33). The only living bear with a premasseteric fossa
is the South American spectacled bear, Tremarctos ornatus, while it is otherwise
known amongst Ursidae in extinct Tremarctinae, Hemicyoninae and other
species of Agriotherium. In tremarctines the masseteric and premasseteric fossae
are separated by a prominent ridge of bone, and the latter fossa is deep, exten-
sive and more or less circular in shape, with its limits clearly defined (e.g. see
Kurtén 1966, plates 8-9). In hemicyonines the ridge separating the two fossae
is not as prominent, the premasseteric fossa is less extensive in a vertical sense,
but more elongated anteroposteriorly, with the anterior end gradually merging
with the buccal surface of the mandible beneath M, (e.g. see Frick 1926, figs 2-3,
12).
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 17
Ee ee Kk Mt A A
Fig. 4. Buccal and dorsal views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium hemimandible, L45062.
The premasseteric fossa in Agriotherium is closer to the hemicyonine type,
and may even be virtually indistinguishable from it (e.g. the A. insigne specimen
figured by Viret (1939, fig. 6)). There are, however, Agriotherium specimens in
which this fossa does not extend as far anteriorly, terminating instead beneath
M, (e.g. the A. schneideri specimen figured by Frick (1926, fig. 36)). There is
at least one specimen assigned to Agriotherium in which this fossa is absent
(i.e. the A. palaeindicum specimen, GSI-D8, discussed by Pilgrim (1932)).
The latter is, however, one of the problematical intermediates between Jndarctos
and Agriotherium, which will be discussed in a later section of this report.
The premasseteric fossae in A. africanum specimens are generally similar
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
vi
ov ce eae
Fig. 5. Buccal and dorsal views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium hemimandible, L45114.
to that in the A. schneideri specimen mentioned above. In the four hemi-
mandibles belonging to three individuals in which the entire premasseteric fossa
is preserved, the anterior termination is beneath M,. These specimens apparently
differ from hemicyonines and other Agriotherium in having a less distinct ridge
of bone separating the masseteric and premasseteric fossae.
The mandible of A. africanum is otherwise distinguished only by the
presence of a distinct ‘chin’ in the symphyseal region, which contrasts with the
receding jaw-line in other ursids. The ‘chin’ is formed by an anteroventral
expansion of the symphysis, which enlarges the area of the symphysis and
presumably strengthened the connection between the two halves of the mandible.
With the exception of the nondescript and relatively unimportant [, P,
P? and P3, all the teeth of A. africanum are known from at least one complete
specimen still in position in a jaw. An incomplete I’ is represented in L45062,
while P! and P? are tentatively identified on the basis of isolated specimens.
Only P, and P, have not been identified, although they could be represented
amongst the six unidentified anterior premolars available. The best represented
of the teeth are the larger posterior cheek teeth (P{-M3), which are, fortunately,
the most informative in the dentition of Agriotherium (Figs 2, 6-7; Tables 2-3).
These teeth are represented by between six and ten specimens belonging to
between four and seven individuals.
19
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
‘VOVIVT
‘uowsely JNOUS JO SMAIA [eIIUDA pue [Loong “| ‘ZIOSST “uewseIy AXe]PIXCU Wntayjolispy SaMueeqasueyT JO MOIA [eIUSA “W ‘9 ‘BLT
A I om
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
nl eee
PUTA ALL
6 117 118 119 210 211 ;
yu
112 1
Fig. 7. Ventral view of Langebaanweg Agriotherium maxillary fragment, L45137.
mM
3 1
Mm
5 1
UU
4 1
Apart from their large size, the incisors of A. africanum are unremarkable
and are little different from those of living Ursinae. Dimensions of some incisors
were given elsewhere (Hendey 1977, tables 2, 5). The I? is distinct in having two
lingual cusps projecting from the V-shaped cingulum posterior to the principal
(spatulate) cusp. The lateral accessory cusp is the smaller and the more anteriorly
situated, being little more than a small projection from the cingulum. The other
accessory cusp is much larger, covering much of the lower part of the lingual
surface, although it is still much smaller than the principal cusp (Fig. 8). In
older individuals (e.g. L45062) the three cusps develop horizontal wear facets
in a single plane. The [’ is similar to I*, but smaller, while the I°, which is the
largest of the incisors, is morphologically similar to its counterpart in Ursinae.
The lower incisors are similar to those of Ursus arctos and other ursines,
and are distinguished only by their larger size.
1
Zz
ma
Lf
£
mu
if
I sil +
mint
3
Fig. 8. Medial, posterior and lateral views of Lange-
baanweg Agriotherium I*, unnumbered Dump 8 specimen.
21
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
6 6
rg ste
-6 7 —6S7
08st =: LOE
GG 0G
6EZ 6ST
LLC ae Oe
SiGe COS
G8. 20 1e
CGC. sar be
160 <Sil€
Sic Ge
8°LZ "2 6°67
qd qe
2N
T
‘2
way = aU! yorl=7
DOSEN Oem neice auc cc enasice ees mite alae
-0'6z -9'8% -I'8z | O'%% -Z'IE 90% 07 ee ok OnUEN
SSeS SS ee ee a ee ee eee
Se Bee ae ee ee ee ee
ee eee ee ee ee Se " LLssy
BS iS Ct Gee a ieee Soe a eee
Ene the eS SSS ie ee
Ge nue Saee = OS Se ee
qd qe I q I UT NOZIYOH, wdsNoON
Ghbiege as
*y}00} Joddn wnisayjousp Somueeqosury Jo suoisuswiqd
Z Alavi,
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ioe |
nN
sre 1% OP FOI patSe
BEG eS Clas LE
O97 = SEE
SEG RL
NGG ES ASITS
SUV) “<8 1c
Elie mar eses| nome 00 iy ei eer | — hil 0c 6.0e
Sal Ug
See i Se
i Ver
SS
=
Q
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
oo eve | see ree per | sor ov
in Se Bes
geo site | Sater 0c ier (sisi ree
out rt| 9'ez9 o'ez | ee Lot coe | ol vz"
gor zor] ov soz | ofc coc cise | chr BIZ
LOI SOI
q I
"We
S‘€E
|
|
€8 ZI = Ge 2
8 S‘ZI S6I 8°67
xe)
Re)
a
ee |
Wl
wT
a
=
ao)
2
*4199} IOMO] Wniayjolusp SomueeqosuryT JO suOIsusUIG
€ A1avL
Nee paq
Nee poq
Nee paq
Nee poq
Nee paq
Nee paq
Nee paq
Nee peq
Nee poq
Nee paq
See peq
NOZINOH]
* sosuvy
sur
1860S
* L000ST
* 9000S
* $000ST
’ Orr0ST
* SrrosT
* 7000S
* €000S7
* plisrl
* €9S9bT
* C90SVT
~ T9STIT
wasWaAN
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 23
The canines are similarly remarkable only for their large size. Otherwise
they differ from the canines of Ursinae only in being less elongated
anteroposteriorly.
All the known anterior premolars (P} to P3) are small, low-crowned and
single-rooted teeth. The P, is slightly elongated anteroposteriorly, and the
crown is divided longitudinally by a crest in the enamel. This is evidently the
remnants of the anterior and posterior keels which have merged into a single
feature as a result of reduction of the principal cusp, and its disappearance as
an identifiable element in this tooth. The enamel on the buccal side of the crest
is smooth, while that on the lingual side is slightly rugose. The P® is similar,
but is more circular in outline, while the crest is convex buccally, with vestiges
of the principal cusp still evident. The tentatively identified P (L55017A) fits
the P+ alveolus of L45062 well and may even belong to this specimen. It is
similar to P,, but is slightly broader posteriorly, and with vestiges of the prin-
cipal cusp still evident.
The P, of A. africanum is much larger than the anterior premolars, and in
relative size and morphology it is not unlike its counterpart in the Ursinae.
It is a stout, double-rooted tooth, with a prominent principal cusp, and in
lateral view the anterior and posterior halves are almost mirror images of one
another. The tooth is broader posteriorly due to the presence of a postero-
lingual bulge in the cingular region. The anterior and posterior keels of the
principal cusp are well defined but rather blunt, and terminate ventrally on
cuspless horizontal shelves. The posterior shelf is fringed by a well-developed
cingulum. Much of the P, enamel is finely rugose, which is also the case in other
posterior cheek teeth of A. africanum. The apex of the principal cusp develops
a horizontal wear facet, which merges with an inclined facet on the posterior
keel.
The P* of A. africanum (Fig. 9) is an important tooth, since it was largely
on its characteristics that the species was identified (Hendey 1972). The P* of
the holotype (L2045) has been exhaustively described (Hendey 1972; Wolff
et al. 1973), while examples from the bed 3aN sample have been briefly discussed
(Hendey 1977). The P* of L2045 is unlike that of any previously described
Agriotherium because of the presence of a large accessory cusp antero-internally,
that is, the anterior end of the protocone lobe. It is now evident that this feature
also distinguishes it from the P*’s of the bed 3aN sample, in which this cusp may
be present but small (e.g. L45137), or very small (e.g. L45062), although it may
also be absent (e.g. L41404). The P* of the A. africanum holotype is thus atypical
of the species sample as a whole. It is, however, not necessarily an abnormal
specimen, but may well be a typical example from a population which predates,
and is therefore more primitive than that represented in bed 3aN.
The bed 3aN P*4 sample, which is comprised of nine specimens belonging
to six individuals, includes only one in which the antero-internal cusp is absent
(i.e. L41404). Consequently, this cusp can still be regarded as a characteristic
of the species. A similar situation does, however, exist in respect of the A. insigne
|
iu
4 1
Fig. 9.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
AAU UT
Buccal, occlusal and lingual views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium P*’s.
A. L46074, from bed 3aN. B. L2045, from bed 3aS.
iB
8
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 25
from Montpellier in France. A specimen described by Gervais (1859) apparently
lacks an antero-internal cusp, but an undescribed specimen from the same
locality (NMB-—MP549) has a large antero-internal cusp on its P*. For this,
and other reasons, A. africanum should perhaps be regarded as a junior synonym
of A. insigne, a matter which will be pursued in a later section of this report.
There is apparently one feature of P* in which A. africanum may be unique.
In L2045 there is a small wear facet situated between the antero-internal cusp
and the apex of the protocone, which was interpreted as the vestiges of another
accessory cusp on the protocone lobe by Hendey (1972). Wolff et al. (1973)
dismissed this interpretation, and regarded this feature simply as a wear facet
caused by occlusion with M,. It is undoubtedly such occlusion which caused
the wear facet, but Wolff and his co-authors overlooked the fact that it is
impossible to get dentine exposed at the same level as enamel unless there had
previously been a small cusp in this position. The difference of opinion is con-
clusively resolved by the fact that the bed 3aN sample includes unworn examples
of this accessory ‘intermediate’ cusp. It has already been recorded elsewhere
(Hendey 1977: 114) that the P* of L41404, although lacking an antero-internal
cusp, does have ‘a small, more posteriorly situated cusp which apparently corres-
ponds to the “intermediate cusp” of the holotype’. Another specimen is now
known (L46074) in which both an antero-internal cusp and an ‘intermediate cusp’
are present and unworn. As with the antero-internal cusp, the ‘intermediate
cusp’ of L2045 must have been more prominent than that of any bed 3aN
specimen.
The buccal cusps of the A. africanum P* are unremarkable. All ten speci-
mens have prominent parastyles, which is characteristic of the genus and of
some advanced Jndarctos specimens (see p. 81). The P* has three roots, two
beneath the buccal cusps and one beneath the lingual ones. The M1 and M? of
A. africanum are similar in this respect, although the lingual root is larger in
these teeth.
The wear facets on P* were discussed by Hendey (1972) and Wolff et al.
(1973), and the only additional observation possible is that the parastyle develops
a crescentic facet which is inclined anterolingually.
The seven M,’s belonging to four A. africanum individuals are, in general,
similar to those of previously described Agriotherium (Fig. 10A). The trigonid
makes up the bulk of the tooth, with the protoconid being particularly large
and prominent. Although the shearing facets normally found in carnivore lower
carnassials are evident on the buccal surfaces of the paraconid and protoconid,
the apices of these cusps also develop horizontal facets. In addition, the single
anterior, and two divergent posterior keels of the protoconid may be obliterated
by inclined facets. Cingula are developed on both sides of the paraconid, with
that on the lingual side being more pronounced. There are usually only two
talonid cusps clearly developed, a prominent, rather bulbous one on the lingual
side, and a low, ridge-like one on the buccal side. The latter develops a hori-
zontal wear facet, while the large lingual cusp develops a posterobuccally
26
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
i
ni
Mm
6 1
Mu
ll
8
i
Fig. 10. Lingual, occlusal and buccal views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium M,’s.
A. L50004, a male specimen of typical morphology. B. L50006, a female specimen with
vestigial ?metaconid.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA PA
inclined facet. There is a ridge of enamel posterior to this cusp which may take
the form of a low cusp, as in L50004.
There are two M,’s in the assemblage which deviate from the basic cusp
pattern described above. An isolated specimen, L50006, which is the smallest
of the M,’s, and which evidently belonged to a female, has a small additional
cusp situated between the protoconid and the large lingual talonid cusp (Fig.
10B). This specimen is also unusual in having only a lingual posterior keel on
the protoconid, the buccal one, which is usually less pronounced, being absent.
In addition, the ridge anterior to the buccal talonid cusp is directed towards
the additional cusp, rather than directly anteriorly as is usually the case. The
second unusual M, is L50446, which is distinct in having two small cusps
situated posterior to the large lingual talonid cusp. The possible significance
of these specimens will be discussed later (see pp. 83, 84).
Both M, and M, have two roots, a larger one supporting the trigonid and
the other supporting the talonid.
The M! of Agriotherium has the basic four-cusped pattern typical of all
later ursids, and this tooth of A. africanum is little or no different from its
counterparts in previously described Agriotherium. The paracone and metacone
are prominent conical cusps of similar size, which develop horizontal wear
facets on their apices, and inclined facets posterolingually. The protocone is a
ridge-like cusp directed anterobuccally at a slight angle to the anteroposterior
axis of the tooth. The hypocone is conical and less voluminous than the proto-
cone. The two lingual cusps are lower crowned than the buccal ones. There are
lingual and buccal cingula which are distinct largely because the enamel is
smooth, whereas that elsewhere tends to be rugose. The cingular region bulges
anterolingually, and this results in the length of the tooth measured over the
lingual cusps being close to the buccal (maximum) length. In addition, the
breadth measured over the two anterior cusps is comparable to the posterior
breadth measurement, and to the two length measurements. In other words,
the M! of A. africanum is more or less square in outline. Agriotherium is unique
amongst later ursids in this respect. In the Ursinae, Tremarctinae, Jndarctos
and Ursayus the M"’s are rectangular with lengths exceeding breadths, while in
Ailuropoda the situation is reversed and the M!? is broader than it is long.
The M, of A. africanum also has a basic four-cusped pattern, but in this
instance the two largest cusps (paraconid and protoconid) are situated
anteriorly, rather than buccally as in M! (Fig. 11A). There are, however, three
teeth belonging to at least two individuals which deviate from this pattern.
They are L45115 and L46563 (Figs. 5, 11B) which probably belong to one
individual, and L50007, which belongs to a smaller individual, probably a
female. In these specimens the anterolingual cusp is reduced or absent. Reduc-
tion is evident in L50007 where the anterolingual cusp is situated closer to the
anterobuccal cusp, with its anterior and posterior keels directed accordingly.
This gives the impression that it is merging with the anterobuccal cusp, rather
than simply reducing in its usual position. In L45114/L46563 the anterolingual
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A B
gy nu
Fig. 11. Occlusal and buccal views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium My,’s.
A. L50004, a specimen of typical morphology. B. L46563, a specimen lacking
the anterolingual cusp.
Mm
cusp is absent, and its posterior keel is linked to the apex of the anterobuccal
cusp. Only vestiges of the anterior keel remain. These three teeth are also
distinct in being relatively narrower than others in the M, sample. The M, cusps
develop horizontal wear facets, while there are also inclined facets antero-
buccally and on the buccal surface of the posterobuccal cusp.
The M? of A. africanum, like the P?, is an important tooth, and it is fortu-
nately well represented (Fig. 12). It is essentially similar to M? in its basic cusp
ll
g
mn
if
Mt
I
S
i
9
ll
A B C
Fig. 12. Occlusal views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium M?’s. A. L47242 (reversed).
B. L48564. C. L47698.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 29
morphology. The paracone and metacone are the most prominent of the four
cusps, although in this instance the metacone is a little smaller than the para-
cone. The protocone is ridge-like, while the hypocone is more conical, although
it tends to be less distinctly developed than the other cusps. There is an expan-
sion of the lingual cingulum adjacent to the protocone, and sometimes also in
the posterolingual part of the tooth. The latter expansion is significant since it
represents the vestiges of the talon which was present in ancestors of Agrio-
therium (see page 87). As with the other molars, the cusps develop horizontal
wear facets, while there are also inclined facets developed anterolingually on
the paracone and metacone.
The M, of A. africanum is a relatively simple, single-rooted tooth, which
tends to be circular in occlusal view, with no distinct cusps developed (Fig. 13).
@ @
LUAU
114 115 1
UU ]
Hu
mm
A
ni
Fig. 13. A. Occlusal and lingual views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium M3, L50981.
B. Occlusal and posterior views of M;, L12561.
The occlusal surface is in the form of a shallow basin surrounded by a low
ridge of enamel. This ridge develops a horizontal wear facet, and the entire
occlusal surface would presumably be worn flat in older individuals. There is
also an inclined wear facet anterobuccally. This region of the tooth tends to be
slightly expanded, which emphasizes a posterior tapering which is best seen in
the specimen L50981.
More detailed comparisons between the teeth of A. africanum and other
taxa will be made in a later section of this report.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON
The present study of A. africanum postcranial bones has been superficial,
largely because adequate modern comparative material was not available and
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ud
waa
TL
ST
Fig. 14. Lateral and ventral views of Langebaanweg Agrio-
therium scapula, L50858. Arrow indicates postscapular fossa.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 31
because of the lack of direct access to relevant fossil material. Little has hitherto
been published on the postcranial skeleton of Agriotherium and other late
Tertiary ursids, and although meaningful interpretation of the evolutionary
and functional significance of A. africanum bones is no doubt possible, the
following account of them is essentially descriptive. In this account references
are made to bones of a male European Ursus arctos (ZM39056), a male Asian
Euarctos (ZM38805) and a female Helarctos (ZM36289), all of which are zoo
specimens. Reference is also made to the limb bones of Ailuropoda as described
by Davis (1964).
In general, the bones of A. africanum are larger and more stoutly pro-
portioned than those of the U. arctos comparative specimen, but they are
essentially similar morphologically.
The available vertebrae of A. africanum are all incomplete, and most are
very fragmentary. Except for their larger size, they are similar to those of the
available comparative specimens and Ailuropoda. No ribs definitely identified
with A. africanum are known.
The only identified A. africanum scapulae, L50857/8, may belong to one
individual, although L50858 differs in showing indications of mild osteo-
arthritis (Fig. 14). Both specimens lack most of the blades. The glenoid fossa
is anteroposteriorly elongated and tapers anteriorly, much like those in the
ursine comparative specimens and the Ai/uropoda specimen illustrated by
Davis (1964, fig. 46). The preserved parts of the blades of A. africanum scapulae
are also similar to those of ursines and Ailuropoda, except for one marked
difference which may be of great functional significance.
Davis (1964: 91) has recorded that there are differences in the nature of
the postscapular fossae in Ailuropoda and U. arctos, and, judging from the
available comparative specimens, there is appreciable variation of this fossa in
Ursinae. It is only the lower parts of this fossa which can be observed in
L50857/8, and these specimens are distinct in having the inferior scapula spine
terminating on the lateral surface of the blade 50 to 60 mm above the glenoid
fossa, instead of terminating posteriorly at the glenoid fossa. Consequently,
the postscapular fossa in A. africanum is confined to the lateral surface of the
scapula, whereas the lower part of this fossa is on the medial surface in Ailuro-
poda, U. arctos and Helarctos, and posteromedially in Asian Euarctos.
According to Davis (1964: 91, 173) the postscapular fossa ‘lodges the
subscapularis minor muscle’ which is the main ‘medial rotator of the arm’.
The functional significance of its distinct orientation in A. africanum is not
known.
No complete humerii of A. africanum are preserved, the best available
specimen being L45063, in which the proximal end is detached and slightly
crushed, and part of the proximal part of the shaft is lost (Fig. 15, Table 4). The
humerus is otherwise known from several fragmentary specimens, mainly distal
ends. All the important features of the humerus, except overall length, can be
observed. It is one of the many A. africanum bones in which available speci-
SV. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ni
Fig. 15. Posterior, lateral and anterior views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium humerus, L45063.
mens exhibit appreciable size variation, larger specimens presumably belonging
to males and smaller ones to females. The latter include L45063.
In its basic morphology the humerus of A. africanum is similar to those of
Ursinae. Proximally it is similar to corresponding parts of ursine humerii in
all observable respects, but distally there are some differences, although like
the Ursinae, and unlike Tremarctinae and Ailuropoda, it lacks the entepicondylar
foramen. However, vestiges of the bar of bone enclosing this foramen, in the
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 33
TABLE 4
Dimensions of Langebaanweg Agriotherium humerii.
140040 145063
hl 7) 67,0
121,5 98,5
92,7 76,4
Max. ant.—post. diam., distal end
Max. transy. diam., distal end .
Max. transy. diam., distal articulation
form of a rugosity at its proximal termination, are more obvious in A. africanum
than Ursinae.
The olecranon fossa is deep and relatively narrower than its counterparts
in available ursine humerii, although it is closer to the Ursinae than Ailuropoda
in this respect (see Davis 1964: 95, fig. 49). There is a relatively greater antero-
posterior development of the A. africanum humerus distally, although once
again it is closer to Ursinae than Ailuropoda. The medial epicondyle is much
less prominent than in ursines, although the lateral epicondyle is similarly
developed.
The lateral epicondylar ridge is more constricted above the lateral epi-
condyle than in ursines. This ridge has a relatively greater length than those of
U. arctos and Helarctos, but that of Asian Evarctos is comparable in this respect.
This is a reflection of the relatively greater elongation of the humerii in A. afri-
canum and Euarctos.
The proximal termination of the lateral epicondylar ridge is more or less
opposite the point of convergence of the deltoid and pectoral ridges (the deltoid
tuberosity), as in ursines. The pectoral ridge is much like that of ursines, but
the deltoid ridge is more prominently developed, and proximally it is more
anteriorly situated. Consequently, the area between these two ridges faces
anteriorly over a greater distance than in the ursines. This is the area of insertion
of the cephalohumeral muscle, which is the chief extensor of the foreleg (Davis
1964: 95, 167). The functional significance of the more anterior insertion, and
apparently greater development of this muscle, is not known.
Some of the characteristics of the ulna of A. africanum have already been
discussed elsewhere (Wolff et al. 1973), but more and better specimens are now
available (Fig. 16, Table 5). Once again the most complete specimen is L45063,
which belongs to a smaller individual than the previously described specimen
(L2154). Apart from the size difference, these two specimens are similar in all
observable respects. The A. africanum ulna resembles those of available ursine
specimens, and other ursids, including the /ndarctos atticus specimen from
Samos described by Pilgrim (1931). The proportions of L45063 are similar to
those of the U. arctos comparative specimen.
In lateral view the A. africanum olecranon does not project as markedly
as in ursines, and its medial tapering is usually less pronounced. The olecranon
is, however, very broad transversely. The area for insertion of the triceps and
flexor carpi ulnaris muscles is therefore large, although that for the insertion of
the latter is less knob-like. In the Ursinae and Ailuropoda the area for insertion
of the most proximal part of the anconeus muscle is prominently developed (see
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
badd
i
i}
A B
Fig. 16. A. Medial view of Langebaanweg Agriotherium ulna, L46076. B. Anterior and
lateral views of ulna, L45063.
35
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
0°0z = a
OE oe ae
8°89 a T'¥6
0°Or 09S 9°09
Spl Fo S‘P8
L‘6E€ — L‘0v
C8 y‘8E L‘0r
9°77 ae 8°Sz
0'9Ir ar re
£90SV7T PSIZIT = (7290S
S‘L8
09S
6°98
Orr
Ur
S'97
9LO9V'I
S‘Iv
9 TP
9°17
€8eclT
vrOOvVT 8080S
¢ alav I,
9°C ae
Liv >>
a 0°8s
ae 8°€6
ra 9'Sh
a OLY
cae 0°87
SO80SsT} £9L0ST
‘OUl[N WNLaYyjolisp SoMueeqosuLyT JO SUOISUSWIIG
1wsrA = Ca)
* ssod0i1d projAjs JO “wieIp y104S
ssos0i1d projAjs Jo ‘wieip 3u0T
* —_ ssed0i1d prouo.109 je wep ysod—juy
* —- YO}OU JeUNIIWOs ye ‘WeIpP ‘ysod—juYy
ssoooid jeouosue je ‘wieip jsod—juy
; * yoJOU IeUN]IWes Jo “WRId
p * yojOU [eIper
ye ssoooid plouol0d jo ‘“WieIp “AsueIy,
ssosoid jeouooue JO “WIRIpP “ASULIT,
: } ; Yj3Ue] [[eI0AO
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Davis 1964: fig. 50), but is less so in A. africanum, especially female specimens
such as L45063. Once again, the functional significance of these differences is
not known.
The semilunar notch differs from those of ursines and Ailuropoda in some
respects. In lateral view it is almost perfectly semicircular, with the inner
borders of the notch not divergent at their extremities as in ursines, and not
showing the beginnings of convergence as in Ailuropoda (see Davis 1964,
figs 50-51). In anterior view the dorsal part is nearly parallel-sided, rather than
sharply tapering as in ursines. The anconeal process of A. africanum is therefore
relatively broad. This, and the relatively narrow olecranon fossa of the humerus,
are probably directly related features. When the humerus and ulna of A. afri-
canum are articulated and fully extended the olecranon fossa is nearly com-
pletely filled by the anconeal process, and little lateral movement of the ulna is
possible. In the ursines only about half the olecranon fossa is filled and appreci-
able lateral movement is possible. Much the same evidently applies in the case
of Ailuropoda, which has an even wider olecranon fossa than ursines, while
Davis (1964: 96) noted that there was no protection against lateral shifting of
the elbow joint. The significance of these contrasting situations is not known.
The shaft of the’ A. africanum ulna is very stout, and although the areas
for attachment of the brachialis tendon and interosseous ligament vary both in
size and form, they are very pronounced features.
Distally the radial articular facet is relatively, and sometimes absolutely,
smaller than its counterpart in ursines. Medially between this facet and the
styloid process is a deep and almost circular depression, which is directly in
line with the prominent ridge on the shaft separating the areas of insertion of
the pronator quadratus and the distal part of the flexor digitorum profundus 5
muscles. This depression is absent in available ursine specimens, and apparently
also in Ailuropoda (Davis 1964, fig. 50). Its significance is not known.
The radius of A. africanum is represented by several proximal and distal
fragments, but only one that is complete (L40044), while another has been
restored (L45063) (Fig. 17, Table 6). The latter belongs to a female and L40044
to a male. These two specimens differ only in size. They are typically ursid in
their characteristics, the proximal end being particularly distinctive, and L40044
is very similar in its proportions to the J. atticus specimen described by Pilgrim
(1931). The latter specimen is, however, distinct in having a broad groove on
the anterior surface towards the distal end. Pilgrim (1931: 27) thought this
noteworthy since ‘a similar structure exists in a corresponding position in the
radius referred by Falconer to Agriotherium . . . sivalense’. According to Pilgrim
it is also present in Amphicyon, although it is evidently not characteristic of all
amphicyonines (see Ginsburg 1977, fig. 25). Since the radius of A. africanum is
otherwise unremarkable, it is not described in detail.
With one exception, all the carpal bones characteristically present in
Ursidae are represented by at least one, and as many as nine, complete speci-
mens (Fig. 18, Table 7). The exception is the radial sesamoid, which was evi-
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 37
LLU
C
fi ; \! | + I 2 1 iafe
oon
(ieee LF
t
mn
mm
wu
6 L
hulu
t
lat
Fig. 17. A-B. Medial views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium radii. A. 145063. B. L40044.
C. Proximal view of L40044.
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hui
1 sil
tui i =
Il
1
Z
|
nu
1
wut
I
mn
Z
th
mn
-
Bs
>
=)
Ul
1
8
mn
1
il
y
ih
1
S|
ma
nn
ii
qn
8
Il
ao
n
i-)
14
il
{
mn
fl
il
|
i
mn
da
H I
Fig. 18. Carpal bones of Langebaanweg Agriotherium. A—G. L45063. H. 146134. I. L50767
(reversed). A. Proximal and dorsal views of scapholunar. B. Medial view of cuneiform.
C. Medial and dorsal views of unciform. D. Anterior view of pisiform. E. Proximal, dorsal
and lateral views of magnum. F. Proximal view of trapezoid. G. Lateral view of trapezium.
H.-I. Specimens illustrating size range of scapholunars.
39
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
e90SV'1
S
SET ODE ¥H'8Z
THE O6E O'8E
661 90% 677
6€€ OLE SOE
y8rp OS ZS
£00071
C90SV1
SWNOAISIT
vLy
L’vEé
918081
e
Si8S a es OOS Oe Epes 9c an ne
ViL SiC MECC sacOG) OCC Ge YC GIES cs
CPEeaS St OSES 686 OTP 6 eV L8G
SNNNOVW
‘WIRIP JOYS 4SIq
‘WIRIP SUC] “}SIG
‘WIRIP J1OYS “XOIg
‘WIRIP SUC] *XOIg
YSU] [[V10AO
SUVYNOATOHdVOS
“s[edivo wnideyjolusp SsoMueeqosury] JO SUOISUSWIG
L a1avL,
L‘€9 == — S‘OL = BS Le
Str 9 = =a 0°6r sa 53 mag
rsp €‘0s 0'6r 9 L‘0S 8°7S (als y'9S
‘OE S‘LE ‘BE ‘9 oI = 8‘€V Ure
O'SHE eS =e o'r0r =a ae: ae
€90SVT 9C8EET 669471 vroOVI 790SPT LPL8VI 9080571
‘UIpel WNayjolisp Somueeqosuey] JO SUOISUSWIG
9 alav
“WILIP [PIJUSAOSIOP “xe
‘WIPIp “AsUPI}
‘WIP ‘sod—jue
"WUPIP [e1}USAOSIOp
“WIeIp “AsuUPIy
Jo0vj [eIpel JO ‘WIeIp -jsod—jue
: : “WIeIp ysod—"jue
pus [eIsIp “weip ‘Asued
puod [eISIp “weIp jsod—jue
pus jewixoid “wep ‘Asuen
puo jeuxoid “werp “jsod—yue
“Xe
“XPJA
“XP
“XE
“XP
“XP
“Xe
“Xe
“XP
“XE
Yysug] [[eI9AO
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dently absent in A. africanum, since the scapholunar lacks the radial sesamoid
facet. In this respect A. africanum is very different from Ailuropoda, in which
the radial sesamoid is better developed than in any other arctoid carnivore
(Davis 1964: 99, 100). A small radial sesamoid is apparently usually, or always,
present in Ursinae, and is larger in Tremarctinae. Otherwise the carpals of
A. africanum are essentially similar to their counterparts in Ursinae.
The largest carpal, the scapholunar, is also the best represented. As with
other A. africanum bones, the scapholunars exhibit appreciable size differences,
the smallest (50767) being only about two-thirds the size of the largest (L46134)
(Fig. 18H-I). This is a slightly greater size difference than that observed in the
scapholunars of North American Tremarctos floridanus, an ursid of similar
overall size (Kurtén 1966, table 19), although in both instances sample sizes |
are small. There are no significant morphological differences between the ~
smallest and largest scapholunars, and they differ in only minor respects from
those of ursines. In the latter the cuneiform facet tends to be clearly distinct
from the unciform facet, but in A. africanum they merge and are distinguishable
only because the cuneiform facet is flattened and the unciform facet is concave.
In some specimens (e.g. L48021) the proximal (radial) articular surface is in
contact anteriorly with the articular facet of the trapezium, and in this respect
A. africanum is similar to Ailuropoda (see Davis 1964: 99). The proximal articular
surface of the A. africanum scapholunar is also Ailuropoda-like, and different
from Ursinae, in lacking the lateral depression which receives ‘the saddle on
the distal end of the radius’ (Davis 1964: 99).
The cuneiform of A. africanum is morphologically similar to that of
U. arctos, except that the scapholunar facet is more elongated. In addition, this
bone is relatively more flattened than that of U. arctos.
Such minor differences in morphology and proportions also distinguish
other A. africanum carpals from their U. arctos counterparts. For example,
in the A. africanum unciform, the magnum and scapholunar facets are not
confluent as in U. arctos, while the pisiform is a considerably stouter bone.
At least some of the distinctive features in A. africanum carpals may be due to
the large size of the species, but their possible significance in other respects was
not investigated.
Of the metacarpals of A. africanum only the second is not represented by
-a complete specimen, although there is one which lacks only the distal end
(L33160). All the metacarpals are similar to their counterparts in ursines in
terms of morphology, but are relatively more massive (Fig. 19, Table 8). In
spite of this, they are not necessarily much longer than those of the available
U. arctos specimen. One of the complete metacarpals I (L45448) is in fact
similar in length to that of the U. arctos comparative specimen, although it
has a much stouter proximal end and shaft. The A. africanum metacarpals
appear to be readily distinguishable from those of Ailuropoda, which are ‘short
and stout, relatively considerably shorter than in [other bears] of comparable
size’ (Davis 1964: 100).
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 41
>
<i (pa @
¢|
mn
1
aa
Fig. 19. Proximal, anterior and lateral or medial views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium meta-
carpals. A. I, L50775. B. III, L25862. C. IV, L33828. D. V, L45063.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
c90SV'T
8°P7Z
Sve
0°77
T9E
9EIT
8660¢T
Ill
6 IZI
C98STT
L‘€Z = O'EZ 2 0°97
6 IZ — VCC Ob
List = SEE PEG WISE
66¢ OLE €CE pa eve €9€ SLE
ZT90Or = = LLIT vOcl OT
le?
aS
On
So
OD
A
OST SET
S9E SLE
mo ie
3 @
[o-e) _
os [ony
(>) So
“s[edivovjoul WnlayjoUsp SoeMmueeqosueryT JO SUOIsSUOWIC
g ATEV IL,
Dene Iaae ‘4SIP “UWIRIpP “ASURI] “xeyAT
* worjelnoy1e
‘\SIp “WIeIp “jsod—jue “xey
* puo -xoid “uIRIp “AsueI) “xe
ies) poids “WeIp ‘jsod—jue -xepy
YI3Ug] [[PI0AO
Teorey THe 4SIp “WeIp “AsuRI} “xe/[
* uone[nonie
*1SIP “WeIp jsod—jue -xey
* pus -xoid “‘WieIp ‘Asuei} “xepy
ee) Sorel” ‘WeIp “jsod—jue -xey
: Yysu9gy [[e10AO
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 43
No complete innominate of A. africanum is known, the best specimen
(L33341) comprising only the posterior part of the ilium and the acetabular
region. The latter is similar to that of the U. arctos comparative specimen, and
is distinguished only by its slightly larger size. There is, however, a greater
dorsoventral constriction of the ilium anterior to the acetabulum, while the
dorsoventral diameter of the posterior parts of the sacroiliac articulation is
actually less than in the comparative specimen. A. africanum is more like
Ailuropoda in this respect (see Davis 1964, fig. 59). The iliopectineal eminence is
less prominent than in U. arctos, and in this respect it is also Ailuropoda-like.
No other important features are observable in L33341, but the fact that it is
more like Ailuropoda than U. arctos in at least two respects may be significant.
The pelvis of the former is very different from those of other bears (Davis 1964:
113), and it is possible that that of A. africanum was equally distinctive.
The femur of A. africanum is represented by several fragmentary specimens,
and a complete one (L40002) belonging to an aged and arthritic female (Fig. 20,
Table 9). The latter specimen is considerably smaller and more slender than
corresponding parts of male specimens, but is morphologically similar to them.
It differs from the femur of the U. arctos comparative specimen in being slightly
longer and relatively more slender.
The head of the femur is hemispherical, as in other ursids, while the neck
is distinct and slightly longer than in U. arctos, but similar to that of Asian
Euarctos and Ailuropoda. The greater trochanter is lower than the head and it
is similar to the U. arctos femur in this respect. The gluteal tuberosity is very
prominent in L40002 and terminates well below the level of the lesser trochanter,
which is also prominent. The area of attachment of the quadratus femoris
muscle between the lesser trochanter and gluteal tuberosity is well marked, as
is the area of attachment of the adductor muscle, which extends about three-
quarters the length of the very straight shaft. The distal end of the femur is
essentially similar to that of U. arctos.
The femur of A. africanum is very different from that identified with
A. sivalense by Lydekker (1884, pl. 29, fig. 1). This very curious specimen may
be pathological.
The tibia of A. africanum, of which only one complete specimen (L45062)
is known, is also very variable in size (Fig. 21, Table 9). As with the femur,
L40002, the tibia is longer than that of the U. arctos comparative specimen, but
in this instance it is also much stouter, evidently because L45062 belongs to a
male. The proximal end of the tibia differs most markedly from those of ursines
in having the tibial tuberosity and crest more prominent. This applies even in
the case of specimens belonging to females (e.g. L50842). In addition, the
proximal articular facets are relatively longer anteroposteriorly.
In Ailuropoda and ursines the lateral edge of the tibia shaft viewed anteriorly
is bowed, with the tibial crest paralleling the proximal curvature. This, together
with prominent lateral projections at the proximal and distal ends, ‘increases
the interosseous space between the tibia and fibula, and the total width across
Fig.
isabel
a
I
iat
sli
Ss
So
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A-B. Anterior and posterior views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium femora.
A. L40002. B. L40128. C. Medial view of L40002.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
i
5
=z
&
5
Fig. 21. Anterior and medial views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium tibia, L45062.
45
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
46
pUo [eISIp “UIP “AsUeN “xe
a, = = OS 17S * pus [eISIp “werp ysod—jue ‘xeyy
ZT 016 ‘2 0°66 °2 LOOT S801 * puso jeurxoid “ureip *Asueq} “xeyy
pes L'S8 €‘L8 1°26 — pus jewrxoid “weip ysod—jue ‘xe
a ae a = = peoy jo ‘weip ysod—jue *xeyy
— ae x O'8LE = : ; Sug] [[e19AO
Cy80ST s8c00VI 6c00VI c90SVI § <€E80ST
/T80sT
6886V1 cOO0OVI 8zcl0rT
AVIAL], VUOWAT
“OEIQN PUL BIOWOJ wniayjoUsp Somueeqosuey JO suoIsuOWIG
ACGCKAD
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 47
=
mn
<
Da INIU UH
i
ni
ul
INH
ht
I
inn
C
ni
ul
a
D
ll
ng
A
nl
Il
Itt
I
Fig. 22. Tarsal bones of Langebaanweg Agriotherium, 145062. A. Proximal, lateral, ventral
and distal views of astragalus. B. Lateral and dorsal views of calcaneum. C. Dorsal view of
cuboid. D. Proximal view of navicular.
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the leg’ (Davis 1964: 115). The tibia of A. africanum differs in having the proxi-
mal and distal lateral projections less prominent, and the shaft less bowed,
which gives it a much straighter and more bilaterally symmetrical appearance
in anterior view. The distal articular facet, like the proximal ones, has a rela-
tively greater anteroposterior diameter than in ursines. The same applies to
the proximal and distal fibula facets, while the fibula itself is much like those of
ursines.
All the tarsal bones of A. africanum, except the mesocuneiform, ecto-
cuneiform and tibial sesamoid, are known from at least one, and as many as
eight specimens (Fig. 22, Table 10). The tibial sesamoid, like the radial sesamoid,
was probably absent in this species. As with the carpals, the tarsals are essentially
similar to their counterparts in Ursinae, and they, too, exhibit appreciable
sexual dimorphism.
The astragalus is the best represented tarsal bone. It is distinguished
from those of ursines principally by a longer neck. The available ursine astragali
have a variably developed lip of bone projecting posteriorly from the base of
the tibial facet, and which is most prominent medially. This lip of bone is
absent in A. africanum, although in the specimens L45062 and L47533 there is
a ventrally projecting lip of bone in this position. Since it effectively inhibits
movement between astragalus and calcaneum, it is probably an abnormality
caused by osteo-arthritis.
The calcaneum of A. africanum is also ursine-like, differing principally in
having a relatively shorter and much stouter tuber calcis.
The remaining tarsal bones differ in only minor respects from their counter-
parts in U. arctos.
All the metatarsals of A. africanum are represented by at least one complete
specimen (Fig. 23, Table 11). They are in general much stouter but only slightly
longer than their counterparts in U. arctos. An exception is a small metatarsal I
(L50771), evidently that of a female, which is of similar length and which is
TABLE 10
Dimensions of Langebaanweg Agriotherium tarsals.
ASTRAGALI
145062 (R) 150765 147533 L50766 150770 147910
61,9 58,0
63,2 62,1 59,8 c. 56,5 51,2 43,7
Max. ant.—post. diam. .
Max. transy. diam.
Transv. diam. of tibial facet 44,9 c. 46,0 43,1 Shy 33,5 29,5
Transv. diam. of navicular facet 43,5 44,5 43,0 37,9 32,8 27,0
Max. dorsoventral diam. 40,4 — 37,2 35,3 28,8 27:5
CALCANEUM NAVICULARS
145062 L50773 145062 | L45062
48,7 43,3
38,7 38,2
20,5 17,6
. ant._post. diam. .
Max. transy. diam.
Max. dorsoventral diam. ;
. transy. diam. of tuber calcis
(R) = Right
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 49
Fig. 23. Proximal, anterior and lateral or medial views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium
metatarsals. A. I, L50787. B-E. II-V, L45062.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
50
a = TET CET : er ae
DONeNoIe [e\sIp “WeIp “ASURI} “Xe
= = OI~ L‘6L = A - = wvonrnonse [eisip “werp ysod—jue “xe
S*LZ ITE LOE OLZ €ZE : : * puso yecapxoid “UIRIP "ASUBI} “XE
ELT 9°67 SOE Ile VE ‘ Sei abe pice al “WieIp “jsod—jue “xe
= = S‘SII S‘6IT = é Pa ae al :
W13U9y [[eJeAO
BOIIy1 6c80ST 790SVE CLS8VI ZI80ST
coOSVI = HBOS
Vz TC * WONEfNose [e}SIp “UIEIP “ASUI} “Xe
y6l S07 uorefnonse [eysip “werp “jsod—yue “xe
SC (44 ates pus jeunxoid “urerp “Asue] “XE
Ive S‘9E
BES [Eanes ‘weIp ‘jsod—jue “xe
6 LOT 9OIT
: ysus] [[e19AO
SsOcOeT 90ST
Til
C90SV1
uu
ELS8Vv1
ILLOSI 6 L8ELVI = L8 LOST
I
“S[esIe}e}OU wnidayjousy Zomueegosuey jo suorlsuauid
TI S1av.L
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 51
more slender than that of the U. arctos comparative specimen. Morphologically
there are no significant differences between the metatarsals of A. africanum and
U. arctos.
The patella, sesamoids and phalanges of A. africanum are also U. arctos-
like, although the Ist and 2nd phalanges of the former are relatively much
shorter and stouter (Fig. 24).
| Mn hn
Fig. 24. Dorsal and lateral or medial views of Langebaanweg Agriotherium phalanges, L45062,
possibly of one digit.
il
DISCUSSION
The overall impression gained from the study of the skull and postcranial
skeleton of A. africanum is of a large and heavily built animal which was unmis-
takably bear-like in its appearance (Fig. 25). It was undoubtedly plantigrade
since its postcranial bones exhibit most of the characteristics found by Ginsburg
(1961) to be indicative of this condition. The appreciable size variation observed
is to be expected of a bear of such large proportions, since marked sexual
dimorphism is characteristic of these animals (Kurtén 1955, 1966, 1967). Being
typical of large ursids in this respect, it is of interest to compare A. africanum
with better known species which belong in this category. They include Ursus
spelaeus, Tremarctos floridanus, and Arctodus simus.
Of these species A. africanum probably resembled the North American late
Pleistocene tremarctine, Arctodus simus, most closely. For example Kurtén
(1967: 49, fig. 28) found that the skull of this short-faced bear ‘shows a remark-
able convergence with the great cats’, which is also a feature of the skull of
A. africanum (see p. 9 and Fig. 3). In overall size the male skull of the latter
(L45062) is intermediate between those of female and male A. simus (see Table 1
herein and Kurtén 1967, table 5). In addition, the postcranial bones of A. afri-
canum are similar in proportions to those of A. simus, although they differ in
52 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 25. Reconstruction of Agriotherium, adapted from one of North American Arctodus simus
by J. Matternes Gin Guthrie 1972).
some morphological details. In actual size the bones of A. africanum males
compare closely with those of A. simus females (e.g. the Potter Creek Cave
sample—see Tables 4-11 herein and Kurtén 1967, tables 10-25).
Unfortunately the skeleton of A. africanum is less well represented than that
of A. simus and consequently cannot be analysed in as much detail. In view of
the marked individual size variation in A. africanum it may be misleading to
combine skeletal elements of different individuals in metric analyses. Never-
theless, this was done in several instances, one of which is presented here.
The isolated metatarsal I, L50787, which is evidently that of a male, was
combined with the metatarsals II to V of L45062, also a male, in order to com-
pare their relative lengths with the metatarsals of other ursids (Table 12). The
similarity to the Potter Creek Cave A. simus sample is striking.
On the other hand, the calcaneum length expressed as a percentage of the
longest metatarsal length of L45062 is 86,6, a figure which compares closely
with the 86,5 of an U. arctos sample, and which is considerably lower than the
figures for extinct tremarctines and U. spelaeus, which are over 100 (Kurtén
1966, table 36; 1967, table 27).
In spite of such deviations from the Arctodus pattern, A. africanum is like
this genus and different from other later ursids in having relatively long legs.
This characteristic, together with its specialized skull and dentition, is a highly
significant departure from the typical ursid condition. Kurtén (1967: 50)
interpreted A. simus as ‘a predominantly carnivorous form’, which may have
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 53
TABLE 12
Relative lengths of the metatarsals of some bears expressed as a
percentage of the length of metatarsal V.
I I Tl IV Vv
Agriotherium africanum . 71 82 96 101 £100
(L50787 + L45062)
Arctodus simus* . ;
(Potter Creek Cave)
Tremarctos floridanus*
70 82 95 99 100
69 80 91 103 100
(males)
Ursus spelaeus' . 63 78 88 98 100
(Salzofen)
Ursus arctos* 65 79 87 96 100
(Recent)
1 Kurtén 1967, table 26.
‘preyed on large contemporary herbivores’, and although not ‘truly cursorial
it may have been capable of bursts of speed exceeding those of U. arctos’. These
conclusions presumably apply equally well in the case of A. africanum.
The ecology and relationships of this species will be dealt with in more
detail in following sections of this report.
PALAEOECOLOGY
The Langebaanweg Agriotherium assemblage is comprised of over 330
specimens, which represent a minimum of 14 individuals. Females are much
less commonly represented than males, and no very young animals are known.
Those postcranial bones belonging to immature individuals are probably all
of young adults, while those of which teeth are known are all young or prime
adults. Some specimens (e.g. L40002) show signs of osteo-arthritis, which
suggests an advanced age for the individuals concerned. Bone pathology is
otherwise rare, one notable exception being the metacarpal, L45448, which
exhibits an osteitis of the proximal end, the cause of which is unknown.
All A. africanum specimens were found in, or closely associated with, river
channel deposits. They occurred together with a wide variety of terrestrial,
freshwater and marine vertebrates, which range in size from shrews to whales.
Lists of most associated mammals have been given elsewhere (Hendey 1976,
table 4; 1978, table 10). Associated birds will be listed by P.V. Rich (in pre-
paration). Lists of lower vertebrates, which include cartilaginous and bony
fish, amphibians and reptiles, have yet to be compiled. It is clear that A. afri-
canum was an element of a rich and diverse fauna, with resemblances to both
late Miocene (Turolian) faunas of Eurasia, and later African faunas. The
Varswater Formation fauna includes descendants of taxa typical of the Eurasian
late Miocene, with A. africanum included in this category, as well as ancestors
of species which are now typically African.
A. africanum is one of the Varswater Formation taxa not recorded from
the Quartzose Sand Member, the lowest of the three important fossil mammal-
bearing units of the succession (Hendey 1976) (Table 13). The Quartzose Sand
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
54
jueurwmopeid
So}BIQOVWIOA | RII}Sel1o} i pues
onjeydsoyd ul UOUWIWOD sso]
Sului09eq jnq ‘“jURpUNQe s]Issoy
pues oiyeyd PeprAtp
-soyd ojur spieMdn 3ulpeis -qns
Se] jIssoy} pue pues zjienb yueq JOA pue jouueys IOAII jou
yusseid Ajgeqoid
sua][od yng ‘pep1OdeaI $9} ¥1q91.19A
AjUO ‘]JJ JO yYInos uoWUWOS
SSO] A[PAISSoIs 01d S]ISSOF
suoziioy Avid pue
pues zj1enb Jepun souilj}oWIoOs
“Keo pue pues snosdvuoqgies
puod pure ysieur
Aejo pue
pues sNOsdeUOGIeS O}UI SUIpeIs AI PUe I] UseM19q 9} eIPSUIE} UL
Sel jIssoy pue pues zji1enb
yueUIWOpeld so}e1q9}19A [eL}
-So119} PUL S[eOS f UOUIUOD S]ISsOy
yueurmopeid
SO} VIQOIOA [P1I}S91I19}
pue sjeos ‘juepunqe sjissoy
yoor ajeydsoyd jo sa] ur pue jouueys IdATI
‘uo 3x jIsso} pue pues zjrenb
UdaNdY ALIYOHdSOHG I1VLATWdg
yueulMopeid
$9}21Q9}19A [PII}SO1I0}
gjees ‘juepunqe s|Issoy
yoor ayeydsoyd uo pues Askejo yueq ISAII
pue
e1el AISA S3}e1QG
-O}LIOA ‘S[ISSOJOIOIUI SUIIUI SUIOS
poyenucieyipun
pues syeqdsoyd [ero] oulTeUr ‘Wdd
SAONFAANIIO TISSOFL SLNAWIGAS OILLSIAALOVAVH) SLNANWNOMIANA IVNOILLISOdId yaodai stu}
pure 9/6] Aepusyy
6L61
10 ja yIsuld
‘SomuLEgosURT ‘AlIengd .q, “UOMNeUIO, IoJeMSIVA OU} Ul SOOUSIINIDO [ISSOJ PUL SJUSUIIPSs SI}SIIO}OvIeY ‘sJUSWIUOIIAUS [eUOITISOdaqd
€[ J1av.L,
55
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
sjiuin AreJUWIIpas JO soroey oe (AT 01 [ INSO PUe AT O1 I N&E Wedd ‘S}UsTeAINboe I1ey} pue) py 0} Tq pue eq pue ZC SUOISIAIpgns oy,
jueulUoperd saye1q
-OJIOAUL PUL So}eIQ9}I0A SUTTeUT
‘yuepunge SOoUI}oWIOS s|Issoy
uMOUyY JOU
yueUIWIOpeld so}e1q
-O}IOAUL JoJeMYseIJ pue sUlIe
-njso “oulIeur ‘jUepUNge s|Issoy
WOUWIUIOS
$0} V1IQO}IOA [VII{Se1I0) “UeUTUIOp
-o1d suoyjod ‘yuepunge sjissoy
yueulwopeid
$0}81Q9}19A [PII}S01I9}
‘UOWWIOS SOUIjaWIOS s]ISSOy
yueulMopeid
SO}B1IQS}IOA [PII}S01I0}
‘yuepunqe sowiiewlos sjissoy
pues zj1enb
pue odes yoor 9sjeydsoyd
uMOUyY j0U
wis Appnut
Ae pue pues snosovuogieo
pues zj1enb
puvs zj1enb
(¢ “39 “6L61 (72 2 9]8UIC 90S)
yoveq Apues pure A011
(Aizenb Jo yjnos
pue jsvo-yjnos s}sixo A[qeqoid
yng posodxo ou) JouURYS JIOATI {
em
ysieur
JeuUeYd IOATI 0} Josopo ured
-pooy g ‘I Jo uorerres o[qissod
(jouuPvYyS sseuTeIp IOUTUI
‘puod °3'9) sjusUIUOIAUSOIOIUI
poyeioosse yA ‘urefdpooy
poyenuorsyipun
o
~~
le)
Z
ECINCI IAN
TAAVAD
wuasWayY, GNVS dASOZLUVNO
N
Ta
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Member deposits were laid down mostly on the floodplain of a river which then
met the sea to the south or south-west of the existing ‘E’ Quarry. Many of the
fossils from this unit are believed to represent the remains of animals which
lived in the immediate vicinity (Hendey 1974: 349-353; 1976: 223-226). By
contrast, most of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member fossils, including those of
A. africanum, were washed into the area by the river, which was then following
more northerly courses, first depositing bed 3aS and later bed 3aN (Hendey
1976: 226-230). Consequently, the A. africanum fossils are likely to be out of
their natural environmental context, and there is no way of certainly establishing
the nature of the preferred habitat of the species. Assuming that A. africanum
was a terrestrial species, the number of possibilities is, however, limited, and
there is some evidence which favours one of them.
The environment in the vicinity of Langebaanweg and in adjacent areas
at the time of deposition of the Varswater Formation was clearly very different
from that of the present (Hendey 1973). Long-necked giraffes (Giraffa sp.) were
common, and, together with other large browsers such as a sivathere (Siva-
therium hendeyi), a palaeotragine (Palaeotragus cf. germaini), and primitive
proboscideans (Anancus sp., Mammuthus subplanifrons), indicate the presence
of trees, probably in substantial numbers, and perhaps in the form of a riverine
woodland. On the other hand, grazers such as alcelaphine antelopes (Gentry
1980 in press), an equid (Hipparion cf. baardi), and a _ rhinoceros
(Ceratotherium praecox) indicate the presence of grasslands as well. Although
there was evidently a variety of micro-environments in the area (Hendey 1976),
it is only the major terrestrial habitats of woodlands and grasslands which
need be considered in the case of Agriotherium.
Of the large herbivores, the one which occurs most commonly in the
Quartzose Sand Member and bed 3aS of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member is
Ceratotherium praecox, a grazer, while browsing giraffoids are very rare in
the Quartzose Sand Member, and only slightly more common in bed 3aS. By
contrast, C. praecox is either very rare, or absent, in bed 3aN, while giraffoids
are astonishingly well represented. The implication is that either woodlands
became a progressively more widespread habitat during deposition of the
Varswater Formation, or that taphonomic factors were such that woodland
species had their remains incorporated in the deposits with increasing frequency.
Either way, the fact that A. africanum is not recorded from the Quartzose Sand
Member, is rare in bed 3aS, and is relatively common in bed 3aN, suggests
that it was a woodland species.
This conclusion has also been reached in respect of Agriotherium elsewhere.
Kurtén (1968: 119) suggested that Agriotherium ‘was probably a forest animal
like most modern bears’, while Wolff et al. (1973: 226) concluded that ‘it does
seem that specimens of /ndarctos and Agriotherium are better represented at
localities which have a greater representation of woodland forms’. The possible
influence of habitat on the evolution of Agriotherium will be discussed later
(see p. 70).
=e ER.
= = -e ~ —aer
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 57
The habitat preference of Agriotherium may have been a factor which
contributed to its comparatively poor fossil record, but this was almost certainly
due largely to the habits of the animal. Agriotherium has long been recognized
as an atypical ursid because it was apparently carnivorous rather than omni-
vorous. Carnivorous species of such gigantic proportions would of necessity
have been rare animals, even under the most ideal conditions (Wolff et a/. 1973).
The same restriction would not apply in the case of more omnivorous bears,
and for later species the ‘fossil record is excellent; indeed, as regards the Pleisto-
cene bears of Europe, almost incomparable’ (Kurtén 1968: 119). An added
factor in the case of the latter was that extreme climatic conditions during the
Pleistocene led bears to use caves as retreats, with consequent concentration
of their remains in caves. Such circumstances did not apply to Agriotherium,
all remains of which are recorded from open sites dating from a climatically
moderate period.
Although A. africanum has been said to be a well represented species, it is
nevertheless one of the less common elements in the Langebaanweg assemblage,
which is now comprised of the remains of many thousands of animals. Pro-
portionately, Agriotherium may be no more common at Langebaanweg than it
is at localities elsewhere.
Many of the Langebaanweg Agriotherium specimens were recovered in
the course of mining operations, or by screening of bulk sediment samples
mechanically removed from the mine. In these instances the original condition
_Of specimens, associations of skeletal elements and body part representations
cannot necessarily be determined. More significant from a taphonomic point
of view is that material recovered from controlled excavations. Three such
excavations yielded Agriotherium remains (Fig. 26, Table 14), and the relevant
material is listed on pages 5-6.
The deposits in which this material occurred are noteworthy for the almost
complete absence of a very coarse lithic fraction. Occasional pebbles of quartz,
feldspar and the local phosphate rock do occur, but the sediments are generally
made up of medium- to coarse-grade sands. Fine sands and clayey sands are
also present. The larger elements of the lag gravels in bed 3aN are almost
exclusively bones and teeth of vertebrates (Fig. 27). Consequently, those fossils
transported by the river were not subjected to the destructive battering by, and
against, cobbles and boulders, which is often a feature of this sedimentary
environment. For about 30 km east of Langebaanweg there are few rock out-
crops, the area being largely covered by the generally sandy deposits of the
‘Sandveld’ (see Talbot 1947; Visser & Schoch 1973). This means that in its
lower reaches the river which was largely responsible for building up the Vars-
water Formation (Fig. 1) could have picked up little in the way of a coarse
lithic fraction. In addition, its generally sandy bed would have provided a
relatively smooth passage for organic materials in its load.
In fact the fossils of beds 3aS and 3aN show remarkably few signs of
abrasion which could be ascribed to transport in sand-charged water over a
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 26. Aerial view of past and present areas of exposure of bed 3aN in ‘E’ Quarry, Lange-
baanweg. 1—LBW-E 1975/1; 2—LBW-E 1976/1; 3—Dump 10; 4—LBW-E 1976/2;
5—Dump 9; 6—Dump 8; 7—Carbonaceous deposits; R—Phosphate rock outcrops;
W—Wet season river channel; D—Dry season river channel.
sandy substratum. What abrasion there is may have developed after deposition
rather than during transport (see below). This suggests that many of the fossils
reached the vicinity of ‘E’ Quarry still protected by soft tissue, perhaps even as
floating carcasses, and that disarticulation and dispersal of skeletal elements
took place locally.
The bed 3aN Agriotherium specimens were recovered from deposits laid
down in three distinct micro-environments. Those deposits exposed in the
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 59
TABLE 14
Controlled excavations in ‘E’ Quarry which yielded Agriotherium remains.
EXCAVATION DEPOSITIONAL STRATIGRAPHIC
ENVIRONMENT Unit?
LBW-E river bank and
1975/1 river channel,
with phosphate
rock substratum
PPM 3aN
I
river channel,
1976/1 with phosphate
rock substratum
LBW-E river channel in PPM 3aN
1976/2 lee of phosphate II
rock, with
unconsolidated
sand substratum
1 See Table 13.
2 Locality 5 of Dingle et al. 1979, fig. 2.
excavation LBW-E 1975/1 were laid down partly in the river channel and
partly on the north bank of the channel. Channel deposits were sampled in
both excavations LBW-E 1976/1 and 1976/2, the depositional environments
differing only in that the former had a rock substratum and the latter a sandy
one. In both the 1975/1 and 1976/1 areas the substratum was a phosphate rock
horizon of up to 0,75 m thick. The third micro-environment was not sampled
by controlled excavation, but was the source of a few Agriotherium specimens
recovered in the course of mining operations. This was an extensive area of
carbonaceous (peat-like) deposit over the southern (seaward) limit of the
river channel. It was probably the area of accumulation of plant debris washed
down by the river during flood times. During the dry season it formed the west
bank of the river and was probably a marshy area with appropriate vegetation.
The likely positions of the wet and dry season channels are indicated in Figure 26.
The bed 3aN deposits are overlain by the thick and extensive commercially
exploited phosphatic sand, which was deposited in a marine littoral environ-
ment (Tankard 1975), and from which some fossil vertebrates, not including
Agriotherium, are known (Hendey 1976: 230).
The fossils from LBW-E 1975/1, which were deposited close to or on the
north bank of the river channel, were generally better preserved and less frag-
mented than those from the other two excavations. This applied particularly
in the case of specimens not in direct contact with the phosphate rock sub-
stratum. In the area of LBW-E 1976/1 most of the deposit overlying the phosphate
rock had been mined away, and the material recovered came from on, or close
to the rock surface itself, particularly depressions therein. This material was
for the most part very fragmented.
The greatest concentration of fossils in bed 3aN was in the area of LBW-E
1976/2. Here the deposits were laid down on an unconsolidated substratum
(the Quartzose Sand Member) in the lee (west) of the phosphate rock exposed
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in the other two excavations. Immediately adjacent to the phosphate rock a
60 cm thick horizon of fossils was accumulated (Fig. 27). This thinned out
rapidly to as little as 10 cm westwards and southwards. Most of the fossils in
this area were highly fragmented and in a poor state of preservation. This applies
particularly in the case of the remains of larger species, of which giraffoids,
especially Sivatherium, were by far the most commonly represented. By contrast
the remains of aquatic vertebrates, with the seal, Prionodelphis capensis, being
exceedingly common, tended to be in good condition, although their remains
were often fragmented and skeletons disarticulated and dispersed.
As this fossil lag deposit thinned westwards and southwards, the clastic
matrix became finer-grained, with an increasing clay component. Westwards
the fossiliferous horizon terminated abruptly against another phosphate rock
outcrop, but southwards it once again thickened and also spread out laterally
in a south-westerly direction. There was also a rapid darkening in the colour
of the clastic matrix, which coincided with a diminution in the occurrence of
vertebrate fossils. These fossils occurred mostly as isolated, and often frag-
mented, teeth and bones, but associated parts of skeletons, including at least
one of Agriotherium, are recorded. In the case of the latter, it is not known how
complete they were, since all were chance discoveries made after disturbance
of the deposit by mechanical excavators.
The darkening of the deposits southwards was caused by an increasing
carbonaceous fraction, which was evidently derived from decomposed plant
remains. This deposit was not a pure peat, the carbonaceous material having
been mixed with a high proportion of sand and clay, but such peats might well
have overlain the remaining carbonaceous deposit (see below).
The picture which emerges is that of a river which in times of flood carried
in to the area remains of terrestrial vertebrates, sometimes as whole carcasses,
depositing some along its banks and others in the channel itself. A major part
of the load of vertebrate remains was deposited immediately after the channel
passed over the western edge of a southward projecting tongue of phosphate
rock. Another such outcrop about 30 m further west then deflected the channel
southwards, where it spread out over a wide and flat area. Here it dropped the
last of its organic load, this probably being comprised largely of easily trans-
portable plant material. Some vertebrate remains also reached this area, but
they are recorded only from the more northerly parts, that is, closest to the area
where the main vertebrate load was dropped.
Although the vertebrate assemblage of bed 3aN is comprised largely of the
remains of terrestrial species washed in by the river, marine vertebrates are also
represented. In the case of the seal the number of individuals involved is sub-
stantial. The marine vertebrate remains are generally better preserved than those
of terrestrial species, which suggests, not surprisingly, that they had suffered
less transport. The seals, cetaceans, marine birds, bony fish, and sharks may all
have been inhabitants of, or visitors to, the river estuary. This probably applied
particularly during flood times when the influx of carcasses of terrestrial species
*SUOISIAIP WO ¢ Ul BJVOG “JYSII oY} WO UOT}OOIIp
Ajioseo-yj10U eB ul spremdn Surdojs doroyno yoo syeydsoyd pure “jJo] pomosse jisodep BxI [Issog “A11end .q, JO vore 7/9/61 A-MAT ‘LZ ‘Stet
<
3)
~)
fy
a
=)
e)
n
re]
iQ
ie}
Zz
a
5
a
fy
;
x
S
q
S
S
N
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
provided an abundant source of food for marine scavengers. Whether or not
the seal was included in this category is not known. Seals may simply have been
attracted by an increase in the numbers of scavengers such as fish and crus-
taceans, and would themselves have attracted predators such as sharks. Marine
vertebrates were certainly in a position to have their remains caught up in, and
dispersed by, the river’s floodwaters.
During the dry season when the river was not in flood it is unlikely to have
breached the phosphate rock outcrop which underlies the northerly and easterly
parts of bed 3aN. Instead it would have been deflected southwards by this
outcrop in the direction of bed 3aS, which was laid down during an earlier
phase of the Varswater cyclothem. This would account for the fact that bed 3aS
was abruptly truncated south of the phosphate rock outcrop. This truncation
was not due solely to flood periods in bed 3aN times because bed 3aS terminated ~
at least 25 m east of the first exposure of the carbonaceous deposit of bed 3aN,
which is an indication of the width of the dry season channel. There may have
been other distributaries of the river north of ‘E’ Quarry.
As indicated earlier, that area west of the dry season channel, where
floodwaters had dropped their load of organic materials, probably took the
form of a marsh.
Although the river probably still fed vertebrate remains into the area
during the dry season, the number of specimens involved is likely to have been
much lower. This raises a problem in connection with specimens collected
between the principal exposures of bed 3aS and bed 3aN. There are relatively
few such specimens, and their actual source is usually uncertain, since most
were collected by mine workers in the course of their activities. This material
has been recorded as being from bed 3aS, but it may actually belong with the
bed 3aN complex of deposits. Those Agriotherium specimens with numbers
between L40000 and L43000 fall into this category.
Fortunately there are no doubts about the source of Agriotherium specimens
from the bed 3aN excavations, and those from the bed 3aN carbonaceous
deposits, the latter being distinctive because of their dark colour. The only
other fossils from ‘E’ Quarry in a similar state of preservation are those from
the ‘peat bed’ of the Quartzose Sand Member (Hendey 1976: 218, table 2), and
there was no possibility of material from these two deposits becoming mixed.
Although there can be little or no doubt as to how the bed 3aN Agrio-
therium remains reached the ‘E’ Quarry area, it is of interest to consider the
nature of some of this material.
The partial skeleton, L45062, is interpreted as the remains of an animal
which reached the point of its discovery as a complete, or nearly complete
carcass. This carcass was deposited about 15 m west of the phosphate rock
outcrop in the LBW-E 1976/2 area. It is virtually certain that at least some,
and perhaps all, missing parts of L45062 were mined away, the parts recovered
having come from an area of 2 to 3 m* immediately adjacent to a vertical face
cut by a mechanical excavator. The remains were found in the lag deposit where
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 63
it. was about 20 cm thick, and were centred on a depression on the unconsoli-
dated substratum. The preservation of the remains was considerably better
than that of the majority of surrounding fossils. Their good preservation,
together with the unmistakable characteristics of Agriotherium bones and teeth,
facilitated their recovery from a mass of thousands of fragmentary fossils.
It appears that after deposition of the carcass of L45062, flowing water
scoured the depression beneath it. At the same time the carcass acted as an
obstruction to coarse debris, causing it to settle in the immediate vicinity.
Disarticulation and slight dispersal of skeletal elements followed decomposition
of soft tissue. L45062 is unusual in being one of the few instances in the LBW-E
1976/2 area where parts of one individual were found in a good state of preserva-
tion, and with skeletal elements in close association. This was otherwise notice-
able mainly amongst the seals, although in these instances the large number of
individuals involved made it impossible to separate their skeletons.
The Agriotherium forelimb, L45063, was another instance where there was
association of skeletal elements of one individual. This material was found in
the same depression as L45062, but was readily distinguishable, having belonged
to a smaller (female) individual. This forelimb must also have reached the area
held together by soft tissue, perhaps with the scapula and most phalanges
already detached. Although no two elements of this limb were found in
articulation, the individual elements were less dispersed than those of L45062.
The incomplete manus, L33160, from LBW-E 1975/1, was a similar occurrence
to L45063.
Other Agriotherium specimens from the bed 3aN controlled excavations
tended to be isolated occurrences of individual skeletal elements. Since they
are generally well preserved and show few, if any, signs of abrasion, they, too,
are likely to be from carcasses similar to that of L45062. However, in these
instances there was greater dispersal of skeletal elements and associations were
no longer obvious. The condition of isolated specimens was usually in keeping
with the nature of the depositional environment. Long bones were invariably
fragmented, but shorter and stouter bones, such as those of the manus and pes,
were usually intact. The hemimandible, L45114, had lost the single-rooted
teeth (incisors, P; and M3), which are easily separated from the jaw, and the
ascending ramus, which is more fragile than the mandibular corpus. The single-
rooted canine was still in position, because the root of this tooth is large and
slightly bulbous, and impossible to remove from the jaw without breaking the
root or the bone enclosing it.
Also of interest from a taphonomic point of view is the post-mortem damage
to specimens. This was clearly dependent on the micro-environment in which
specimens were deposited.
The incomplete manus, L33160, was deposited close to, or on the north
bank of the river in the LBW-E 1975/1 area. This specimen is remarkable
because it provides evidence of the activities of hyaenas in this area. Like many
of the fossils from ‘E’ Quarry, L33160 shows signs of having been chewed by
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
—
—
=—_
a
thet
em
nein
canal
——
ll
|
<
li
al
ge
iS
oo
Hyaena-gnawed Agriotherium manus, 133160, from Langebaanweg. Arrows indicate
areas of major damage.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 65
a hyaena, and this was done while the bones were still articulated. The phalanges,
metacarpal I and distal ends of the metacarpals II to V are lost, probably having
been ingested by the hyaena concerned, and there are tooth-marks on some of
the metacarpals adjacent to the missing parts. There is also damage on the
scapholunar and unciform, but the magnum and trapezoid, which are largely
enclosed by the other bones, are intact (Fig. 28).
The remains of at least six small hyaenas (Ictitherium preforfex) were
recovered from LBW-E 1975/1. This species of hyaena, and perhaps others,
probably scavenged the banks of the river for the remains of animals washed
into the area. Hyaena-damaged bone was not uncommon in this area, another
notable example being the skull of a seal with double punctate marks on the
braincase. The lower canines of Ictitherium preforfex fit these punctate marks
well.
Another specimen from LBW-E 1975/1, the metatarsal L30205, is remark-
able in having on its shaft gnaw-marks apparently made by a small rodent
(Fig. 29). This type of damage is rare amongst the fossils from ‘E’ Quarry.
110 Mi 12
113
Fig. 29. Rodent-gnawed Agriotherium metatarsal, L30205, from Langebaanweg.
Arrow indicates area of damage.
Although rodent remains are generally common in the fossiliferous deposits
of the Varswater Formation, this was not the case in the LBW-E 1975/1 area,
where only bathyergids were represented in moderate numbers. Living bathy-
ergids, which are fossorial, are known to gnaw at objects encountered in their
tunnels, plastic water-pipes and telephone cables being items recently affected
in this way in the south-western Cape Province. It is possible that a bathyergid
tunnelling on the river bank was responsible for the damage to L30205.
Three distinct types of post-mortem damage are evident on the bones and
teeth of the partial skeleton L45062. Most common is simple fracturing of
bones, which is ascribed to movement after loss of soft tissue, and to subsequent
compression by overlying deposit. Not surprisingly, it was the relatively delicate
parts of the skull which were particularly affected by this fracturing. The second
type of damage is abrasion, which was probably caused by sand-charged water
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
flowing over exposed parts of the partly buried skeleton. This type of damage
is not uncommon on the fossils from ‘E’ Quarry, and a good example was
mentioned elsewhere (Hendey 1970: 82, fig. 3).
The third type of damage was caused by fire, with affected bones and teeth
being blackened, more badly fractured and less well preserved than unburnt
bone (Fig. 30). This type of damage is also not uncommon on fossils from
‘E’ Quarry, and has been discussed elsewhere (Hendey 1974: 351; 1976: 224).
jy
Fig. 30. Fire-damaged Agriotherium astragalus,
145062, from Langebaanweg.
It was previously assumed that fire-damage was caused by dry-season bush or
grass fires. While this may sometimes have been the case, there are instances
where the inferred depositional environment and nature of the damage is such
that fires of another sort are likely to have been responsible. The fire-damage
of L45062 is a case in point.
It is clear that this damage was done after the skeleton had been dis-
articulated, since severe fire-damage on one bone is not matched by damage to
immediately adjacent parts of the skeleton. For example, the symphyseal region
of the right hemimandible is fire-damaged and the incisors are lost, whereas
the left hemimandible is intact in this region and the incisors are present.
Similarly, the distal end and part of the shaft of the left ulna is damaged, but
corresponding parts of the left radius are unaffected.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 67
Assuming that the depositional environment of L45062 has been correctly
interpreted, it is highly improbable, if not impossible that the random burning
of parts of the skeleton could have been caused by a bush or grass fire. A more
plausible explanation is that the fire-damage was caused by peat fires, a
phenomenon which has been reported in a North American estuarine swamp
by Staub & Cohen (1979). It was indicated earlier that the horizon in which
L45062 occurred graded laterally into a peat-like deposit, and that pure peats
may have overlain this horizon. Such peats, if they did exist, may have been
prone to dry season fires like the American example cited above. Having burnt
away they would have left no trace obvious to observers unfamiliar with such
phenomena other than some underlying burnt bone.
Peat fires may also have led to the formation of hitherto unexplained
deposits capping the peat-like sediments immediately south of the LBW-E
1976/2 area. Immediately overlying the ‘peat’ was a horizon of sand a few
centimetres thick, which was recorded as being ‘orange-brown’ in colour and
in this respect unlike any other sand body recorded before or since in ‘E’ Quarry.
The ‘orange-brown sand’ was in turn overlain by a grey clay incorporating
scattered sand grains. In the examples of peat fires recorded by Staub & Cohen
(1979), and in other similar ones (e.g. Cypert 1961), ponds developed in depres-
sions left in the peat after burning, and such ponds become a new and distinct
depositional environment in the areas in question. If there was, indeed, a peat
fire in the LBW-E 1976/2 area, the orange-brown sand and grey clay may
represent sediment accumulated in a resultant pond, while the underlying
carbonaceous deposit represents an unburnt residue of the original peat deposit.
The carbonaceous deposit may have remained unburnt either because it was
waterlogged or because its high mnon-carbonaceous content made it
incombustible.
The grey clay is finely laminated, suggesting slow accumulation in still-
water conditions, with individual sediment particles perhaps having been
transported to the pond by wind. The origin of the orange-brown sand is not
known. It was initially thought that it may represent the unburnt residue of
the peat fire, but the occasional vertebrate fossils incorporated in the sand
show no signs of having been burnt.
The existence and effects of peat fires at Langebaanweg are largely specu-
lative, but they do provide a plausible explanation for hitherto unexplained,
or unsatisfactorily explained, aspects of the fossils and the deposits.
The ecological role of Agriotherium is also relevant here. It was mentioned
earlier that Agriotherium was a carnivorous animal and, judging from its
dentition, it was better adapted to carnivory than almost all other later ursids.
It is the nature of the posterior cheek teeth which are particularly significant
in this respect, and since these teeth are better represented in A. africanum than
in previously recorded Agriotherium, it is useful to examine them from a func-
tional viewpoint.
The P*, M! and M? of A. africanum, and other Agriotherium, resemble one
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
another in having a series of prominent buccal cusps and less prominent lingual
ones (Fig. 31). In all there are seven buccal cusps, three on P* and two on each
of the molars, and they are in the form of a smooth curve, with the convexity
directed buccally. In addition to being lower-crowned, the lingual cusps are
less distinct and fewer in number, only five excluding the vestigial accessory
cusps on the P* protocone lobe. These cusps are more or less in a straight line.
TULA LULL
mM
Tl
6
Fig. 31. Langebaanweg Agriotherium specimens showing prominence of buccal cusps.
A. Lingual view of P* and M1. B. Anterior view of M?.
Judging from wear facets, the buccal cusps have a combined shearing and
crushing function, with the former being predominant. The lingual cusps also
have this double function, but in this instance the crushing function is
predominant.
Much the same applies in the case of P, and the lower molars, in which
the more prominent cusps are situated buccally. An exception is the large
posterolingual cusp of the M, talonid. This cusp is, however, like the more
buccal ones in developing an inclined shearing facet on its buccal side. The
other lower teeth or cusps which develop inclined shearing facets buccally are
the paraconid, protoconid and hypoconid of M,, the protoconid and hypoconid
of M,, and the anterobuccal part of Ms.
A most significant development relating to the emphasis of the buccal
cusps in A. africanum is the reduction or loss of the anterolingual cusps of the
M,.’s, L45114/L46563 and L50007. As far as is known this has not previously
been observed in Agriotherium. It creates the impression that the M, of A. afri-
canum was tending to become a second lower carnassial. Although smaller
than the true carnassial, L45114/L46563 and L 50007 resemble this tooth in
having the trigonid large and functioning essentially as a shearing element.
To have carried this evolutionary experiment to its logical conclusion
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 69
would have required continued suppression of the lingual cusps of P*, M! and
M2, continued emphasis of the buccal cusps of these teeth, and a similar emphasis
on the more buccal parts of the lower molars. This would have resulted in a
sectorial dentition unique amongst Carnivora, but since no Agriotherium is
known in which there was an advance on the A. africanum condition, it evidently
served the needs of the genus adequately.
It is worth noting in this connection that a similar evolutionary path has
been followed by the polar bear, Thalarctos maritimus. In this species the P4
protocone is reduced or absent, the buccal cusps of M! and M? are relatively
higher crowned than those of other ursines, while the lingual ones, including
the M? talon, are correspondingly reduced. These dental characters reflect ‘the
carnivorous habits of the species and diverges from the omnivorous dentition
of most other ursids’ (Kurtén 1964: 4).
Whether Agriotherium was a predator or a scavenger is not known. Its
large and cumbersome build suggests that the former alternative is less likely,
although it may have been capable of hunting down at least some of the larger
contemporary herbivores, such as the giraffids. The P* of Agriotherium has
long been referred to as hyaenid-like (Falconer & Cautley 1836; Wagner 1837),
and recently Wolff (1978: 4) has written that this tooth ‘bears a striking resem-
blance in robustness to the teeth of the bonecrushing hyaenas’. This implies a
belief that Agriotherium may have been a scavenger. However, in the hyaenas it
is the more anterior cheek teeth which are enlarged to perform a bone-crushing
function, and the enlarged cheek teeth of Agriotherium may have been too
posteriorly situated to perform this function efficiently.
Irrespective of how its food was acquired, there can be no doubt that an
abundance must have been available in the Langebaanweg area when it was
inhabited by Agriotherium. There is evidence, however, which suggests that the
Varswater Formation fauna dates from the latter part of the period which
Kurtén (1971: 152) termed the ‘climax of the Age of Mammals’, and that even
in its heyday it was becoming an anachronism. In fact, it is possible that the
circumstances which led to the evolution of Agriotherium ultimately also caused
its extinction.
The late Tertiary was a period of world-wide environmental change, with
a general lowering of mean annual temperatures (Butzer 1971, fig. 2), which
heralded the glacial-interglacial oscillations of the Pleistocene. Over wide
areas of the Old World and the Americas, forests and woodlands were giving
way to savannas and grasslands, and these changes had a profound effect on the
character and composition of terrestrial vertebrate faunas (Webb 1977).
The Varswater Formation fauna provides evidence of these changes. For
example, it includes two of the earliest alcelaphine antelopes yet recorded
(Gentry 1980), and it is these bovids with their high-crowned teeth which are
characteristic of the African savannas today. Similarly, an early ancestor of
Africa’s grazing rhinoceros (Ceratotherium simum) is recorded from Langebaan-
weg (Hooijer 1972). Palynological evidence from Langebaanweg, and elsewhere
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in the south-western Cape Province, indicates that the modern Cape macchia
(fynbos) vegetation was becoming established at this time, and that the climate
was changing from ‘Cool Wet’ to ‘Colder Drier’ (Coetzee 1978: 121, fig. 2).
There is even some as yet unpublished evidence to suggest that there was a
marked fall in local sea temperatures during deposition of the Varswater
Formation.
The immediate cause of the climatic and environmental deterioration in the
Langebaanweg area and adjacent regions was the development of the Benguela
Current System off the west coast of southern Africa and the consequent
aridification of the adjacent land mass (Siesser 1978; Tankard & Rogers 1978).
The development of the Benguela Current was in turn the result of major
glaciation in Antarctica later in the Miocene (Kennett et al. 1975).
This period of climatic and environmental change must have influenced
the Ursidae as much as any other mammalian group. During the Vallesian |
the ursids which inhabited Europe were generally relatively small omnivorous
animals inhabiting forests and woodlands. That lineage which was to give rise
to the Ursinae, and probably also the Tremarctinae, continued to be repre-
sented by small species during the Turolian. However, in the Indarctos lineage
there was a marked increase in the size of the species during this period. In the
following section of this report, evidence will be presented which indicates that
Indarctos was the ancestor of Agriotherium, and consequently it is the Indarctos
lineage, and the changes it underwent, which are relevant here.
By the Turolian (and its equivalents) the environment in mid-latitudes was
in the process of change, with woodlands giving way to more open country
(Kurtén 1971). Consequently, woodland plant foods such as fruits, nuts and
berries, favoured by omnivorous ursids, were probably becoming less readily
available. It is the larger species which would have been most adversely affected
by this development, and thus Turolian Jndarctos, and its counterparts else-
where, may increasingly have been forced to adapt their diets to more abundant
food sources. In this instance, the response was evidently in the direction of
increased carnivory, with adaptations culminating in the evolution of
Agriotherium.
During the Pleistocene a similar situation arose in respect of Thalarctos.
At the onset of one of the glaciations, populations of Ursus arctos did not
retreat southwards in advance of the ice, but instead adapted to the new con-
ditions. Amongst other things, this involved a growing reliance on carnivory
to replace the plant foods which had previously been part of its diet (Kurtén
1964; Hendey 1972).
The early ancestors of the giant panda, Ailuropoda, evidently responded to
late Tertiary environmental change in a different way. They adapted their diet
to include more readily available plant foods which had not necessarily figured
in their diets previously. Thus arose the most herbivorous of all living ursids,
whose main diet of bamboo shoots is varied by other plant foods when this is
possible (Ewer 1973). :
71
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
Pe
be!
Rex :
“ff
‘OL6[ Bulidg ‘somuvegesuryT ‘AjIJedo1d ourur py] sojwioyo sul “ze “SI
72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
By becoming a highly specialized herbivore, Ai/uropoda ensured its survival,
although latterly in diminishing numbers and in increasingly remote areas.
On the other hand, by adopting carnivory, Agriotherium placed itself in direct
competition with smaller and better adapted predators and scavengers for a
declining food source (i.e. large woodland browsers), or one which was increas-
ingly difficult for a large ambulatory carnivore to acquire (i.e. cursorial grazers
of the savannas and grasslands). According to this hypothesis, the fate of Agrio-
therium was sealed by the factors which led to its origins.
The picture of the Langebaanweg Agriotherium which emerges is of a
gigantic carnivore living at a time when vertebrate life flourished in the south-
western Cape Province, and when the Langebaanweg area was well-watered
and richly vegetated. The semi-arid environment of Langebaanweg today,
devoid of indigenous trees and scarred by man’s activities, is a poor reflection ~
of the past (Fig. 32). Only some of the smallest of the carnivorous cousins of
Agriotherium, namely foxes, polecats, mongooses and wildcats, still occupy
the area and the prospects for their survival are limited.
RELATIONSHIPS OF AGRIOTHERIUM
The first Agriotherium specimens to be collected and recorded were several
isolated teeth of an aged individual found at Montpellier in France early in the
nineteenth century. These specimens, which are preserved in the Museum
d’Histoire Naturelle, Geneva, were described by Cuvier (1822) under the name
of ‘Lophiodon de Montpellier’. Stehlin (1907) gave an account of this historic
material, whose true identity remained a mystery for many decades, and pro-
vided an indication of the difficulties originally encountered in correctly identi-
fying and classifying specimens belonging to Agriotherium.
Although its ursid affinities were recognized by Falconer & Cautley (1836)
on the basis of material from the Siwalik Hills of India, Agriotherium is in many
respects an atypical member of the family. Of all the genera of Ursidae, it is
Agriotherium and its herbivorous counterpart, Ailuropoda, whose relationships
have been most controversial. The fact that Agriotherium has a poor fossil
record, while that of its nearest relatives is not necessarily any better, has
aggravated the problem. In addition, there has been a tendency to compare it
with the ursine bears, which have long been well known, and this has further
obscured matters, since the ursines and Agriotherium are only distantly related.
Much the same applies in the case of Ailuropoda.
Hyaenarctos Owen, 1845, a junior synonym of Agriotherium Wagner, 1837,
was the generic name in common use during the last century and the earlier
part of the present one. Prior to the identification of Indarctos by Pilgrim (1913),
“Hyaenarctos’ was the name applied to species now referred to both Agrio-
therium and Indarctos. This is an indication that these two genera have many
characters in common, a point made obvious by studies such as those of Frick
(1926) and Matthew (1929). Pilgrim (1931, 1932) did much to clarify the situa-
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 5
tion, and thereafter, apart from occasional lapses (e.g. Viret 1939), the name
‘Hyaenarctos’ fell into disuse, and Pilgrim’s interpretation of the genera Agrio-
therium and Indarctos was generally accepted.
Pilgrim (1932: 42, 43) listed half a dozen characters which he believed
distinguished these genera and concluded that ‘Indarctos appears to represent
a distinct line of development from Agriotherium, in some ways more and in
others less advanced than the latter’, while ‘J. punjabiensis seems to some extent
to bridge over the gulf between [them]’. In spite of the attention given by
Pilgrim to the problem of distinguishing Agriotherium from Indarctos, and in
determining their relationships to one another, and to other ursids, uncertain-
ties have remained. Nevertheless, it has become common practice to include
these genera in the subfamily Agriotheriinae, together with ‘the basal genus of
the family, Ursavus’ (Kurtén 1966: 7).
Since Agriotherium and Indarctos fossils are not common, they, and the
question of their relationships, have received only infrequent attention since
Pilgrim’s (1932) review. Such attention has been prompted on the one hand by
descriptions of new material (e.g. Viret 1939; Kretzoi 1942; Tobien 1955;
Thenius 1959; Hendey 1972; Crusafont & Kurtén 1976; Wolff 1978), and on
the other by reviews of ursid inter-relationships and phylogeny (e.g. Erdbrink
1953; Thenius & Hofer 1960). On those rare occasions when the relationship
between Agriotherium and Indarctos has been discussed, Pilgrim’s (1932)
opinion has been favoured. For example, both Erdbrink (1953, fig. 61) and
Thenius & Hofer (1960, figs. 34-35) place these genera on separate lineages,
and indicate derivation from an unknown common ancestor in the Ursavus
group.
This theory is based on the belief that Agriotherium is the more ‘primitive’
(i.e. canid-like) of the two genera, which, since it survived later than Indarctos,
must represent a distinct lineage. However, there is an alternative hypothesis.
In previous studies on the Langebaanweg Agriotherium it was suggested that
this genus was directly descended from Jndarctos (Hendey 1972, 1977), an
idea which was apparently first conceived by Schlosser (1899). Before examining
this alternative in more detail it is worth noting what is known of the temporal
ranges of the two genera.
In Europe Agriotherium is first recorded from the Ruscinian, while Indarctos
is known only from the Vallesian and Turolian (Table 15). In North America
Agriotherium is restricted to the late Hemphillian (i.e. 4,5-6,0 Ma) and Indarctos
is recorded only from the latter part of the early Hemphillian (i.e. 6-7 Ma)
(R. H. Tedford 1979, pers. comm.). In Africa the Langebaanweg Agriotherium
is from a Ruscinian-equivalent fauna whereas the cf. Agriotherium from Sahabi
(Boaz et al. 1979) is probably an advanced Indarctos in terms of current defi-
nitions, and is almost certainly a little older than the Langebaanweg species.
The situation in Asia is still obscure, although it is now known that the Dhok
Pathan of the Siwaliks, from which important Indarctos and Agriotherium
specimens are recorded, spans an appreciable period during the late Miocene
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 15
The occurrence of Jndarctos and Agriotherium in Europe and the Middle East.
APPROX.
AGE IN
m.y.t
TAXON LOCALITY MAMMAL AGE! | MEIN ZONE?
Ruscinian
Turolian
Montpellier
Concud
Samos
Pikermi
Maragha
Montredon Late
Orignac Vallesian —
Pfaffstetten
Westhofen
Can Llobateres Early 12
Can Purull Vallesian
Agriotherium insigne .
Indarctos atticus
Indarctos arctoides
Indarctos vireti
1 Berggren & Van Couvering 1974; 7? Mein 1975.
and Pliocene (Pilbeam et al. 1977). Consequently, the Dhok Pathan repre-
sentatives of these genera, whose taxonomy is controversial (see below), were
not necessarily contemporaneous with one another. A similar situation may
well exist in the case of Jndarctos and Agriotherium from Chinese late Tertiary
localities, with the former known from Localities 30, 31, 43 and 52, while
Agriotherium is tentatively identified from Locality 13 (Kurtén 1952).
Indications are, therefore, that Agriotherium and Indarctos were not
contemporaries, and when their age is known the former appears later in the
fossil record. Consequently, their known temporal ranges are in accord with the
theory that Agriotherium was descended from Indarctos.
While its relationships to Agriotherium may be controversial, the history
of Indarctos itself is now reasonably well documented. It apparently had its
origins in Europe during the Vallesian, having stemmed from an Ursavus, and
subsequently spread through Asia and into North America (Thenius & Hofer
1960), as well as to Africa (see above). Differing interpretations of inter-generic
relationships are possible. For example, Crusafont & Kurtén (1976) suggested
that J. vireti was ancestral to both I. arctoides and I. atticus, whereas I. arctoides
is here regarded as an intermediate between the other two species. Crusafont
& Kurtén (1976: 15) further suggested that J. anthracitis ‘may be a precociously
specialized form’. This species is, indeed, unusual, perhaps because it evolved
in isolation on a Tethyan island, but it is largely irrelevant to present con-
siderations. Recorded Asiatic Indarctos are either close to I. atticus or more
advanced, while North American /ndarctos is more advanced than J. atticus.
Irrespective of the actual inter-relationships of Indarctos species, there is
no doubt that J. vireti is a generalized and early form, whereas J. atticus, and
Asian and North American Jndarctos are more specialized and younger in age.
For example, Crusafont & Kurtén (1976: 15) noted that J. atticus is ‘more
advanced [than other European /ndarctos] with larger cheek teeth, more reduced
premolars, heavy and powerful jaws, and ursine limb proportions’.
a ee — rf
-—- ——e
> — a J
, nn
ta ~— eee 6 ee | A oe.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA US
It follows that if Agriotherium were descended from Jndarctos, then the
evolutionary trends evident in the /. vireti-J. atticus lineage are likely to have
been continued in the hypothetical Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage. This is,
indeed, the case, and Crusafont & Kurtén’s comments quoted above apply
equally well to Agriotherium relative to J. atticus. Such general trends do not
necessarily constitute proof of a direct phylogenetic relationship between the
two taxa.
Much more convincing evidence comes from an examination of certain
tooth and skull characters in advanced Jndarctos (i.e. those between 6 and 9 m.y.
old), and early Agriotherium (i.e. those that are, or probably are, about 5 m.y.
old). Examples of the latter are A. africanum from Langebaanweg, A. insigne
from Europe (Montpellier), and A. palaeindicum from the Siwaliks. Advanced
Indarctos includes J. atticus from Europe (Samos) and Iran (Maragha), J. pun-
jabiensis from the Siwaliks, and North American Indarctos. All recorded speci-
mens of the latter are here referred to the species J. oregonensis (see p. 101).
The classification of material referred to some of the above species has
long been complicated by specimens which exhibit a combination of characters
‘typical’ of both genera. Pilgrim (1932: 4446) discussed such a problem involv-
ing three incomplete mandibles from the Dhok Pathan of the Siwaliks (GSI-D8,
D9, D10), and although he found it ‘difficult to give a definite answer’, he
decided to reverse the identifications suggested by Lydekker (1884). Pilgrim’s
identifications are accepted here, with D8 assigned to Agriotherium palae-
indicum, while D9 and D10 are assigned to Jndarctos punjabiensis. The latter
has since been recognized as one of the more advanced representatives of
Indarctos (Thenius 1959), while A. palaeindicum is one of the more primitive
representatives of Agriotherium (Hendey 1977).
It is highly likely that more will yet be written on the identity of the Siwaliks’
Indarctos and Agriotherium. Both Pilgrim and Lydekker may have been incorrect
in their interpretation of GSI-D8, D9 and D10 (and other specimens) since
they could represent a single species which was no more variable than the
Langebaanweg Agriotherium. The anomalous situation in respect of J. pun-
Jabiensis and A. palaeindicum will be repeatedly evident in the discussions which
follow. The study of new and well provenanced material from the Siwaliks
may resolve a situation which is beyond satisfactory resolution on the basis of
available evidence.
Whatever the final outcome of this controversy, the fact that specimens
can with some justification be identified with either Indarctos or Agriotherium
is here regarded as highly significant, with specimens such as GSI-D8, D9 and
D10 being interpreted as ‘intermediates’ between ‘typical’ Jndarctos and ‘typical’
Agriotherium. The present study has shown that such ‘intermediates’ are more
common than has hitherto been supposed. The characters which the two genera
have in common, coupled with apparent evolutionary trends linking them,
provide surprisingly good evidence for the transition of Indarctos to Agrio-
therium considering the relatively poor fossil record of the taxa concerned.
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Indarctos—Agriotherium ‘intermediates’ are included in the A. africanum
assemblage, while an undescribed A. insigne specimen from Montpellier
(NMB-MP549) and the recently described Indarctos skull from Florida (Wolff
1978) are also in this category. The Florida skull is perhaps the best single
recorded specimen which is ‘intermediate’ between ‘typical’ Indarctos and
‘typical’ Agriotherium. The age of this specimen is ‘late Hemphillian’ (Wolff
1978: 1), and it probably dates back about 6 m.y. It is certainly younger than
the Samos J. atticus skulls described by Helbing (1932) and Thenius (1949,
1959), and it is much younger than the skull of J. vireti from Spain (Crusafont
& Kurtén 1976). On the other hand, it is probably a little older than the skull
of the Langebaanweg A. africanum.
Judging from the few measurements given by Wolff (1978), and from
illustrations, the Florida skull is appreciably larger than that of J. atticus, which
in turn is larger than that of J. vireti (Crusafont & Kurtén 1976). The trend of
increasing size with time in the Jndarctos lineage is clearly illustrated by these
specimens. This trend was continued with the evolution of Agriotherium,
since the skull of A. africanum is, in some respects at least, still larger than that
of the Florida Jndarctos. In respect of size the Florida skull is probably closer
to that of A. africanum (and A. sivalense) than the three described skulls of
European Jndarctos.
The general similarity between the skulls of the Florida Jndarctos and
A. africanum was discussed earlier (see pp. 9-16), while the differences between
them can all be ascribed to the more advanced condition of the latter. The
advances are probably all related to the larger size of the A. africanum skull,
and to modifications of its masticatory apparatus.
Judging from the Florida Indarctos and A. africanum skulls, the following
are the most significant cranial characters shared by advanced Indarctos and
Agriotherium:
1. Snouts relatively short and broad.
2. Zygomatic arches very stout and of similar shape.
3. Sagittal crest very high.
4. Overall similarity of the basicranial regions, particularly the absence
of the alisphenoid canal, and the positions of the oval, postglenoid and
other foramina.
In respect of the development of the snout, zygomatic arches and sagittal
crests, the Florida Jndarctos is intermediate between J. atticus and A. africanum.
The basicranial region of J. atticus is similar to those of the other two skulls,
and, according to Crusafont & Kurtén (1976), the basicranial region of /. vireti
is similar to that of J. atticus. I. vireti is more primitive, however, in having
the ‘facial part of the skull. . . relatively much longer than in J. atticus’ (Crusa-
font & Kurtén 1976: 10).
The relatively short snout of Agriotherium goes together with a relatively
short palate, which is of interest because Kurtén (1964: 22) found that the
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA Ti
palate of the polar bear, Thalarctos, is slightly shorter than that of the brown
bear, U. arctos, a pattern which he was not ‘able to match... . in any other bear
population’. Evidently the Indarctos—Agriotherium example was not taken into
account, but it is a parallel to U. arctos-Thalarctos in this respect. Kurtén (1967)
subsequently noted that, like Thalarctos, a short and broad snout characterizes
Arctodus, another ursid which is convergent with Agriotherium (see p. 51).
- Another apparent similarity between the skulls of Agriotherium and
Thalarctos is that in lateral view they have a relatively straight profile, with the
sagittal crest prominent (Erdbrink 1953). It was on this basis that Wagner (1837)
proposed the name Agriotherium for the Ursus sivalensis of Falconer & Cautley
(1836) (see Erdbrink 1953: 557). Thalarctos is like Agriotherium and Arctodus in
being a carnivorous animal descended from an omnivorous ancestor, and other
parallels between them will be mentioned below.
The presence of a premasseteric fossa in the mandible of Agriotherium, and
its absence in Jndarctos, is an important distinguishing characteristic, the sig-
nificance of which has prompted much published and unpublished comment.
In one recent account it was erroneously stated that the premasseteric fossa is
also characteristic of Ursavus (Hendey 1977), an error stemming from Frick
(1926: 99), citing Wegner (1913). In fact, Ursavus, like Indarctos, lacks this
fossa, and it is thus peculiar to Agriotherium in the hypothetical Ursavus—
Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage.
The premasseteric fossa is important from a phylogenetic point of view,
since it, like other ‘characteristics’, may not be an invariably diagnostic feature
of Agriotherium. For example, it is absent from at least one mandible which
has been assigned to Agriotherium, namely, the A. palaeindicum specimen
GSI-D8. On the other hand, in the Samos J. atticus specimen described by
Thenius (1959) (NMW-Samos 1912, 29), there is a slight depression in the pre-
masseteric region which could be an incipient fossa. No such fossa, however,
has been reported in more advanced Jndarctos, such as that from North America.
Thenius (1959) pointed out that most of the Jndarctos mandibles then
known were either incomplete or belonged to immature individuals, and that
the premasseteric fossa was either not observable or absent. This fossa clearly
is an ontogenetic character, since in the Langebaanweg assemblage it is well
developed only in older individuals (e.g. L45062), and is shallow in the mandible
of a young adult (L45114) (Fig. 33).
A premasseteric fossa is otherwise known amongst ursids in Hemicyoninae
and Tremarctinae. Although the early history of tremarctines is not well known
(Thenius 1976), there is nothing to indicate that they and the hemicyonines are
closely related. Consequently, it is certain that the premasseteric fossa in these
two groups was evolved independently. There is thus no reason to suppose
that its presence in Agriotherium is indicative of a close relationship with either
the Hemicyoninae or the Tremarctinae. Since the significance of the premas-
seteric fossa in ursids is not known (Davis 1955), there is no way of knowing
why it should develop in some lineages and not in others.
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A B
Fig. 33. Dorsoventral cross-sections of Lange-
baanweg Agriotherium hemimandibles with arrows
indicating premasseteric fossae. A. 145114.
B. L45062.
The teeth of Indarctos and Agriotherium provide much evidence in support
of the theory that they are directly related.
As is often the case with carnivore incisors and canines, little of signifi-
cance emerged from a study of these teeth in Indarctos and Agriotherium, except
that they are essentially similar morphologically The [' and I? are perhaps the
most distinctive of the anterior teeth in A. africanum, and they are closely
matched by those of the /. atticus specimen from Samos described by Helbing
(1932, fig. 2) (NMB-Sam31). The anterior teeth of Agriotherium are distinguished
from those of Indarctos principally by their larger size, this being a reflection of
the overall size differences between the two genera.
It is worth noting in this connection that since the Agriotheriinae, like other
ursids, exhibit appreciable sexual dimorphism, it is possible that large males
of advanced Indarctos were of similar size to, and perhaps even slightly larger
than, small Agriotherium females. For example, in terms of overall size the
maxillary fragment of a small A. insigne specimen from Montpellier (NMB-—
MP549) is virtually identical in size to corresponding parts of the Vienna
I. atticus specimen (NMW-Samos 1912, 29) (Fig. 34). Similarly, the Florida
Indarctos skull is in some respects as large as that of the Langebaanweg Agrio-
therium, which belongs to a male, and would therefore have been larger than
those of A. africanum females. Thus size alone may not necessarily be a reliable
criterion for distinguishing the two genera.
One of the general trends in ursid evolution has been the emphasis on the
development of the posterior cheek teeth, and the. reduction in size or even loss
of the anterior premolars (Pj-P3). More reduced premolars is one of the charac-
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 719
ee eee C IT)
Fig. 34. Upper cheek tooth rows of Indarctos
atticus, NMW-Sam1912/29 (left) and Agriotherium
insigne, NMB-MP549 (right). Drawn from casts.
ters which distinguishes J. atticus from the earlier J. vireti (Crusafont & Kurtén
1976). In I. atticus P} and P§ are apparently always single-rooted, while P3 usually
have two roots, although P, may sometimes have only one root (Thenius 1959).
In the Florida Indarctos P! and P? are single-rooted, and P? is double-rooted
(Wolff 1978).
Judged on the basis of the Langebaanweg sample, the anterior premolars
of Agriotherium had undergone even further reduction, since in this instance
all are invariably single-rooted and as many as two of a series may be lost
(Table 16). This sample does not, however, exhibit one of the extremes in
anterior premolar development encountered in Agriotherium. The Montpellier
A. insigne specimen, NMB-MP3549, is like advanced Indarctos in having a
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 16
Anterior premolars in Agriotherium from Langebaanweg.
L41404
150003 = = p p p
150445 — == — p p p
140044 — —_— p a p
L50004 —_— — p a p
150903 = = p a p
p p
145062
p
145114
p = present; a = absent.
double-rooted P? set transversely in the jaw. It is especially reminiscent of the
Vienna J. atticus specimen in this respect (Fig. 34), the only difference being
that the principal cusp in the latter is slightly more distinct. The P? of NMB—
MP549 is unlike that of any other recorded Agriotherium.
By contrast, the Vienna J. atticus specimen is Agriotherium-like in having
the P, to P; reduced to single-rooted teeth.
Thus, in respect of anterior premolar development conditions typical of
advanced Jndarctos may occasionally be found in Agriotherium, and vice versa.
In addition, the anterior premolars of Agriotherium are morphologically similar
to those of advanced Indarctos, except for the slightly more distinct principal
cusps in the latter. This is a primitive characteristic since the principal cusps of
the anterior premolars of /. atticus are in turn less well developed than those of
I. vireti.
The P,’s of advanced Indarctos and Agriotherium are also almost indis-
tinguishable in terms of their basic morphology. Differences in detail are probably
no greater than those in the Langebaanweg Agriotherium sample, which includes
one specimen (L50445) with the principal cusp configuration resembling that
in the J. atticus specimen, NMB-Sam31 (Fig. 35). Of particular significance is
the tendency in Indarctos for the development of a postero-internal bulge in
the cingular region. This feature is well developed in the Maragha J. atticus
specimen (De Mecquenem 1925). In Agriotherium the postero-internal bulge
on P, is comparably developed, whereas it is absent or much less pronounced
in all other ursids.
The principal differences between the P,’s of advanced Indarctos and
Agriotherium are that the latter are higher crowned and tend to be larger in
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 81
A
Fig. 35. Buccal and occlusal views of P,’s.
A. Indarctos atticus, NMB-Sam31 (after Helbing
1932, fig. 3). B. Langebaanweg Agriotherium,
L50445.
overall size. All the posterior cheek teeth of Agriotherium are higher crowned
than their counterparts in Indarctos, although the Florida Indarctos specimen
may be an exception in this respect. Apparently the crown height increase in
the Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage was more or less in proportion to the overall
increase in the size of the taxa concerned.
A likely parallel of this situation is that involving Thalarctos, which has
relatively higher crowned posterior cheek teeth than Ursus arctos (Kurtén 1964).
In the case of the upper carnassial (P*), it is the nature of the protocone
lobe and the development of the parastyle which are of particular phylogenetic
significance.
As a general rule the P* of Agriotherium is distinguished from that of
Indarctos by the presence of a parastyle. However, some specimens of Jndarctos
do have a P* parastyle, although it is usually less prominent than that of Agrio-
therium. For example, this cusp is present in J. atticus from Concud (Crusafont
& Kurtén 1976) and Samos (Helbing 1932; Thenius 1959), I. punjabiensis from
the Siwaliks (Lydekker 1884), and North American Jndarctos (Merriam et al.
1925; Merriam & Stock 1925; Wolff 1978). The parastyle is particularly well
developed in some North American specimens (e.g. the Florida skull), which
are younger than European J. atticus. This cusp is absent in the still older and
more primitive J. arctoides and I. vireti. There was thus a tendency for the
development of a P* parastyle in the Jndarctos lineage, and this was continued
in the presumed descendant, Agriotherium, in which this cusp is always present
and well developed.
As far as is known the only other ursids in which the P? parastyle is present
are Ursavus depereti and its possible descendant, the giant panda, Ailuropoda
melanoleuca (see p. 96).
The situation in respect of the P* protocone lobe is slightly different,
although equally informative. According the Crusafont & Kurtén (1976: 8)
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
there was a tendency for J/. vireti to develop an antero-internal cusp on the P*,
a situation which ‘is not uncommon in J. arctoides and I. atticus’. This cusp is
also present in the J. punjabiensis specimen, GSI—D6, although in this instance
it is rather small (Lydekker 1884). In the younger and more advanced North
American Jndarctos this cusp is either reduced (Wolff 1978) or absent (Merriam
& Stock 1925). This indicates that while a double-cusped protocone lobe is
characteristic of most /ndarctos, there was a tendency for the antero-internal
cusp to be reduced or lost in advanced forms.
By contrast, an antero-internal cusp is found only in some of the earlier
Old World representatives of Agriotherium, namely, I. insigne from Mont-
pellier (NMB-MP549) and the Langebaanweg A. africanum. In the case of the
latter, this cusp is best developed in the holotype, L2045, from bed 3aS, which
predates those A. africanum P*’s from bed 3aN in which the antero-internal
cusp is small or absent.
Indications are, therefore, that early forms of European and African
Agriotherium still had an antero-internal cusp on P*, but this was soon reduced
and lost. On the other hand, no Asian or North American Agriotherium is
known to have had this cusp, which had already been reduced and lost in the
advanced Indarctos of these continents. This suggests that the Indarctos—
Agriotherium lineage may have had at least two geographically separated
branches, one in Europe and Africa and the other in Asia and North America,
which in respect of their P* protocone lobes evolved at different rates. The impli-
cations of this possibility will be discussed later (see pp. 101—4).
Reduction of the P* protocone is a characteristic of the Ursus—Thalarctos
lineage (Kurtén 1964), and in South American Arctodus (Kurtén 1967). This is
another example of a parallel development in Agriotherium, Thalarctos and
Arctodus.
Once again a double-cusped protocone lobe is otherwise known only in
Ursayus depereti and Ailuropoda, although in these taxa the morphology of the
lobe is somewhat different (see p. 96).
As with the upper carnassial, the lower one (M,) is an important tooth in
indicating the origins of Agriotherium. There is, however, a complication with
M,, although in the final analysis its phylogenetic significance is not diminished.
The complication concerns the identification of the posterolingual cusps of this
tooth.
The cusp of the Agriotherium M, which has invariably been identified as
the metaconid may in reality be the entoconid. If this is, indeed, the case, then
the metaconid of the Agriotherium M, is either reduced or absent, usually the ,
latter.
Both the metaconid and entoconid are present and well developed in |
Ursavus and Indarctos, although with time the metaconid becomes a progres-
sively less prominent feature of My,, since it is reduced in size relative to the
entoconid and is increasingly overshadowed by the protoconid. In U. primaevus ~
the metaconid is larger and more prominent than the entoconid, and is only ~
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 83
slightly less high-crowned than the protoconid (e.g. Crusafont & Kurtén 1976,
fig. 13). Much the same applies in the case of J. vireti and J. arctoides, except
that in these species the metaconid and entoconid are of comparable size
(Crusafont & Kurtén 1976, fig. 2; Tobien 1955, fig. 3). In I. atticus the metaconid
is much less prominent than the protoconid, but is still of similar size to the
entoconid (Helbing 1932, fig. 3).
In the smallest of the A. africanum M,’s (L50006) what is interpreted as a
vestigial metaconid is still present. It is completely overshadowed by the proto-
conid, and, unlike its counterpart in J. atticus, is smaller than the entoconid.
The metaconid is absent in all other M,’s from Langebaanweg, and, apparently
also from all other recorded Agriotherium M,’s. The progressive reduction and
eventual loss of the M, metaconid in the Ursavus—Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage
is illustrated in Figure 36.
rs
ag
Fig. 36. M,’s. A. Ursavus primaevus (after Crusafont & Kurtén 1976, fig. 14). B. Indarctos
arctoides (after Tobien 1955, fig. 3). C. Indarctos atticus (after Helbing 1932, fig. 3). D. Lange-
baanweg Agriotherium (D1—L50006; D2—L50004; D3—L50446). All are lingual views
except C, which is a buccal view with the buccal talonid cusps omitted. e—entoconid;
m—metaconid; p—protoconid.
If the largest of the posterolingual M, cusps in Agriotherium is indeed the
entoconid (i.e. a talonid cusp), rather than the metaconid (i.e. a trigonid cusp),
this would account for Tobien’s (1955: 14) observation that the “Metaconid’ of
Agriotherium is ‘niedriger und starker zuriickgeschoben’, while in /ndarctos it is
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
‘héher und naher an das Protoconid gestellt’. The cusp which Tobien believed
to be the metaconid in Agriotherium may simply be a well-developed entoconid
in more or less its usual position, while in Jndarctos the metaconid was correctly
identified as such, and it, too, is in its usual position.
The metaconid in /ndarctos has a counterpart on the buccal side of the
talonid, this being a small cusp situated between the protoconid and hypoconid.
It is present in J. vireti (Crusafont & Kurtén 1976), I. atticus (Helbing 1932),
I. oregonensis (Dalquest 1969), and other specimens, although traces of its
presence may be obliterated by wear. A vestige of this cusp may be represented
in the A. palaeindicum specimen, GSI-—D8, by a slightly inclined ridge anterior
to the hypoconid. A similar ridge is present in the M, of A. africanum, although
in this species it takes the form of an undemarcated horizontal extension of the
hypoconid. It meets with the posterobuccally directed keel of the protoconid.
L50006 is also unusual in lacking this keel and in having the hypoconid ridge
linked directly with the vestigial metaconid.
The reduction and loss of the M, metaconid in the Indarctos—Agriotherium
lineage thus appears to have been accompanied by reduction and loss of its
buccal counterpart. The impression gained is that these cusps were ‘absorbed’ by
the protoconid, which is considerably enlarged in Agriotherium. This is a
manifestation of the development of the shearing cusps (paraconid and proto-
conid) at the expense of the crushing cusps (talonid cusps) in the Indarctos—
Agriotherium lineage.
It is possible, however, that the traditional interpretation of the large
posterolingual M, cusp in Agriotherium as the metaconid is correct. Another
of the Langebaanweg specimens, L50446, is unusual in having the largest of the
posterolingual cusps flanked posteriorly by two smaller cusps, whereas in all
other specimens there is only one such cusp. An almost exact match of L50446
is the M, of the A. palaeindicum specimen, GSI-D8 (Lydekker 1884). If the
largest of the posterolingual cusps in these specimens are metaconids, then the
smaller cusps immediately posteriorly would be the entoconids. It would,
therefore, be the entoconid which is lost in other Agriotherium M,’s, and this,
rather than the loss of the metaconid, would have characterized the Indarctos—
Agriotherium lineage. This hypothetical link would then be supported by the
observation that the entoconid is as well developed in Agriotherium specimens
such as L50446 and GSI-D8 as it is in some advanced Jndarctos (e.g. I. oregon-
ensis—Dalquest 1969, fig. 4).
In the case of the first alternative suggested above, the two smaller postero-
lingual cusps in L50466 and GSI—D8 would be interpreted as a duplication of
the single cusp in this position in other Agriotherium M,’s.
A first-hand examination of all relevant specimens may be necessary before
deciding which of the above alternatives is likely to be correct. Irrespective of
which applies, a transition from the typical Indarctos condition to that typical
of Agriotherium is documented by specimens from the Siwaliks and
Langebaanweg.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 85
Another trend evident in the lower carnassials of Indarctos and Agrio-
therium is that of a reduction in their relative lengths with time (Table 17).
Only the problematical Siwaliks’ specimens GSI-D8 and D9 are anomalous in
terms of their length: breadth ratios.
The arrangement and morphology of the M! cusps in advanced Jndarctos
and Agriotherium is virtually identical. The M? of A. africanum differs from that
of I. atticus only in being relatively shorter and higher crowned, although it may
be indistinguishable from more advanced Indarctos (e.g. the Florida specimen)
in these respects.
In most, and perhaps all, Indarctos M?’s the posterior keels of the meta-
cone and hypocone are linked across the posterior end of the tooth by a low
ridge of enamel. This feature is present but less obvious in A. africanum, and
probably all other Agriotherium, and this region of the tooth also differs in
being noticeably shorter than in the corresponding part of the J. atticus M?.
In other words, there is a very short ‘talon’ region in the latter, and it is reduction
of this feature which contributes to the overall shortening of M! in Agriotherium.
TABLE 17
Length : breadth ratios of Indarctos and Agriotherium My,’s.
Loca ity and/or
TAXON NUMBER LENGTH | BREADTH L:B MEANS
Agriotherium africanum .\ { L45062 1 1,82: 1
145062 2 il
150004 oat |
L50006 21
150446 Bil
145114 al
L50005 Bil
Agriotherium insigne .\ Montpellier! oa 17a
Montpellier? aI
Agriotherium
palaeindicum . .| GSI-D8? Balt 2,00 : 1
Indarctos punjabiensis .| GSI-D9? gt 1,88 : 1
Indarctos atticus . .| NMB-Sam31 Bal! 1,90:1
NMW-Saml 912/29? v1
Concud? al
Indarctos arctoides* .| Westhofen il 1,93: 1
Pfaffstetten |
Montredon ori
Indarctos viretit . .| Can Llobateres
VP633 $ 2,01 : 1
VP647
VP647
Can Purull
Type (pontiensis)
Type
1 Viret 1939; * Lydekker 1884; ° Thenius 1959; +4 Crusafont & Kurtén 1976.
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
This is a significant difference, because once again a specimen of one genus
is known which has the character of the other. An Jndarctos-like post-metacone
lengthening is one of the few features visible on the incomplete and badly
restored M? of the Montpellier A. insigne specimen, NUB-MP549.
The ‘primitive’ M! of this remarkable specimen is yet another of its Indarctos
‘characteristics’, others being its relatively small size, double-rooted and trans-
versely orientated P’, and double-cusped P* protocone lobe. This specimen also
has the P*, M! and M2? lower crowned than any of their counterparts in the
Langebaanweg assemblage. However, it is identified with Agriotherium because
its M? is of the Agriotherium type and distinct from that of all specimens referred
to Indarctos (see below). Had the M? of this specimen not been preserved, it
may well have been referred to Jndarctos. Montpellier could therefore have
erroneously acquired the distinction of being the only locality where Indarctos
and Agriotherium occurred together. This imaginary situation is mentioned
here to indicate the importance of NMB-MP549 as an Indarctos—Agriotherium
‘intermediate’, and to illustrate how easy it is to misidentify specimens belonging
to late Indarctos and early Agriotherium. The possibility of similar confusion
with certain Siwaliks specimens was mentioned above.
Before dealing with the next tooth in the dentition, another parallel between
Agriotherium and Thalarctos is mentioned. The M? of the latter is relatively
shorter and higher crowned than that of U. arctos, its ‘structural’ ancestor
(Kurtén 1964). This also applies in the case of at least some species of Arctodus
(Kurtén 1967).
The M, of A. africanum, and other Agriotherium, usually consists of two
trigonid cusps side by side, flanked posteriorly by two similarly positioned
talonid cusps. The M, of Jndarctos differs only in having two lingual talonid
cusps, and in being relatively longer and narrower. There are, however, Agrio-
therium specimens which are Indarctos-like in both these respects. The M, of
the A. palaeindicum specimen GSI—D8 has two lingual talonid cusps, while
vestiges of a second cusp are visible in the Langebaanweg specimens L54114/
L46563 and L50007. The length:breadth ratios of the M,’s of GSI-D8 and
L45114/L46563 are comparable to those of I. atticus M,’s (Table 18). By
contrast, this ratio in the J. punjabiensis specimen GSI-D9 is the same as that
of the mean of the A. africanum sample.
Curiously, the A. africanum M,’s which are most Jndarctos-like in respect
of talonid cusps and proportions are those which are most specialized in terms
of their trigonid development (see p. 27). Consequently, these specimens should
not be considered as good Jndarctos—Agriotherium intermediates. In addition,
it could be argued that Pilgrim (1932) was incorrect in reversing Lydekker’s
(1884) identifications of GSI-D8 and D9 and that they, too, are not ‘inter-
mediates’ in the sense claimed above. This may, indeed, be the case, but the
fact remains that however these (and other) Siwaliks specimens are identified,
they exhibit a combination of Indarctos and Agriotherium characters.
The dentitions of Indarctos and Agriotherium are perhaps most clearly
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 87
TABLE 18
Length : breadth ratios of Indarctos and Agriotherium M,’s.
Locatiry and/or
NUMBER LENGTH | BREADTH L:B
145062
145062
150004
150003
150007
145114
146563
Montpellier?
Agriotherium africanum .
Cie} 'afel (int hele) nie oie
pnh | pemed pemek pemek peek feek feed fe
Agriotherium insigne
Agriotherium
palaeindicum .
Indarctos punjabiensis
Indarctos atticus
GSI-D8?
GSI-D9?
NMB-Sam31
NMW-Sam1 912/298
Montredon
Westhofen
Pfaffstetten
Can Llobateres
VP633
VP640/1
VP647
VP647
Can Purull
Type
Type (pontiensis)
1,39: 1
1,29:1
1,39:1
Indarctos arctoides* 1,41:1
Indarctos vireti*
1 Viret 1939; * Lydekker 1884; * Thenius 1959; 4 Crusafont & Kurtén 1976.
distinguished from one another by the fact that the M? of the latter lacks a talon,
whereas in Jndarctos this feature, although variably developed, is always present.
The postero-internal (talon) region of the Agriotherium M? is also variably
developed, the Langebaanweg assemblage being useful in indicating the varia-
tion possible in a single population (Fig. 12). Of particular interest is the isolated
M?, L47698, in which there is a marked posterior projection of the postero-
internal part of the tooth. This is here interpreted as the vestiges of the talon
characteristically present in the M? of Indarctos. L47698 is remarkably similar
to the M?, GSI-D12, referred to J. punjabiensis by Lydekker (1884, fig. 6), and
these two specimens represent an intermediate between the conditions typical
of Indarctos and Agriotherium. The progressive shortening and broadening of
M”’s in the Jndarctos—Agriotherium lineage is indicated by the data in Table 19.
Erdbrink’s (1953: 582) view that there is ‘at best a beginning of a [M?]
talon .. . in A. insignis’ is here regarded as the reverse of the true situation.
A. insigne, like A. africanum, sometimes has the vestiges of a M? talon.
As with M}!, the arrangement and morphology of the four principal cusps
of M? in advanced Indarctos and Agriotherium are very similar. The paracones
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 19
Length : breadth ratios of Indarctos and Agriotherium M*’s.
LOCALITY or
NUMBER LENGTH} BREADTH L:B
Agriotherium africanum .|_ 48577 0,84: 1
148564 0,84 : 1
141404 0,85 : 1
L45062 0,87: 1
145062 0,88 : 1
L45137 0,93 : 1
L45137 0,94 : 1
L47242 1,00: 1
L47698 1,03 : 1
Agriotherium insigne NMB-MP549 0,89 : 1 ail
Type* 1,03: 1
Indarctos punjabiensis GSI-D12? 1,06: 1 ou
Indarctos atticus NMW-Sam1912/298 1,13:1 cat
NMB-Sam31 1,28: 1
Indarctos arctoides Montredon* 1,29:1 al
Montredon? 1,43 :1
Orignac* 1,28:1
Gau—Weinheim® 1,37:1
Indarctos vireti VP6334 1,47: 1 |
VP646? Sil
1 Frick 1926; *Lydekker 1884; *Thenius 1959; 4 Crusafont & Kurtén 1976; *°Tobien 1955.
and metacones are conical, with distinct anterior and posterior keels, the
protocone is ridge-like, and, with the small hypocone, is lower than the buccal
cusps.
The M*’s of Indarctos and Agriotherium illustrate very clearly a progressive
development from /. vireti, through I. arctoides, I. atticus, I. punjabiensis to
Agriotherium, with A. africanum taken as an example of its genus (Fig. 37).
The recorded M?’s of advanced North American Indarctos all have well-
developed talons, that of the J. cf. oregonensis specimen recorded by Merriam
& Stock (1925) being the most prominent. It is, however, from the same deposits
as another J. oregonensis M?, which is a larger tooth but with a relatively smaller
talon (Merriam et al. 1925). The latter is here interpreted as belonging to a male,
while the smaller specimen with the larger talon belongs to a female.
This raises the possibility that the teeth of female Indarctos and Agrio-
therium tend to be more ‘primitive’ than those of the larger males. This explana-
tion applies in the case of the ‘primitive’ A. insigne specimen, NMB-MP549,
discussed earlier, which represents a small individual, apparently a female.
Another example is the A. africanum M, with the vestigial metaconid, L50006.
The female I. cf. oregonensis is also ‘primitive’ compared with other North
American Jndarctos in having a relatively small P* parastyle and a relatively
elongated M1. It does not, however, have a double-cusped P* protocone lobe.
This, together with the fact that NMB-MP549 does not have a talon on M?,
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 89
A B c
D1 D2 D3
Fig. 37. Ms. A. Indarctos arctoides (after Helbing 1932, fig. 7). B. Indarctos atticus (after
Helbing 1932, fig. 1). C. Indarctos punjabiensis (after Lydekker 1884, fig. 6). D. Langebaan-
weg Agriotherium (D1 —L47698; D2—L45137; D3 —L41404).
indicates that females were not necessarily ‘primitive’ in all respects. Never-
theless, since increasing size was a characteristic of the Indarctos—Agriotherium
lineage, and consequently large size was itself an ‘advanced’ character, it is to be
expected that larger individuals would also be ‘advanced’ in other respects, and
vice versa. This is a further indication that allowance must be made for appre-
ciable variation in characters in studies on Indarctos and Agriotherium. The
fact that known North American Indarctos M*’s appear more ‘primitive’ than
the I. punjabiensis specimen, GSI-D12, does not necessarily mean that they
must be older.
There is other evidence to support this opinion. Once again there is a
parallel between Agriotherium and Thalarctos, since the latter also has the M?
talon reduced, and it may sometimes even be absent. The study by Kurtén
(1964) has shown that there is considerable variation in Thalarctos in this
respect even within a single population. Particularly remarkable is a specimen
in which the right M? talon is reduced, while that of the left M? is completely
absent (Kurtén 1964: 17, pl. 4A). Such examples are exceptional, but presumably
if samples of Indarctos as large as Kurtén’s Thalarctos sample (n = 113) were
available, similar specimens may be found. This suggests that undue reliance
may have been placed on the value of the M? talon as a distinguishing charac-
teristic of Indarctos.
The M, of Indarctos and Agriotherium is less commonly represented than
other posterior cheek teeth, evidently because it is single-rooted and easily
90 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
separated from the mandible. It is nevertheless clear that this tooth was reduced
in length in the /ndarctos—Agriotherium lineage to a degree comparable to that
of M®. In J. vireti the Mg is markedly elongated anteroposteriorly and has a
pronounced posterior tapering (Crusafont & Kurtén 1976). The M, of J. atticus
is similar, but is less elongated, while that of Agriotherium is usually only as
long as it is broad. The latter, however, is still Jndarctos-like in having a pro-
nounced posterior tapering. The A. africanum Mg, L50981, is very like those of
the Vienna and Basel /. atticus specimens (Thenius 1959; Helbing 1932) in shape.
The reduction of Mg is another development shared by Agriotherium and
Thalarctos.
Although mention has been made of differences in proportions in certain
of the posterior cheek teeth discussed above, this matter warrants more detailed
attention, since these differences are directly related to changes in tooth mor-
phology and are as significant from a phylogenetic point of view. In addition,
metrical data have the advantage of being easily represented diagrammatically
and can thus give a visual impression of certain evolutionary changes in the
hypothetical Ursavus—Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage. Five Old World species
were selected to represent successive stages in this lineage. They are Ursavus
primaevus, I. vireti, I. arctoides, I. atticus, and A. africanum. Individual species
do not necessarily represent the stock from which the next in the series was
derived, but are simply structurally suited to such a role. The lengths and
breadths of their posterior cheek teeth are plotted in Figures 38—40.
It is clear from these figures that U. primaevus is in an isolated position,
whereas there are similarities between J. vireti and J. arctoides on the one hand,
10 SE
10 -E
p4 BREADTH / p4 LENGTH
2—/ -D 2 -D
1 -C 2 -c
2 -B 2 -B
-A 3 -A
(ee ee ee a ee ee eee ee ee ee ee SS Sd
8 10 12 14 #16 18 20 22 24 26 1214 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
M, LENGTH
=) 3
-C 3
-B
-A 5
s40 12-4416 8202222 1) 20 22 3A 28 20, S02 34, 36> GU TAUEROEAS
Fig. 38. Lengths and breadths of P* and M,. A. Ursavus primaevus. B. Indarctos vireti.
C. I. arctoides. D. I. atticus. E. Agriotherium africanum. Sample sizes, ranges and means are
indicated. Data from Crusafont & Kurtén (1976), Thenius (1959) and this report.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 91
6 -E 6 -E
mM! BREADTH mM! LENGTH
2 -D -D
3 -C -C
-B —B
4 -A 4 -A
Le en Se Eee eee ee ee eee (ee ee eS eee ee eee ee
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-E -E
=D -D
-c -c
—B -B
-A —-A
ee ee Se ES eS ee es ee ee Ee ee
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 14.16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
Fig. 39. Lengths and breadths of M' and M, of some Ursidae, (see Fig. 38 for key).
and J. atticus and A. africanum on the other. The isolated position of U. primae-
vus is not surprising since it is a contemporary of J. vireti (Crusafont & Kurtén
1976), and its phylogenetic connection with the /ndarctos—Agriotherium lineage
must be indirect. The fact that this lineage is divisible into two parts on the
basis of cheek tooth size (and other evidence) is significant. The first is comprised
of earlier, smaller and more primitive forms (i.e. J. vireti-I. arctoides), and the
second of later, larger and more advanced forms (i.e. J. atticus—A. africanum).
9 -E 9 -E
M2 BREADTH M> LENGTH
2 -D =D
3 -C -c
—B8 -B
3 =A. 3 -A
ee ee ee ee eee a SS SS eS ee ee es ee ees |
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 14.16 #18 20 22 26 26 28 30 32 34
-E -E
M, LENGTH
=D 2 -D
-B 4 -B
-A 2 -A
(aa) js ts
8 10 12 14 #16 «18 «20 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Fig. 40. Lengths and breadths of M? and M; of some Ursidae, (see Fig. 38 for key).
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
It is only in the last segment of the lineage that there are deviations from
otherwise general trends in the lineage as a whole. The most obvious of these
general trends was the increasing breadth of the posterior cheek teeth. This
was probably more or less in proportion to the overall size increase of the taxa
concerned. However, the situation in respect of the lengths of these teeth is
more complex.
Only in the case of P* was there a tendency to increase length throughout
the Ursavus—Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage. This is also a reflection of the
increasing size of successive members of the lineage. In addition, it may be
interpreted as indicating the increasing functional importance of the principal
shearing tooth in the upper dentition, with the increased lengths of P* in the
last stage of the lineage (i.e. J. atticus—A. africanum) being largely due to the
development of the parastyle. It might be expected that there would have been
a corresponding increase in the length of the lower carnassial. The fact that
there is a barely perceptible increase in the mean length of the A. africanum M,
over that of J. atticus may simply be due to the composite nature of this tooth,
the increased length of the shearing element (i.e. the trigonid) being obscured
by the reduction of the talonid.
By contrast, in the case of M? and M, the lengthening trend evident in most
of the lineage is reversed in the /. atticus—A. africanum segment. This is a mani-
festation of the reduced importance of the crushing function of the most pos-
terior cheek teeth in the last stage of the lineage.
The situation in respect of the lengths of the intermediate teeth, M! and
M,, was itself intermediate, with lengths remaining static once the J. atticus stage
was reached.
The overall impression gained from the study of the morphology and
dimensions of the teeth of successive members of the Ursavus—Indarctos—
Agriotherium lineage is that this lineage can be separated into two parts. Up to
the I. atticus stage the taxa concerned were generalized ‘omnivorous’ ursids,
but thereafter there were modifications of both tooth morphology and pro-
portions being manifested which indicate adaptation to a more carnivorous
diet. It may thus be more appropriate to think of ‘advanced Jndarctos’ as being
“primitive Agriotherium’.
Since the transition from Jndarctos to Agriotherium was gradual in the
sense that there are specimens which exhibit ‘characteristics’ of both genera,
it is far from obvious on what grounds the distinction between these genera is
to be made. Earlier attempts to find distinguishing characters are now seen to
have been inadequate. For example, lists of such characters given by Pilgrim
(1932: 42) and Tobien (1955: 14) can be misleading and should be used with
caution, if they are to be used at all. The formulation of mutually exclusive
diagnoses for these genera has become difficult, if not impossible. There would,
of course, be no problem if these diagnoses were to be based on a primitive
Indarctos, such as I. vireti, and any of the species presently identified with
Agriotherium. However, when all recorded intermediate forms are taken into
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 93
account, the diagnoses break down under a welter of qualifying statements. The
situation could only become more confused if all the Indarctos and Agriotherium
assemblages from the critical 5-8 Ma period were as large, or larger, than that
from Langebaanweg. Even if this is never the case, the Langebaanweg assem-
blage has clearly shown that agriotheriines are as variable as other ursids, and
consequently there can no longer be complacency about supposed ‘charac-
teristics’ of individual representatives of this group.
This situation is here interpreted as indicating an ancestor—descendant
relationship between Indarctos and Agriotherium beyond all reasonable doubt.
In concluding his study of the Florida Indarctos, Wolff (1978: 11) stated that
there are ‘several cranial features [which] may indicate a relatively closer
relationship between Ailuropoda and Indarctos than with other bears, although
other possibilities exist’. In the light of the preceding discussion and the fact
that the Florida Indarctos skull is even more like that of A. africanum than
Ailuropoda, the ‘other possibilities’ must certainly include Agriotherium. The
similarities between the skulls of advanced Jndarctos, particularly the Florida
specimen, and Agriotherium are so great that it is inconceivable that they are
only distantly related. Wolff’s concluding remarks refer specifically to ‘great
enlargement of the cheek teeth’, ‘expansions of the zygomatic arches and
sagittal crests’, and the ‘absence of the alisphenoid canal’ as shared characters
indicative of the ‘close relationship’ between Jndarctos and Ailuropoda. The fact
that Indarctos and Agriotherium also share them is equally significant, especially
taken in conjunction with all the other evidence cited above.
It seems superfluous at this stage to consider alternative theories on the
origin of Agriotherium, but one is mentioned here since it apparently still has
some support.
The fact that Agriotherium and the Hemicyoninae have a premasseteric
fossa on the mandible in common has contributed to the belief that they are
closely related (e.g. Frick 1926). There is also a superficial similarity between the
dentitions of Agriotherium and hemicyonines, and both are supposedly canid-
like, rather than ursine-like. This is indeed so in the case of hemicyonines, but
in terms of the arrangement, morphology and size of individual cusps, the teeth
of Agriotherium are far more like those of advanced Indarctos than any hemi-
cyonine. It could, of course, be argued that the rather generalized hemicyonines
are structurally suitable in both cranial and postcranial characters to be ancestral
to Agriotherium. This more tenuous hypothesis is considered less likely than the
alternative suggested here.
It was indicated earlier that the known temporal ranges of Indarctos and
Agriotherium are in accord with the theory that the latter was derived from the
former. In the case of the Hemicyoninae—Agriotherium alternative the situation
is much less convincing because of an apparent, or actual, gap between the
recorded histories of the taxa concerned.
In Europe Agriotherium is first recorded from the Ruscinian, whereas
hemicyonines were extinct by the end of the Vindobonian (Table 20). This
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 20
The occurrences of Hemicyoninae and Agriotherium in Europe.
LOCALITY MAMMAL AGE! | MEIN ZONE?
Ruscinian
MeL ka
Moc ee
Hemicyon sansaniensis, Wintershof- Burdigalian
Hemicyon goeriachensis | West, Sansan, to
etc.® Goriach, La Vindobonian
Grive-St-Alban,
APPROX,
Agriotherium insigne
Steinheim etc®
1Van Couvering 1972, Fahibusch 1976; * Mein 1975, Fahlbusch 1976; *Heizmann 1973.
means that there was a period of about 8 m.y. for which no possible inter-
mediate between hemicyonines and Agriotherium is known in Europe. Much the
same applies in Asia and North America. It is unlikely that this could be due
to a defective fossil record, since the period in question covers the Vallesian
and Turolian (and their equivalents), of which the faunas are moderately to
very well known. It is possible that the Hemicyoninae—Agriotherium transition
took place in Africa, where 5-13 Ma faunas are poorly known, but negative
evidence is hardly convincing support for a theory.
It is much more likely that the characters Hemicyoninae and Agriotherium
have in common are due to convergent evolution. Parallel and convergent
evolution often complicate studies of relationships, and the Ursidae are a group
where this complication definitely exists. Early in the history of the Ursidae,
the Amphicyoninae and Hemicyoninae evolved along parallel lines, while later
the same applied to the Ursinae and Tremarctinae. Agriotherium is of particular
interest in this connection, since not only is it intermediate in age between
amphicyonines/hemicyonines and ursines/tremarctines, but it has in certain
respects paralleled members of both sets of subfamilies.
The superficial similarities between Agriotherium and large amphicyonines
and hemicyonines (e.g. Amphicyon major, Dinocyon thenardi) are striking
enough to suggest that these animals were ecological vicars. On the other hand,
Agriotherium, A. major and D. thenardi (and better known hemicyonines) also
differ from one another in certain respects, which can be explained by their
having evolved at different times from different ancestors.
Amongst the Ursinae, Thalarctos has now been mentioned several times
as having evolved characters comparable to some in Agriotherium. In this
instance there is no possibility of the shared characteristics being due to a close
relationship. They are simply explained by the fact that both Agriotherium and
Thalarctos are essentially carnivorous forms which evolved from omnivorous
ancestors (Hendey 1972: 122). The relationship between Thalarctos and the
Ursus arctos group has been well documented (Thenius 1953; Kurtén 1964),
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 95
and is here regarded as a parallel of the relationship between advanced Indarctos
and Agriotherium. A more detailed search for parallelisms between these two
sets of taxa may well be worth while. The obvious differences between Agrio-
therium and Thalarctos are not unexpected, since their ancestral forms are
markedly different from one another. In addition, Thalarctos has as yet had a
relatively brief history compared with that of Agriotherium. Given time it would
no doubt become increasingly distinct from U. arctos, and perhaps become
even more Agriotherium-like.
Agriotherium and advanced Indarctos are also paralleled in some respects
by tremarctines, especially the large extinct species. For example, several
references have been made above to similarities between the skull and skeleton
of A. africanum and Arctodus simus. Merriam & Stock (1925: 5) found that
there are certain characters ‘in which Tremarctos and [Arctodus] show distinctly
closer affinity to [Agriotherium] and its allies of the Pliocene than is seen in
Pleistocene and Recent bears of the genus Ursus’. Others have thought this
significant. For example, Erdbrink (1953) suggested that Tremarctos was
closely related to the ursines, while the larger tremarctines were derived from
advanced Jndarctos. Kurtén (1966: 7) disagreed, and concluded that although
the ‘earlier history of Arctodus is poorly documented . . . there can be little
doubt that it is a tremarctine, and not a member of the Agriotheriinae’.
The Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage was but one of several evolutionary
developments amongst the Ursidae during the latter part of their history. As
indicated above, it was a development which paralleled that undergone earlier
by large amphicyonines and hemicyonines, but it, too, was ultimately unsuc-
cessful and by the end of the Tertiary Agriotherium was on the verge of extinc-
tion, if not already extinct. It had no descendants.
Other later ursid lineages, however, were more successful. This applies
particularly in the case of the one which gave rise to the Ursinae, which under-
went a spectacular radiation beginning in the Pliocene. As with Indarctos—
Agriotherium, the Ursinae also stemmed from Ursavus, and Thenius (1977 and
earlier papers) has suggested U. ehrenbergi as the likely ancestral form.
The Tremarctinae were less successful than the Ursinae, having been con-
fined to the Americas, and eventually being supplanted in North America by
the Ursinae (Kurtén 1966, 1967). Their origins were recently considered by
Thenius (1976), who suggested that they, too, stemmed from an Ursavus.
Unfortunately, little is known of early tremarctines, but no doubt more will
yet be learnt of the origins and early history of this group.
The origin of the giant panda, Ailuropoda melanoleuca, has long been a
controversial issue. The earlier views that Ailuropoda is an ursid and not a
procyonid, and that it had an agriotheriine ancestor (Hendey 1972), are main-
tained here, although it now appears that it may have stemmed from Ursavus
and not /ndarctos as previously suggested.
As indicated earlier, the skulls of Ailuropoda and advanced Indarctos have
many characters in common which suggest that they are more closely related
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
to one another than to other bears. However, the latter had already undergone
specializations in the direction of Agriotherium which render it structurally
unsuitable as a stem form for Ailuropoda. For example, advanced Jndarctos
has reduced anterior premolars, while those of Ai/uropoda are unusually large
for an ursid. This objection does not apply in the case of earlier, unspecialized
Indarctos (see Hendey 1972, table 1), but since such species have much in
common with Ursavus, the latter must also be taken into account when con-
sidering the origin of Ailuropoda.
One of the less well-known species of Ursavus is U. depereti of the European
Turolian, which is in some respects atypical of the genus (see Heizmann 1973).
This applies particularly to the P*, and it is the unusual characteristics of this
tooth which suggest that U. depereti may have a direct phylogenetic connection
with Ailuropoda.
Casts of upper teeth of U. depereti from Soblay in France were recently
examined in the Naturhistorisches Museum, Basel. The originals are in Lyon
and were described by Viret (1949) and Viret & Mazenot (1949). Two P?’s are
represented and they are remarkable for two reasons. Firstly, unlike the P*’s
in other Ursavus species, the Soblay specimens have large parastyles. This cusp
is proportionately even larger than those in advanced Indarctos and in Agrio-
therium, in which the parastyles are overshadowed by large and high-crowned
paracones. The large parastyle and relatively low-crowned paracone of U.
depereti are reminiscent of the situation in Ailuropoda, and differ from that in
all other ursids. Secondly, the U. depereti P* has an enlarged, double-cusped
protocone lobe, which differs from that in Indarctos and Agriotherium in being
more anteroposteriorly elongated and regular in occlusal outline. In addition,
in the Soblay specimen, AA52 (Viret & Mazenot 1949, pl. 1 (fig. 6)), both cusps
are ridge-like rather than pointed and are of more or less equal size. In all these
respects the U. depereti P* protocone lobe is Ailuropoda-like, and once again
it differs from that in all other ursids.
The M? and M? of U. depereti are also basically similar in morphology to
their counterparts in Ailuropoda. However, the upper molars are also similar
to those of other Ursavus species and Jndarctos, and are thus less significant
in indicating a relationship with Ailuropoda. A possibly important charac-
teristic of the M? figured by Viret & Mazenot (1949, pl. 1 (fig. 4)) is the rugose
enamel of the occlusal surface, which could foreshadow the ‘richly tuberculate’
condition of the Ailuropoda M? (Davis 1964: 127).
The M, and M, of U. depereti also have the basic morphology charac-
teristic of other Ursavus and Indarctos, although the M, is distinct, and more
Ailuropoda-like, in having the metaconid more anteriorly situated (Schlosser
1902, pl. 2 (figs 20, 23)).
Slender though the evidence may be, U. depereti appears to be structurally
better suited than any other recorded fossil ursid to fill the role of ancestor to
Ailuropoda. In addition, it is also temporarily and geographically well suited to
this role since it is from the continent on which the early evolution of living
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 97
bears was centred and it dates from a period when the radiation of later bears
was just beginning. The absence of any intermediate forms may simply be due
to the relatively poor Pliocene record in Asia, the continent to which Ailuropoda
melanoleuca is confined (Chorn & Hoffmann 1978). Relevant fossils of Plio-
cene age, as well as better knowledge of U. depereti, are required to test this
theory of Ailuropoda origins.
While the ultimate origins of both Ailuropoda and the Indarctos—Agrio-
therium lineage are uncertain, it is evident that these genera are more closely
related to one another than to the Ursinae and Tremarctinae.
The radiation of the Ursidae, like that of some other mammalian families,
was thus characterized by repetitious evolutionary developments, and the
correct identification of relationships requires careful study of the fossil record.
Ignorance of the details of this record may well lead to misinterpretation
of the significance of similar, but independently evolved characteristics in
ursid taxa. Kurtén (1967: 5) has found, for example, the analogy between
European Miocene Jndarctos and North American Pleistocene Arctodus to be
‘truly astonishing and an example of the déja vu experiences so familiar to the
student of fossil bears’.
The relationships suggested here are indicated in Figure 41. The named
late Tertiary species are all from Europe and consequently the European sub-
divisions of this period are used.
URSINI TREMARCTINI AILUROPODINI
HOLOCENE & (Ursus, Thalarctos, Euarctos, Helarctos.
‘
PLEISTOCENE Melursus)
‘Ursavus’ Indarctos
x |
depereti atticus
TUROLIAN Nas
Ursavus sp. Ursavus
(Soblay) ehrenbergi ,
’ A
| as
A
URSAVINAE Ursavus is Indarctos Indarctos
primaevus +: anthracitis arctoides
1
Ursavus 4, Indarctos
brevirhinus Z soras- ss ViretL:
ee areas
VINDOBONIAN ek
Ursavus
brevirhinus
HEMICYONINAE eee
elmensis
Foueocene | AMPHICYONINAE oN
Cephalogale
Fig. 41. Suggested relationships of some Ursidae.
(Plionarctos. Arctodus, (Ailuropoda)
Tremarctos)
Agriotherium
insigne
AGRIOTHERIINAE
PLIOCENE
MIOCENE
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
NOMENCLATURE
The suprageneric classification of the Ursidae adopted here (Table 21) is a
modification of an arrangement suggested earlier (Hendey 1972: 119), and is
based on the phylogenetic relationships indicated in Figure 41.
TABLE 21
A classification of the Ursidae.
SUBFAMILY TRIBE GENERA, SPECIES
Amphicyoninae . : ; Not subdivided t Amphicyon, + Cynelos and tothers
Hemicyoninae . ; 4 : Not subdivided {| Hemicyon, | Dinocyon and t others
Ursavinae Not subdivided t Ursavus
: a Agriotheriini {Indarctos, + Agriotherium
Agriotheriinae . . . . : — - - —
Ailuropodini t‘Ursavus’ depereti, Ailuropoda
Weise Tremarctini {Plionarctos, + Arctodus, Tremarctos
Ursini Ursus, Thalarctos, Euarctos,
Helarctos, Melursus
+ = extinct
In preceding sections of this report the generally accepted practice of
allowing the ursines and tremarctines subfamilial status has been followed.
With this as a precedent, it follows that the agriotheriines and Ailuropoda each
warrant similar status. Some of those who have included Ailuropoda in the
Ursidae have, indeed, placed it in a separate subfamily (e.g. Pilgrim 1932).
Similarly, the agriotheriines have been widely recognized as a valid subfamily
(e.g. Kurtén 1966).
A disadvantage with this arrangement is that it does not indicate the
apparently close relationships between the ursines and tremarctines on the
one hand (Kurtén 1966, 1967; Thenius 1976), and the agriotheriines and
Ailuropoda on the other (Hendey 1972; Wolff 1978; this report). This problem
is overcome by reducing the status of the four subfamilies to tribes, and then
separating them into two subfamilies, namely, the Agriotheriinae (Agrio-
theriini and Ailuropodini) and the Ursinae (Ursini and Tremarctini). Except
for the position of the Tremarctini, this was the arrangement suggested earlier
(Hendey 1972), and for which there has been some support (e.g. Chorn &
Hoffmann 1978).
There is also a difference now in the taxa constituting the Agriotheriinae.
Firstly, in the classification suggested here, Ursavus depereti is included in
the Ailuropodini, since it is regarded as the likely ancestor of Ailuropoda. This
means that it can no longer be referred to Ursavus, but must either be given a
new generic name, or be referred to Ailuropoda itself. The latter course is
favoured here, but in view of the uncertainties still surrounding this species
neither of these alternatives is followed, and the doubtful generic identity of
‘Ursavus’ depereti is indicated by quotation marks.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 99
Secondly, if the Ursini, Tremarctini and Ailuropodini did, indeed, stem
from the Ursavus group and are valid tribes, then the Indarctos—Agriotherium
group of the Agriotheriini must be given the same status. This means that
Ursavus, which is generally regarded as an agriotheriine (e.g. Kurtén 1966;
Hendey 1972), has to be excluded from the tribe.
The various species of Ursavus, excluding ‘Ursavus’ depereti, are accordingly
placed in a new subfamily, the Ursavinae. Since this subfamily is not established
on the same criteria as the others, it constitutes an unsatisfactory element in
the classification as a whole. When their relationships are better understood,
it may be possible to assign the species of Ursavus to other tribes, just as ‘Ursavus’
depereti has been assigned to the Ailuropodini. The need for this additional
subfamily will then fall away.
The classification of more primitive ursids, or ursid-like carnivores, namely,
the hemicyonines and amphicyonines, was not investigated since they are
largely irrelevant to the present study. They are mentioned here for the sake of
completeness, but the conclusions regarding their status are tentative.
The Hemicyoninae are generally regarded as an early off-shoot of primitive
ursid stock (probably Cephalogale—see Erdbrink 1953, fig. 61; Hendey 1972,
fig. 1), and they are here included in the Ursidae.
The connection between the Amphicyoninae and later ursids is more
remote, and the classification of this group is more controversial. They have
been variously classified as a separate family (e.g. Hunt 1972), a subfamily of
the Canidae (e.g. Kuss 1965), and as an ursid subfamily (e.g. Ginsburg 1977).
The latter course is followed here.
The nomenclature of the species constituting the Agriotheriini is a far
more problematical matter than the suprageneric classification of the Ursidae.
The conclusion that Agriotherium is directly descended from Jndarctos
with certain specimens exhibiting a combination of ‘characteristics’ of both
genera, raises the possibility that they are congeneric, with Agriotherium the
senior synonym. This situation had been foreseen even before Indarctos became
well established in the literature (Pilgrim 1914; Merriam ef al. 1916). It can be
considered in relation to a similar situation involving the brown and polar bears.
Ewer (1973) and Van Valen (1978) have recently discussed the relative
merits of opposing opinions on the generic identity of the polar bear. According
to one widely held opinion the polar bear and brown bear are congeneric
(i.e. both belong to the genus Ursus), while the opposing view is that the polar
bear represents a separate genus (i.e. Thalarctos). Ewer and Van Valen favoured
the latter alternative, a view which is supported here. A problem with this
arrangement is that by one widely accepted criterion Thalarctos does not merit
separate generic status. Thalarctos maritimus and Ursus arctos are known to
produce fertile hybrids (see Van Gelder 1977). Van Valen (1978: 292) dismissed
this objection in the grounds that ‘lack of intersterility per se’ is of ‘low evolu-
tionary importance’ a fact for which Vrba (1979) has found supporting evidence
amongst the Bovidae.
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
It is clear from their habitats and habits that Thalarctos and U. arctos are
set on distinct evolutionary paths, and that given time they may well warrant
generic separation by any standards. It is fortuitous that at present their diver-
gence is not far advanced, although there is no doubt that this divergence does,
in fact, exist. There will always be a problem in classifying species, both living
and extinct, which are on separate lineages, but which are still close to a common
ancestor. In instances where divergence is certain, and in the case of the brown
and polar bears it is, then classification by ‘clade’ rather than ‘grade’ is
preferable.
As indicated earlier, Thalarctos and Agriotherium are similar in the sense
that both are essentially carnivorous forms derived from omnivorous ancestors.
There is an apparent difference, however, in the evolutionary histories of these
two genera. In the case of Thalarctos there was a divergence from the U. arctos
group after which two lineages evolved independently, one with essentially
carnivorous elements, and the other continuing with essentially omnivorous
ones. In the case of Indarctos—Agriotherium it has been suggested above that
the essentially omnivorous ancestor gradually adapted to give rise to the more
carnivorous descendant forms and did not itself continue to exist as a separate
entity. In other words, successive members of what may be regarded as a single
lineage adapted their habits in response to a gradually changing environment
(see p. 70).
This may, of course, be a misinterpretation of the fossil record and there
may have been a dichotomy during the history of Indarctos—Agriotherium
similar to that of U. arctos-Thalarctos. For example, Crusafont & Kurtén (1976)
may be correct in their interpretation of the early history of Indarctos, and
I vireti may have given rise to both I. arctoides and the more Agriotherium-like
I. atticus. According to this interpretation J. vireti-I. arctoides wouid be an
equivalent of the U. arctos lineage, while J. atticus was the counterpart of
Thalarctos. The nomenclatural implication is that J. atticus and other later
Indarctos should be referred instead to Agriotherium, leaving only J. vireti,
I. arctoides and the aberrant J. anthracitis as representatives of Indarctos. This
arrangement is supported by the earlier suggestion that those species referred
to throughout this report as ‘advanced Indarctos’, could as well be regarded as
‘primitive Agriotherium’. A minor difficulty which arises is that Indarctos would
have to be replaced by another name, because the genotype (J. salmontanus)
would then be identified as an Agriotherium.
It could also be argued that since J. vireti is readily distinguishable from
contemporary Ursavus, the evolutionary changes which were to culminate in
Agriotherium were already being manifested early in the Vallesian. Thus J. vireti
relative to contemporary Ursavus was the counterpart of the present-day
situation involving Thalarctos and U. arctos. According to this interpretation
all species presently identified with Jndarctos should be referred instead to
Agriotherium.
Both the above arrangements are less arbitrary than the existing one in
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 101
which it is only the most advanced agriotheriines which are referred to Agrio-
therium. This is unsatisfactory because it does not reflect the realities of the
situation. Nevertheless, no changes in this arrangement are proposed here.
Undescribed Jndarctos and Agriotherium material from Asia and North America
is available, and a decision regarding the status of these genera is best left until
it, too, can be taken into account.
The same applies in the case of nomenclature at the species level, although
some changes which reflect opinions on relationships are proposed here.
An appropriate starting point is with the European species, since they are
amongst the best known and they represent the primary group from which
agriotheriines elsewhere evolved. Four late Miocene species are recognized as
valid. They are J. vireti, I. arctoides, I. atticus and I. anthracitis. I. atticus was
apparently the first species to spread into Asia. J. maraghanus (De Mecquenem
1925) and J. lagrelii (Zdansky 1924) were apparently broadly contemporaneous
with J. atticus and are here regarded as junior synonyms of this species.
The situation in respect of Siwaliks species is more problematical. The
identifications of Pilgrim (1932), although regarded as unsatisfactory in some
respects, are accepted here. Various possibilities will have to be considered in a
revision of the Siwaliks material. For example, J. punjabiensis and I. salmontanus
may represent a single species which is conspecific with J. atticus. Alternatively
this species, or perhaps only J. punjabiensis, may be more advanced. The possi-
bility that advanced Siwaliks Indarctos is conspecific with A. palaeindicum will
also have to be considered. A. sivalense will be mentioned below.
Advanced Jndarctos is also represented in Africa (Sahabi—see p. 73), and
in North America, where material has been identified as J. oregonensis (e.g.
Dalquest 1969), J. nevadensis (MacDonald 1959), or not identified as to species
(e.g. Wolff 1978). There is no reason to believe that recorded North American
Indarctos represents more than one species. Whether it should be identified as
I. oregonensis, or referred to one of the Old World species, is not certain. The
North American species was an immigrant from the Old World during the
Hemphillian (Repenning 1967), and must, therefore, be closely related to a
contemporary Asian species. It is here regarded as definitely distinct from
I. atticus, but if I. punjabiensis is a valid species, it might be conspecific with,
and the senior synonym of J. oregonensis.
Largely because of the uncertainties surrounding the Siwaliks species,
I. oregonensis is here retained as a distinct species. In addition, the possibility
was mentioned earlier that in certain respects North American /ndarctos evolved
independently of, and at a more rapid rate than its counterparts in Europe and
Africa (see p. 82). If this were a development peculiar to North America,
rather than both Asia and North America, then it would be another reason for
recognizing [. oregonensis as a distinct species.
The situation in respect of recorded species of Agriotherium is complex,
although the final solution with these species may be very simple. This solution,
which is not advocated yet, is for all species of Agriotherium to be regarded as
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
junior synonyms of A. sivalense. Judged on the basis of the variation observed
in the Langebaanweg Agriotherium, there may be no size or morphological
grounds for recognizing more than one species of Agriotherium, However, it
was decided to draw at least some distinctions on a geographical basis.
European A. insigne, which is here taken to include A. intermedium (Stach
1957), is tentatively regarded as valid. It was suggested earlier that African
Agriotherium was an offshoot from the primary European lineage, and although
A. africanum is almost indistinguishable from A. insigne, they are not regarded
as conspecific, since the former is likely to be a descendant of north African
Indarctos and was thus probably only indirectly related to European A. insigne.
There are some distinctive features in the dentitions of recorded A. insigne
and A. africanum specimens which suggest that their phylogenetic connection
may, indeed, have been indirect. For example, the European A. insigne speci-
men, NMB-MP549, has a double-rooted P®, a condition unknown in the
Langebaanweg sample. On the other hand, no European specimen is known
which has an ‘intermediate cusp’ on the P* protocone lobe or a vestigial M,
metaconid, while none is known to lack the anterolingual cusp of M,. The
possibility that European and African Agriotherium evolved independently will
be discussed again below.
The situation in respect of Agriotherium in Asia and North America is
similar to that with the Indarctos of these continents. A. sivalense is definitely
a valid species, while A. palaeindicum is only tentatively regarded as such.
Chinese Agriotherium is probably referable to A. sivalense. There is almost
certainly only one species of Agriotherium represented in North America, and
this may also be referable to A. sivalense. However, the North American species
name which has priority, A. schneideri (Sellards 1916), is provisionally retained.
It has generally been assumed that North American Agriotherium, like
Indarctos, was an immigrant from Asia (e.g. Repenning 1967). This is clearly
a simple and logical interpretation of a situation where one genus supersedes
another closely related one on a continent known to have received immigrants
during the period in question. However, this is not the only interpretation
possible. The fact that North American Jndarctos includes some of the most
Agriotherium-like specimens known suggests that the Indarctos—Agriotherium
transition may have taken place in North America. If this were so then either
the subsequent dispersal of Agriotherium started in North America, or Agrio-
therium evolved independently from advanced Indarctos in North America as
well as in Europe and Africa.
The former alternative is unlikely in view of what is known of the Old
World history of agriotheriines, whereas the independent evolution theory is a
distinct possibility. This alternative appears to be implausible only in that it
involves the polyphyletic origin of one genus as it is presently conceived. If, as
indicated earlier, ‘advanced Jndarctos’ is interpreted instead as ‘primitive
Agriotherium’, it would mean that the Indarctos—Agriotherium transition took
place once only (probably in Europe), and that once this evolutionary course
103
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
sisuauobaJo sojosepu
uapleuyos wnueyjouby
VOIHAWV HLYON
‘goeds pu SUII} UI TUIMIOYJONIZY JO JUOWOSURIIL SAIIEIUN} YW “Zp “SIT
eaceetes hae ee sv
snioesyjue sojosepu|
| sapiojose sojosepu]
‘ |
ears Snowe sojosepuy
sisuaigelund sojo1epuy
| é
wnoipulaejed wnvayjouby
‘ds sojosepul;
ANSOOIW ALV1
asuajeais wnueyjouby aubisul wnuayjouby
visvana
wnueowe wnueyjouby
VOldsv
ANSOONMd
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
had been set the development of Agriotherium (senso stricto) could take place
irrespective of the geographical location of the populations concerned.
Thus European A. insigne may have been descended from ‘J.’ atticus,
A. africanum from the north African Jndarctos-like agriotheriine, A. sivalense
from the ‘J.’ punjabiensis/A. palaeindicum complex in Asia, while in North
America ‘J.’ oregonensis was ancestral to A. schneideri. It is nevertheless clear
that there was a close connection between advanced agriotheriines in Europe
and Africa on the one hand, and in Asia and North America on the other, and
the above scenario may therefore be unrealistic. Instead A. insigne and A. afri-
canum may share a common ancestor and be conspecific, while the same may
apply to A. sivalense and A. schneideri. These alternatives are indicated in
Figure 42. The possibility that all Agriotherium (senso stricto) evolved from a
single source is not favoured here, but it cannot yet be dismissed.
The nomenclature of this genus will ultimately have to be established by
further testing of the hypotheses presented here, and perhaps by reference to
conclusions reached in respect of other taxa with similar wide distributions
and generally uniform characteristics. Amongst the latter are the living brown
and black bears, as well as a wide variety of other carnivores, notably canids
and felids.
SUMMARY
Available material of Agriotherium africanum from the latest Miocene/early
Pliocene Varswater Formation at Langebaanweg is described. This species
was found to be as variable as other bears of comparable size, this being in part
due to marked sexual dimorphism.
The depositional environment and likely habitat and habits of the Lange-
baanweg Agriotherium are discussed. It is suggested that it was a large wood-
land carnivore, remains of which were transported to their points of discovery
by a river which then met the sea in the vicinity of Langebaanweg. The trans-
porting agent, and hyaenas, rodents, and fires contributed to the post-mortem
damage exhibited by specimens.
Agriotherium was evidently descended from late Miocene Jndarctos, the
more significant evidence in support of this hypothesis being as follows:
1. There was an increase of size with time in the /ndarctos—Agriotherium
lineage, and advanced Indarctos may be little or no different’in size to
Agriotherium.
2. The skull characters of advanced Jndarctos (e.g. I. atticus from Samos;
Indarctos from Florida) are shared by Agriotherium (e.g. the Langebaanweg
specimen L45062). Observable differences reflect further development of trends
already evident in the Indarctos lineage. Significant shared characteristics are a
relatively short and broad snout, with the posterior palatine incisure in line
with the M? metacones, large zygomata and sagittal crest, and similar basi-
cranial region, including absence of the alisphenoid canal.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 105
3. There is little or no difference in the dentitions of advanced Indarctos
and Agriotherium. For example, the incisors, canines, P,’s, M?’s, M,’s and M,’s
may be morphologically indistinguishable. Differences that do exist reflect
trends already evident in the Jndarctos lineage. For example:
(i) There was a progressive reduction in the size and number of anterior
premolars in the Indarctos—Agriotherium lineage, with their principal cusps
becoming progressively lower crowned and indistinct. However, Agrio-
therium sometimes has Indarctos-like upper premolars (e.g. A. insigne,
NMB-MP549), while Indarctos may have Agriotherium-like lower anterior
premolars (e.g. J. atticus, NNUW-Samos 1912, 29).
(ii) The shearing elements of the carnassials in the Indarctos—Agriotherium
lineage are progressively developed, as are the buccal cusps of M! and M3,
which also have a shearing function. There is a corresponding reduction
in the crushing elements of the posterior cheek teeth. For example, while
the M2? of Indarctos is distinguished from that of Agriotherium by the
presence of a talon, this feature is progressively reduced in time. In advanced
Indarctos it may be small (e.g. I. punjabiensis, GSI-D12), while vestiges of
a talon may be present in Agriotherium (e.g. the Langebaanweg specimen
L47698).
(iti) As a general rule the P* of Agriotherium is distinguished from that of
Indarctos by the presence of a parastyle, but this cusp may be present in
advanced Indarctos (e.g. Samos I. atticus; most North American specimens).
4. A double-cusped P* protocone lobe is characteristic of European
Indarctos, and is also found in some European and African Agriotherium
specimens (e.g. A. insigne, NMB-MP549; Langebaanweg L2045 and others),
although the P* antero-internal cusp is sometimes absent (e.g. A. insigne,
Gervais (1859) specimen; Langebaanweg, L41404). The fact that this cusp is
sometimes absent in A. insigne, and that in those specimens postdating L2045
it is reduced or absent, indicates that there was a tendency in European—African
Agriotherium to lose the antero-internal cusp. A similar tendency is evident in
advanced Asian and North American Indarctos (e.g. I. punjabiensis, GSI-D6;
Florida Jndarctos), while the antero-internal cusp is always absent in the
Agriotherium from these continents. This common tendency in Jndarctos and
Agriotherium indicates a close relationship, while the examples cited suggest
that the European/African and Asian/North American Indarctos—Agriotherium
lineages evolved independently and at different rates later in their history.
The primary /ndarctos—Agriotherium lineage was European and comprised
I. vireti, I. arctoides, I. atticus and A. insigne, with I. anthracitis as an aberrant,
probably island-dwelling offshoot. Indarctos emigrated to Africa, probably late
in the Miocene, and an Agriotherium (A. africanum) very similar to the European
A. insigne was evolved on this continent. Advanced Indarctos also migrated
eastwards and the Asian/North American lineage is comprised of species of
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Indarctos and Agriotherium postdating J. atticus. Pending further studies, most
existing species names of these genera are retained.
It is suggested that either all /ndarctos, or all later Indarctos (I. atticus
and younger species) should be referred instead to Agriotherium, although the
status quo is maintained for the present.
A modified suprageneric classification of later Ursidae is proposed. The
species of Ursavus are included in a new subfamily, the Ursavinae. The Agrio-
theriinae are divided into two tribes, namely, Agriotheriini (Indarctos—Agrio-
therium) and the Ailuropodini (‘Ursavus’ depereti—Ailuropoda melanoleuca).
The Ursinae and Tremarctinae are reduced to the status of tribes within a
reconstituted subfamily Ursinae.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am greatly indebted to the many persons who assisted directly and
indirectly in the study of the Langebaanweg Agriotherium. They include
Drs G. de Beaumont (Geneva), B. Engesser (Basel), A. W. Gentry (London),
L. Ginsburg (Paris), J. Jewell (London), C. A. Repenning (Menlo Park, Cali-
fornia) and E. Thenius (Vienna) who provided access to, and/or casts of,
specimens in their care. Drs A. J. Tankard (Knoxville, Tennessee) and R. H.
Tedford (New York) provided information on geological and palaeontological
matters respectively. Almost all the photographs of specimens were made by
Miss J. Nolte, while Mr A. Byron printed Figures 27 and 32. Miss L. Scott
prepared Figure 34, Mrs P. Eedes typed the manuscript, and the South African
Air Force provided the aerial photograph for Figure 26. Drs R. G. Klein
(Chicago) and B. Kurtén (Helsinki) reviewed early drafts of the manuscript.
The Langebaanweg Research Project is supported by Chemfos Ltd, the
South African Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, and the Wenner—
Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research (Grant no. 2752-1834), and
the assistance of these organizations is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
BERGGREN, W. A. & VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1974. The Late Neogene. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Boaz, N. T., GAziry, A. W. & EL-ARNAUTI, A. 1979. New fossil finds from the Libyan Upper
Neogene Site of Sahabi. Nature, Lond. 280: 137-139.
BuTzer, K. W. 1971. Environment and archaeology. Chicago: Aldine.
Cuorn, J. & HOFFMANN, R. S. 1978. Ailuropoda melanoleuca, Mammalian Species 110: 1-6.
CoETZEE, J. A. 1978. Late Cainozoic palaeoenvironments of southern Africa. In: VAN ZINDEREN
BAKKER, E. M. ed. Antarctic glacial history and world palaeoenvironments: 115-127.
Rotterdam: Balkema.
CRUSAFONT, M. & KurTEN, B. 1976. Bears and bear-dogs from the Vallesian of the Vallés-
Penedés Basin, Spain. Acta. zool. fenn. 144: 1-29.
Cuvier, C. 1822. Recherches sur les ossemens fossiles. Paris: E. D’Ocagne.
CypertT, E. 1961. The effects of fires in the Okefenokee Swamp in 1954 and 1955. Am. Midl.
Naturalist 66: 485-503.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 107
DA Quest, W. W. 1969. Pliocene carnivores of the Coffee Ranch. Bull. Texas Mem. Mus. 15:
1-43.
Davis, D. D. 1955. Masticatory apparatus in the spectacled bear Tremarctos ornatus. Fieldiana,
Zool. 37: 25-46.
Davis, D. D. 1964. The giant panda. Fieldiana, Zool. Mem. 3: 1-339.
De MECQUENEM, R. 1925. Contribution a l’étude des fossiles de Maragha. Ann. Paléont. 13/14:
135-160, 1-36.
DINGLE, R. V., Lorp, A. R. & HENDEY, Q. B. 1979. New sections in the Varswater Formation
(Neogene) of Langebaan Road, south-western Cape. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78: 81-92.
ERDBRINK, D. P. 1953. A review of fossil and Recent bears of the Old World. Deventer: Jan
de Lange.
Ewer, R. F., 1973. The carnivores. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson.
FAHLBUSCH, V. 1976. Report on the International Symposium on mammalian stratigraphy of
the European Tertiary. Newsl. Stratigr. 5: 160-167.
FALCONER, H. & CAUTLEY, T. P. 1836. On Ursus sivalensis, a new fossil bear from the Sewalik
Hills. As. Res. 19: 193-200.
ForstEn, A. 1978. Hipparion and possible Iberian—North African Neogene connections.
Ann. zool. fenn. 15: 294-297.
Frick, C. 1926. The Hemicyoninae and an American Tertiary bear. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist.
54: 1-119.
Gentry, A. W. 1980. Fossil Bovidae (Mammalia) from Langebaanweg, South Africa. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 79. (In press.)
GerVAIS, P. 1859. Zoologie et Paléontologie francaises. Paris: A. Bertrand.
GinsBurG, L. 1961. Plantigradie et digitigradie chez les Carnivores fissipédes. Mammalia 25:
1-21.
GinspurG, L. 1977. Cynelos lemanensis (Pomel), carnivore ursidé de l’Aquitanien d’Europe.
Ann. Paléont. (Vertébrés) 63: 57-104.
Grecory, W. K. 1936. On the phylogenetic relationships of the giant panda (Ailuropoda) to
other arctoid Carnivora. Am. Mus. Novit. 878: 1-29.
Guturig, R. D. 1972. Re-creating a vanishing world. National Geographic 141: 294-301.
HEIZMANN, E. P. J. 1973. Die Carnivoren des Steinheimer Beckens. B. Ursidae, Felidae,
Viverridae sowie Erganzungen und Nachtrage zu den Mustelidae. Palaeontogr. Suppl.
8 (GB): 1-95.
HELBING, H. 1932. Ober einen Jndarctos-schadel aus dem Pontien der Insel Samos. Abh.
schweiz. palaeont. Ges. 52: 1-18.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1970. A review of the geology and palaeontology of the Plio/Pleistocene
deposits at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 75-117.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1972. A Pliocene ursid from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 115-132.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1973. Fossil occurrences at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Nature, Lond. 244:
13-14.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1977. Fossil bear from South Africa. S. Afr. J. Sci. 73: 112-116.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978. Late Tertiary Mustelidae (Mammalia, Carnivora) from Langebaanweg,
South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 329-357.
Hoover, D. A. 1972. A late Pliocene rhinoceros from Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 59: 151-191.
Hunt, R. M. 1972. Miocene amphicyonids (Mammalia, Carnivora) from the Agate Springs
Quarries, Sioux County, Nebraska. Am. Mus. Novit. 2506: 1-39.
Hunt, R. M. 1977. Basicranial anatomy of Cynelos Jourdan (Mammalia: Carnivora), an
Aquitanian amphicyonid from the Allier Basin, France. J. Palaeont. 51: 826-843.
KENNETT, J. P., Houtz, R. E., ANDREWS, P. B., EDWARDS, A. R., GosTIN, V. A., HANos, M.,
HAmpToNn, M.., JENINS, D. G., MARGOLIS, S. V., OVENSHINE, A. J., & PERCH-NIELSEN, K.
1975. Cenozoic paleo-oceanography in the southwest Pacific Ocean, Antarctic glaciation,
and development of the Circum-Antarctic Current. In: KENNETT, J. P. et al. eds. Initial
reports of the DSDP 29: 1155-1169.
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Kretzot, M. 1942. Zwei neue Agriotheriiden aus dem ungarischen Pannon. Fold. Kézlény 72:
350-353.
KurTEN, B. 1952. The Chinese Hipparion fauna. Commentat. biol. 13: 1-82.
KurtTEn, B. 1955. Sex dimorphism and size trends in the cave bear, Ursus spelaeus Rosenmiiller
and Heinroth. Acta zool. fenn. 90: 1-48.
KurtTEN, B. 1964. The evolution of the polar bear, Ursus maritimus Phipps. Acta zool. fenn.
108: 1-30.
KurTEN, B. 1966. Pleistocene bears of North America. 1. Genus Tremarctos, spectacled bears.
Acta zool. fenn. 115: 1-120.
KurTEN, B. 1967. Pleistocene bears of North America. 2. Genus Arctodus, short-faced bears.
Acta zool. fenn. 117: 1-60.
KurtEN, B. 1968. Pleistocene mammals of Europe. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson.
KourtEn, B. 1971. The Age of Mammals. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson.
Kuss, S. E. 1965. Revision der europaischen Amphicyoninae (Canidae, Carnivora, Mamm.)
ausschlieflich der voroberstampischen Formen. Sitz. heidelb. Akad. Wiss. 1965 (1): 1-168.
LYDEKKER, R. 1884. Indian Tertiary and post-Tertiary Vertebrata. Siwalik and Narbada
Carnivora. Palaeont. indica (10) 2: 178-354. é
MacDOonaL_Lb, J. R. 1959. The Middle Pliocene mammalian fauna from Smiths Valley, Nevada.
J. Palaeont. 33: 872-887.
MATTHEW, W. D. 1929. Critical observations upon Siwalik mammals. Bull. Am. Mus. nat.
Hist. 56: 437-560.
Mein, P. 1975. Proposition de biozonation du Neogene Mediterraneen a partir des mammi-
féres, Trab. Neogeno-Cuaternario Madrid 4: 112-113.
MERRIAM, J. C., Stock, C. & Moopy, C. L. 1916. An American Pliocene bear. Univ. Calif.
Publ. Bull. Dept. Geol. 10: 87-109.
MERRIAM, J. C., Stock, C. & Moopy, C. L. 1925. The Pliocene Rattlesnake Formation and
fauna of Eastern Oregon, with notes on the geology of the Rattlesnake and Mascall
Deposits. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Publ. 347: 45-92.
MerRIAM, J. C. & Stock, C. 1925. A hyaenarctid bear from the later Tertiary of the John Day
Basin of Oregon. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Publ. 347: 41-44.
Owen, R. 1845. Odontography. London: Bailliere.
PILBEAM, D., BARRY, J., MEYER, G. E:, IBRAHIM SHAH, S. M., PICKFORD, M. H. L., BisHop,
W. W., THOMAS, H., & JAcoss, L. L. 1977. Geology and palaeontology of Neogene strata
of Pakistan. Nature, Lond. 270: 684-689.
Pitcrim, G. E. 1913. The correlation of the Siwaliks with mammal horizons of Europe.
Rec. geol. Surv. India. 43: 264-326.
Pitcrim, G. E. 1914. Further description of Indarctos salmontanus Pilgrim, a new genus of
bear from the Middle Siwaliks, with some notes on the fossil Indian Ursidae. Rec. geol.
Surv. India 44: 225-233.
PitGrim, G. E. 1931. Catalogue of the Pontian Carnivora of Europe. London: British Museum
(Natural History).
PILGRIM, G. E. 1932. The fossil Carnivora of India. Palaeont. indica (n.s.) 18: 1-232.
REPENNING, C. A. 1967. Palaearctic-Nearctic mammalian dispersal in the Late Cenozoic. In:
Hopkins, D. M. ed. The Bering Land Bridge: 288-311. Stanford: University Press.
ScHLosseR, M. 1899. Ueber die Baren und barenahnlichen Formen des europaischen Tertiars.
Palaeontogr. 46: 95-146.
ScHLOossER, M. 1902. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Séugetiere aus den siiddeutschen Bohnerzen.
Geol. paldont. Abh. 9: 117-258.
SELLARDS, E. H. 1916. Fossil vertebrates from Florida: a new Miocene fauna; new Pliocene
species; the Pleistocene fauna. Florida State geol. Surv., 8th Ann. Rep., 77-121.
StEsserR, W. G. 1978. Aridification of the Namib Desert: Evidence from oceanic cores. In:
VAN ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M. ed. Antarctic glacial history and world palaeoenvironments:
105-113. Rotterdam: Balkema.
STACH, J. 1957. Agriotherium intermedium n.sp. from the Pliocene bone breccia of Weze.
Acta Palaeont. polonica 2: 1-18.
Straus, J. R. & CouEN, A. D. 1979. The Snuggedy Swamp of South Carolina: A back-barrier
estuarine coal-forming environment. J. sedim. Petrol. 49: 133-143.
STEHLIN, H. G. 1907. Les Types du ‘Lophiodon de Montpellier’ de Cuvier (Hyaenarctos insignis
P. Gery.). Bull. Soc. geol. Fr. (4) 7: 219-223.
AGRIOTHERIUM FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA 109
TALBOT, W. J. 1947. Swartland and Sandveld. Cape Town: Oxford University Press.
TANKARD, A. J. 1975. Varswater Formation of the Langebaanweg-Saldanha area, Cape
Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 77: 265-283.
TANKARD, A. J. & RoGers, J. 1978. Late Cenozoic palaeoenvironments on the west coast of
southern Africa. J. Biogeog. 5: 319-337.
THENIUS, E. 1949. Uber die GehGrregion von Indarctos (Ursidae, Mamm.). Sber. mathem.-
naturw. Kl., Akad. Wiss. Wien 158: 647-653.
THENIUS, E. 1953. Zur Analyse des Gebisses des Eisbaren, Ursus (Thalarctos) maritimus Phipps,
1774. Saugetierkundl. Mitteil. 1953: 1-7.
THENIUS, E. 1959. Indarctos arctoides (Carnivora, Mammalia) aus dem Pliozain Osterreichs
nebst einer Revision der Gattung. Neues Jb. Geol. Paldont. Abh. 108: 270-295.
THENIUs, E. 1976. Zur stammesgeschlichtlichen Herkunft von Tremarctos (Ursidae, Mam-
malia). Z. Saugetierk. 41: 109-114.
THENIUS, E. 1977. Zur systematischen Stellung von Protursus (Carnivora, Mammalia). Sitz.
mathem.-naturw. KI., Osterreich. Akad. Wiss. 1977 (3): 1-5.
THENIUS, E. & Horer, H. 1960. Stammesgeschichte der Sdugetiere. Berlin: Springer.
TosiENn, H. 1955. Neue und wenig bekannte Carnivoren aus den unterpliozénen Dinotherein-
sanden Rheinhessens. Notizbl. Hess. Landesamt. Bodenforsch. (6) 6: 7-31.
VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1972. Radiometric calibration of the European Neogene. Jn: BisHop,
W. W. & Mirter, J. A. eds. Calibration of hominoid evolution: 247-271. Edinburgh:
Scottish Academic Press.
VAN GELDER, R. 1977. Mammalian hybrids and generic limits. Am. Mus. Novit. 2635: 1-25.
VAN VALEN, L. 1978. Why not to be a cladist. Evol. Theory 3: 285-299.
VirET, J. 1939. Monographie paléontologique de Ja faune de vertébrés des Sables de Mont-
pellier. III. Carnivora Fissipedia. Trav. Lab. géol. Fac. Sc. Lyon 37: 1-26.
Viret, J. 1949. Observations complémentaires sur quelques mammiféres fossiles de Soblay.
Ecl. geol. Helv. 42: 469-476.
VireET, J. & MAzeENoT, G. 1949. Nouveaux restes de mammiféres dans le gisement de lignite
pontien de Soblay (Ain.). Ann. Paléont. 34: 1-42.
Visser, H. N. & Scuocn, A. E. 1973. The geology and mineral resources of the Saldanha Bay
area. Mem. geol. Surv. S. Afr. 63: 1-150.
VrBA, E. 1979. Phylogenetic analysis and classification of fossil and recent Alcelaphini Mam-
malia: Bovidae. Biol. J. Linn. Soc. 11: 207-228.
Wacner, A. 1837. Palaontologische Abhandlungen. Gel. Anz. bayer. Akad. Wiss. Miinchen 5:
334-335.
WEGNER, R. N. 1913. Tertiar und umgelagerte Kreide bei Oppeln (Oberschleisen). Palae-
ontogr. 60: 175-274.
Wesp, S. D. 1977. A history of savanna vertebrates in the new world. Part 1. North America.
Ann. Rey. Ecol. Syst. 8: 355-380.
Wo ttr, R. G. 1978. Function and phylogenetic significance of cranial anatomy of an early
bear (UIndarctos) from Pleistocene sediments of Florida. Carnivore 1 (3/4): 1-12.
Wo rr, R. G., SINGER, R. & BisHop, W. W. 1973. Fossil bear (Agriotherium Wagner 1837)
from Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South Africa. Quaternaria 17: 209-236.
ZDANSKY, O. 1924. Jungtertiare Carnivoren Chinas. Palaeont. sinica (C) 2: 1-149.
| 6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
| (particularly Articles 22 and 51). :
| Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
| followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. noy., sp. nov., comb.
| novy., Syn. NOv., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
| punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
| name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
| species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
| scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
| order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
| Figs 14-1SA
| Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b),
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
| Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
| not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g. :
| Holotype
| SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
| Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973. 3
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
|7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
| e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
|(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
|(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
| e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
| Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
| Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
| Roman numerals should be conyerted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
| book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
| Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
| Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
Q. B. HENDEY
AGRIOTHERIUM (MAMMALIA, URSIDAE)
FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA, AND
RELATIONSHIPS OF THE GENUS
E /
{ , OC
JOLUME 81 PART 2 FEBRUARY 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRIC
MUSEU
CAPE TOWN |
| .
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author's(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are-not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in dist of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list a,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 81 Band
February 1980 Februarie
Rant 2 Deel
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE THEROCEPHALIAN
FAMILY LYCOSUCHIDAE
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
By
J.A. VAN DEN HEEVER
Cape Town _. Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3;,5=8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, tpi), 5(-3,.4, 7-9);
6(1, t.-p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t-p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 85 8
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., . Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE THEROCEPHALIAN FAMILY
LYCOSUCHIDAE (REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
By
J. A. VAN DEN HEEVER
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 9 figures)
LMS. accepted 29 November 1979]
ABSTRACT
The taxonomic position of the therocephalian family Lycosuchidae is discussed in the
light of published accounts and a re-examination of most of the type material, together with
additional information from undescribed specimens of early therocephalians. It is shown that
the primary distinguishing characteristic of the Lycosuchidae which separates it from the
Pristerognathidae, i.e. two simultaneously functional canines in each maxilla, is based on a
misinterpretation. It is therefore concluded that the family consists of an unnatural grouping
of members of the Pristerognathidae and should consequently be regarded as invalid.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : , Papell
Historical review F ; is exalt
Material and techniques . oe ey alily/
Description and discussion . 118
Conclusions . : ; ae P23
Acknowledgements . : ay el23
References . , : : oo 124
Abbreviations . pe Baits S- FALZS
INTRODUCTION
The early Therocephalia of the upper Permian Tapinocephalus Zone
(Dinocephalian and Pristerognathus/Diictodon Assemblage Zones of Keyser
& Smith 1979) of the Beaufort Series of the South African Karoo are generally
poorly understood in comparison with other therapsid groups such as the
Dicynodontia and the Cynodontia, mainly as a result of the intractable matrix
in which the material is usually found. Since the dentition of an unprepared
specimen is often its most distinctive feature the number and position of the
teeth have been predominantly used in the past to distinguish between the
various taxa of the group. Consequently, serious doubts have only recently
been raised about the naturalness of taxa which have existed in the literature,
e.g. the Lycosuchidae (Haughton & Brink 1955). Since the family Lycosuchidae
was established its relatively rare members, identified principally by the posses-
sion of two maxillary canines, have always been regarded as closely allied to
111
Ann: S. Afr. Mus. 81 (2), 1980: 111-125, 9 figs.
112 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the more abundant family Pristerognathidae, contemporary therocephalians
with one maxillary canine. Most authors (Haughton & Brink 1955; Kermack
1956; Romer 1956; Watson & Romer 1956; Boonstra 1969) who have discussed
the early Therocephalia have placed great taxonomic weight on the number
of canines and consequently the concept of double-canined therocephalians
is widespread in the literature. Illustrations of early therocephalians usually
present the double-canined Lycosuchus as a general representative of the group
(Du Toit 1954; Romer 1956, 1966).
Kermack (1956) demonstrated in the Therocephalia and the Gorgonopsia
the existence of two upper canine positions which alternate in housing a single
functional canine. According to Hopson (1964) this is also the case in the
cynodont Thrinaxodon liorhinus and probably most other cynodonts as well.
From this it is to be expected that while the functional canine was being replaced,
the animal would have two canines of different ages in each maxilla, super-
ficially similar to the condition frequently observed in living mammals when
the permanent canine is in the process of replacing the milk canine (Fig. 1).
Kermack also described a lycosuchid Trochosaurus major with two erupted
canines and states that the possession of two simultaneously functional canines
was primitive for Therocephalia. This idea probably stems from the view that
a similar condition was thought to typify sphenacodont pelyccsaurs, the pre-
sumed ancestors of therapsids.
In an important paper Mendrez (1972) established the existence of an
incipient crista choanalis in the pristerognathids Pristerognathus polyodon and
Ptomalestes ayidus, situated on the inner surface of the maxilla medial to the
canines. She interpreted this structure as the first step on the way to the develop-
ment of a bony secondary palate as in mammals. Since the gorgonopsian
maxilla is completely smooth in this area (Kemp 1969), this structure makes it
possible to distinguish readily between the otherwise very similar snout frag-
ments or isolated maxillae of therocephalians and gorgonopsians. Mendrez
Fig. 1. Stereophotograph of the left maxilla of Felis caracal (SAM-ZM38191)
to show the eruption of the permanent canine anterolingual to the milk canine.
Scale =10mm. —
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE 113
(1972) also noted the presence of two canine positions in pristerognathids
(but did not cite Kermack’s prior discovery of this fact) and states at page 2961:
‘Pristerognatus polyodon ainsi que Ptomalestes avidus possédent également une
autere caractéristique qui, selon les descriptions classiques, était, parmi les
Pristerosauria de la zone a Tapinocephalus, \a propriété exclusive des Lyco-
suchidae, a savoir la présence de deux canines de chaque cété de la téte. Ceci
diminue le nombre déja faible des caractéres opposant ces deux familles. Il est
fort probable que le Pristerognathidae décrits comme présentant un diastéme
entre la canine et les postcanines possédaient a cette place une seconde canine.’
From this she concluded that the Pristerognathidae and the Lycosuchidae
probably form a single family. However, from her statement it appears as if
the Pristerognathidae possessed, like the Lycosuchidae, two functional canines
in each maxilla and thus that the accepted definition of the Lycosuchidae
should include the Pristerognathidae as well.
In summary, the only distinguishing characteristic of the family Lyco-
suchidae that at present still appears to separate it from the Pristerognathidae
is the presence of two functional canines in each maxilla. In an effort to deter-
mine the validity of this morphological distinction, and thus of the family
Lycosuchidae, a detailed study of the mode of replacement of the upper canines
was undertaken. This study is intended to resolve the question of whether the
two canines were fully mature and remained simultaneously functional for a
long period of time (as assumed by most authors), or whether the condition
represents a short-lived phenomenon in the replacement process, representing
a stage during which the new canine is well erupted but the old functional
canine has not yet been shed. The latter interpretation implies that the double-
canined condition is a short segment of the normal replacing cycle of all early
therocephalians and that there is no valid basis for taxonomically separating
the double-canined forms (Lycosuchidae) from the Pristerognathidae.
HISTORICAL REVIEW
The first early therocephalian possessing two maxillary canines was
described by Broom (1903a) as Lycosuchus vanderrieti (Figs 2-3). According
to Broom the only other theriodont known at that time which possessed two
canines in each maxilla was the Albany Museum specimen of the cynodont
? Cynognathus leptorhinus Seeley (currently placed in Cynognathus cratero-
notus). However, in an addendum to the description of Lycosuchus vanderrieti,
Broom (1903a) notes that ? Cynognathus leptorhinus is similar to Cynognathus
platyceps and that the other known species of Cynognathus all had only one
canine; therefore, the double-canined condition in this specimen was regarded
by him as temporary. Broom also drew attention to the type of Trirachodon
kannemeyeri Seeley which on one side of the snout, in front of the canine,
shows the tip of a second canine similar to that in both Cynognathus and
Lycosuchus. Broom (1903a) felt that the anterior canine in all these genera is
the morphological equivalent of the permanent mammalian canine and the
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Stereophotograph of the right maxilla of the type skull of Lycosuchus vanderrieti
(Stellenbosch D173) to show the canines. The specimen is covered with polymethylmethacrylate
for preparation in acid. Scale = 10 mm.
Fig. 3. Stereophotograph of the left maxilla of the type skull of Lycosuchus vanderrieti to
show the canines. The specimen is covered with polymethylmethacrylate for preparation in
acid. Scale = 10mm.
posterior canine is the equivalent of the deciduous canine of mammals. He also
stated that both teeth may, however, have been functional for some time in
Lycosuchus and the higher theriodonts because the posterior canine which
developed first is more powerful and the anterior canine is ‘peculiarly
specialized’ as if developed for a different function. The suggestion of separate
functions was due to his observation that both the anterior and the posterior
borders of the anterior tooth are serrated, whereas only the posterior border
of the posterior tooth appeared to be serrated.
a wg
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE 115
Fig. 4. Stereo photograph of the left maxilla of the type specimen Trochosuchus acutus (SAM-—
1076) to show the canines. Scale = 10mm.
Broom (19035) described the isolated maxilla of a second therocephalian
possessing two canines as Lycosuchus mackayi. Not until five years later (Broom
1908), however, when describing the double-canined Hyaenasuchus whaitsi,
does he mention the fact that he now regards both canines in these early thero-
cephalians as being simultaneously functional with neither of them being a
replacement tooth. In the same article Broom described the anterior part of a
small therocephalian skull as Trochosuchus acutus, noting the presence of two
maxillary canines, the anterior being the smaller (Fig. 4).
Broom (1915) described Trochosuchus major specifically, stating that
neither of the two canines in the maxilla is a replacement tooth and that in
the light of the descriptions of Lycosuchus, Hyaenasuchus and Trochosuchus
he regards these genera as having two large canines functioning simultaneously
in each maxilla.
Haughton (1915) in his description of Trochosaurus intermedius followed
Broom in interpreting the two canines present in each maxilla as being simul-
taneously functional, notwithstanding the fact that they differed in size and
that a replacement tooth was situated medial to the anterior canine in each
maxilla.
In his book on the mammal-like reptiles of South Africa, Broom (1932)
redescribed all of the species with two canines in each maxilla and stated that
both teeth are simultaneously functional because more than a dozen specimens
were then known to possess this arrangement of teeth. He regarded them as a
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
group separate from the Pristerognathidae but did not formally establish a
new family for them. (Lycosaurus mackayi at his p. 50 is an error and should
read Lycosuchus mackayi.) He also synonymized Trochosaurus intermedius
(Haughton, 1915) with Trochosuchus major (Broom, 1915) under the name
Trochosaurus major. He retained the genus Trochosuchus for the single specimen
of Trochosuchus acutus (Broom, 1908).
A third specimen of Trochosaurus major was described by Boonstra (1934)
who indicated in the text as well as in the figures that the canines were under-
going replacement. He also noted the relatively broad epipterygoid which is
narrowest in the middle and expanded dorsally and ventrally.
Broom (1936a) described Trochorhinus vanhoepeni as closely allied to
Trochosaurus major and possessing two canines of unequal size, the larger being
anterior.
Broom (1936b) described Trochosaurus dirus as having two large functional »
canines in each maxilla. However, the canines are at different stages of develop-
ment and the roots of their eventual replacements are visible medially. He notes
that both canines are functional and situated so close together that they probably
functioned as one tooth. Furthermore he states that: *. . . each anterior canine
has a very young replacing tooth; but the posterior canine on the left is being
replaced by an already well-developed successor. On the right side the specimen
is imperfect but the inner canine is of large size and apparently functional.
Probably the outer canine is shed or being absorbed.’
No new early therocephalian specimens showing double upper canines
were described after 1936. Romer (1945) included all of the above-mentioned
genera in the Pristerognathidae.
Although Broom (1932) developed the rather loose concept of double-
canined therocephalians, it was actually Houghton & Brink (1955) who estab-
lished the family Lycosuchidae, for which they gave the following diagnosis:
‘Medium-sized therocephalians with two large functional canines in each
maxilla.’ They listed the species as: Hyaenasuchus whaitsi Broom, 1908; Lyco-
suchus vanderrieti Broom, 1903 (not 1902 as given by Haughton & Brink);
Lycosuchus mackayi Broom, 1903; Trochorhinus vanhoepeni Broom, 1936;
Trochosaurus major (Broom, 1915), and Trochosaurus dirus Broom, 1936. The
single specimen of Trochosuchus acutus was referred by them to the family
Akidnognathidae. Tatarinov (1974) ascribes the establishment of the family
Lycosuchidae to Haughton (1924). The references in Tatarinov’s article reveal
that the paper in question was actually published in 1925; however, in this
paper Haughton retained the double-canined forms in the family
Pristerognathidae.
Shortly thereafter, Watson & Romer (1956) followed Romer (1956) who
independently established the family Trochosuchidae comprising the same
genera as those placed by Haughton & Brink (1955) in the Lycosuchidae. They
also synonymized Trochosaurus Haughton, 1915, with Trochosuchus Broom,
1908. Watson & Romer (1956) diagnosed the family Trochosuchidae as: ‘Large
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE 117
therocephalians which resemble the Pristerognathidae in fundamental features
of their structure but differ in having a much lower skull with a broad and
rather flattened snout, a sagittal crest never elevated and the occiput trans-
versely widened. They may have six incisors and normally two canines, each
separately replaced.’ Since their classification is predated by that of Haughton
& Brink (1955) the name Lycosuchidae has precedence and has been used by
nearly all subsequent authors, e.g. Boonstra (1969, 1971, 1972), Mendrez (1972),
and Tatarinov (1974); Lehman (1961 : 232), however, incorrectly follows Watson
& Romer (1956). Von Huene (1956) retains the members of the Lycosuchidae
within the Pristerognathidae.
In spite of having synonymized Trochosaurus with Trochosuchus (Watson
& Romer 1956), Romer (1966), synonymized the Lycosuchidae of Haughton &
Brink (1955)-with a new family, the Trochosauridae. This was apparently done
to facilitate the inclusion of Trochosuchus in another family, the Alopeco-
dontidae (Romer 1966). However, Haughton & Brink (1955) had placed
Trochosuchus in the Akidnognathidae (defined as having one small canine in
front of the large functional canine) a family not recognized by Romer (1966),
and they described the Alopecodontidae as therocephalians with two small
canines in front of the large functional canine in the maxilla. The weathered
type specimen of Trochosuchus acutus (SAM-—1076) in the South African Museum
has one canine in the right maxilla and two canines in the left maxilla, the
anterior being the smaller (Fig. 4). However, the last incisor appears to lie
within the maxilla when viewed laterally and may have been mistaken for a
small canine by Romer.
The genera included by Watson & Romer (1956) in the Trochosuchidae
(Lycosuchidae) do not have larger skulls than those early therocephalians
possessing a single maxillary canine, and an examination of the available
material indicates that the other diagnostic differences of the family can be
attributed to post-mortem distortion. Consequently, in a later description of
the Lycosuchidae, Boonstra (1969) characterizes the family as: ‘Early fairly
large Therocephalia with fairly broad flattened skulls with two functional
canines in the maxilla, advanced broadened epipterygoid and low sagittal crest.
Otherwise very similar to pristerognathids. With four monotypic genera.’
However, as Mendrez (1972) quite rightly points out, the so-called broad
epipterygoid of the Lycosuchidae is actually known in one specimen only,
Trochosaurus major (BMNH RS5747), and it is, in fact, no broader than that
of the pristerognathid Ptomalestes avidus.
MATERIAL AND TECHNIQUES
The type material of Tapinocephalus Zone therocephalians at the South
African Museum was examined. In addition a complete therocephalian skull
(G.S. C60) with lower jaw, lacking only the occipital bones, was borrowed from
the Geological Survey. The medial aspect of the right maxilla of this specimen
was carefully prepared by mechanical means to show the canines.
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The type skull of Lycosuchus vanderrieti (D173), on loan from the University
of Stellenbosch, is currently being prepared in an 11 per cent solution of formic
acid owing to the extreme hardness of the matrix. It is at present still covered
with polymethylmethacrylate (Figs 2-3), but the double canines are well pre-
served and have been examined.
Other material was prepared mechanically where necessary. In addition,
the right maxilla of an unidentified species of therocephalian, SAM—K317
(identified as therocephalian according to the method of Mendrez (1972)),
was sectioned frontally on a Beuhler Isomet Low Speed Saw at intervals of
2 mm. One section was stained with Alizarin Red S in a 4 per cent solution of
potassium hydroxide to show the resorption of the canine root.
All photographs were taken on Kodak Panatomic-X film with a stereo
apparatus built by N. J. Eden of the South African Museum.
DESCRIPTION AND DISCUSSION
The inner surface of the left maxilla of therocephalian SAM-—K317 shows
a distinct canine boss which contains the two canine alveoli (Fig. 5). The relative
positions of the roots are visible as two smaller bulges separated by a shallow
vertical sulcus. This condition can also be seen in the type of the pristerognathid
Ptomalestes avidus, SAM-11942. The functional canine lies in the anterior
alveolus and is broken off at the alveolar border. No tooth is externally visible
in the posterior alveolus. The right maxilla of SAM—K317 shows the same
features as does the left side, but a frontal section through the posterior alveolus
shows the root of an old canine being resorbed from the alveolar border upwards
(Figs 5-6).
The skull of Geological Survey specimen C60 has been compressed laterally,
but in lingual view the maxilla clearly shows the canine boss with the functional
canine in the anterior alveolus (Fig. 7). A replacement canine of which the tip
is serrated both anteriorly and posteriorly is erupting from the posterior
alveolus. This condition is identical to that in the left maxilla of Lycosuchus
Fig. 5. Stereophotograph of the medial surface of the left maxilla of an unidenti-
fied pristerognathid (SAM-—K317) showing the boss containing the canine alveoli.
Anterior is to the right. Scale = 10 mm.
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE 119
Fig. 6. Frontal section through the posterior
canine alveolus of the right maxilla of an
unidentified pristerognathid (SAM-—K317) to
show the resorption of the old canine root
and its replacement by spongy bone.
Scale = 10 mm.
vanderrieti except that in the latter the younger tooth lies in the anterior position
(Fig. 3).
See externally only, G.S. C60 would have to be classified as a lycosuchid
according to the accepted definition of the family. However, the diameter of
the posterior alveolus is the same as that of the anterior and much larger than
that of the erupting canine. This suggests that the posterior alveolus was
probably occupied previously by a large canine and that the immature tooth is
not the first to have erupted in that position. Medial to the functional canine
(Figs 7-8) an unerupted replacement canine is visible where the bone of the
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. Stereophotographs of the medial surface of the right maxilla of an unidentified pris-
terognathid (G.S. C60) showing the boss containing the canine alveoli and the sequence of
canine replacement. Scale = 10 mm.
Fig. 8. Stereophotographs of a ventral view of the right maxilla of an unidentified
pristerognathid (G.S. C60) to show the sequence of canine replacement.
Scale = 10 mm.
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE 121
medial wall is damaged. In this ‘lycosuchid’, then, there is direct evidence that
the sequence of canine eruption alternates between the two alveoli in such a
way that the time lapse between the eruption of teeth in the two alveoli produces
a single functional canine at a time. This is also the most likely interpretation
of the condition in the type of Lycosuchus vanderrieti. Specimens with two large
canines in the same maxilla represent the terminal stages of the older tooth of
the pair.
Since the second canine is older than the first in Lycosuchus vanderrieti,
it would naturally be more powerful than the immature tooth, and since both
tips of the posterior canines in Lycosuchus are damaged, Broom (1932) had no
grounds for stating that the anterior canines are ‘peculiarly specialized’ for a
different function. In fact, specimens of therocephalians which have complete
canines show serrations at the tips of these teeth both in front and behind,
regardless of whether the tooth is in the anterior or posterior position.
Kermack (1956) regards the single lycosuchid specimen (Trochosaurus
major, BMNH R5747) described in his paper as one of the most primitive
of the therocephalians because it has two functional canines in each maxilla
(Fig. 9). By his own description (Kermack 1956: 114) the roots of replacement
canines can be seen in a fracture lying lingual to each of the canines in the right
maxilla. The anterior of this pair is in a more advanced stage of development
than the posterior, which strongly suggests that the two large functional teeth
are also of different ages. On the left, the fracture is such that the replacement
teeth cannot be seen but the large canines are clearly also of differing ages
since the anterior canine was still in the process of erupting and has a wide-open
pulp cavity. This indicates not that both teeth were functional at the same time
but rather that replacement was taking place at the time of death. However,
Kermack (1956: 115) states: “This specimen compares closely with the two
specimens of Ae/urosaurus (R339 and R855a). The only essential difference is
that, in the two gorgonopsids the pair of alveoli in the maxilla each alternately
bears the functional canine, while in the therocephalian each bears a functional
tooth simultaneously. The difference is one of timing only.’
Kermack (1956: 121) notes further that in sphenacodont pelycosaurs such
as Dimetrodon, as well as in Trochosaurus, two functional canines were present
in each maxilla and elsewhere (Kermack 1956: 130) he states: ‘As in Dimetrodon
there was a pair of functional upper canines on each side in these primitive
therocephalia, and they were replaced alternately. The functional replacement
for each of the pair was the next number of its own tooth family. Like Dimetro-
don when one of the upper canines was being replaced, these Therocephalia
must have had but one functional canine on that side of the jaw.’
Kermack (1956) apparently implies here that in Dimetrodon and Trocho-
saurus-like primitive therocephalians the double canine condition was the
prevailing one, whilst the period during which only one canine was functional
was, in fact, of a comparatively short duration, i.e. there were normally two
upper canines functioning simultaneously.
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
R L
Fig. 9. Diagram from Kermack (1956) to show
the canines and canine replacements of Trocho-
saurus major (BMNH R5747).
R = right, L = left.
The South African Museum holds at least 112 specimens of early thero-
cephalian skulls and skull fragments in which the canines can be seen. Of these,
fourteen specimens possess two canines in either one or both of the maxillae,
including the above-mentioned types. This ratio of roughly one specimen with
double canines for every seven with a single canine per maxilla illustrates the
relative scarcity of the two-canine condition and indicates that the period during
which two canines were externally visible was probably of relatively short
duration. In no South African Museum specimen with double canines are there
any indications that the teeth are of the same age and, from the literature cited
above, it is also clear that in all described specimens of Lycosuchidae the
canines are also staggered in age. It is highly improbable that in carnivores
such as the Therocephalia, in which the tips of the canines are serrated both
anteriorly and posteriorly, these teeth would have functioned optimally as a
closely packed unit. Not only would the efficiency of penetration be impaired
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE 123
by the bulky ‘unit’ compsed of two large teeth, but also, since some of the
serrations would be obscured, the teeth would tear less efficiently as well.
Therefore, it seems more likely that these animals possessed a single piercing
canine of long functional duration and that the period of replacement, during
which two canines were externally visible in each maxilla, was as short as
possible. This is indicated by the relatively few specimens actually showing this
condition. The functional replacement for each canine would then not be the
next tooth of its own family (i.e. in the same tooth position), but the next tooth
erupting from the other canine alveolus. This model of canine tooth replace-
ment is supported by the work of Edmund (1960) who, contrary to the observa-
tion of Kermack (1956), found that in Dimetrodon the pair of canines in each
maxilla were only occasionally functional at the same time and usually alternated
so that only one tooth was functional at a time.
CONCLUSIONS
Kermack (1956) is correct in stating that in the Therocephalia the two
canine alveoli each bore the functional canine alternately, but he is incorrect
in assuming that in the Lycosuchidae, e.g. Trochosaurus, both alveoli normally
bore functional canines simultaneously. In view of the importance of canines
in carnivore dentitions it is to be expected that the replacement of any fang will
develop at such a time and replace the mature canine in such a way that the
animal is never without at least one functional canine in each maxilla. This
necessitates a period of time when the erupting replacement coexists with the
old functional tooth. Because of the distinct advantages of the single over the
double functional canine condition, the actual period of time in which the two
canines were externally visible was probably kept as short as possible.
The Lycosuchidae is therefore not a separate primitive therocephalian
family but consists of members of the Pristerognathidae in which death occurred
while the erupting replacing canine was visible externally. Lycosuchus van-
derrieti (Figs 2-3) is an especially good example of this condition. Therefore
the family Lycosuchidae (—Trochosauridae) represents an unnatural grouping
of members of the Pristerognathidae, and it is suggested here that it be
invalidated.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I wish to thank the following persons: Mrs K. Rial and Mr N. J. Eden,
both of the Department of Palaeontology at the South African Museum for,
respectively, preparation and photography, Professor W. J. Verwoerd of the
Department of Geology at the University of Stellenbosch, and Dr A. W. Keyser
of the Geological Survey in Pretoria for the loan of specimens, Dr J. A. Hopson
of the University of Chicago for critically reading the manuscript, and Mrs P.
Eedes and Mrs G. E. Blaeske, of the South African Museum, for typing.
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
BoonstrA, L. D. 1934. A contribution to the morphology of the mammal-like reptiles of the
suborder Therocephalia. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 31: 215-267.
Boonstra, L. D. 1969. The fauna of the Tapinocephalus zone (Beaufort beds of the Karoo).
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 1-73.
‘ BoonstrA, L. D. 1971. The early therapsids. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 17-46.
BoonstraA, L. D. 1972. Discard the names Theriodontia and Anomodontia: a new classi-
fication of the Therapsida. Amn. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 315-338.
Broom, R. 1903a. On an almost perfect skull of a new primitive theriodont (Lycosuchus
vanderrieti). Trans. S. Afr. phil. Soc. 14: 197-205.
Broom, R. 19036. On some new primitive theriodonts in the South African Museum. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 4: 147-156.
Broom, R. 1908. On some new therocephalian reptiles. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 361-367.
Broom, R. 1915. Catalogue of types and figured specimens of fossil vertebrates in the American
Museum of Natural History. II. Permian, Triassic and Jurassic reptiles of South Africa.
Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 25: 105-164.
Broom, R. 1932. The mammal-like reptiles of South Africa and the origin of mammals. London:
Witherby.
Broom, R. 1936a. On some new genera and species of Karroo fossil reptiles, with notes on
some others. Ann. Transy. Mus. 18: 349-386.
Broom, R. 19365. On the structure of the skull in the mammal-like reptiles of the suborder
Therocephalia. Phil Trans. R. Soc. 226: 1-42.
Du Torr, A. L. 1954. The geology of South Africa. 3rd ed. S. H. Haughton ed. Edinburgh;
London: Oliver & Boyd.
Epmunp, A. G. 1960. Tooth replacement phenomena in the lower vertebrates. Life Sci.
Contr. R. Ont. Mus. 52: 1-190.
HauGutTon, S. H. 1915. On two new therocephalians from the Gouph. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12:
55-57.
HauGuton, S. H. 1925. A bibliographical list of pre-Stormberg Karroo Reptilia, with a table
of horizons. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 12: 51-104.
HAUGHTON, S. H. & BRINK, A. S. 1955. A bibliographical list of Reptilia from the Karroo
beds of Africa. Palaeont. afr. 2: 1-187.
Hopson, J. A. 1964. Tooth replacement in cynodont, dicynodont and therodephalian reptiles.
Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 142: 625-654.
Kemp, T. S. 1969. On the functional morphology of the gorgonopsid skull. Phil. Trans. R.
Soc. (B) 256: 1-83.
Keyser, A. W. & Smit, R. M. H. 1979. Vertebrate biozonation of the Beaufort Group with
_ Special reference to the western Karoo basin. Ann. geol. Surv. Pretoria 12: 1-35.
Kermack, K. A. 1956. Tooth replacement in mammal-like reptiles of the suborders
Gorgonopsia and Therocephalia. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B) 240: 95-133.
LEHMAN, J. P. 1961. Therocephalia. In: Traite de Paleontologie 6: 224-245. J. Piveteau, ed.
MENDREZ, C. 1972. Premiéres ébauches d’un palais secondaire osseux chez les reptiles mam-
maliens. C. r. Acad. Sci. Paris 274: 2960-2961.
Romer, A. S. 1945. Vertebrate paleontology. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Romer, A. S. 1956. The osteology of the reptiles. 1st ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Romer, A. S. 1966. Vertebrate paleontology. 3rd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
TATARINOV, L. P. 1974. Theriodonts of the USSR. Moscow: NAUCA.
Von HEUNE, F. 1956. Paldontologie und Phylogenie der niederen Tetrapoden. Jena: VEB,
Gustav Fischer Verlag.
WATSON, D. M. S. & Romer, A. S. 1956. A classification of therapsid reptiles. Bull. Mus.
comp. Zool. Harv. 114: 37-89.
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE LYCOSUCHIDAE
ABBREVIATIONS
anterior canine
canine boss
crista choanalis
canine root
functional canine
incisor
lower postcanine
maxilla
milk canine
old alveolus
postcanine
position of anterior canine
posterior canine
permanent canine
position of posterior canine
replacing canine
sulcus
unerupted canine
tip of unerupted canine
upper postcanines
British Museum of Natural History
Geological Survey, Pretoria
South African Museum.
125
i}
—
We
Hy
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific namé must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973,
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman’ numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
J. A. VAN DEN HEEVER
ON THE VALIDITY OF THE
THEROCEPHALIAN FAMILY LYCOSUCHIDAE
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
VOLUME 81 PART 3 FEBRUARY 1980
j
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
|CAPE TOWN
ca
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title; informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author's(s') name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small |
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates.
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...”
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, 5, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGn, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140,
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. ‘
Konn, A. J. 19604. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon,
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51. ,
THIELE, J. 1910, Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 81 Band
February 1980 Februarie
Part 3 Deel
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS
FROM THE BOKKEVELD SERIES
OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
W. G. CHALONER E.R.
Pk. FOREY
B. G. GARDINER
ALS; BILL
V. T. YOUNG
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 711-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(S), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 88 2
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM THE BOKKEVELD SERIES
OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
W. G. CHALONER F.R.S.
Birkbeck College, University of London
P. L. FoREY
British Museum (Natural History)
B. G. GARDINER
Queen Elizabeth College, University of London
A. J. HILL
Birkbeck College, University of London
&
V. T. YOUNG
British Museum (Natural History)
(With 14 figures and 1 addendum)
[MS. accepted 20 September 1979]
ABSTRACT
Fossil fish and plants from upper strata of the Bokkeveld Series of Barrydale, Cape
Province, Republic of South Africa, are described. The fishes are represented by arthrodire
placoderms, Barrydalaspis theroni gen. et sp. noy., a phlyctaenaspid arthrodire and, possibly,
Groenlandaspis; an acanthodian spine indistinguishable from Gyracanthides warreni White;
and an egg case. The plants are represented by lycopods: Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae sp.
noy., A. cf. picosensis Kraéusel & Dolianiti, and two different types of lycopod endocortical
cast. The fishes and plants are compared with those in Australia, Antarctica, North America
and South America, and it is concluded that these Bokkeveld fossils are either Middle or
Upper Devonian.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction Sine a) HCE py re ei ee ene ms cert 2%.)
The fish remains , : j ; ‘ : 3 : Z = 28
Arthrodires ; f : : ; : : . ; B28
?Chimaeroid . ; 3 F ; ; : { ‘ . 140
Acanthodian ; , : : : : : : : . 140
The plant remains. : : : : ; . 141
Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae sp. nov. . 5 Teas
Archaeosigillaria sp. cf. A. picosensis Krausel & Dolianiti =). 149
Lycopod ?endocortical cast . : j : : ; . 150
Discussion . : P 3 : : : : : E : =) £t50
Acknowledgements . : : : . : : : ; Ch Pd4:
References . ah ee : 4 E : Se : : . 154
127
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81 (3), 1980: 127-157, 14 figs, 1 addendum.
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
In 1974 a small collection of fossil fish and plants was sent to one of the
authors (B. G.) for identification by Dr J. N. Theron of the Geological Survey
of South Africa. The material comes from the upper strata of the Bokkeveld
Beds at Barrydale, Cape Province, Republic of South Africa. Precise locality
information is not available.
The Bokkeveld Series is reputed to be of Devonian age (Du Toit 1939)
and therefore the presence of fish is of significance because, with one possible
exception, fish have not previously been recorded from the Devonian of South
Africa. This one possible exception is a reference to the occurrence of Machae-
racanthus in the Bokkeveld Beds which is given without detail by Du Toit
(1939: 222). It is possible that Du Toit extracted this record from Schwarz (1900)
who referred to a fossil fish spine. At the very best, therefore, Devonian fish
from southern Africa are very poorly known and this collection adds a new
dimension to our rapidly increasing knowledge of Devonian fish from the
Southern hemisphere.
The primary purpose of this paper is to describe these fishes. The fish
are associated with a few plant remains and these are described and discussed
(W. G. C. & A. J. H.). A few notes are added concerning the age of the Bokke-
veld Beds based on comparisons of the fish and plants with those preserved in
presumed contemporaneous strata in North and South America, Antarctica,
Australia and west Africa.
The fish are represented mainly by placoderms, but an acanthodian and
the impression of a large egg case are also present. This last is particularly
interesting since the form of the egg case is similar to those attributed to chimae-
roids which are not known prior to the Jurassic. The plants are represented by
several types of lycopods. All the fossils are poorly preserved, the majority
being represented as impression or internal casts. The matrix is a texturally
variable and poorly bedded micaceous siltstone. Because of this and the type
and condition of the contained fossils, it appears as if the sediment was deposited
in a freshwater environment and that the fossils lived in the place of
sedimentation.
The specimens referred to in this paper come from the collections of the
South African Museum, Cape Town and from the Geological Survey, Cape
Office. The former are prefixed by SAM;; the latter are left unprefixed, simply
being quoted by the field number.
THE FISH REMAINS
ARTHRODIRES
A number of facts have made the study of the arthrodires difficult; only
impressions of the plates remain; with few exceptions the plates are isolated
and sometimes broken, making it difficult to associate parts of animals; there
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 129
is some degree of post-mortem deformation with resulting distortion. Never-
theless, the margins of the plates are perfectly angular, ruling out the possibility
of post-mortem/pre-depositional transportation. Among the specimens several
show associated ventral thoracic armour and on the basis of these two types of
arthrodire can be recognized. Some isolated plates of the lateral aspect of the
trunk shield can be referred to one or other of these types. It has been decided
to name one of these because it is distinctive from other named arthrodires.
The second arthrodire type shows a general similarity to named arthrodires
from elsewhere. To avoid cluttering the already burdensome literature with
yet another name, this is referred to as a ‘phlyctaenaspid arthrodire’ with the
implication that what little is known of this form is similar to Neophlyctaenius
and presumed close relatives. Additionally, specimens of a head and a piece of
a large arthrodire are briefly mentioned.
Order ARTHRODIRA
Suborder PHLYCTAENIOIDE! Miles 1973
Infraorder and Family incertae sedis
Genus Barrydalaspis gen. nov.
(Figs 1-4, 6A)
Etymology
From Barrydale, South Africa, the area in which these fossils are found.
Diagnosis
Phlyctaenioid with short, broad ventral thoracic armour; spinal long with
denticles along the medial edge, spinals set at a very divergent angle; sub-
pectoral emargination broad; interolateral with prominent transverse groove;
anterior ventrolateral of either side meeting its partner in the mid-line; anterior
dorsolateral with a prominent groove on the lateral face of the anteroventral
corner; ornament consisting of small, simple tubercles; body behind thoracic
shield at least partially covered with scales.
Type species
“@
Barrydalaspis theroni sp. nov.
Barrydalaspis theroni sp. nov.
Etymology
Named after Dr J. N. Theron who brought this material to the attention
of the authors.
Holotype
SAM-K4647, the impression of the ventral thoracic armour from the
Bokkeveld Series of Barrydale, Cape Province, South Africa.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Other material
SAM-K 4648-50, K4770-73, K4766, K4779, K4785, K4789, K4791, and
an anterior dorsolateral plate preserved on K4798.
Diagnosis
As for genus, only species.
Remarks
The ventral thoracic armour shows a superficial resemblance to that of
the petalichthyid Lunaspis (see Gross 1961); the armour is short and broad and
the spinals are set at a divergent angle. However, unlike Lunaspis, Barrydalaspis
shows well-differentiated posterior ventrolaterals. (Gross (1961) describes two
pairs of plates lying behind the anterior ventrolaterals in Lunaspis, the posterior
ventrolaterals and the postero-ventrals. These are interpreted as body scales by
Miles & Young (1977) and their interpretation is accepted here.) Furthermore,
the dorsal part of the armour is similar to that of a phlyctaenioid and unlike
that of a petalichthyid in showing a ‘ball and socket’ dermal neck joint and a
large posterior dorsolateral.
The anterior ventrolateral (AVL) is short and broad, being 1,35 times as
wide as long in the smallest individuals and 1,25 times as wide as long in the
20mm
(= [oe
Fig. 1. Barrydalaspis theroni gen. et sp. nov. Silicone cast of holotype showing ventral thoracic
armour in external view.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 131
a.t.s.c
Fig. 2. Barrydalaspis theroni gen. et sp. nov. Restoration of the ventral thoracic armour in
ventral view. Based on SAM-K4647 and K4649. AVL —anterior ventrolateral, 1L—intero-
lateral, PVL—posterior ventrolateral, SP—spinal, a.t.s.c—anterior transverse sulcus.
larger (presumably older) individuals. With this change in linear dimensions
there is also a change in shape, the posterior area of the AVL becoming squarer
with increasing size (cf. Figs 1 and 2). The length of the spinal margin, expressed
as a percentage of the maximum width of the plate, also varies from 48 per cent
in the small individuals to 44 per cent in the large specimens. A similar decrease
in the relative length of the spinal margin has been recorded for Coccosteus by
Miles & Westoll (1968: 433-434). There is a well-marked ‘Ventrolateralkante’
(Gross 1933) running longitudinally on the posterior part of the AVL and across
the posterior ventrolateral. This implies that there was a narrow subpectoral
wall of the flank armour and the development of a postbrachial lamina. The
centre of radiation of the AVL lies remarkably far forwards, more so than in
any of the ‘dolichothoracid’ types figured by Denison (1958, fig. 112). The
ornament on the AVL consists of simple tubercles which are very small at the
radiation centre but become larger along the anterior, median and posterior
margins. Ornament is absent from that part of the plate adjacent to the sub-
pectoral emargination. A similar lack of ornament is noted by Miles & Westoll
(1968) in the corresponding area of Coccosteus.
The visceral surface of the AVL shows that perichondral bone lined the
scapulocoracoid. Impressions left by this perichondral layer suggest that the
abdominal division and the coracoid process of the scapulocoracoid (termi-
nology of Stensi6 1959) were both very broad, as in most ‘dolichothoracids’.
In some specimens the contact faces with the anterolateral can be seen, sug-
gesting that the width of the pectoral fenestra is equal to about half the length of
the subpectoral emargination.
The posterior ventrolateral (PVL) is a little longer than broad and, as usual,
the left PVL overlaps the right. As mentioned above, there is a strongly
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
IL
MRDORRT POC ne x Sta I ANA ON
RRARAL AAG a KAS An anann
ananene
20mm
Fig. 3. Barrydalaspis theroni gen. et sp. nov. Restoration of anterior ventrolateral, intero-
lateral and spinal of the left side in visceral view. Based on SAM—-K4779, K4770, K4791 and
K4771. Abbreviations as in Fig. 1.
developed ‘Ventrolateralkante’ which divides the plate into lateral (vertical)
and ventral (horizontal) laminae. The lateral lamina, which is relatively long,
suggests that the postbrachial lamina was also long, as in phlyctaenaspids
(Denison 1958: 534). The ornament is similar to that on the AVL. The medial
margin of the left PVL is ‘S’-shaped where it overlaps the right but there is no
indication of the complex overlap relations seen in Tiaraspis and Romundina.
The spinal (SP) is relatively long and the proportions agree more with those
of Denison’s phlyctaenaspid genera than with those of any other arthrodire
group. The spinals are relatively longer in smaller individuals. A suture between
the SP and AVL can be traced except anteriorly. As mentioned in the diagnosis,
the SP is set at a very divergent angle, this being approximately 50°. Phlyctaenius
acadica also shows a spinal set at a high angle (about 48° from the restoration
given by Heintz 1934), but in this species the SP is much shorter. The ornament
consists of well-developed tubercles along the lateral edge of the anterior two-
thirds. Smaller tubercles are also present over half of the ventral surface and
about one-fifth of the dorsal surface. Posteriorly, the medial edge bears six to
eight recurved denticles.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 133
The interolateral (IL) is orientated almost transversely and has ventral
(external) and dorsal (internal or postbrachial) laminae which both become
wider laterally. On the ventral lamina there is a shallow sulcus between two
rows of tubercles. This sulcus, which has been variously named in arthrodires
(‘anterior ventral sulcus’—Miles & Westoll 1968; anterior transverse sensory
canal— Mark-Kurik 1973; Orvig 1975), implies that there was a neuromast
line as in Actinolepis and several brachythoracids. The ventral surface of the
IL is covered with tubercles, similar to those on the edges of the AVL. The
tubercles on the dorsal surface are regularly arranged into four or five rows.
The presence of an anterior median ventral is seen in SAM-—K4649 where there
is the impression of tubercles between the IL and the AVL of either side. How-
ever, the shape of this plate and the existence of a posterior median ventral
cannot be demonstrated in this material.
An anterolateral (AL) has not been found associated with the ventral
armour, but two specimens showing most of this plate can be referred to Barry-
dalaspis because they show ornament similar to that on the AVL. A note of
caution must be introduced when associating plates by using similarities in
ornament. White (1969: 303) has pointed out that in Heightingtonaspis anglica
Traquair the ornament on the AL may differ considerably from that on the
AVL. However, in the South African material there are only two types of AL
present, each with ornament which matches that on one or the other of the
two types of ventral armour. Thus, the criterion of association by ornament
seems the most reasonable with the available material.
The AL is tall and relatively narrow, similar proportions being seen only
among ‘dolichothoracids’ in the arctolepid described by Miles (1965). As usual
the bone is raised to a focal point, which in this case is centrally placed, and from
this four ridges run to the corners to divide the bone into quadrants. The
posterodorsal corner is produced as in Arctolepis decipiens Woodward and,
to some extent, in Neophlyctaenius sherwoodi (Denison). The pectoral emargi-
nation is very wide, matching that of the AVL. Tubercles are present on the
dorsal, anterior and posterior quadrants but they are very sparse on the ventral
quadrant.
The anterior dorsolateral (ADL) is known from two specimens, one of
which (SAM-—K4648) shows part of the trunk armour preserved in lateral view.
This specimen can be associated with the holotype because of the similarity
of ornament and the fact that there is evidence of scales on the body. Among
the ‘dolichothoracids’ the ADL of Barrydalaspis resembles that of Tiaraspis.
Both are tall and narrow and have a dorsal margin which slopes postero-
dorsally and have the anteroventral angle produced. This last feature is also
seen in Neophlyctaenius sherwoodi (Denison 1950, fig. 2). The bone is divided
into lateral and dorsolateral faces by a prominent ridge below which runs the
lateral line canal. A small trochlear is developed on the anteromesial edge,
immediately in front of where the ridge and lateral line converge. Beneath the
trochlear the anterior margin is swollen to resemble an obstantic process, but
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
o. MD
10mm
0. AL
Fig. 4. Barrydalaspis theroni gen. et sp. nov. Restoration of anterior dorsolateral of left side.
Based on SAM-K4648. 1.1—lateral line, o. AL—area overlapped by anterolateral, o. MD—
area overlapped by median dorsal, tr—trochlear.
it is impossible to determine if an articular face was present. The lateral face of
the anteroventral corner is marked by a prominent groove. This is a feature
usually found in brachythoracid arthrodires where it receives the dorsal part
of the postbranchial lamina. The presence of this groove thus suggests that
the dorsal part of the AL may have been inturned. The surface of the ADL is
ornamented with tubercles which become larger along the posterior margin
and along the crest of the ridge. The centre of radiation is found at the base of
the trochlear.
One specimen (SAM-K4648) shows evidence of a posterior dorsolateral
but, apart from noting the fact that it is a large plate, it is too incomplete to
merit further comment. A relatively large plate is significant in showing that the
lateral face of the trunk armour is not ‘reduced’ as it is in many brachythoracids.
The holotype and SAM-—4643 show impressions of scales behind the trunk
armour. The latter specimen shows that the scales are moderately large, deeper
than long and completely cover at least 10 cm of the body. The scales immedi-
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 135
ately behind the posterior dorsolateral plate are deeper than those above or
below and in this respect the squamation is similar to that seen in Sigaspis
Goujet (1973, fig. 3a). There are impressions of dorsal ridge scales but no further
details of these or the flank scales can be established.
Relationships of Barrydalaspis
The interrelationships of the arthrodire groups have recently been reviewed
by Miles (1973) and Miles & Young (1977) and some rational outline of arthro-
dire phylogeny has been proposed. Within the cladistic framework provided by
these authors, Barrydalaspis is to be regarded as a phlyctaenioid arthrodire by
virtue of the possession of a ‘ball and socket’ dermal neck joint. Unfortunately,
the relationships of Barrydalaspis cannot be considered further due to lack of
information about the head and the median dorsal plate. The suborder Phlyctae-
nioidei of Miles contains the collateral infraorders Phlyctaenii and Brachy-
thoracii. The latter can be shown to be monophyletic (Miles 1973) based on
synapomorphies in features of the head and the median dorsal plate. The former,
as Miles admits, is possibly a grade group. In other words monophyly has not
yet been demonstrated for the Phlyctaenii (families Tiaraspidae, Groenland-
aspididae, Phlyctaenaspidae, Williamaspididae and the genus Aggeraspis) and
more rigorous analysis of the species included within the Phlyctaenii is necessary.
Some recent work suggests that Tiaraspis and Groenlandaspis may be sister
groups based on the synapomorphies of a high median dorsal plate and the
fact that the lateral line, in crossing the posterior dorsolateral describes a sharp
dorsal flexure. These two genera, plus an unnamed form from the Middle
Devonian of Australia, are included in the Groenlandaspididae by Ritchie
(1975).
Thus to place Barrydalaspis as Suborder Phlyctaenioidei incertae sedis
means that it shows the synapomorphy of that Suborder but that the material
does not allow us to specify its position within that group. Barrydalaspis
resembles some members of the Brachythoracii in showing a prominent groove
on the ADL to receive the AL but it is not yet clear whether this should be
regarded as a synapomorphy of the brachythoracids or as a feature primitive
for the Phlyctaenioidei.
‘Phlyctaenaspid arthrodire’
The second type of placoderm which is recognizable in the present collec-
tion is known from ventral views of the trunk armour and a partial AL which is
associated with the ventral plate because of the similarity of the ornament. This
arthrodire is distinct from Barrydalaspis in a number of respects: the ventral
armour of the trunk is much longer and narrower; the SP is set at a much lower
angle (i.e. it is more nearly parallel to the sagittal plane) and lacks the medial
denticles; the SP appears to be fused with the AVL throughout its length; the
lateral end of the IL is swollen to produce what is here termed an ‘elbow’; the
ornament consists of coarse tubercles along the outer edge of the SP and IL
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
20mm
Fig. 5. ‘Phlyctaenaspid arthrodire’. Restoration of ventral thoracic armour in ventral view.
Based on SAM-K4640. Abbreviations as in Fig. 1.
but elsewhere is represented by minute tubercles.
The proportions and shape of the ventral armour are similar to both
Neophlyctaenius sherwoodi (Denison 1950) and Gaspeaspis Pageau (1969). The
former is from the late Middle or early Upper Devonian of New York State,
the latter from the early Middle Devonian of Gaspé Peninsula, Quebec. As in
Gaspeaspis, the South African form shows AVLs which meet one another in
the mid-line, leaving only small areas for the anterior and posterior median
ventrals (these were not seen in the South African form). The ‘Ventrolateral-
kante’ is well developed and there was probably a long postbrachial lamina.
The South African phlyctaenaspid differs from both N. sherwoodi and Gaspeaspis
in the relatively longer AVL and the fusion of that plate with the SP. The division
between the IL and SP is recognized as a deep groove. The prominent elbow of
the ILis matched elsewhere in the Lower Devonian phlyctaenaspid Dicksonosteus
(see Goujet 1975, pl. 4 (fig. 1)). An incomplete AL (SAM-K4775) which can
be referred to the ventral armour is tall with a wide pectoral emargination and
a focal point which is situated ventral to the centre of the bone. Distinctively
the dorsal margin slopes anteroventrally towards the front. This last feature is
‘SLLYA-INVS JO SUIMeIp eplony e1oweD ~s11poiyjie prdseuoryoAyyd, Jo oyejd jesrojeoINUY “g
OS9PA-INVS JO SurMesp epion] eroweD “Aou “ds jo ‘usd iWosay) sidspjopdadpg JO opis 1YBII Jo o1eId [eIo\e[OINUY “WY °9 ‘Shy
137
WW O}
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
aN I a a ER ASE I LE LS IIL TRISTE SB ait
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
rare among arthrodires but is seen in species currently referred to Phlyctaenaspis
and in Arctolepis decipiens (see illustrations in White 1969, figs 2-21).
In summary, this South African form is considered to be a phlyctaenaspid
because it lacks the anteroventrals (a derived feature of actinolepoids (Miles
& Young 1977)) and because it shows phenetic resemblances in the proportions
of the ventral thoracic armour and constituent plates to certain phlyctaenaspid
genera.
Arthrodire head
One specimen (SAM-—K4748) shows the matrix impression of the under-
surface of a partial skull roof. It cannot be associated with either of the two
types described above although it is of a size that would match either. Further-
Cael
Sere
Fig. 7. Arthrodire head. Camera lucida drawing of internal cast of a partial skull roof,
SAM-K4748. Ce—central, M—marginal, Nu—nuchal, Po—postorbital, Pro—preorbital,
Sc.c—impression left by semicircular canals, Ce.s.c.—central sensory canal, Cl.l—cephalic
division of the main lateral line.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 139
more, it cannot be assumed that the pattern of sutures visible on the under-
surface of the skull roof corresponds faithfully to that on the upper surface,
which is the surface most frequently studied. For these reasons our remarks
about this specimen must be limited.
The anterior end of the nuchal is narrow, gently rounded and reaches a
considerable distance between the centrals. The postorbital is short and broad
with the posterior margin orientated transversely. These features are seen in
combination in Gaspeaspis (Pageau 1969, fig. 20). The marginal has a broad
area of contact with the central, a feature rarely seen in actinolepoids but
common in phlyctaenaspids, Groenlandaspis and Aggeraspis. What little that
can be seen of the paths of the sensory canals agrees with that expected in a
‘dolichothoracid’.
Undetermined arthrodire
In the collection there is one specimen (SAM-K4646, Fig. 8A) of a large
arthrodire which shows coarse ornamentation unlike the forms already described
Fig. 8. A. Silicone mould of the right side of part of the trunk armour of a large arthrodire,
SAM-K4646. ADL—anterior dorsolateral, PDL—posterior dorsolateral, PIL—postero-
lateral, 1.1—lateral line, o.AL—overlap area for anterolateral.
B. ?Chimaeroid egg case. Silicone mould of SAM-K4814.
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
from this locality. If we have interpreted this specimen correctly, this represents
an impression of the posterior part of the flank of trunk armour displaying
parts of the anterior dorsolateral, posterior dorsolateral and posterolateral.
The anteroventral margin of the ADL and the anterior margin of the PL are
similar to those in Groenlandaspis antarcticus Ritchie (1975). Gavin Young
(pers. comm.) suggests that the size and pattern of ornament shown in this
specimen is similar to the ornamentation seen in the Antarctic Groenlandaspis.
However, it is to be admitted that similarity in ornament is a weak basis for
associating this single South African specimen with the Antarctic Groenlandaspis
and in consequence this specimen is left unnamed.
?CHIMAEROID
There is, in the collection, a specimen of an egg capsule (Fig. 8B), 160 mm
in length and with approximately thirty-two unbranched narrow transverse
ridges in each lateral flange.
The egg capsules of living chimaeroids are leathery, bilaterally symmetrical
and elliptical in outline. They possess a membranous lateral web, which may be
strengthened by simple or branched, rib-like thickenings and the margin of
which can be fimbriate or entire.
Presumably by analogy with these Recent types, some eleven fossil
chimaeroid eggs have been described. The earliest descriptions are of forms
from the Middle Jurassic of Germany (Bessels 1869; Jaekel 1901) while the
majority of later finds have been those from the Upper Cretaceous (Gill 1905;
Dean 1909; Brown 1946; Voronets 1952; Vakhrameey & Pushcharovskii
1954; Obruchev 1967). Additional material has been described from the
Jurassic of Canada (Warren 1947) and the Oligocene of the U.S.A. (Brown
1946). A rather differently shaped form, almost butterfly-like, has been recorded
from the Triassic of Connecticut (Bock 1949) but this is possibly a pteropod.
Thus the find reported here takes the known occurrence of these supposed
egg capsules back into the Devonian. In this respect it is interesting to note
that the Chimaeroidei extend back only to the Jurassic (Toarcian) although
members of the Menaspoidei first occur in the Upper Devonian (Patterson 1967).
If, however, pelvic claspers are a primitive feature of the elasmobranchiomorphs,
as is suggested by their presence in ptyctodonts, then it is reasonable to assume
that placoderms also produced egg cases (Patterson 1965) and that the egg case
reported above may be that of a placoderm.
ACANTHODIAN
A specimen of an incomplete pectoral spine of Gyracanthides (Fig. 9) is
present in the collection. The spine is flattened and is deeply grooved along the
medial edge of the posterior half. The upper and lower surfaces are marked
with tuberculated ribs which pass obliquely across the surface and meet in a
chevron pattern along the free edge. A prominent ridge runs the length of this
free edge.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 141
30mm
Fig. 9. Gyracanthides sp. Pectoral spine. Freehand sketch of rubber latex cast.
Gyracanthides is known by two species, G. murrayi (Woodward 1906),
from the Mansfield Slate of Victoria, Australia, and G. warreni White (1968)
from the Aztec Siltstone of Victoria Land, Antarctica. The latter is known only
from two specimens representing part of the base of a pectoral spine, perhaps
of the same individual (White 1968).
The South African Gyracanthides is similar to G. warreni in a number of
biometric details. In both, the ribs and alternating grooves are of equal width;
the ribs are almost straight; there are nine to ten ribs per cm at the base of the
insertion area and thirteen to fifteen just behind this level (these counts are
taken by placing a cm scale at 90° to the direction of ribbing) and the tubercles
on the ribs are very closely packed. Thus, the South African Gyracanthides and
G. warreni are similar in all features in which the two can be compared and there
is every reason to regard them as being conspecific. Gyracanthides murrayi
differs from G. warreni in that the pectoral spine and the ribs are more strongly
curved and the ribs are spaced further apart, as are the tubercles upon the ribs.
THE PLANT REMAINS
The plants associated with the fish fauna consist of various types of lyco-
pods, preserved either as ‘external moulds’ (‘impressions’), or in some cases as
matrix infillings of the cortical cavity within the stem (‘endocortical casts’).
Before describing the fossils, this form of preservation must be briefly reviewed.
Available for study were a number of latex casts prepared from moulds
in the original matrix in South Africa, and sent to London. There was also a
rather smaller number of specimens on the rock matrix, where this had been
sent to London for study of the associated fish. From these, additional casts
were made in latex or silicone rubber.
The lycopods represented evidently had a relatively tough cortical cylinder
(Fig. 10A) within which (by analogy with Palaeozoic lycopods preserved
uncompressed, as petrifications) a small stele (circle in that figure) was sur-
rounded by a broader middle cortical cavity. As the fragmented stems became
buried in matrix, this cavity became filled with mud (with or without the stelar
woody cylinder at the centre).
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
we wege+vweeeeweewiwivif 2 + ef ef + ~~ =
'@@@e@00800060006 0 06600606 0 @
e e ee e
eee
e
d’@
Fig. 10. Compression of stem of a lycopod such as Archaeosigillaria, producing the two types
of fossil, endocortical cast (EC) and the external mould (EM). A. Stem lying horizontally in
matrix (M). Matrix both surrounds it and fills the cortical cavity. The stem outer surface
shows protruding leaf cushions; the only features on the cortical inner surface are indentations
corresponding to the position of the passage of a vascular trace into the cortex. The positions
of these indentations will correspond to the position of the leaf cushion. B. Compressed
matrix (M) and coaly matter of the plant (Co). (The lower half only is shown.) On the outer
surface protrusion of the leaf cushions is reduced with little distortion of their horizontal
dimensions. The greater compressibility of plant tissue as against matrix caused collapse of
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 143
On compression, with resulting collapse of the plant tissue, the matrix
filling the cortical cavity became compressed to a rod of matrix of ellipsoidal
cross-section (Fig. 10B). In all cases studied, the plant material was missing,
being represented either by a gap (white region in Fig. 10C), or by a dark brown
(iron-rich?) porous mineral substance. The surface of an endocortical cast
(EC in Fig. 10C) of such a fossil is revealed by a fracture plane passing between
the cast and the enclosing matrix, i.e. the external mould. It generally shows
(Fig. 14E) a topography dependent partly on any indentations on the inner
surface of the cortex (e.g. passage of leaf trace, etc.) and partly on the collapse
of the plant material on compression into features (e.g. leaf cushions) on the
stem outer surface. Endocortical casts in this material typically show several
series of longitudinal rows of bosses (Figs 12E, 14E) which correspond to the
positions of leaf cushions on the original stem outer surface. They may show
a small central protrusion which was a depression on the inner face of the
cortex (EC in Fig. 10C). Latex ‘moulds’ were prepared (La in Fig. 10D) from
such endocortical casts. It must be emphasized that the topography of these
endocortical casts corresponds only in the broadest way to the original external
appearance of the stem.
The external mould (or impression in the matrix) of the original outer
surface shows a closer approximation to the original appearance of the stem.
External features (e.g. leaf cushions, represented symbolically by ridges in
Fig. 10A) appear in somewhat reduced topography, on such an external mould
(EM in Fig. 10E). Latex casts (La in Fig. 10E), approximating to the original
outer surface of the plant, may be prepared from such a mould (e.g. Fig. 13A—B).
Where leaves were still attached to such a stem, evidence of their presence
is normally seen on an external mould. Where a leaf has a broad expanded base
(leaf cushion) the leaf plus cushion became compressed on the upper and lower
surfaces of the cylindrical stem. Such a leaf is shown in Figure 11A as though
lying on the lower surface of a stem. On compression and subsequent removal
(by weathering or diagenesis) of the plant material the leaf cushion is repre-
sented in the external mould by a depression in the matrix (Fig. 11C). At the
bottom of this depression a narrow slit extends into the rock matrix representing
the site of the lamina of the leaf. When latex is poured on to such a mould,
the shape and topography of the leaf cushion are shown faithfully, but usually
the latex (La in Fig. 11D), does not penetrate into the narrow mould of the
the matrix filling the endocortical cavity into the area behind the leaf cushions. The matrix
forming the endocortical cast now also shows raised bosses, corresponding to the positions
of leaf cushions. C. Subsequently some, or all, of the coaly matter is removed leaving the two
matrix surfaces, the endocortical cast (EC) and the external mould (EM). D. Upper half of the
endocortical cast (EC) exposed by fracture plane passing over cast surface, together with latex
mould (La) prepared from it, a negative version of the cortical cavity (a plaster cast taken from
this mould will correspond to the original endocortical cast). E. Latex cast (La) of the external
mould (EM), corresponding to the original (compressed) stem surface with protruding leaf
cushions.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 11. Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae sp. nov. Compression of leaf and leaf cushion resulting
in the production, in the latex mould, of a leaf cushion showing only the ‘false leaf
scar’. A. Original shape of leaf and cushion (as seen in profile at edge of stem in Figs 12C, 13B),
surrounded by uncompressed matrix (M) which also fills the endocortical cavity; the leaf lies
in the matrix as on the lower surface of a horizontal steni. PT —plant tissue. B. Compression
distorts the shape of both leaf base and leaf. The leaf cushion becomes less protruding, the
thickness of the leaf lamina is reduced and its angle of emergence is decreased. Co—coaly
matter. C. Removal of coaly matter (by subsequent diagenesis or weathering) gives a negative
impression of the leaf cushion with a narrow mould of the leaf lamina going down into the
matrix. D. Latex (La) applied to this negative mould fails to penetrate the narrow mould of
the leaf lamina, leaving a ‘false leaf scar’ on the (positive) cast of the leaf cushion (Fig. 13A—B,
f.l.s. in Fig. 12D).
leaf itself. As a result, the leaf cushion, seen (as a protruding ‘positive’ feature)
on the latex cast prepared from this mould, does not show the leaf but merely
a transverse marking—a kind of ‘false leaf scar’—in the middle of the cushion
(f.l.s. in Fig. 12D) where the latex failed to flow into the narrow space repre-
senting the leaf. In such a specimen the leaf may be seen in profile at one or
both margins of the compressed stem (Fig. 12C; see left side of Fig. 13B).
In one specimen of Archaeosigillaria cf. picosensis the narrow mould of the
leaf itself was wide enough to allow latex to enter, so producing a somewhat
flattened replica of the original leaves attached to the leaf cushion surface
(Figs 12A-B, 14A, F).
Although, in what is said above, the distinction is made between an endo-
cortical cast and the external mould, the former may be encountered lying, in
effect, within the latter (Fig. 14B). In this case, the visible surface features are
those of the endocortical cast, but the leaves may be seen in profile at the margin
(Fig. 14C-D). Unfortunately, there were no cases of ‘part-and-counterpart’
specimens, where external mould and endocortical cast could be seen on
opposed, fractured, faces of matrix. .
Two well-defined taxa of lycopods may be recognized in this material;
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 145
one is made the basis of a new species and the other is compared with a South
American species. Two further kinds of rather less satisfactory lycopod fossils
are also described.
Division TRACHEOPHYTA
Class LYCOPsIDA
Order PROTOLEPIDODENDRALES
Family Archaeosigillariaceae
Genus Archaeosigillaria Kidston
Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae sp. nov.
(Figs 12C-D, 13A-B)
Etymology
Named after Dr Edna Plumstead who has contributed so much to our
knowledge of South African Palaeozoic plants.
Holotype
185B, external mould (Fig. 13A).
Paratypes
161, 190A, 192A, 175. Silicone and rubber casts from the type material,
two natural external moulds, are shown in Figure 13A-B.
Diagnosis
Fragments of lycopod leafy stems up to 1,5 cm diameter and 11 cm in
length, represented by external moulds. Stem surface completely covered by
hexagonal cushions, each typically 6,5 mm wide by 4 mm high, upper and
lower edges of leaf cushions flat and in contact with cushions above and below.
Cushions arranged in vertical ranks with corresponding orthostichies in alter-
nating series. Leaves seen only in profile at margin of flattened stem mould;
free part of leaf typically 6 mm long, leaving stem at about 45° and diverging
from it, the apical part of the leaf being almost perpendicular to the stem.
Shape of lamina otherwise unknown, but evidently not thicker than 1 mm.
No evidence of leaf abscission nor of ligule or ligule pit.
Remarks
As indicated above, the shape of the leaf lamina may be seen in profile at
the edges of the compressed stem (Fig. 13A, left-hand side) but over the stem
surface the leaves (represented by cavities in the matrix of the fossil) cannot be
seen (Fig. 11D). The latex poured into this natural mould evidently failed to
flow into these cavities. Thus the only clear feature on each hexagonal leaf
cushion is a transverse line at the widest part of the cushion (f.l.s. in Fig. 12D).
This is rather comparable to the ‘false leaf scar’ of a lycopod compression
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
fossil when a fracture plane has detached the leaf in the counterpart fossil
(cf. Chaloner & Boureau 1967: 533). It must be borne in mind that whatever
is seen of the leaf lamina in profile at the flattened stem margin (Figs 12C, 13B)
is only a minimum length. It may actually have been longer, depending on the
shape and taper of the leaf (cf. Lacey 1962, fig. 12A, D). There is no evidence of
Fig. 12. Archaeosigillaria and ‘lycopod endocortical cast .
A-D. Leaves and leaf bases of both species of Archaeosigillaria. Drawn from photographs of
the latex cast. A-B. Archaeosigillaria sp. cf. A. picosensis Krausel & Dolianiti. A. Rhomboidal
leaf cushion with leaf attached, 2 mm long, probably complete, lying parallel to the stem sur-
face, with its sides tapering abruptly to form a spatulate tip; SAM-—K4785. B. Another leaf
cushion, with a small tab-like and probably incomplete leaf emerging from the centre of the
leaf cushion; SAM-—K4785. C—D. Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae sp. nov. C. Leaf seen in
profile at side of stem, showing uncompressed dimensions of leaf cushion, and thickness of
leaf lamina (as in Fig. 11A). Leaf emerging at 45° and diverging from the stem to become
nearly perpendicular to it; 190A. D. Leaf cushion of holotype (as in Fig. 13A). Hexagonal,
strongly protruding leaf cushion, featureless apart from the false leaf scar (f.l.s.), a transverse
line at the widest part of the cushion; 185B.
E. ‘Lycopod endocortical cast’ with bosses on the surface produced by processes of compression
and collapse explained in Figure 10. The bulge in the centre of each boss is interpreted as a
feature produced by the site of passage of the leaf trace into the cortex.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 147
Fig. 13. A-B. Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae sp. nov. Latex casts coated with ammonium
chloride and illuminated from top left. A. Holotype, 185B. Stem showing three rows of con-
tiguous hexagonal leaf cushions. x 3. B. Paratype, 161. x 3. Both specimens showing leaves
in profile on the left.
C_D. Lycopod ?endocortical cast, cf. Haplostigma irregulare Seward. Illuminated from top
left. SAM-K4744. C. Plaster cast prepared from latex mould, representing the original rock
surface, showing circular raised features corresponding to positions of leaf bases. x 3. D. Latex
mould showing positions of leaf bases as depressions. x 3.
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
leaf shedding (abscission) in these specimens; none shows a leaf scar, and hence
no parichnos or vascular scar could have been represented. There is no evidence
of a ligule. One specimen shows several missing leaf bases (Fig. 13A, bottom
and right of specimen). The most probable explanation of this is that secondary
growth of the cortex caused eventual sloughing off of the whole leaf cushions,
as in the case of Sigillaria (Chaloner & Collinson 1975).
Grierson & Banks (1963), in their emended generic diagnosis of Archaeo-
sigillaria (which the authors generally follow), do not regard this genus as
having leaf cushions, and refer only to ‘enlarged leaf bases becoming hexagonal
on larger stems’. Their figure of the leaf of A. vanuxemi in profile (their pl. 35
(fig. 4)) conforms closely with that seen in our specimens. They further state
(Grierson & Banks 1963: 239) that the leaves of their plant ‘were persistent and
that the six-sided leaf bases cannot be regarded as true cushions from which the
leaf abscissed but rather as merely the enlarged base of the leaf’. The authors
prefer to follow the broader concept of a leaf cushion developed by Meyen
(1976) and regard the swollen leaf bases of their plant as constituting cushions
even though the leaf was not abscissed, and would emphasize that they differ
from Grierson & Banks only in terminology, and not in interpretation of their
plant.
The broad leaf cushions of the present species with flat upper and lower
faces in contact with cushions above and below are reminiscent of some Upper
Carboniferous Sigillaria species, particularly those of the Favularia group
(e.g. S. elegans Brongniart, particularly the specimens figured as S. hexagona
Brongniart, a synonym of the former species). However, of course, Archaeo-
sigillaria plumsteadiae differs from all Sigillaria species in having no indication
of leaf abscission. The appearance of the leaf cushions and the profile view of
the leaves in the present species are most closely matched in Archaeosigillaria
kidstoni where the much smaller leafy shoots show comparable hexagonal leaf
cushions (Lacey 1962, fig. 12B—C; Chaloner & Boureau 1967).
Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae shows good general agreement with several
species of Archaeosigillaria including A. vanuxemi, A. kidstoni, and with the
Ghanaian A. essiponensis (Mensah & Chaloner 1971). It is noteworthy that
these are all Lower Carboniferous species.
Comparison with A. caespitosa (Schwartz) Plumstead from the Witteberg
is limited, as the holotype of this species is apparently an endocortical cast
(Plumstead 1967, pl. 11 (fig. 2)), and none of the specimens she assigns to that
species shows details of leaf shape. A. plumsteadiae differs from all other species
of the genus with hexagonal leaf cushions in their being broader than long.
It must be accepted that this distinction is relatively trivial, but on available
information this separates the present species consistently from earlier described
ones. The authors endorse Meyen’s (1976) emphasis on the need for as wide a
range of specimens as possible in order to establish the extent and variability
in fragments of lycopod stems. Unfortunately, as here, such a range is not always
available.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 149
Archaeosigillaria sp. cf. A. picosensis Krausel & Dolianiti
(Figs 12A-B, 14A, F—G)
Material
SAM-K4785 (Fig. 12A, B; Fig. 14A, F), ‘D’ (Fig. 14G), SAM-K4650.
Description
This species is represented by several specimens showing fragments of
stem outer surface, seen only as a natural mould (i.e. a negative version of the
original stem surface) in the matrix. The stem surface is formed of contiguous
rhomboidal to rounded-rhomboidal leaf cushions (expanded leaf bases), typi-
cally 4 mm wide by 2,5 mm high, arranged in prominent alternating vertical
series. Arrangement of the cushions must have been either in alternating
whorls or a very low angle spiral. The leaves were still in attachment, the free
portion being about 1 mm wide and 2 mm long.
Remarks
No leaves are seen in profile at the edges of the specimens as in the last
species, perhaps because they represent fragments of a larger stem rather than
parts of a complete cylinder. However, latex evidently penetrated the leaf
cavities in the mould more freely than in A. plumsteadiae (possibly due to greater
thickness of the leaves) so that something of the form of the leaves is seen in
the latex cast of the stem prepared from the mould (Figs 12A—B, 14A, F). This
can be compared with the situation in A. conferta (Menendez 1965) where leaves
are seen on the surface because the fracture plane exposing the fossil followed
the plane of the leaf laminae rather than the stem surface. It is possible that
these small tab-like leaves (seen in the latex casts) represent incomplete infill by
the latex of a larger leaf cavity, or possibly the original leaf shape was somewhat
eroded before fossilization. It is interesting to compare the situation here with
that in A. plumsteadiae, where the latex did not penetrate the leaf cavity. On
one of the specimens (Fig. 14G) there is evidence of secondary cortical growth
resulting in the lateral separation of the leaf bases revealing (?) cortical tissue
between them. This is, of course, a common phenomenon in many Lepidodendron
species (Thomas 1966).
In the leaf shape and arrangement this material agrees well with those
species of Archaeosigillaria seen to have short tab-like leaves turning abruptly
from the leaf cushion to parallel the stem surface or lie obliquely to it; these
include A. vanuxemi, A. kidstoni, and A. essiponensis, with leaves showing at
the side of the stem, and more particularly A. picosensis. This plant, from the
Picos member in Brazil (Lower Devonian according to Krausel & Dolianiti
1957), is preserved like the specimens here as a natural mould with leaves
showing on the surface and is the closest species to the Bokkeveld plant. Those
authors describe their specimen (free translation from the German summary)
as ‘small stems, [covered with] leaf cushions pressed together, rounded-angular
to rhomboidal, also in part hexagonal, bearing in their upper part a small
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
thin leaf’ (literally, leaflet). It should be noted that the age of Krausel & Doli-
aniti’s specimen, cited by them as Lower Devonian, may well be much younger.
Sampaio & Northfleet (1973) offer an age correlation for the Picos member
(of the Pimenteiras Formation) as ranging between Emsian and Eifelian;
Bar & Riegel (1974) favour ‘Middle Devonian Age’. The age of A. picosensis is
probably best placed only within a broad bracket between Emsian and Frasnian
(Brito 1971, fig. 10).
LYCOPOD ENDOCORTICAL CASTS
(Fig. 14B-E)
Material
SAM-K4790, K4798a.
Remarks
The specimen illustrated in Figure 14E is one of several in the latex casts
available in which the topography of the fossil appears to represent only a very
blurred version of the lycopod stem. This cannot be reconciled with leaf bases
or remains of attached leaves, and this fossil is interpreted as representing an
endocortical cast. This shows the positions of leaves in the form of bulges or
bosses on the endocortical cast, which simulate leaf bases or cushions (EC in
Figs 10C—D, 12E, 14E). One of these casts K4798a (Fig. 14B-D), besides
showing these vertically seriated bosses, also shows leaves in profile along the
margin. The leaves appear to be preserved in a brown mineral substance which
must have come to occupy the site of the original plant tissue. This mineral
matter is a thin layer on the outside of the cast, representing the cortical tissue
and leaf bases of the stem. The leaves are somewhat similar to those of some
species of Archaeosigillaria, such as A. essiponensis (Mensah & Chaloner 1971)
and A. kidstoni (Lacey 1962; Chaloner & Boureau 1967), being short with a
broad base and tapering towards the apex.
On the other cast SAM-K4790 (Fig. 14E) this mineral matter is not
present, and on the left-hand side a cavity can be seen representing the gap
between the endocortical cast and the external mould, i.e. the site of cortical
Fig. 14. A, F, G. Archaeosigillaria sp. cf. A. picosensis Krausel and Dolianiti. A. Latex cast
of a fragment of an external mould showing contiguous rhomboidal leaf bases with attached
leaves, one of which, near top left, is more complete than the others; SAM—K4785. F. Scanning
Electron Micrograph photograph of an area of the same specimen, taken on a Cambridge S600
at a stub angle of 10°. (Horizontal axis only, x 12.) G. Latex cast showing separation of leaf
bases, SAM ‘D’ x 7,5.
B-E. Indeterminable lycopod endocortical casts. Photographs of original rock surface.
B. Part of cast immersed in alcohol, photographed to show vertical files of raised bosses on
the surface. At both sides there is a thin layer of mineral matter, representing the site of original
plant tissue, and showing leaves in profile, one on the left-hand edge, three on the right.
SAM-K4798a. x 3. C-D. Detail of leaves (immersed in alcohol). Short leaves with a broad
base tapering to a thin lamina, at about 45° to the stem surface. x 5.
E. Cast photographed dry, lighting from top left, showing seriated raised bosses; SAM-K4790.
x Bb
151
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
152 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tissue. These endocortical casts are generally comparable to those formed on
the matrix infill inside A. essiponensis (cf. Plumstead 1967, pl. 11 (fig. 2); Mensah
& Chaloner 1971, pl. 64 (fig. 7)), but other genera can produce similar casts
(e.g. Plumstead 1967, pl. 15 (fig. 3) attributed to Haplostigma). The authors
do not believe that such fossils can be assigned to genera based on charac-
teristics of leaf cushion shape and prefer to leave these present specimens
unassigned.
Lycopod ?endocortical cast, cf. Haplostigma irregulare Seward
(Fig. 13C-D)
Description
The specimen figured in Figure 13D (and a plaster cast prepared from that
latex mould, so representing the original rock surface, Fig. 13C) shows vertically
seriated round markings on a grooved stem surface, the grooves apparently
separating elongated leaf cushions. This specimen is preserved as a ‘positive’
cast apparently showing detail of the surface topography, rather than the
blurred bosses described above. It is believed that this is due to the plant posses-
sing only a narrow zone of cortical tissue, which in compression would collapse
to a uniformly thin layer more or less conforming to the stem’s original external
topography on both surfaces. No leaves are in evidence in the material, and it
is not clear whether they were abscissed. It is accordingly regarded as generically
indeterminable but is figured since it shows some resemblance to the holotype
of Haplostigma irregulare Seward, 1903, from the Bokkeveld (as refigured by
Plumstead 1967, pl. 13 (fig. 3), pl. 14 (fig. 5)). It is also comparable to the speci-
mens attributed to the same species by Krausel (1960, fig. 88) from the Ponta
Grossa Formation of Brazil.
DISCUSSION
The Bokkeveld Series consists of alternating bands of sandstone and shale
which vary in number and thickness over wide areas of the Cape Province
(Plumstead 1967). This is overlain conformably by the Witteberg Series. Most
authors divide the Bokkeveld Series into lower and upper beds which, by reason
of the contained fossils, are thought to represent marine and shallow marine/
freshwater deposits respectively. One author, Swart (1950), suggests that in at
least one locality shallow marine conditions persisted throughout the Bokkeveld
Series. In the Barrydale area the more usual freshwater beds are clearly seen,
and the fish are found in these upper beds of the Series.
The interpretation of the lower beds as representing marine conditions is
well founded. A large number of marine species have been described (Lake 1904;
Reed 1925 and refs; Haughton 1969) including lamellibranchs, brachiopods,
trilobites, gastropods, cephalopods, corals and crinoids. A consensus of opinion
holds that the lower marine beds of the Bokkeveld Series are of Lower Devonian
age, and Boucot ef al. (1967) are more precise in suggesting an Emsian age.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 153
Further, several authors (Du Toit 1939; Doumani 1965; Haughton 1969) note
the close similarity of the marine faunas of the Bokkeveld with the presumed
contemporaneous strata in the Falkland Islands, Bolivia, Argentina, southern
Brazil and Antarctica. Therefore, on the strength of the evidence of the under-
lying marine sequence, the fish- and plant-bearing beds of the Bokkeveld Series
cannot be older than Middle Devonian.
The only information available here (J. N. Theron, pers. comm.) on the
position of the fish fauna is that it is some ‘6 000 ft’ below the fish zone of the
Upper Witteberg (Gardiner 1969) and as such may be anything from Middle
Devonian to Lower Carboniferous. At first sight the fact that the fauna con-
tains two dolichothoracid arthrodires suggests a Lower/Middle Devonian age
since the dolichothoracids reached their acme in the Emsian/Eifelian (Miles
1969). Nevertheless, Groenlandaspis is a widespread late Devonian representa-
tive of the dolichothoracids, while Neophlyctaenius survived into the Frasnian
in the eastern United States (Denison 1950). Since one of the dolichothoracids
is a completely new form and the other closely resembles Phlyctaenius, their
stratigraphic significance is not apparent. Similarly, the occurrence of large
arthrodire plates resembling Groenlandaspis does no more than confirm a
Middle or Upper Devonian age. However, from the same general area as the
other specimens, but not, unfortunately, as accurately located within the
sequence, occurs a spine of the large acanthodian Gyracanthides. Elsewhere
Gyracanthides is recorded from the Upper Devonian of Victorialand, Ant-
arctica (White 1968) and the Lower Carboniferous of Mansfield, Australia
(Woodward 1906).
The Upper Devonian Antarctic fish fauna from Victorialand is charac-
terized by the presence of Bothriolepis, Phyllolepis, Groenlandaspis, holopty-
chiids and various acanthodians and sharks (Gavin Young pers. comm.)
whereas the Australian Lower Carboniferous fauna from Mansfield has Strep-
sodus, Ctenodus, Elonichthys and three acanthodian genera but no placoderm
genera. There can be little doubt that the Antarctic fauna is Upper Devonian
(Young 1974) and if this South African fauna is to be interpreted as being of
similar age then the absence of more typical Upper Devonian forms such as
Bothriolepis, Phyllolepis and Holoptychius from the Bokkeveld is difficult to
understand. Nevertheless the presence of a typical Lower Carboniferous fish
fauna in the overlying Witteberg Series, some 1 800 m (6000 ft) above the
fish-bearing layer of the Bokkeveld convinces the authors that the fauna under
discussion must be at least of Upper Devonian age and the only safe con-
clusion that can be drawn is that the fish fauna is Middle/Upper Devonian.
The only plants in this flora which may be of significance in dating these
rocks are the two species of Archaeosigillaria, and in particular the very distinc-
tive A. plumsteadiae. Plants belonging to this genus range from Middle Devonian
to Upper Carboniferous (Banks 1960; Grierson & Banks 1963; Lejal 1970;
Mensah & Chaloner 1971). Recently Lejal-Nicol (1975) has described a number
of typically Middle or Upper Devonian and Lower Carboniferous lycopod
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
genera (including Protolepidodendron, Lepidodendropsis, Lepidosigillaria and
Archaeosigillaria) from Libya. Lejal-Nicol maintains that these deposits are
of Lower Devonian age, and a further flora is described containing A. kidstoni
from rocks believed to be of Pre-Siegenian age (either Gedinnian or Siluro-
Devonian). These genera, which are characterized by various peculiarities of
their leaf cushion shape and arrangement, do not appear in Europe and North
America until the Middle or Upper Devonian (Grierson & Banks 1963;
Chaloner & Boureau 1967). Typical lycopods of the Lower Devonian from
continents other than Africa (e.g. Drepanophycus and Baragwanathia) show no
significant development of leaf base expansion comparable to the cushions
of the later arborescent lycopods. Even in the Middle Devonian lycopods with
a leaf cushion or cushion-like feature (e.g. Protolepidodendron, Leclercqia, and
Colpodexylon) this feature is poorly developed compared with that seen in the
arborescent lycopods of the late Devonian and early Carboniferous. On this
basis an extreme age bracket is put on these Bokkeveld lycopods as Middle
Devonian to Lower Carboniferous, with the strongest possibility of their being
Upper Devonian (Frasnian—Fammenian).
It may be useful to note that shoots of lycopods such as Archaeosigillaria
were evidently among the more robust of plant remains occurring in the Upper
Palaeozoic; they commonly survived when no, or few, other plants were repre-
sented in coarse non-marine lithologies, or even in marine environments.
Archaeosigillaria kidstoni occurs in the coral/brachiopod-rich Carboniferous
Limestone in Britain (Chaloner & Boureau 1967) and the holotype of A.
vanuxemi is closely associated with a brachiopod fauna. The present association
of lycopods with fish remains is therefore not surprising.
The evidence of both the fish and the plants suggests, therefore, that these
fossils come from an horizon within the Bokkeveld Series that is either Middle
or Upper Devonian. Hopefully, further collecting in these strata will yield
fossils giving a more precise stratigraphic position.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We should like to thank Dr J. N. Theron for bringing this material to our
attention. Our thanks are also due to Drs R. S. Miles and G. C. Young for
comments on the fishes, and to Dr O. Rosler and Professors H. P. Banks and
J. D. Grierson for comments on South American stratigraphy and the lycopods.
Finally, we thank the authorities of the South African Museum for allowing us
to comment on this material.
REFERENCES
BANKS, H. P. 1960. Notes on Devonian Lycopods. Senckenberg. leth. 41: 59-88. Mi
BAr, P. & RiEGEL, W. 1974. Les microflores des séries paleozoiques du Ghana (Afrique |
occidentale) et leurs relations paléofloristiques. Bull. Sci. nat. Géol. 27 (1-2): 39-58.
BESSELS, R. 1869. Ueber fossile Selachier-Eier. Jh. Ver. vaterl. Naturk. Wiirtt. 25: 152-155.
Bock, W. 1949. Triassic chimaeroid egg capsules from the Connecticut valley. J. Paleont. 23:
515-517.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 155
Boucot, A. J., JOHNSON, J. G. & TALENT, J. A. 1967. Lower and Middle Devonian faunal
provinces based on brachiopods. In: OswALD, D. H. ed. International symposium on the
Devonian System 2: 1239-1254. Calgary: Alberta Society of Petroleum Geologists.
Brito, I. M. 1971. Contribuicao ao conhecimento dos microfosseis Silurianos & Devonianos
da Bacia do maranhao. V. Acritarcha, Herkomorphitae & Prismatomorphitae. Anais
Acad. bras. Cienc. 43: 201-208.
Brown, R. W. 1946. Fossil egg capsules of chimaeroid fishes. J. Paleont. 20: 261-266.
CHALONER, W. G. & BourEAU, E. 1967. Lycophyta. In: BourEAu, E. ed. Traité de paleo-
botanique 2: 434-802. Paris: Masson et Cie.
CHALONER, W. G. & COLLINSON, M. W. 1975. Application of SEM to a sigillarian impression
fossil. Rev. Palaeobot. Palynol. 20: 85-101.
DEAN, B. 1909. Studies on fossil fishes (sharks, chimaeroids and arthrodires). Mem. Am. Mus.
nat. Hist. 9: 209-287.
DENISON, R. H. 1950. A new arthrodire from the New York State Devonian. Am. J. Sci. 248:
565-580.
DENISON, R. H. 1958. Early Devonian fishes from Utah. Part III. Arthrodira. Fieldiana,
Geol. 11: 461-551.
Doumanl, G. A. 1965. Geologic Setting. Lower Devonian fauna of the Horlick Formation,
Ohio Range, Antarctica. Antarctic Res. Ser. Washington 6: 241-248.
Du Torr, A. L. 1939. Geology of South Africa. 2nd ed. London: Oliver & Boyd.
GARDINER, B. G. 1969. New palaeoniscid fishes from the Witteberg Series of South Africa.
Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 48: 423-452.
Git, T. 1905. An interesting Cretaceous chimaeroid egg-case. Science, Washington 22:
601-602.
GouseT, D. 1973. Sigaspis, un nouvel arthrodire du dévonian inférieur du Spitzbergen. Palae-
ontographica (A) 143: 73-88.
GouseT, D. 1975. Dicksonosteus, un nouvel arthrodire du dévonian du Spitsberg: remarques
sur le squelette visceral des dolicothoraci. Colloques int. Cent. natn. Rech. scient. 218:
81-99.
GRIERSON, J. D. & Banks, H. P. 1963. Lycopods of the Devonian of New York State. Palae-
ontogr. am. 4 (31): 217-295.
Gross, W. 1933. Die unterdevonische Fische und Gigantostraken von overath. Abh. preuss.
geol. Landesanst. (Neue Folge) 145: 41-77.
Gross, W. 1961. Lunaspis broilii und Lunaspis heroldi aus dem Hunsriickschiefer (Unterdevon,
Rheinland). Notizbl. hess. Landesamt. Bodenforsch. Wiesbaden 89: 17-43.
HaucGuton, S. H. 1969. The Geological history of South Africa. Johannesburg: Geologicak
Society of South Africa for the South African Chamber of Mines.
HeInTz, A. 1934. Some remarks about the structure of Ph/lyctaenaspis acadica Whiteaves.
Norsk. geol. Tidsskr. 14: 127-144.
JAEKEL, O. 1901. Ueber Jurassiche Zahne und Eier von Chimariden. Neues Jb. Miner. Geol.
Paldont. BeilBd. 14: 540-564.
KRrAUusEL, R. 1960. Spongiophyton nov. gen. (Thallophyta) & Haplostigma Seward (Pterido-
phyta) no Devoniano inferior do Parana. Monografias Div. geol. miner. Bras. 15: 1-4.
KRAUSEL, R. & DOLIANITI, E. 1957. Restos vegetais das Camadas Picos, Devoniano Inferior
do Piaui. Bolm. Div. geol. Miner. Bras. 173: 7-19.
Lacey, W. S. 1962. Welsh Lower Carboniferous plants. I. The flora of the Lower Brown
Limestone in the Vale of Clwyd. Palaeontographica (B) 111: 126-161.
Lake, P. 1904. The trilobites of the Bokkeveld Beds. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 201-220.
LeyAL, A. 1970. Etude des Archaeosigillariaceae du Djado (Sahara oriental). C. r. Congr.
Socs sav. Paris Sect. Sci. 3: 109-130.
LeEJAL-NIcoL, A. 1975. Sur une nouvelle flore a lycophytes du Dévonien inférieur de la Libye.
Palaeontographica (B) 151: 52-96.
Mark-Kurik, E. 1973. Actinolepis (Arthrodira) from the Middle Devonian of Estonia.
Palaeontographica (A) 143: 89-108.
MENENDEZ, C. 1965. Archaeosigillaria conferta (Frenguelli) nov. comb. del Devonico de la
Quebrada de la Chavela San Juan. Ameghiniana 4: 67-69.
MeENsAH, M. K. & CHALONER, W. G. 1971. Lower Carboniferous lycopods from Ghana.
Palaeontology 14: 357-369.
156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Meyen, S. V. 1976. Carboniferous and Permian lepidophytes of Angaraland. Palaeonto-
graphica (B) 157: 112-157.
Mites, R. S. 1965. Description of the fish plate. Lower Devonian fauna of the Horlick
Formation, Ohio Range, Antarctica. Antarctic Res. Ser. Washington 6: 273-274.
Mies, R. S. 1969. Features of placoderm diversification and the evolution of the arthrodire
feeding mechanism. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 68: 123-170.
Mites, R. S. 1973. An actinolepid arthrodire from the Lower Devonian Peel Sound Forma-
tion, Prince of Wales Island. Palaeontographica (A) 143: 109-118.
Mixes, R. S. & WeESTOLL, T. S. 1968. The placoderm fish Coccosteus cuspidatus Miller ex
Agassiz from the Middle Old Red Sandstone of Scotland. Part I. Descriptive morphology.
Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 67: 373-476.
Mites, R. S. & YounG, G. C. 1977. Placoderm interrelationships reconsidered in the light of
new ptyctodontids from Gogo, Western Australia. In: ANDREws, S. M., Mies, R. S. &
WALKER, A. eds. Problems in Vertebrate Evolution: 123-198. Linnean Society Symposium
Series 4. Academic Press: Linnean Society.
OBRUCHEV, D. V. 1967. Fundamentals of Palaeontology II Agnatha, Pisces. OBRUCHEV, D. VY.
ed. Jerusalem: Israel program for Scientific translations.
drvic, T. 1975. Description, with special reference to the dermal skeleton, of a new radotinid
arthrodire from the Gedinnian of Arctic Canada. Colloques int. Cent. natn. Rech. scient.
218: 41-71.
PAGEAU, E. 1969. Nouvelle faune ichthyologique du Dévonien moyen dans les Grés de Gaspé
(Quebec). II. Morphologie et Systématique. Naturaliste can. 96: 805-889.
PATTERSON, C. 1965. The phylogeny of the chimaeroids. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B) 249: 101-219.
PATTERSON, C. 1967. Class Holocephali. Jn HARLAND, W. B. et al. The fossil record: 673-675.
London: Geological Society.
PLUMSTEAD, E. P. 1967. A general view of the Devonian fossil plants found ia the Cape System
of South Africa. Palaeont. afr. 10: 1-83.
REED, F. R. C. 1925. Revision of the fauna of the Bokkeveld Beds. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 22:
27-225.
Ritcuiez, A. 1975. Groenlandaspis in Antarctica, Australia and Europe. Nature, Lond. 254:
569-573.
Sampaio, A. V. & NORTHFLEET, A. 1973. Estratigraphia & Correlacoes das Bacias sedimentares
brasileiras. Anais congr Soc. Brasil Geol. 3: 190-206.
ScHWARZ, E. H. L. 1900. Detailed description of the Bokkeveld Beds at the Gamka Poort,
Prince Albert. Rep. geol. Commn. Cape Good Hope 1899: 32-49.
SEWARD, A. C. 1903. Fossil floras of the Cape Colony. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 1-122.
STENSIO, E. A. 1959. On the pectoral fin and shoulder girdle of the arthrodires. K. svenska
Vetensk Akad. Handi. (4) 8: 1-229.
Swart, B. 1950. Morphological aspects of the Bokkeveld Series at Wuppertal, Cape Province.
Annale Uniy. Stellenbosch 26A: 413-479.
Tuomas, B. A. 1966. The cuticle of the lepidodendroid stem. New Phytol. 65: 296-303.
VAKHRAMEEV, V. A. & PUSHCHAROVSKU, Y. M. 1954. The geological part of the Verkhoyansk
Marginal Flexure in the Mesozoic. Vop. Geol. Azii 1: 588-628.
Voronets, N. S. 1952. First findings of the egg capsules of chimaeras in the U.S.S.R. Dokl.
Akad. Nauk SSSR 84: 587-589.
WARREN, P. S. 1947. Chimaeroid fossil egg capsules from Alberta. Bull. geol. Soc. Am. 58: 1238.
Wuite, E. I. 1968. Devonian fishes of the Mawson—Mulock area, Victoria Land, Antarctica.
Scient. Rep. transantarct. Exped. 16: 1-26.
WuitE, E. I. 1969. The deepest vertebrate fossil and other arctolepid fishes. Biol. J. Linn. Soc. 1:
293-310.
Woopwarb, A. S. 1906. On a Carboniferous fish fauna from the Mansfield District, Victoria.
Mem. nat. Mus., Melb. 1: 1-23.
YounG, G. C. 1974. Stratigraphic occurrence of some placoderm fishes in the Middle and
Late Devonian. News/. Stratigr. 3: 243-261.
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM: SOUTH AFRICA 157
ADDENDUM ADDED IN PRESS
After preparing this manuscript for publication, the authors received
(August 1979) an offprint of Plumstead’s (1977) account of Zosterophyllum
de-vriesii and Z. bokkeveldensis. (The former name is here hyphenated to give a
single epithet, in accordance with the International Code of Botanical Nomen-
clature, Art. 23.) It is immediately evident from Plumstead’s figures and speci-
men citations that the species described above as Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae
is based on the same fossil assemblage (and in part the same specimens ?), from
the same locality, as her Zosterophyllum de-vriesii. No basis in her paper is
found for revising the views expressed here, that these cylindrical structures
covered with closely spaced hexagonal leaf cushions represent a lycopod vege-
tative axis and not a zosterophyll fructification. Her photographs and her
text-figure 3 (central figure) clearly show what has been here interpreted as the
free tips of the leaves, seen in profile at the stem margin (her “bisected empty
sporangial sacs’). The clear validity and priority of Plumstead’s specific name is
acknowledged, and accordingly it is reassigned:
Archaeosigillaria de-vriesii (Plumstead) comb. nov.
Synonyms:
Zosterophyllum de vriesii Plumstead, 1977: 270, text-fig. 3, pl. 1 (figs 1-10).
Archaeosigillaria plumsteadiae Chaloner et al. 1979 (this paper): figs 12C—D,
13A-B.
Plumstead’s Zosterophyllum bokkeveldensis does not appear to be strikingly
distinct from Z. de-vriesii, but her view that they are distinct species is not
challenged. It is agreed that they are congeneric (i.e. may both be placed in
Archaeosigillaria), but no formal reassignment of the former species is suggested.
The age implication of the authors’ systematic assignment of these plant
fossils is, of course, at variance with Plumstead’s. In rejecting assignment to
Zosterophyllum, the suggestion of a Middle or Upper Devonian horizon rather
than the Lower Devonian which was implicit in attributing these fossils to
Zosterophyllum, is sustained.
REFERENCE
PLUMSTEAD, E. P. 1977. A new Phytostratigraphical Devonian Zone in southern Africa which
includes the first record of Zosterophyllum. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 80: 267-277.
W. G. CHALONER
London, September 1979
|
%
Ci on atl
aa srt Nan
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51). :
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. noy., comb.
nov., syn. Nov., etc. ‘
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
- species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-1SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
‘not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
W. G. CHALONER F.R.S.
P. L. FOREY
B. G. GARDINER |
A. J. HILE |
Vv. T. YOUNG
DEVONIAN FISH AND PLANTS FROM THE
BOKKEVELD SERIES OF
SOUTH AFRICA
|
i 81 PART 4 FEBRUARY 1980 ISSN 0303-2515
ay
l
ANNALS
\F THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
-APE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required. should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; ates sh
‘As described (Haughton & Broom eo
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927) . :
Note: no comma separating name anit year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FiscHer, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., Dvuvat, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, SRE masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4) os
TuHreELeE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Cobirlncenbaes Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In; SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 81 Band
February 1980 Februarie
Part 4 _ Deel
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN
AULACEPHALODON (REPTILIA,
ANOMODONTIA)
By
S.M. TOLLMAN
EF. E. GRINE
&
B. D. HAHN
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t-p.i.), 70-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 87 4
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., , Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALODON
(REPTILIA, ANOMODONTIA)
By
S. M. TOLLMAN
F. E. GRINE*
Department of Anatomy, Medical School, University of the Witwatersrand,
Johannesburg
&
B. D. HAHN
Department of Applied Mathematics, University of the Witwatersrand,
Johannesburg
(With 10 figures and 6 tables)
[MS. accepted 11 October 1979]
ABSTRACT
A large number of Aulacephalodon crania have been examined by means of biometrical
(allometric) methods. The results of this investigation indicate that this sample represents a
morphometrically homogeneous group, and that probably only a single species of Aulacepha-
lodon, viz. A. baini, is represented in the Permian sediments of South Africa and Zambia.
A qualitative analysis of nasal boss and temporal arch morphology indicates that these features
are related to sexual dimorphism. Sexual dimorphism of the cranium appears to have been
expressed in individuals with a basal skull length of between 190 and 245 mm. The geographical
distribution of these fossils has been examined also.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . 4 : 4 ; 3 All i)
Material and methods . ; ; ‘ . 162
Cranial growth and variability . ; : . 165
Sexual dimorphism . ; : ‘ ‘ . 169
Distribution . : : ; : 3 a Ze)
Discussion . : ; : : . . 180
Summary and conclusions p : ; = 83
Acknowledgements . : ; ; : . 184
References . F : ; : ; Ze l84:
INTRODUCTION
Numerous anomodont fossils have been recovered from lower Beaufort
Group sediments of South Africa. Well over 100 anomodont species have been
described from Cistecephalus Zone strata alone. The Cistecephalus Zone, as
defined by Kitching (1970, 1977), includes both Broom’s (1906) Endothiodon
Zone and the lower and middle portions of his Cistecephalus Zone. Kitching
(1970, 1971) has classified the upper horizons of Broom’s (1906) Cistecephalus
Zone as the Daptocephalus Zone.
159
*Present address: South African Musem, Cape Town.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81 (4), 1980: 159-186, 10 figs, 6 tables.
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
One of the most commonly occurring forms in these sediments is a rather
homogeneous group of anomodonts which have been referred to the genus
Aulacephalodon by Haughton & Brink (1954) and Keyser (1969). The fossil
remains of this reptile appear to have a rather limited stratigraphic range; ©
in the Cistecephalus Zone, they occur in sediments with a vertical thickness
of some 330 m, but they are concentrated in a relatively thin horizon (about
80 m) in which the zone fossil, Cistecephalus, occurs abundantly (Keyser
1969). Aulacephalodon has been recovered, albeit rarely, from within the first
3 m of the overlying Daptocephalus Zone (Kitching 1977), and fossils of Aula-
cephalodon have been found in comparatively large numbers at the northern
(Chikonta) localities of the upper Member of the Upper Madumabisa Mudstone
‘Formation’, Luangwa Valley, Zambia (Drysdall & Kitching 1963).
A number of genera and species of aulacephalodonts have been described,
but only a few have been based on more than fragmented fossils, and none has
been diagnosed adequately. In very few instances has either ontogenetic growth
or sexual dimorphism been considered in the description of a new taxon.
Owen (1844) described the first species of this group, on the basis of a
single specimen, as Dicynodon baini. He later referred a second specimen to
D. baini because it showed “the same character of the tusk’ as the type-species
(Owen 1876). A second species, D. tigriceps, was described also by Owen
(1855). Seeley (1898) divided Dicynodon into two subgenera. He proposed
that those forms of Dicynodon which exhibit a short snout and a wide cranium
be included in the subgenus Aulacephalodon. Broom described two further
species of Dicynodon, viz. D. laticeps (Broom 1912) and D. moschops (Broom
1913). In 1921 he proposed a new genus, Bainia, for the ‘tusked specimens of ||
Dicynodon’; he included the species D. baini, D. tigriceps and D. laticeps in
the genus Bainia and named two more species, B. peavoti and B. haughtoni |
(Broom 1921). Later, Broom (1932) recognized the validity of Seeley’s (1898)
subgeneric name Aulacephalodon but, as pointed out by Keyser (1969), he
altered the spelling, probably as a mistake from the spelling of Seeley’s (1898)
other subgenus Aulacocephalus, to Aulacocephalodon. Broom considered that,
‘Aulacocephalodon ... ought to be accepted for the group of broad skulled
anomodonts typified by Dicynodon baini if we regard them as worthy of separate
generic rank. ... Certainly they must be placed in at least a subgenus, and I
think we can quite safely regard Aulacocephalodon as a distinct genus. Some
years ago I proposed the name Bainia for the large broad-headed types not fully
recognising the claims of Seeley’s name’ (Broom 1932: 191-192).
He referred six species, namely Dicynodon baini, D. tigriceps, his own
D. laticeps, D. moschops, Bainia peavoti, and B. haughtoni to the genus ‘ Aulaco-
cephalodon’; and he described a new species, A. Jatissimus (Broom 1932). In
the same work Broom (1932, fig. 65A—B) figured the dorsal and lateral views
of an apparently nearly complete cranium with the legend, ‘view of skull of ~
Aulacocephalodon whaitsi, Broom’ ; however, there is no accompanying descrip-
tion which serves to define or differentiate that taxon. Accordingly, the name
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 161
Aulacocephalodon whaitsi does not satisfy Article 13 of the International Code
of Zoological Nomenclature (1964) and it must, therefore, be considered as a
nomen nudum. The generic name ‘Aulacocephalodon’ was used subsequently
by Broom (1936, 1937, 1940, 1941, 1948), Broom & George (1950), Van Hoepen
(1934), and Haughton & Brink (1954). However, Keyser (1969) has pointed
out that the name ‘Aulacocephalodon’ is probably an incorrect subsequent
spelling of Seeley’s name Aulacephalodon and thus ‘Aulacocephalodon’ has no
status in nomenclature; the correct generic name is Aulacephalodon Seeley.
Broom (1928) described the species Dicynodon milletti, and Van Hoepen
(1934) placed this species in Aulacephalodon; Keyser (1969) has referred it to
Oudenodon, as a junior synonym of O. baini, and he has noted that Broom’s
(1913) Dicynodon moschops (which Broom referred to Aulacephalodon as a
valid species in 1932) probably represents a valid species of Pelanomodon.
To date some seventeen species which have been referred to Aulacephalodon
have been described (Table 1). Keyser (1969) has examined the supposed
features that have been used in the diagnosis of various Aulacephalodon species
and has concluded that, for most of these characters, their variability and
susceptibility to diagenetic distortion makes them highly questionable as
taxonomic criteria. He made the important observation that, since many of
the features used to distinguish the various species are to at least some extent
size-dependent, the possibility that these species are all synonyms deserves
consideration.
TABLE 1
List of suggested synonyms of Aulacephalodon baini (Owen).
Dicynodon baini. : ‘ Owen, 1844
Dicynodon tigriceps : 5 Owen, 1844
Dicynodon laticeps . : j Broom, 1912
Bainia peavoti : ; ‘ Broom, 1921
Bainia haughtoni . : ; Broom, 1921
Aulacephalodon latissimus ; Broom, 1932
Aulacephalodon nesamanni : Broom, 1936
Aulacephalodon nodosus . : Van Hoepen, 1934
Aulacephalodon luckhoffi . : Broom, 1937
Aulacephalodon hartzenbergi . Broom, 1937
Aulacephalodon coatoni . : Broom, 1941
Aulacephalodon brodiei_ . : Broom, 1941
Aulacephalodon cadlei_ : Broom, 1948
Aulacephalodon pricei ; : Broom & George, 1950
Aulacephalodon vanderhorsti . Broom & George, 1950
Consequent upon Keyser’s suggestion, the hypothesis entertained in this
study was that many, if not all, of the aulacephalodont specimens which have
been described possibly constitute an ontogenetic series of a single species of
Aulacephalodon. A number of aulocephalodont crania were biometrically
analysed in an attempt to ascertain whether an ontogenetic growth series could
be demonstrated for this anomodont, and also whether the phenomenon of
allometric growth could explain the supposed morphological differences between
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the various proposed taxa. The possibility that sexual dimorphism was expressed
in the cranium of Aulacephalodon (as suggested by Broom 1937, 1948; so
1969) has been examined.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
Thirty-three specimens were examined. The material ranged from relatively
undistorted crania to portions of the skull. The principles of relative (allometric)
growth were applied to 18 of the crania (Table 2, Nos. 1-18) whilst the remainder
of the specimens received less rigorous biometric treatment. Some 31 different
measurements were defined (Fig. 1), but, because of the often fragmentary and
distorted nature of the fossils, there were only 4 specimens for which all 31
TABLE 2
List of all specimens of Aulacephalodon examined in this study.
Previous taxonomic
Specimen Number designation Description Vv Sex
1 SAM-3328 A. haughtoni (T) cranium 12 indet.
2 SAM-8747 A. latissimus (T) cranium 28 female
3 SAM-K1221 A. luckhoffi (1) cranium 25 female
4 BPI.FN. 1207 cranium 31 indet.
5 BPI.FN. 806 A. pricei (T) cranium 31 male
6 BPI.FN. 300 A. baini cranium 31 ? female
7 BPI.FN. 904 cranium 26 indet.
8 BPI.FN. 4087 A. baini cranium 30 female
9 BPI.FN. 4124 A. cf. baini cranium 29 female
10 BPI.FN. 642 A, cf. baini cranium 7 male
11 : BPI.FN. 2594 A sp. cranium 14 male
12 BPI.FN. 634 A. vanderhorsti (T) cranium 28 male
13 BPI.FN. 2460 A, sp. cranium 31 male
14 BPI.FN. 3950 A. cf. baini cranium 20 female
15 BPI.FN. 2983 A. baini cranium 29 male
16 BPI.FN. 4106 A, baini cranium 12 female
17 BPI.FN. 493 A. baini skull 23 male
18 BPI.FN. 304 A. baini cranium 29 female
19 TM 287 A. hartzenbergi (T) snout = indet.
20 T™ 1494 A. brodiei (T) skull ae female
21 T 4043 Aulacephalodon cranium * female
22 + TM 4118 A. sp. cranium na female
23 + T™ 953 ? Aulacephalodon occiput a
24 + TM 2043 A. sp. snout a female
25 + T™ 4471 A. sp. cranium = indet.
26 + T 1506 A. sp. skull ~ indet.
27 + T™ 4468 A, sp. snout = indet.
28 ++ TM, 4452 A. sp. cranium * indet.
29 + TM 4467 A. sp. cranium * indet.
30 + T™< 4469 A. sp. cranium x
31 GS K30 A. baini snout = female
32 GS R550 A, baini cranium = male
33 GS RS415 A. baini cranium = male
V = number of mensurable parameters recorded; * = specimens not included in the allo-
metric analysis; -- = specimens for which no locality data are available (thus, not included ;
in Table 6); (1) = holotype; SAM = South African Museum, Cape Town; BPI.FN. =
Bernard Price Institute for Palaeonotological Research, Johannesburg; TM = Transvaal ©
Museum, Pretoria; GS = Geological Survey, Pretoria.
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 163
Fig 1. Aulacephalodon cranial measurements. A. Dorsal. B. Basal C. Occipital. D. Lateral.
1. Basal cranial length. 2. Basal temporal length. 3. Basal snout length. 4. Palatal length.
5. Pterygoid fossa length. 6. Total cranial length. 7. Temporal cranial length. 8. Bicanine
breadth. 9. Least prespenoid breadth. 10. Interquadrate distance. 11. Canine-snout length.
12. Temporal fossa length. 13. Temporal fossa breadth. 14. Buccolingual diameter of canine
(or socket). 15. Breadth of caniniform process. 16. Width between premaxillary ridges.
17. Least squamosal breadth. 18. Intermediate temporal breadth. 19. Greatest cranial width.
20. Breadth of occipital condyle. 21. Least post-temporal fossa breadth. 22. Post-pineal
length. 23. Pre-pineal length. 24. Least interorbital width. 25. Greatest width between nasal
bosses. 26. Snout width. 27. Orbital length. 28. Greatest width between prefrontal bosses.
29. Intertemporal width across pineal foramen. 30. Greatest snout length. 31. Length of
nasal bosses.
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
metrical features could be recorded. The cranium only was measured, as the
mandible is missing from most of the specimens. The variables selected for
measurement were designed to reflect the overall shape of the cranium and its
various parts rather than the configuration of individual bones.
All measurements were taken with either a sliding vernier caliper or the
top segment of an anthropometer and were recorded to the nearest millimetre.
In a number of instances, owing to either distortion or breakage of the specimen,
some variables could not be measured directly. In these cases estimates of the
diameters were made on the basis of symmetry in order to correct for distortion
and missing fragments of bone. For those crania which were too badly distorted
or broken to permit reasonable estimates, the affected measurements were not
recorded.
The study of relative growth has been characterized by Gould (1966) as
the analysis of size and its consequences. Allometric growth refers simply to
the changes in proportion that occur as an organism increases in size. Such
growth can be assessed and described quantitatively when measurements are
fitted to the biparametric power function
Wy Sede
where y is a variable whose increase relative to that of another parameter, x,
is considered; a is a numerical constant and f is the slope of the rectilinear plot,
or, simply, the ratio of the specific growth rates of variables x and y (Huxley
1932). This approach rests on the observation that the size of an organism, and
not its rate of growth, is important when one determines the proportions of its
parts (Dodson 1975a). If this equation is converted to logarithms, the problem
is reduced to the fitting of a straight line:
log y = loga + Blog x.
This may be rewritten as
Y=a-+ BX
where Y = log y, X = log x and « = log a. The allometric coefficient, f, is
the slope of the ‘best straight line’ through the data, and may be considered as
the value of Y when X = 0. Thus, f is the ratio of the specific growth rates of
Y and X;; it serves as an indication of the intensity of differential size increase.
Values of 8 greater than | (positive allometry) imply a differential increase of
Y relative to X; when f is less than 1 (negative allometry) the Y/X ratio decreases
with an increase of the absolute magnitude of X. Isometry, when 8B = 1, repre-
sents the maintenance of geometrical similarity with size increase.
In determining the slope of the ‘best straight line’ through the data,
Kermack & Haldane (1950) and Kermack (1954) have cautioned against the
use of regression models which assume error to be related to only a single
variable. Consequently, the fitting procedure utilized here was that of Bartlett’s
(1949) ‘best fit’. This method was found to be the preferred procedure in a
computer simulation of ten different methods by Kidwell & Chase (1967),
because it (i) is highly accurate, (ii) has a small variance, (iii) has a simple
procedure for setting confidence limits on the estimates, and (iv) includes a
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 165
simple linearity test. Bartlett’s (1949) method has been recommended for
analysis of allometric growth by Simpson et al. (1960) and has been so used
by Dodson (1976) and Grine et al. (1978). A description of Bartlett’s method
has been provided by Grine et al. (1978) and will not be repeated here.
Two diameters, basal cranial length (variable 1) and basal snout length
(variable 3) were utilized as comparative (x) measurements in the present study.
Basal snout length was found to have a nearly isometric relationship to basal
cranial length, and use of the former permitted specimens, for which the latter
length was not obtainable, to be included in the analysis of sexual dimorphism.
In addition to a bivariate quantitative assessment, several qualitative
features were examined in an attempt to define sexual dimorphism in Aula-
cephalodon crania.
CRANIAL GROWTH AND VARIABILITY
The basal cranial length of those fossils in the present series for which this
parameter could be recorded ranged from 135 mm (BPI.FN. 904) to 410 mm
(BPI.FN. 806). This range, if basal cranial length is accepted as an indicator
of the general size of the cranium, can be accommodated comfortably within
the ontogenetic size range for skulls of modern large reptiles (e.g. Alligator
and Crocodylus). And, as mentioned previously, specimens of Aulacephalodon
have been recovered from localities within a rather limited horizontal and
vertical range. Aulacephalodon appears therefore to satisfy the requirements
for a possible growth series as established by Olson & Miller (1951).
Coefficients of allometry and other relevant data for bivariate plots against
basal cranial length are presented in Table 3. Selected bivariate plots of cranial
measurements against basal cranial length are shown in Figure 2.
In no instance could linearity be rejected, by analysis of the t statistic, in
favour of a possible parabolic (quadratic) relationship (Table 3). Correlation
between variable sets is rather high; most correlation coefficients are greater
than 0,95 (Table 3). The high correlation coefficients and the degree of clustering
of the points about the slope lines suggest that the specimens studied here
represent a morphologically homogeneous group of animals in various stages
of ontogenetic development. This series includes the types of Aulacephalodon
haughtoni, A. latissimus, A. luckhoffi, A. pricei, and A. vanderhorsti.
In several cases the allometric coefficients indicate isometric or nearly
isometric growth relative to basal cranial length (e.g. variables 2, 3, 6, 8, 16,
21, 26), but in each instance the confidence intervals for 8 range from well below
to well above isometry. Dodson (1975a) has. noted that for Alligator missis-
sipiensis coefficients as close to isometry as 0,98 or 1,02 can be shown to differ
from 1,00 at p = 0,02 or even p = 0,001, an indication of the high degree of
correlation between variables, which is conditioned, in part, by the magnitude
of the ontogenetic size range of specimens of Alligator.
In three instances—palatal length (4), greatest cranial width (19), and the
greatest width between the nasal bosses (25) (Fig. 1)—positive allometric
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Log 4
3,80
Log |4
3,26
3,10 =
490 5,06 522 536 5,54 570 586 6,02 490 5,06 522 5,38 554 5/70 5,86 6,02
3,9 :
490 5,06 522 538 554 5,70 586 602
4,90 5,06 522-5,38 5,54 5,70 5,86 6,02
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 167
Log 25
4,20
3,80
3,40
3,00
490 5,06 5,22 536 5,54 5/70 586 6,02
Log 28
3,00
4,90 5,06 5,22 538 554 5,70 5,86 602
Log 31
3,90
4,90 5,06 5,22 5,38 5,54 570 586 6,02 490 5,06 5,22 538 554 570 586 602
Fig. 2. A-L. Selected bivariate plots of Aulacephalodon crania. The scale on both axes is
logarithmic. In each case the X-axis is basal skull length (variable 1). The solid line
represents the calculated line of Bartlett’s “best fit’.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 3
Summary of data concerning relative growth and variability in Aulacephalodon (X = basal
cranial length).
y Nhe a B-Cl a-Cl r rede t RL
2. 13 0,99 - 0,46 . 0,875 1,11 0/50; =043 099) io) 0713 eee
3 13. 0,99 —0,84 0,79; 1,19 —0,90; —0,78 0,97 10 0,444 No
410 4,15 =1569' 1,045. 1,26> 1,725! 165 91.00), aca
5 10 0,82 0,52 0,63: 1,23. 0,623) 0,42" 094) 7) Gage
6 12. 1,00 0,18 0,85; 1,14 0,13; 0,22 10,9959 Ogepene
7 ie 091 0,19 0:63;, 1,16. 0,11; 0,28 0,95 9, "=o 554nuenm
8 12 1,01 —O78 0,59: 1,29 —0,89; =067 095 9 ~l o.0ggummnm
9 12 1,10 —2,64 0,78: 1,44 —2,74 2053 005 9) Odeo
10 6 5-°1,20 ~=1,49 3 11,66) 1,80; 117 90198 9 92) oo ee
11, 13. 1,17 2,13. 0,86; 1,51. 2,23; 2/03), (0:95 910; —0lgnp aan
12 41 1,12, —1,35 0,87: 1,53 —1,43; =1,26-. 096 6 ose
13 12 0,94 0,67 0:59; 1,16° —0,76; —0)59' 0,96 9° = 1197
14.13 087 —1)67 <0,54; 117 .—1,76; "= 157") O91 10) nie
15 10- 0,81. —0,80. 0,60; 1,01 .—0)87; 9-078" 0977.07 =Onaee
16 12 1,05 —295 0,643 1,37 - —3,07; 283, 0.94 9 =0aumuee
17° 12 091° —0,05 0,43: 1,39 —O11; “00 086 9) ons eee
18 11 1,145 —0,89 091: 145 —0l98: ogi, 0196 3) = 2c neem
19 11° . 1,21.» 1,01 1,04: 1,33. =1,06; —096 (099 8” (NO asauem
20 10 0,89 1,33. 03227413 .°=1,42; 124 70:96 S78 eso nee
21 10 0198 | S09 0.71. 1.03 0,97; —0,84 098 7 —0558 NE
22°13. 126° ' 2,60 0,80; 1.90 - °—2,77;°=—2,43 086 10 9 20, gueaee
23. 13. 0,84 . 0,49 0,58; 1,04. . 0,42; 0:56..0:96 40) s=i:705 ene
%” 12 1,31 °—294 0,95; 1,64 —305; =—293 006 "9, —S0sRunemem
25° 13 1,33 22,73 1,02: 1,57 ° 2182" 2165 0.97" 108 no coo
26 13 1,01 —1,70 0,56; 1,34 1/82; —1,59" (0935 10" | “Onesmeamm
27.12. 0,87. —0,69 0,64; 1,10 _-—0,76; —0,61 096 9 —1,488.0eNe
2% 12 1,39 3,08 O81:°1,76 —3.20; —296 095 9) —enqugz ame
29 13° 059 0:80 - O01 1,07 0,63; 0,96 0,72 10 0,363 No
30 11 0,86 0,76 0,312 1,21 —091: 062% 090, 8 Soars ame
31.13 1l1_ = 2,33 091; 1.27 22395 2:98 0.08) Oe SOc enn
Y = variable number; N = number of specimens; a—-CI = 95% confidence interval for a;
B-CI = 95% confidence interval for 8B; r = correlation coefficient; d.f. = degrees of freedom;
t = Bartlett’s test statistic; RL = rejection of linearity in favour of a parabolic relationship.
growth was indicated. On the other hand, whilst some eleven variables showed
values of B less than 1,00, in all of these cases the 95 per cent confidence intervals
ranged above isometry; variable 29, intertemporal width, showed the lowest
value (0,59) but even here the upper end of the confidence limit ranged above
isometry to 1,07. This parameter shows a particularly high degree of variability
in terms of the magnitude of its allometric confidence limits and its low corre-
lation coefficient (Table 3).
It is interesting to note that the diameters of both the tusks (variable 14)
and the caniniform processes (variable 15) show negative allometric growth
(Table 3), although the upper limits of the confidence intervals for each range
to above isometry. It appears that the eruption, or replacement of the tusks,
by which increasingly larger teeth were introduced, did not keep pace with
cranial enlargement. Also, the size of the orbits, as judged by their length
(variable 27), enlarged in a negative allometric manner compared to basal
|
|
|
|
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALODON 169
cranial length (Table 3). This is generally characteristic of higher vertebrates,
where the eyes are disproportionately large in young individuals.
Gould (1968) has noted that increase in size subjects organisms to different
orders of forces and, thus, new morphological configurations to cope with
these new forces are required. In his discussion of the allomorphism of species,
Hennig (1966) maintained that knowledge of allometric correlation is important,
because it permits recognition of linkages between different series of trans-
formations that might otherwise not be recognized. New shapes produced by
continuation of an ontogenetic allometric relationship into new size ranges are
not independent taxonomic criteria (Gould 1966).
For the most part, the features which have been used variously in the
diagnosis of new aulacephalodont species have been (i) the size of the nasal
bosses, (ii) the shapes and sutural relationships of the individual bones of the
cranium and (iii) the length—breadth ratio of the cranium.
Although several Aulacephalodon specimens have been described as possible
‘juveniles’ (Haughton 1917; Broom 1921), no description of a new species has
taken into consideration the phenomenon of allometry. Cluver (1971), in a
detailed study of another anomodont, Lystrosaurus, has recorded that minor
changes in skull morphology, such as a change in the sutural relationships of
bones, may be attributed to the size and consequently the ontogenetic age of
individual specimens. Keyser (1972) has postulated that the characters which
have been used to distinguish the various species of Aulacephalodon depend
greatly upon the size of the individual.
It is evident that in Aulacephalodon rather marked changes in the shape of
the cranium and its various parts occurred with increasing size. In general, the
relative width of the skull across the zygomatic arches and across the pre-
frontal and nasal bosses, as well as the robusticity and sculpture of the temporal
arches and other parts, show a rather dramatic increase with ontogenetic age
(Fig. 3).
The results of the present investigation indicate that at least five of the
type specimens of Aulacephalodon species could be interpreted as constituting
a homogeneous ontogenetic growth series. Two other types—A. hartzenbergi
and A. brodei—have been examined also, and whilst these specimens were not
subjected to allometric analysis, it is evident that they, too, form part of the
same growth series. Although not every type and available specimen has been
studied, the results of this preliminary investigation appear to support the con-
tention that perhaps all the specimens, which have been regarded previously
as belonging to different Aulacephalodon species, constitute a taxonomically
homogeneous ontogenetic growth series of but a single species, Aulacephalodon
baini (Owen).
SEXUAL DIMORPHISM
Sexual differences of both living and fossil reptiles are generally poorly
expressed in the skeleton, and, as such, they are difficult to identify (Olson
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
170
171
"WD Ul SoTeOg “WU Op U)SUT [erUeIO
[eseq :(1a014d “py Jo adAjoOjoY) 908 “NA'Idd ‘¢ ‘Ou “UoUTOeds OBIE] AIOA “D “WUT 76] YISUOT
[erueIo [eseq ‘OO “NAId dl “9 “Ou uouNoedg “gq “WIUI get YISUD] [eIURIO [eseq ‘1071 "NA'Id@
“py ‘ou ‘uoumIoeds [[eUIg “YW “eIUeID wopojnYydaoDjnp JO solIas d1joUed0jUO poysossng ‘¢ “31.7
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON
172 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1969). Dodson (1976) has used successfully two complementary approaches
to define quantitatively sexual dimorphism in skulls of a small ceratopsian
dinosaur. His first approach made use of bivariate allometric plots, a use of
ratios, whilst the second was based on multivariate statistical analysis.
In the present study an attempt was made to assess quantitatively sexual
dimorphism in a growth series of Aulacephalodon crania. Dodson’s (1976)
bivariate technique was utilized but application of the multivariate approach
was not attempted owing to the small sample size of relatively complete crania.
Bivariate plots of all thirty-one parameters were examined. For each case,
individual values that lay above the line of Bartlett’s “best fit’ were assigned
a score of —1, those below the line a score of +1, and values on the line were
accorded a score of 0. Scores of 0 were very infrequent and were treated as
indeterminate; thus they were not included in the final total of a score. The
lower limit for the acceptance of either ‘maleness’ or ‘femaleness’ was set
arbitrarily at 75 per cent, that is, at least three-quarters of the plotted points
for an individual specimen lay to one side of the line. Only those specimens
for which at least fifteen of the thirty possible variable plots were recorded
were included in this part of the study (Table 4). Those fossils which fell above
the line for 75 per cent of characters were considered to be male, whilst those
that lay below the line for 75 per cent of traits were deemed to be female (see
Dodson 1976).
Bivariate analysis of sexual dimorphism revealed that no single specimen
exhibited a consistently male or female pattern. Two specimens, however, were
consistent in expression in at least 74 per cent of the traits (specimens 2, SAM—
8747, and 3, SAM-K1221), whilst a third (specimen 12, BPI.FN. 634) was
consistent in 72 per cent of the characters. Accordingly, two of the specimens
(2 and 12) may be accorded male status, whilst specimen 3 could be considered
to be a female. Two of the fossils were completely indeterminate (7 and 8)
and the others were only vaguely consistent in expression. In this analysis all
available characters were considered; no selection of sexually distinctive features
of the cranium was made. Thus, the technique utilized here differed from
Dodson’s (1976) in that he selected characters which were believed to be
dimorphic for Protoceratops. It is possible that, in the bivariate analysis of
sexual dimorphism in Aulacephalodon, those features which are related to
sexual dimorphism could have been ‘swamped’ by a larger number of variables
which are not dimorphic. Furthermore, as not all the specimens possessed all
possible measurable features, it is possible that those traits which may be
sexually related were not present in some of the fossils.
The principal cranial feature of Aulacephalodon which has been postulated
to show sexual dimorphism is the relative size of the nasal bosses. Broom (1937)
noted considerable variation in the size of the nasal bosses. He considered
that the larger bosses were shown by male skulls, whilst females evinced more
weakly developed bosses. He compared briefly two skulls which he considered
represented a male and a female, and concluded also that the ‘canine’ tusks in
hE a IS PY TS
es
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALODON Wie)
TABLE 4
Bivariate sexual dimorphism scores for Aulacephalodon crania.
Specimen
Variable
no.
ae i |
+O
ba) Plesk ee [ee
Ho Se eae te ld es
|S
+] [4+ ]+4/&
| +++0
|
| ae |
lbsese ae a Wes
ae |
eae ett
| Labs Peet
|
apap (ae [LaF
| |
Woe sires eeatesant Mar
|
Ste [etely (eater late stag eater Nee \ ate tet eetle toto
7 |
eer
J+) ++
I] tt | eeet] + +) 4+o4+14+4+!]4+4+4+11 11 1400
Wate eel alfa elites peli
|
|; ++] +++] t+) ) +) +444) 4) 4+4+4+4+4+4 I
te ee
tott |] F4+4+t] [++] ) ++) 4+] 44+) 444+] 4+] 4a.
ed | aesest se fk se ji tese arc | se pel se se hse eset at
++4++++++] +
++|lo++++|
He ie ML
+++] 1] 1]
31
Dominant
sign = SE Se ies pa Ochnts ae ae
Score 74 74 65 59 63 50 50 59 72 63 68 58
Score = percentage frequency of occurrence of the dominant sign. -++ = individual plot
below the line of Bartlett’s ‘best fit’; — = individual plot above the line of Bartlett’s ‘best
fit’; 0 = individual plot on the line. See text for explanation.
++
males are longer and further apart than in females. In his description of A. cadlei
he noted the nasal bosses of the type to be smaller than those in the type of
A. rubidgei, and he postulated that the former specimen was a female whilst
the latter was a male (Broom 1948). The question of sexual dimorphism in
dicynodont crania has been considered by several workers (Owen 1860, 1876;
Broom 1912, 1932; Barry 1957; Tripathi & Satangi 1963). Cluver (1971) dis-
cussed the possibility that Lystrosaurus crania exhibited pronounced sexual
dimorphism, but he concluded that the dimorphic skulls of that genus probably
represent two groups of species. Keyser (1969) recorded that the nasal bosses of
Aulacephalodon appear to increase in prominence concomitantly with an increase
in skull size; he maintained also that the bosses were related to sexual
dimorphism.
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
In light of the previous speculations which have related nasal boss size and
shape variation to sexual dimorphism, these structures were examined both
metrically and osteoscopically in the present series of crania.
As an indication of the relative size of the nasal bosses the length of the
protuberances (variable 31), as well as the greatest width between them (variable
25), were considered. When these two parameters are compared to basal cranial
length (Table 3), both are found to increase in a positive allometric fashion,
although the confidence interval for nasal boss length ranges to below isometry.
When these variables are considered against basal snout length (variable 3),
the positive allometric nature of their growth rates is slightly more pronounced
(Table 5) and the 95 per cent confidence limit for nasal boss length ranges as
low as isometry only. The considerable degree of morphological variability
which is evinced by the nasal bosses may be related to their rates of growth.
Dodson (1975a, 1975b) found that in two living reptiles (Alligator and
TABLE 5
Summary of data concerning relative growth and variability in Aulacephalodon (X = basal
snout length).
Ve INI B a B-CI a-CI rt df t RL
1S) aor 0,85 0,84; 1,27 0,79; 0,91 0,97 10 —0,444 No
2 13 ~~ 1,00 0,38 0,73; 1,41 0,25; 0,48 093 10 #—0,550 No
4 10) tie) >) OF 1,09; 1,26 —0,74; —0,68 1,00 7 —0,912 No
5 10 0,83 0,18 0,60; 1,35 0,06; 0,30 0,93 7 -—0,599 No
6 13° 0:93 1,39 0,73; 1,16 1,32; 1,46 0,97 10 —0,548 No
Wy (83 0,93 0,67; 1,28 0,83; 1,03 0,93 10 0,480 No
8 14 1,01 0,07 0,69; 1,34 —0,04; 0,18 0,93 11 —0,113 No
Oe Sila lil —1,71 0,69; 1,77 —1,87; —1,54 0,88 9 —0,140 No
10 6 0,85 1,07 0,70; 2,18 0,61; 1,52 0,83 3 —0,747 No
11 15 1,13 —O,88 0,84; 1,51 —0,99; —0,77 0,92 12 -—1,418 No
12) 12%) 1307) 0313) 10} 8i 47, —0,22; —0,05 0,93 9 -—2,404 Yes
13 13 0,99 -—0O,07 0,75; 1,22 -—0,14; 0,01 0,97 10 0,353 No
14 15 0,88 —0,95 0,63; 1,16 —1,03; —0,86 0,92 12 1,186 No
15 10 0,80 -—0,03 0,56; 1,09 —0,12; 0,06 0,95 7 —0,352 No
16S ssc Ol —1,88 0,70; 1,31 —1,98; —1,78 0,95 10 —0,220 No
17 13 0,86 1,09 0,43; 1,26 0,95; 1,22 0,88 10 —0,264 No
182 1.08 0,38 0,85; 1,42 0,29; 0,48 0,96 9 1,344 No
LO aD ile 0,46 0,85; 1,42 0,36; 0,55 0,97 9 —0,082 No
20 10 0,92 -—0,67 0,35; 1,18 —0,77;- —0,58 0,95 7 —1,849 No
Zl eelil 1,03 —O,32 0,86; 1,41 —0,39; —0,25 0,96 8) 2 1425 NG
Py M8) PAT Ile) OLT2 DAU 2s — 134 0583)" 10) O6Siaeeeine
2B) als 0182: 1,32 0,60; 1,05 1,25; . 1,40 0,94. 12 . =1,572 No
24 14 1,24 \—1,45 0,94; 1,57 S1s63 iss) OS — i 0,910 No
25) ale —2,44 1,02; 2,13 —2,63; —2,26 0,89 12 -—0,705 No
26 15. 0,97 —O0)58 0,59; 1,34 0,70; —0,45 0,89 12 -—0,114 No
27 14 0,89 —0,03 0,75: 1,06 —O0,08; 0,03 0,97 11 —1,449 No
28 13 1,20 —0,98 0,44; 1,69 —1,13; —0,82 0,90 10 —0,076 No
29 IS O68 0,86 0,25; 1,06 0,73; 1,00 0,80 12 —0,078 No
30 13 1,12 —1,36 0,75; 1,60 —1,46; —1,16 0,90 10 0,651 No
SE Si LS S25 00S 77 —1,69; —1,56 0,98 12 -—1,507 No
Y = variable number; N = number of specimens; «-CI = 95% confidence interval for «;
B-CI = 95% confidence interval for 8; r = correlation coefficient; d.f. = degrees of free-
dom; t = Bartlett’s test statistic; RL = rejection of linearity in favour of a parabolic
relationship.
|
)
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 17/5)
Sceloporus) the greatest variability is associated with the most strongly allo-
metric variables. In Aulacephalodon the greatest width between the bosses
(which includes the breadth of both these structures as well as the rest of the
nasal bones) shows the strongest allometric growth compared to basal snout
length (Table 5). The allometric nature of these protuberances is not quite so
marked when basal skull length is used for comparison, but in the latter case
(Table 3) fewer specimens were included. The width across the nasal bosses
shows both stronger allometric growth and more variability than the length
of these structures when the two are compared to either basal cranial (Table 3)
or basal snout (Table 5) lengths.
Three rather distinct types of nasal boss morphology, as assessed quali-
tatively, were discerned in the present cranial series (Figs 4-5). In crania with
‘Type 1’ boss development (Figs 4A, 5A), the lateral margins of the nasal bones
above the external nasal apertures show very little, if any, form of swelling; when
viewed from above, the dorsal surface of the snout tapers anteriorly from the
orbits. Nasal bosses of the second type (Figs 4B, 5B) project laterally to various
degrees from the edges of the nasals above the external nares. The bosses
project laterally and form a nearly flat (horizontal) surface with the nasal
bones. Bosses of “Type 3’ (Figs 4C, 5C) also project laterally above the external
nasal apertures, but are more swollen in appearance than those of the second
type; they project dorsally as well as laterally. The third type of nasal pro-
tuberance projects above the dorsal surface of the nasal bones, and in several
specimens a longitudinal ‘gutter’ is present between the midline of the nasal
bones and the boss on each side.
The first type of nasal boss was found in small crania, whilst the second
and third types appear in larger skulls. Nasal bosses of ‘Type 1’ are very slightly
developed (Fig. 6). The second and third types of nasal bosses appear to increase
in size with cranial length, but the two types can be distinguished in nearly all
cases throughout a broadly overlapping range of individual size (Fig. 6).
In the present sample, skulls which show “Type 3’ nasal bosses achieve a
larger size than those with bosses of “Type 2’ morphology. This apparent size
difference, however, may be an artefact of sampling. Several specimens (e.g.
19, 25-29) show a nasal boss configuration that appears to be intermediate
between the second and third types. Although the morphological configuration
of the nasal bosses may be altered through burial deformation (e.g. a ‘Type 3’
could be changed to a “Type 2’ through vertical diagenetic pressures), in the
vast majority of cases these structures seem to have suffered very little from
such deformation. In one specimen (15, BPI.FN. 2983) the nasal bosses had
been pushed ventrally so that they form a nearly horizontal transverse plane
with the nasal bones, but the bilateral shallow longitudinal troughs are still
discernible owing to the presence of the median sagittal nasal ridge.
Inasmuch as the present sample of Aulacephalodon crania exhibits a rather
high degree of biometric homogeneity, it seems reasonable to suggest that the
morphological differences shown by the nasal bosses may be sexual in nature.
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
=
A
showing the three basic types. A. ‘Type
1’. B. ‘Type 2’. C. ‘Type 3’. See text
for explanation.
i 1
1 1
Fig. 4. Schematic representation of a
coronal section through the nasal bosses
1 t
t 1
Various cranial sizes, or inferred ontogenetic stages, are present for both the
second and third types of nasal bosses, whilst the smallest, and presumably
youngest, skulls in the present sample evince a ‘Type 1’ nasal boss. It is possible
that the nasal bosses in Aulacephalodon could have served as a sexually selective
feature for mate recognition and/or agonistic display mechanisms, or for both.
Furthermore, the several relatively large crania (specimens 19, 25-26 and 29)
which show nasal bosses intermediate in form between “Types 2 and 3’ may
represent the antimodal overlap of the bimodal distribution of a discontinuous
feature such as sexual dimorphism. However, a number of the crania in which
the nasal bosses are indeterminate are broken and poorly preserved.
It is possible that those crania with the more robust, “Type 3’ nasal bosses
represent the male condition. The same has been postulated obliquely by pre-
vious workers (Broom 1937, 1948; Keyser 1969).
In the present series, it appears that, once a certain cranial size had been
reached, the nasal bosses assumed one of two rather distinct configurations
(Fig. 7). It is suggested that the smaller crania, in which the nasal bosses are
only slightly expressed (‘Type 1’), represent relatively young, sexually immature
individuals. Specimen 6 (BPI.FN. 300) possesses rather small nasal bosses of
the ‘Type 2’ (female) configuration (Fig. 8). This fossil has been identified
tentatively as female (Figs 6-7). It is possible that with growth the nasal bosses
of both sexes were of a “Type 2’ configuration before sexual maturity (or
dimorphism) had been achieved; the smallest positively identifiable male
cranium is somewhat larger than the specimen in question. If this sample is
at all representative of Aulacephalodon, then it seems that the expression of
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 177
Fig. 5. Stereophotos of the three basic nasal boss configurations. A. ‘Type 1’,
specimen no. 7, BPI.FN. 904. B. ‘Type 2’, specimen no. 18, BPI.FN. 304. C. ‘Type
3’, specimen no. 17, BPI.FN. 493. See text for explanation. Scales in cm.
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Type Size
very large
3 large
§
3 medium
S very large
g large
Ss 2
8 medium
small
40 60 80 100 120 140 I60 180 200 220
Basal Snout Length (mm)
Fig. 6. Relationship of nasal boss size and morphotype to cranial (snout
length) size.
sexual dimorphism was achieved by individuals when snout length was between
about 80 and 95 mm and basal cranial length approximately 190 to 245 mm.
The nasal bosses enlarged in a positive allometric manner compared to
snout and cranial lengths, but it appears that the general morphology of these
structures remained relatively constant with an increase in individual size.
Another feature of the cranium also appears to be related to sexual
dimorphism. In large presumptive male crania (e.g. specimens 5, 13, 15 and 17),
the lateral border of the zygomatic arch shows a thickening of the squamosal.
This body thickening is in the form of a gently curved, ventrally directed
convexity, the lateral margin of which shows a rugose texture (Fig. 9). Large
female crania, on the other hand, show no such thickening of the zygomatic
arch; in these specimens the lateral margin of the squamosal is thinner and the
arch has parallel dorsal and ventral surfaces. In smaller male crania the zygo-
matic arch is similar to those of females in that there is no sign of squamosai
thickening. The significance of this thickening of the anterior portion of the
zygomatic arch in larger male crania is enigmatic. Keyser (1969) noted that
these squamosal ‘bosses’ may have been related to the jaw adductor muscu-
lature; but if this were the case it is puzzling why only the older males developed
these structures.
Of the three crania sexed by bivariate analysis, the metrical diagnosis of
two of them (specimens 3 and 12) agreed with the non-metrical assignment;
however, whilst the third skull (specimen 2) was male according to the bivariate
sexing technique, it shows a ‘Type 2’ nasal boss configuration, and although it
is a fairly large specimen the zygomatic arches are not thickened.
I
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 179
Male
3 (sa A AaA A A
Immature
4
~-"
a a
(en o>
0 a
Nasal Boss Type
40 60 80 100 |20 |40 I60 180 200 220
Basal Snout Length (mm)
Fig. 7. Graphic representation of nasal boss morphotype compared to
cranial (snout length) size. The questionable individual is specimen no. 6,
BPI.FN. 300 (see Figs 3B, 8).
Fig. 8. Stereoview of nasal boss size and morphology of specimen no. 6,
BPI.FN. 300. Scale in cm.
DISTRIBUTION
An important factor to be considered in an analysis of the biological
implications of the Type 1, 2 and 3 nasal boss configurations of Aulacephalodon
is the geographic and temporal distribution of these various types. The geo-
graphical distribution of the localities which have yielded the crania examined
in this study is shown in Figure 10. Although the Madumabisa Mudstone
‘Formation’ is situated a considerable distance from the concentration of lower
Beaufort localities in the Cape Province, the Aulacephalodon specimens found
at the Zambian sites do not appear to be morphologically distinct from those
recovered from the Cistecephalus and lower Daptocephalus zone sediments of
South Africa (Drysdall & Kitching 1963).
The specimens examined in this study were recovered from localities over
a rather limited geographical (Fig. 10) as well as vertical (Keyser 1969; Kitching
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 9. Lateral view of a large Aulacephalodon skull showing the thickening
of the squamosal at the anterior end of the zygomatic arch. Specimen
no. 17, BPI.FN. 493. Scale in cm.
1977) range. There is no horizontal separation by either size or nasal boss }
morphology of the specimens; furthermore, two specimens (4 and 17) from the !
same site (Fig. 1OR, Table 6) show considerable difference in both size and ¢
nasal boss configuration. One (BPI.FN. 1207) is a small individual with only |
minimal nasal boss development, whilst the other specimen (BPI.FN. 493) |
represents the largest skull.in the sample and it posseses well-developed “Type |
3’ nasal protuberances. Specimens which show variously Type 2 and 3 nasal ,
bosses have been recovered from at least one other locality (Fig. 10I, Table 6).
The facts that specimens of various sizes with different nasal boss con- |
figurations have been recovered from single localities, and that there is no |
geographic or stratigraphic separation of specimens evincing different sizesand |
shapes, appear to support the hypothesis that the Aulacephalodon specimens |}
studied here do, indeed, represent an ontogenetic growth series of a single ,
species which evinced sexual dimorphism.
DISCUSSION
During the deposition of the Cistecephalus Zone sediments the terrain
appears to have been characterized by broad, low gradient floodplains traversed
by numerous, intermittent streams (Keyser 1970). The climate throughout ©
this time, as inferred from the abundance of calcareous concretions and of |
‘desert roses’, composed of pseudomorphs of calcite after gypsum (Keyser
1966), may have been sufficiently dry to warrant the term arid. The flora of
the lower Beaufort seems to lack variety, the most commonly occurring plants
being the equisetaleans, Schizoneura and Phyllotheca (Keyser 1970). Both ~
Keyser (1969, 1970) and Kitching (1977) have commented on the improbability q
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALODON 181
RICHMOND
VICTORA® Db) @
EST IDDELBURG
500km *
@ -RASERBURG
RY GRAAFF-REINET
e f@
Fig. 10. Distribution of the localities from which the specimens examined in this study were
recovered. A. Murraysburg commonage. B. Swaelkrans. C. Leeufontein. H. Ringsfontein.
I. Graaff-Reinet commonage. J. Katbosch. K. Vleiplaats. L. Bultfontein. M. Leeuriviers-
berg. N. Houd Constant. O. Roodebloem. P. Matjiesfontein. Q. Petersburg. R. Hoekplaas.
S. Ferndale.
of the synchronous and apparently sympatric coexistence of a large number of
anomodont species under the ecological conditions envisaged for Cistecephalus
Zone times. Keyser has noted the possibility that only a single species of
Aulacephalodon, a \arge dicynodont, is represented in these strata.
Biometric (allometric) analysis of a fairly large sample of Aulacephalodon
crania, which included seven of the seventeen type specimens, indicates that
at least this group of crania constitutes a homogeneous and probably species-
specific, ontogenetic growth series.
The ecological roles of at least two large extant reptiles, Alligator and
Crocodylus, have been observed to change continuously throughout the life
of the animal (Cott 1961; Dodson 1975a), the size and type of food obtained
being a function of the size of the individual. Analogous food changes probably
occurred with the Triassic cynodont Diademodon (Grine et al. 1978). Similar
changes in the ecological role of Aulacephalodon baini might have taken place
as a function of ontogenetically increasing body size, and thus increased the
breadth of the niche occupied by this reptile; but this is by no means certain.
Keyser (1972) has pointed out that Aulacephalodon possessed a relatively short,
broad snout, reinforced by anterior longitudinal palatal ridges, and he concluded
that biting was restricted to the tips of the jaws. Aulacephalodon probably had
a horny beak at the tip of the snout, and it is possible that the changes in the
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 6
Tabulation of locality data. The code corresponds to the legend for Figure 10.
Nasal boss
Code Locality Specimen morphotype Sex
A Murraysburg commonage 7 1 indet.
B Swaelkrans 5 3 male
C Leeurivierspoort 33 3 male
D Modderfontein 9 2) female
E Bloukop 8 2 female
F Oudeplaas 13 3 male
G Leeufontein 12 3 male
H Ringsfontein 11 3 male
15 3 male
I Graaff-Reinet commonage 10 3 male
18 D female
21 2 female
J Katbosch 6 2 ? female
K Vleiplaats 3 2 female
L Bultfontein 14 2 female
M Leeuriviersberg 32 3 male
N Houd Constant 20 2 female
31 2 female
oO Roodebloem 1 1 indet.
P Matjiesfontein 16 2 female
Q Petersburg 19 23 ? male
R Hoeksplaas 4 1 indet.
17 3 male
S Ferndale 2 2 female
shape of the snout that occurred during growth may have been further accen-
tuated by the beak.
Although sexual differences of both extant and fossil reptiles are generally
poorly expressed in the skeleton, Dodson (1976) has provided convincing
evidence of sexual dimorphism in skulls of the late Cretaceous dinosaur,
Protoceratops andrewsi. He showed sexual dimorphism to be an important source
of variability in this ceratopsian, and found that it was reflected in many
characters of the skull apart from the obvious ones.
A preliminary and limited biometric (bivariate) analysis of Aulacephalodon
skulls indicated that only three of the specimens in the sample could be assigned
even possibly to a sex: two specimens were provisionally accorded male status
whilst a third was regarded as possibly female. The nasal bosses of Aulacepha-
lodon have been regarded by several workers as being related possibly to sexual
dimorphism e.g. Broom 1937, 1948; Keyser 1969). A simple size and shape
analysis of these structures throughout an ontogenetic growth series has revealed
that they do, indeed, appear to be related to sexual differences (Figs 6-7).
The smallest crania exhibit only slightly developed nasal bosses (‘Type 1’),
whilst larger skulls evince either a somewhat flattened, laterally projecting boss
(‘Type 2’) or a more bulbous, expanded structure (‘Type 3’). The sex of the
smaller crania could not be determined although Haughton (1917) considered
SAM-—3328 (specimen 1, described by Broom in 1921 as the type of Bainia
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALODON 183
haughtoni) to be a ‘young male’. It was not possible in this study to refute or
substantiate Haughton’s claim.
Those crania which showed a “Type 2’ nasal boss are believed to represent
females, whilst it is suggested that males evinced a more strongly developed
(‘Type 3’) protuberance. Although the bivariate sexing technique used here
proved to be generally inconclusive, as discussed above, three specimens
showed relatively consistent biplot patterns (SAM-8747, BPI.FN. 634—males;
SAM-K1221—female). The qualitative determination of sex, based solely
upon nasal boss configuration, agreed with the biometric determination in
two instances; but in the case of SAM-8747, a relatively large specimen, whilst
the biparametric technique indicated ‘maleness’, it was deemed to be a female
on the shape of its nasal bosses.
It is suggested that males possessed relatively more strongly developed
bosses than females, and that these structures might have served some sexual
selective function. They might have served as important visual signs in a mate
recognition system and/or as agonistic display mechanisms. Keyser (1969) has
suggested that the bosses could have protected the eyes (from thorny vegetation
or during fighting), supported horny growths, and possibly even served a
thermoregulatory function.
While the size of the nasal bosses is related in an allometrically positive
fashion to the growth of the cranium (as represented by either basal snout or
basal cranial lengths), the morphotypic expression of their general configuration
appears to have been established at the attainment of sexual dimorphism and
to have remained recognizably distinct throughout continued ontogenetic
development. Thus, the male and female configurations are discernible over a
rather large size range, whilst the smaller specimens show only minimal boss
development. If nasal boss morphology is sexually related, as indeed it appears
to be, and if the present sample is representative of Aulacephalodon, then it
seems that sexual dimorphism was first expressed when the base of the cranium
attained a length of between 190 and 245 mm.
The locality data appear to support the hypothesis that the present sample
represents a morphometrically homogeneous, ontogenetic growth series of a
single species of Aulacephalodon and that with age this species exhibited sexual
dimorphism of the nasal bosses and of the anterior portion of the temporal
arch. The confirmation or refutation of these hypotheses must, however, await
a more detailed biometrical and osteoscopic analysis of a larger series of
specimens which includes all the type specimens of Aulacephalodon.
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
A biometrical (allometric) analysis of a number of Aulacephalodon crania
was undertaken. The sample included representatives of various supposed
species as well as the holotypes of a number of these. The results of this investi-
gation indicate that this sample represents a morphometrically homogeneous,
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
species specific, ontogenetic growth series. The features utilized previously as *
taxonomic criteria can be understood as one result of allometric growth.
A qualitative analysis indicates that nasal boss morphology is related to
sexual dimorphism. It is apparent that the smallest (ontogenetically youngest)
individuals showed no or minimal nasal boss development, and that sexual
maturity or at least the earliest expression of sexual dimorphism may have
occurred in individuals with a basal cranial length of between 190 and 245 mm.
The larger male crania show a thickening of the lateral margin of the temporal
arches, and this is not present in small male or any female skulls. Large male
crania show a thickening of the anterior portion of the temporal arches.
The locality data for the specimens in this sample support the inference
that this group of fossils represents a species—specific ontogenetic growth
series, and that sexual dimorphism was expressed in the cranium of Aulace-
phalodon baini.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The fossil material was made available to us through the generous offices
of the Bernard Price Institute for Palaeontological Research, Johannesburg,
the Geological Survey, Pretoria, the South African Museum, Cape Town, and
the Transvaal Museum, Pretoria. Discussions with Drs M. A. Cluver, J. W.
Kitching, and A. W. Keyser, who helped in the mapping of the locality data,
were beneficial to this paper. We thank Dr M. A. Cluver, and Professors
J. A. Hopson, M. Raath, and P. V. Tobias for reading and constructively
criticizing this paper. We thank Miss J. Groom for drawing the text figures
and Mr H. Thackwray for photography. This work was supported in part by
a grant to F. E. Grine by the University of the Witwatersrand Senate Research
Committee.
REFERENCES
Barry, T. H. 1957. On the significance of tuskless specimens of Dicynodon grimbeeki Broom.
Palaeont. afr. 5: 57-66.
BarTLeETT, M. S. 1949. Fitting a straight line when both variables are subject to error.
Biometrika 5: 207-212.
Broom, R. 1906. The classification of the Karroo beds of South Africa. Geol. Mag. (5)3: 36.
Broom, R. 1912. On some new fossil reptiles from the Permian and Triassic beds of South
Africa. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1912: 859-876.
Broom, R. 1913. On some new genera and species of dicynodont reptiles, with notes on a
few others. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 32: 441-457.
Broom, R. 1921. On some new genera and species of anomodont reptiles from the Karroo
beds of South Africa. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1921: 647-674.
Broom, R. 1928. On three new species of Dicynodon. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 22: 421-425.
Broom, R. 1932. The mammal-like reptiles of South Africa. London: Witherby.
Broom, R. 1936. On some new genera and species of Karroo fossil reptiles, with notes on
some others. Ann. Transy. Mus. 18: 349-386.
Broom, R. 1937. A further contribution to our knowledge of the fossil reptiles of the Karroo.
Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 107: 299-318.
Broom, R. 1940. Some new Karroo reptiles from the Graaff-Reinet district. Ann. Transv. Mus.
20: 71-87.
|
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN AULACEPHALO DON 185
Broom, R. 1941. Some new Karroo reptiles with notes on a few others. Ann. Transy. Mus.
20: 193-213.
Broom, R. 1948. A contribution to our knowledge of the vertebrates of the Karroo beds of
South Africa. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 61: 577-629.
Broom, R. & Georce, M. 1950. Some new anomodont reptiles in the Bernard Price collection.
S. Afr. J. Sci. 46: 275-278.
Ciuver, M. A. 1971. The cranial morphology of the dicynodont genus Lystrosaurus. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 56: 155-274.
Cort, H. B. 1961. Scientific results of an inquiry into the ecology and economic status of the
Nile crocodile (Crocodilus niloticus) in Uganda and Northern Rhodesia. Trans. zool.
Soc. Lond. 29: 211-356.
Dopson, P. 1975a. Functional and ecological significance of relative growth in Alligator,
J. Zool., Lond. 175: 315-355.
Dopson, P. 1975b. Relative growth in two sympatric species of Sceloporus. Am. Midl. Natur.
94: 121-150.
Dopson, P. 1976. Quantitative aspects of relative growth and sexual dimorphism in Proto-
ceratops. J. Paleont. 50: 929-940.
DRYSDALL, A. R. & KITCHING, J. W. 1963. A re-examination of the Karroo succession and
fossil localities of part of the upper Luangwa Valley. Mem. Surv. Nth. Rhod. 1: 1-55.
Gow p, S. J. 1966. Allometry and size in ontogeny and phylogeny. Biol. Rev. 41: 587-670.
GouLp, S. J. 1968. Ontogeny and the explanation of form: an allometric analysis. J. Paleont.
42: 81-98.
Grine, F. E., HAHN, B. D. & Gow, C. E. 1978. Aspects of relative growth and variability
in Diademodon (Reptilia: Therapsida). S. Afr. J. Sci. 74: 50-58.
HaucGuton, S. H. 1917. Investigations in South African fossil reptiles and Amphibia, Part 10.
Descriptive catalogue of the Anomodontia, with especial reference to the examples in
the South African Museum. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12: 127-174.
Haucuton, S. H. & Brink, A. S. 1954. A bibliographical list of Reptilia from the Karroo
beds of Africa. Palaeont. afr. 2: 1-187.
HeEnnic, W. 1966. Phylogenetic systematics. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
Houxtey, J. S. 1932. Problems of relative growth. New York: Dial Press.
KerMack, K. A. 1954. A biometrical study of Micraster coranyuinum and M. (Isomicraster)
senonensis. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (8) 237: 375-428.
Kermack, K. A. & HALDANE, J. B. S. 1950. Organic correlation and allometry. Biometrika
37: 3041.
Keyser, A. W. 1966. Some indications of arid climate during the deposition of the Beaufort
series. Ann. geol. Surv. S. Afr. 5: 77-79.
Keyser, A. W. 1969. A re-evaluation of the systematics and morphology of certain anomodont
Therapsida. Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand.
Keyser, A. W. 1970. Some ecological aspects of the Cistecephalus zone of the Beaufort series
of South Africa. In: I.U.G.S. 2nd Symposium Gondwana Stratigraphy and Palaeontology:
653-657. Cape Town and Johannesburg.
Keyser, A. W. 1972. ’A re-evaluation of the systematics and morphology of certain anomodont
Therapsida. Palaeont. afr. 14: 15-16.
Kwwe Lt, J. K. & Case, H. B. 1967. Fitting the allometric equation—a comparison of ten
methods by computer simulation. Growth 31: 165-179.
Kircaine, J. W. 1970. A short review of the Beaufort zoning in South Africa. In: I.U.G.S.
2nd Symposium Gondwana Stratigraphy and Palaeontology: 309-312. Cape Town and
Johannesburg.
KircuinG, J. W. 1977. The distribution of the Karroo vertebrate fauna. Mem. Bernard Price
Inst. palaeont. Res. 1: 1-131.
Oxson, E. C. 1969. Sexual dimorphism in extinct amphibians and reptiles. In: WESTERMANN, G.
ed. Sexual dimorphism in fossil metazoa and taxonomic implications. 1.U.G.S. series A
(1): 223-225.
Oxson, E. C. & Miter, R. L. 1951. Relative growth in paleontological studies. J. Paleont.
25: 212-223.
Owen, R. 1844. Description of certain fossil crania, discovered by A. G. Bain, Esq., in sand-
stone rocks at the south-eastern extremity of Africa, referable to different species of an
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
extinct genus of Reptilia (Dicynodon), and indicative of a new tribe or suborder of Sauria.
Proc. geol. Soc. 4: 500-504
Owen, R. 1855. Description of certain fossil crania, discovered by A. G. Bain, Esq., in sand-
stone rocks at the south-eastern extremity of Africa, referable to different species of
an extinct genus of Reptilia (Dicynodon), and indicative of a new tribe or suborder of
Sauria. Trans. geol. Soc. Lond. 7: 59-84.
Owen, R. 1856. Report on the reptilian fossils of South Africa. Part II. Description of the
skull of a large species of Dicynodon (D. tigriceps, Ow.), transmitted from South Africa
by A. G. Bain, Esq. Trans. geol. Soc. Lond. 7: 233-240.
Owen, R. 1860. On some reptilian fossils from South Africa. Q. JI. geol. Soc. Lond. 16: 49-54.
Owen, R. 1876. Descriptive and illustrated catalogue of the fossil Reptilia of South Africa in
the collection of the British Museum. London: British Museum (Natural History).
SEELEY, H. G. 1898. On Oudenodon (Aulacocephalus) pithecops from the Dicynodon beds of
East London, Cape Colony. Geol. Mag. 5: 107-110.
Simpson, G. G., RoE, A. & LEwWonrtIN, R. C. 1960. Quantitative zoology. 2nd ed. New York:
Harcourt, World and Brace.
TRIPATHI, C. & SATSANGI, P. P. 1963. The Lystrosaurus fauna of the Panchet Series of Raniganj
coalfield. Mem. geol. Surv. India Palaeont. indica 37: 1-49.
VAN HOoePEN, E. C. N. 1934. Oor die indeling van die Dicynodontidae na aanleiding van nuwe
vorme. Paleont. Navors. nas. Mus., Bloemfontein 2: 67-101.
'
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51). ;
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc. ,
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ 4
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
S. M. TOLLMAN F. E. GRINE
&
B. DEAN
ONTOGENY AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN
AULACEPHALO DON (REPTILIA,
ANOMODONTIA)
VOLUME 81 PART 5 APRIL 1980
ANNALS
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN >
| MUSE UM |
|} CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small _
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 X 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; peas ay
“As described (Haughton & Broom xa):
‘As described (Haughton ef al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name acl year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
' et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in ‘list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, 5, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLtouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., Dovat, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. ‘gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, cee. masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THEELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Pabulccrteal Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-. Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 81 Band
April 1980 April
Part 5 Deel
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 10
STATION DATA 1977, 1978, 1979
Compiled by
ELIZABETH LOUW
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 201-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4—5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnayrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 90 4
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape ' Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 10
STATION DATA 1977, 1978, 1979
Compiled by
ELIZABETH Louw
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 1 figure and 6 tables)
LMS. accepted 6 December 1979]
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : F ; ; : : 187
The cruises . F : , ‘ : Be el ee/
Acknowledgements . : : 2 e205)
References . herec 5 5 ; . 205
INTRODUCTION
In 1975 the South African Museum’s Department of Marine Biology
embarked on the first of a series of cruises in deeper waters (about 500 m and
more) off the east coast of southern Africa. Station data for the 1975 and 1976
cruises have been published (Louw 1977). During the period 1977-9 three
additional cruises were carried out in areas south of the region sampled in 1975
and 1976. Publications dealing with collections from the 1977, 1978 and 1979
cruises will in most instances give station numbers only, and refer to the present
paper for further data.
THE CRUISES
Grants from the South African National Council for Oceanographic
Research (SANCOR) and assistance from the South African Museum enabled
the Department of Marine Biology to undertake the three cruises aboard the
R.V. Meiring Naude. From 9 to 18 May 1977 work was carried out south of
Durban, Natal, in the area 30°01’S to 31°30’S and 30°03’E to 32°02’E with
bottom depths ranging from 690 m to 2 600 m. In 1978 the area from 32°40’S
to 34°11’S and 28°50’E to 27°08’E was worked during the period 24 May to
1 June, in depths ranging from 80 m to 2 880 m. In 1979 permission was obtained
to fish off the coast of the Repubtic of Transkei and from 18 to 28 June the area
30°46’S to 32°37’S and 30°39’E to 28°54’E was sampled in depths of 82 m to
2 820 m. In both 1978 and 1979 some stations that were worked were in relatively
shallow water due to adverse weather and sea conditions which prevented
187
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81 (5) 1980: 187-205, 1 fig., 6 tables.
|
‘ q
|
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM |
r 26° 29° 30° 3° '
\sv. DURBAN
52
E51
53
|
ih Ly
NZ 1476
|
| SOUTH AFRICA we
Ng y6 1
3°
fag
959, *254 2008
* 53
243 207
25009249 0 $28
3F sue 2 246. Ile 0210
ais 022
Caer Be
:
200 30235 237 2215
:
225
223 gv
22848226 220
231-8 °230 2)9- $0218
©6224
227 © $221
223” 0999
2159
#159J-60
i
162, 161
4 E.LONDON « |
3 4 = 4169 3
o {
oe 169
0. 466-7 |
171 168 i
0174 el715
| VEIT 7
"2 179 176
178, aja }
184-5 77 4182 !
| 773
j ;
ep (83 D
187 j
188: 3
189 Y
d
#190 i
191 |
Pr we 29° 30° 31° vig
Fig. 1. Chart of the area sampled during the 1977 (stations SM 116-158), 1978 (stations i
SM 159-191), and 1979 (stations SM 192-256) cruises of. the South African Museum on the
R.V. Meiring Naude. ‘i
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 189
sampling further off shore. In all 141 stations were occupied during the three
cruises and station data are presented in Tables 1, 3 and 5. Relevant temperature
data are provided in Tables 2, 4 and 6.
The gear used was basically the same as for the 1975 and 1976 cruises, but
with the following changes:
Use of the IOSN and IKMT was discontinued
The small square-framed neuston net (Neustong) used in 1976 was
replaced during the 1977 cruise with a larger oval-framed net with
floats (Neuston,)
In addition to the RMT with uniform anchovy mesh (RMT),), a
similar net with stepped-mesh (RMT,) was used at some mid-
water stations
A double beam trawl (Menzies 1964: 103, fig. 14; Belyaev 1966: 18,
fig. 17) replaced the 18 ft beam trawl on the 1979 cruise
The material collected is housed in the South African Museum collections,
with duplicate fish material in the J. L. B. Smith Institute of Ichthyology,
Grahamstown, and duplicate decapod and isopod Crustacea in the U.S. National
Museum of Natural History, Washington, D.C. Some animal groups are still
available for study by interested biologists. These include Gasteropoda,
Pelecypoda, Brachiopoda, Anthozoa, Mysidacea, Tanaidacea and Euphausiacea.
77
NOTES FOR TABLES
S, D and N following SM numbers, e.g. SM 124S, SM 124D and SM 124N, indicate
shallow Bongo, deep Bongo and Neuston net hauls respectively, at the same station.
J following SM numbers, e.g. SM 159J, indicates surface fishing with jiggers or dip-nets
at night lights after completion of the haul at the station of the same number.
The beam trawl was lost at SM 137 (during the third cruise), at SM 165 (during the
fourth cruise) and the double beam trawl was lost at SM 256 (at the end of the fifth cruise).
Bathythermograph column in Tables 1, 3 and 5 indicates the number (BT-) of the
bathythermograph profile to which one should refer for temperature data relevant to that
station, and for which temperatures at selected depths are given in Tables 2, 4 and 6,
respectively.
In Table 1
** SM 115 Neuston net was towed during the RMT haul
* SM 126 An Expendable Bathythermograph (XBT) was used instead of a standard
bathythermograph
~ SM 119 RMT, was on the bottom for part of the haul
In Tables 4, 6
* Temperatures at Om were obtained from the readings on the Multipoint chart for sea
surface temperature.
In Table 6
** There are no temperature readings for BT—50 and BT-—51 due to equipment failure.
ee oemer 44° OU Sito Oser Oree 41S 62° OR Oe 1? Oto Ve b FE
o
5: a — www ell we ew
LL'S01 [T8I-So8t TOSOE S'TEOE Sb?I WS
aspoip
0 Pl‘97 AACOH 069 069 LL'S Ot SSSI-ScSI LOSI /9°8V.0E VEE.0E €cl WS
See aS hod ¢—La osuog CIT LL Ol 80rI-9reEl 0°SP.0E O9E.0€ AZZI WS
68°T L1‘97@ €-—Ld osu0g os LL’S ‘Ot OvVEI-EET /0°Sv.0E 0°9€.0€ Szcl WS
[Mey
98°T £6°S7 uwuvoq ¢c9-006 ¢¢9-006 LL 01 OfIT OPOI-TE60 O80 /8°7S0E /CTEOE IZl WS
IL‘T L8°Sz C-Ld osu0g CIT LL'S OT TS90-T£90 0°8S.0€ L'6T.0E G07 WS
z €£0 06°SZ c-Ld osu0g 6S LLS Ot ¥c90-L190 /0°8S.0€ /L‘6TOE socl WS
a
5 89'T 69ST I“ Ld WIWY OSL OSL LLS 6 CSIt EIT HOIT EV6r GO ELLE VVTOE 6Il WS
a
Z est 86°S7Z I-Ld osu0g CI? LLS'6 T@8I-8SLT /V800TE /681.0€ d8II WS
S 6ET 00°97 Ld osu0g os LLS'6 CSLI-9PLI /V 8001 6 81.0€ S8IT WS
2 [Med]
y8'T 00°97 uvoq 0¢8 078 LL 6 SCLI OS9T-OZ9T ESST 0 OTTE /SLToO€ LIT WS
SB
9 aspeip
2 0 66 °SZ AAvoH 078 078 LL 6 OISt LvvI-LOvI Let VSTONE 0°ST.O€ SIT WS
&
= s}OUy ays wi wi Ao So
a “dua “ON puq suysiy jaADIS. apnjigsuoT — apnjijvT
s paads aavfans ydoss dpay yjdaq yidaq 210Q——_ ‘ON
a S.diys pas -OWABY] SULYSL wojjog Out, uouisog uouvis
~AYIOg
“LLOI ABW 81-6 “SINIO paryy OY} Joy wep MONIES
| a1av.L
190
191
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
09'T 8Z'SZ ZI-LE osuo0g TIZ LL €1 S€90-7190 /VLIOE OTIoTE G9ET IWS
£9°T ZEST 7I-La osuog = 0S LL €1 8090-2090 LIE OO UTOTE S9ET NS
€9'T €9°S7Z TI-La osuog = ZIZ LL ZI ISTI-62Z1 /CVTOE VEOTE ASEl WS
09°T 79°SZ lI-La@ osuog 0S LL ZI O@ZI-VIZI /CVTOOE EO TE SSET WS
[Med}
0 Or‘SZ weog (006 006 LLS ZI OIII O£€0I-0€60 6580 /CLTOE 00001 vel WS
6r'T 6S5°SZ = TuojsnoN 86 LLS TI UIUL ¢ S970 COTE NEEL WS
6r' I 6S‘STZ OI-La osuog = ZIZ LLS TI 0’90-8190 /S‘9TOE /TIOTE AEE WS
VET 1S‘*Sz OI-La osuog = 0S LL'S TI 7190-9090 /S‘9TOE /CIOTE SEETWS
69° 1197 6-Ld WLINU 0-0£8 OSLI LL I 6E2~ 6rIT-8P0Z 7007 /C CHOOE VSVo0E ZET NS
[Mery
0 €0°9Z weog O8/ O8Z LL SILI ZP9I-OI9T SPST /8‘0V.0E iC EVE Tel WS
06'T v8°SZ = TuojsnaN =O) LLS TI UIW OT /80€00€ /CSS0E NOEI WS
06'T P8‘SZ 8-—Ld osuog = ZZ LL ST 60EI-8r7ZI /80€.00€ /7SS.0€ COET WS
88‘T 8L‘°SZ 8-—Ld osuog 0s LUST SYTI-6ETI /80€00€ (SSO SOET WS
espoip
0 8L°SZ ACOH 0s8 0s8 LLS IT SIII-ZIOl 760 /LTEOE VES .0E 6cI WS
Mey
0 08‘SZ weog O£6-0£8 Of6-0£8 LLS II 6260 6v80-EI80 OFLO ,L‘SE.0€ 1 6V00€ 8zI WS
SLT 79°SZ = SuojsnaN =O LUSH “UI OT 9 Tvo0E Lvvo.0€ NLZ7I WS
SLT Z9S7Z L-Ld osuog OST LLS TI Z£90-1 190 WOE ZLbyO0E ALZI WS
orl 19°Sz L-14 osuog 0s LLS'T1 4090-1090 9 THO Lvvo0E SLZI WS
€L‘€ S1‘9Z +9- LE WIN O-19r ~— O81 LL'S ‘01 SIIO OSEZ-OS7%Z LIZZ ,9°6S.0€ ,9°6£.0E 971 WS.
061
TABLE 1
Station data for the third cruise, 9-18 May 1977.
Se ee ee eee
fi eas 5 Bathy-
Br Position Time Bottom Fishing Meni: Sea Ship’s
aS D
Latitude Longitude Start Fishing End “s Ze nee ee oN. : pice ee
: :
Ss °E
m m 1c knots
oO 14 ° Ld
SM 116 30°15,0 31°15,4 1347 1407-1447 1516 9.5.77 820 820 Heavy 25,99 0
dredge :
oO
SM 117 30°17,5’ 31°10,0’ 9.5.77
1725
1553 1620-1650
trawl
a a ee eee
SM 118S 30°18,9’ 31°08,1’ 1746-1752 9.5.77 50 Bon
teas cae 2. go BT-1 26,00 1,39
SM 118D 30°18,9 31°08,1 1758-1821 9.5.77 212 Bongo BT-1 25,98 1,83
SM 119 30°14,4’ 31°13,9’ 1943 2104-2134 2152 9.5.77 750 750 RMT BT-1 25,65 1,68
SM 120S 30°29,7’ 30°58,0’ 0617-0624 10.5.77 59 Bon
cell Bel Laks FX0) BT-2 25,90 0,33
SM 120D 30°29,7 30°58,0 0631-0651 10.5.77 212 Bongo BT-2 25,87 1,71
SM 121 30°32,2’ 30°52,8’ 0830 0931-1040 1130 10.5.77 900-625 900-625 Beam 25,93 1,86
trawl
SM 122S 30°36,0’ 30°45,0’ 1334-1340 10.5.77 50 Bon
PS at 5. go BT-3 26,17 1,89
SM 122D 30°36,0 30°45,0 1346-1408 10.5.77 212 Bongo BT-3 26,15 1,78
SM 123 30°33,4’ 30°48,6’ 1507 1525-1555 10.5.77 690 690 Heavy 26,14 0
dredge ;
SM 124S 30°32,5’ 30°59,2’ 1805-18 5.
SM 124D 30°32,5’ 30°59,2’ 1817-1 par ieee es Hee eae Ee oe i 4
. ' rast 5M 124m 30°32,5’ _ 30°SO.27 12. min. 10.5.77 ad ° Ne rmdir: 26,24. La 2h a
SM 125 30°32,2’ 30°S7,5” 1909 1929-2029 2050 10.5.77 1280 415-0 . £RMtTtm BY-s 2618 Ann
‘SM 126 30°39,6’ 30°59,67 2217 2250—2350 0115 10.5.77 1820 464-0 RMTm BT-6* 26,15 3,73
SM 127S 30°44,7’ 30°41,6’ 0601-0607 11.5.77 50 Bongo BTI-7 25,61 1,46
SM 127D 30°44,7’ 30°41,6’ 0611-0632 11.5.77 150 Bongo BT-7 25,62 1,78
SM 127N 30°44,7’ 30°41,6’ 10 min. 11.5.77 0 Neustons — 25,62 1,78
SM 128 30°49,1’ 30°35,7’ 0740 0813-0849 0929 11.5.77 830-930 830-930 Beam 25,80 0
trawl
SM 129 30°53,4’ 30°31,7’ 0942 1012-1115 11.5.77 850 850 Heavy 25,78 0
dredge
SM 130S 30°55,2’ 30°30,8’ 1239-1245 11.5.77 50 Bongo BT-8 25,78 1,88
SM 130D 30°55,2’ 30°30,8’ 1248-1309 11.5.77 212 Bongo BT-8 25,84 1,90
SM 130N 30°55,2’ 30°30,8’ 10 min 11.5.77 0 Neuston. — 25,84 1,90
SM 131 30°43,2’ 30°40,8’ 1545 1610-1642 1715 11.5.77 780 780 Beam 26,03 0
trawl
SM 132 30°45,4’ 30°42,2’ 2002 2048-2149 2239 11.5.77 1750 830-0 RMTm BT-9 26,11 3,65
SM 133S 31°01,2’ 30°26,5’ 0606-0612 12.5.77 50 Bongo BT-10 25,51 1,34
SM 133D 31°01,2’ 30°26,5’ 0618-0640 12.5.77 212 Bongo BT-10 25,59 1,49
SM 133N 31°01,2’ 30°26,5’ 5 min 12.5.77 0 Neustony —_ 25,59 1,49
SM 134 31°00,0’ 30°27,2’ 0859 0930-1030 1110 12.5.77 900 900 Beam 25,40 0
trawl
SM 1358S 31°03,4’ 30°24,2’ 1214-1220 12.5.77 50 Bongo BT-11 25,64 1,60
SM 135D 31°03,4’ 30°24,2’ 1229-1251 2ST 212 Bongo BT-11 25,63 1,63
a a ee erg a Se a Oe ee Ce Pe en
SM 1368S 31°11,0’ 30°17,1’ 0602-0608 13.5.77 50 Bongo BT-12 25,32 1,63
SM 136D 31°11,0’ 30°17,1’ 0614-0635 13.5.77 212 Bongo BT-12 25,28 1,60
WngasnW NVOrddv HLNOS AHL AO STVNNV
SASINUO FGAVN ONIVIAW SIWNASQW NVOIdAVY HLNOS AHL
161
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
192
RS ETI
6st 00o% sI-ld $ cBuog os LU 91 vIZI-6071 EOE 98Z1E SOPI WS
SO‘e ¥6°STZ LI-La WIN 0-6cT1 0007 LLS 91 PEO! S760-S780 SELO 0°P0.0€ POETE Svl WS
19‘T 00°92 LI-La osuo0g CIT LLS 91 $£90-F190 /S°9000€ N9ZTE bbl WS
9ET 00°97 LI-La@ osu0g os LL’S91 0190-7090 /S°90.0€ MOTTE Spr WS
19‘T 18°Sz 9I-La osuog CIZ LL'S’ST OrsI-9I8I LYLE LYTLE aetril WS
Z9'T €8°S7Z SI-La osuog os LLS SI 7181-9081 LVI OE LYTLE Sevl WS
es pep
0 69°S7Z Kaeo O0vT OOrT LLS'S1 SO9l CcSI-csvl SIvI 6 91.0€ O'VTolE Chl WS
rT 90°97 ST-—La osuo0g CIC LLS'SI STELVScl /£VTOE YOToIE Albl WS
6r'T €0°97 SI-—Ld osu0g os LL SI 6rCI-EvCl /£ VTE IO OVAE STIvI WS
LI‘€ £0°97 vI-La WIWY O-OZIT o9sT LL ST 6071 6011-6001 SI60 6 0C0E VPToIE Ort WS
VE CHV €I-La WIW4a 0-0S¢ oort LLS VI Sv00 IZ00-OZET VOET TOTAE /8°TTOE 6€I WS
97E 78°EZ €I-La@ WIWY 0-0£8 OcET LLS v1 8vIZ COIT-6S61 ST6l LST OE /£ 1T0E 8€I WS
[Mey
ae =a weog ate OL8 LLS €1 -LE80 S080 Cele JESToE Let WS
sjouy Do uw uw Ao So
“duiay ‘ON puq SUIYSIY idDJIS apnyisuoT apnjijoT
paads aavfains ydois iva) yidaq yidaq | ¢ (a ‘ON
5, ays pag -OUWls2YI SUIYSLT wojylog aul, uoljIsog uolDnis
~Ayj0g
(panuljuod) | aTaV
193
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
6L‘I 10°97 S7-La osuog = ZZ LL'S'81 9ETI-BITI OTE 880.0 Assi WS
68'T 00°97 ~=s-« S7-Ll osuog = 0S LL'S'81 vITI-6071 OTO.TE —-8°80.0€ S8ST WS
vee 86°SZ S7-Ld WINU 0-0SL O0EI LLS81 OvOI 660-680 6080 O'LS.1E S$ °SO0€ LSI WS
y9'T 76°SZ = TuojsneaN =) LL'S'81 UI OT TLSoLE S100€ NIST INS
v9'T 76'S7 b7-La osuog = ZIZ LL 8 v£90-€ 190 TLSLE iS TO0€ d9St WS
6£'1 $6°S7 pc-La osuog = 0S LL'S 81 6090-7090 TLSNE S10.0€ S9ST WS
67E Ol‘vZ TUO}sNeN«x 0 JES Ph IU Q] IS CVE — 4S VCE SST WS
67€ 1) 4 €c—La WINU 0-005 0097 LAS HEN! 8000-80EZ 6E7Z =<STEIE S*YZOE pS WS
vee SL‘EZ €7-La WINY 0-199 0061 JAS IEE = FANG. ELE ATSN TAS A GE = TSN esl WS
SL‘T 08°€Z os TuoisneN =O) LLUS LI uIW O| SLEVE iS €10E NST WS
SL‘T 08°€Z t?-La osuog = ZZ LL LI vEsIVI8I SLTVE SELO€E AzSI WS
79'T 08°€Z tc-La osuog = 0S LL LI OI8I-v08I IG LCE | 7S ETO — SCS INS
aspolp
0 78°EZ Jola =: 006 006 LE GL. 9 LSE CULT=csol. OFS) ILTIE OVTOE Ist WS
ospolp
0 OL‘EZ LVN) 5 000) 0001 LLSLI = O@9L ~TSSI-LEvVE OlvI WSTIE -L PIoOE OsT WS
Z9'T S7vZ — TuojsneN =O LL LI UTIL QO] 6COIE ~P6I.0€ N6rl WS
Z9'T S7bT I7-La osuog = ZIZ LLS LI LETI-SIZI 6COTE P6IO€ dé6rl WS
09‘T 02‘rZ I7-La osu0g = 0S LLL IIZI-S07I L6CLE W6IOE S6rI WS
I€‘€ Stv~ = s_« O@--LEA WIWU 0-082 008 LL LI 9$80-9SL0 OILO jZSZIE ,TLI.O€ srl WS
fo}. 98-56 = TuojsneN 0 — seemensnecbalie Sula uu OL SVCLE...,0 91.0 NLYLINS
Se Aone oe ae
—
TABLE | (continued)
Bathy-
Station Position Time Bottom Fishing thermo- Sea Ship's
No. Date Depth Depth Gear graph surface speed
Latitude Longitude Start Fishing End No. temp.
°5 oe m m ba 2; knots
SM 137 31°15,3’ 31°12,6’ 0805 0837- 13.5.77 870 — Beam 7
trawl
SM 138 30°21,3’ S0nIS S72 1915 1959-2102 2148 14.5.77 1320 830-0 RMTm BT-13 23,82 3,26
SM 139 30°22,8’ 31°16,2’ 2304 2320-0021 0045 14.5.77 1400 250-0 RMTm BT-13 24,42 3,24
SM 140 31°14,4’ 30°20,9’ 0915 1009-1109 1209 15.5.77 1560 1120-0 RMTm BT-14 26,03 3,17
SM 141S 31°16,6’ 30°24,3’ 1243-1249 15.5.77 50 Bongo BT-15 26,03 1,49
SM 141D = 31°16,6’ 30°24,3’ 1254-1315 15.5.77 212 Bongo BT-15 26,06 1,42
SM 142 31°14,0’ 30°16,9’ 1415 1452-1522 1605 15.5.77 1400 1400 Heavy 25,69 0
dredge
SM 1438S 31°14,7’ 30°14,7’ 1806-1812 15.5.77 50 Bongo BT-16 25,83 1,62
SM 143D = 31°14,7’ 30°14,7’ 1816-1840 15.5.77 212 Bongo BT-16 25,81 1,61
SM 1448S 31°26,1’ 30°06,5’ 0604-0610 16.5.77 50 Bongo BT-17 26,00 1,36
SM 144D = 31°26, 1’ 30°06,5’ 0614-0635 16.5.77 212 Bongo BT-17 26,00 1,61
SM 145 31°30,4’ 30°04,0’ 0735 0825-0925 1034 16.5.77 2000 1129-0 RMTm BT-17 25,94 3,05
SM 146S 31°28,6’ 30°03,9’ 1209-1214 16.5.77 50 Bongo BT-18 26,00 1,59
SM 146D 31°86” 30°03,9’ 1219-1239 16.5.77 212 Bongo BT-18 25,99 1,49
na ISIS SOS. Saas or ser a ee — a
SM 147D —30°16,0" 31°24,5° 0615-0635 17.5.77 212 Bongo BY-19 23,86 a4
SM 147N 30°16,0° 31°24,5’ 10 min 17.5.77 oO Neuston._ _ 23,86 1,34
SM 148 30°17,1° SL 25,2" 0710 0756-0856 17.5.77 1800 750-0 RMTm BT-20 24,25 3,31
SM 1498 30°19,4’ 3152934 1205-1211 17.5.77 50 Bongo BT-21 24,20 1,60
SM 149D = 30°19,,4’ 31°29,3’ 1215-1237 17.5.77 212 Bongo BT-21 24,25 1,62
SM 149N = 30°19,,4’ 31°29,3’ 10 min 17.5.77 0 Neustony — 24,25 1,62
SM 150 30°14,7’ 31°25,4’ 1410 1437-1552 1620 17.5.77 1000 1000 Heavy 23,70 0
dredge
SM 151 30°14,0’ 31°27,6’ 1630 1652-1715 1737 17.5.77 900 900 Biol. 23,82 0
dredge
SM 152S 30°13,5’ SL27,5° 1804-1810 7S 7, 50 Bongo BT-22 23,80 1,62
SM 152D —_ 30°13,,5’ 31°27,5’ 1814-1834 iss Pele 212 Bongo BT-22 23,80 1,75
SM 152N 30°13,5’ 31°27,5’ 10 min 17.5.77 0 Neustony — 23,80 1,75
SM 153 30°15,5’ 31°28,2’ 1852 1932-2032 2123 17.5.77 1900 664-0 RMTm BT-23 23,78 3,24
SM 154 30°24,5’ 31°32,5’ 2239 2308-0008 17.5.77 2600 500-0 RMTm BT-23 24,10 3,29
SM 155 30°24,5’ 31°32,5’ 10 min 17.5.77 0 **Neuston. 24,10 3,29.
SM 156S 30°01,5’ 31°572' 0602-0609 18.5.77 50 Bongo BT-24 25,95 1,39
SM 156D —_ 30°01, 5’ S15 7,2" 0613-0634 18.5.77 212 Bongo BT-24 25,92 1,64
SM 156N 30°01,5’ 31°5752° 10 min 18.5.77 0 Neuston_ -- 25,92 1,64
SM 157 30°05,5’ 31°57,0' 0809 0849-0949 1040 18.5.77 1300 750-0 RMTm BT-25 25,98 3,34
SM 158S 30°08,8" 32°02,0° 1209-1214 18.5.77 50 Bongo BT-25 26,00 1,89
SM 158D —_30°08,8’ 32°02,0’ 1218-1236 18.5.77 212 Bongo BT-25 26,01 1,79
761
WngasnW Nvorddsv HLNOS AHL dO STVNNV
SASINUD JaaRN ONIMIZW S.WOSSAW NVOIA¥Y HLNOS AHL
£61
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
194
= = = S6vI OL‘OT O7IZT O8'EZ SS*Z O0SZ OL'ST 0657 06ST 065% 06S7 S7-Ld
aa = == 09st SLOT O9I% Os‘%z~ =~OS‘EZ~=S—s—«OOTHZ-SsCS7SZ~=SsCOD'9Z ~=Ss—«O'9Z-=Ss«OO9Z~=—s« NZ v7-LE
= = = O6ZI OOP OZLI S9'8E O€0% SLIZ O0O'EZ SEET OS'EZ SS*ET SSE €7-L@
= = = OVZI OLE OLE S68T Or6r O96T OS0% OF IZ OFEC SOEZ SL‘ET 7-1
= = = O6ZI OLE OS°OE O6LE O76E 0007 O80% OFZ SL'P~ O0KT OTK I7-L@
= = = OCEL SS*hE SZLE O98 O00% O0TZ SS‘IZ O€E% OFC SL'VZ O87 07-LE
= = = OSszI 46SOCEL «= SHOTS SL'LI. = «OOO «3S SO'OZ’-—Ss—«COT'TIZ_~S—é‘SW'ZZ_~—s—=«éB'EZ~=Ss«CéCGEZ~—Ss«O'Z 6I-Ld
= = — SSEL OSI OO6E OO'TZ OSE St%HZ SESZ OBST 0657 065% 0657 sI-La
== = = OO'rI Oost sooz os‘zz OL‘EZ oO8'sz 00.9% 00.9% 009% 00°97 00°97 LI-La
= == = = OovE Orst OL0Z O0°%% O67 OFZ OFST SL'ST SLIST SL‘SZ 9T-Ld
= = = OOrE Ost §«oz0~ )«=—sO'Z@Z_——«OHZSi«éi‘9Z_~—s—«éi'9Z~—Sié«éiT'9Z@~—é—é‘«iT'9Z™_~—<‘éiT'Z_~—CiéOOT ‘97 CI-La
= = = SSCL OOTE O&LE OG). -OL0% <SGlt —OS EC) O8tt “OS EZ _O8'EC ~ O8'EZ vI-Ld
= == = OS‘ZI 6OOEL «=sCOS‘SET = OGOT)=s OST —Ss«OT6T = ST‘OZ = OB‘7Z_~—s«OSEZT ~—sC«OLEZ~—s«OBET €I-L@
— = = SIEL OOP OBE O86T O617 OSE OFZ OLE SESZT OST OF'SZ 7I-L@
= == = = Orr O9LE OOIZ SIEZ SOPZ SLZ S9'St OL'St OL'S™ OL‘SZ II-L@
= = = OVEL OSE 096F O09 1c “O0;ce O0're SPSt SSst, SSse SSSt SS'Sc OI-L@
= = = OOSE Oror sSEO~T OS‘%Z S6r~Z 00°97 009% 009% 009% 009% 00°97 6-L&
a = = OSEL Obl O0% SLIM -O8ize O0te OSC <O8iSe SPSc -OS'Sc SSS s-La
= = = OSE —SOSL 1O80t. mO0ice. SLice. Sisto. UOGSG. «ShSG. O0S:Sc (0S;S¢ 20S;S¢ L-LE
OM'ZI 46 SO'ZE. =O SZEE)~=—sOSST =Ss«OLOL~=SsCOS‘IZ»~=s«OOEZ»«=sC«OSZ~=SsCOHOT-—SsSH9T = SHOTS OH9T_=—Ss«OH9Z_~—Ss«OOW9Z 9-Ldx
i = = Ov‘sE OS‘OE SIZ sz osrz srsz s6‘st 009% 009% 00°92 00°92 ¢-Ld
— = = OOSE O6'SE SOIT OL'%Z O07 009% 009% 009% 009% 009% 00°97 y-Ld.
= = = Spl OST SOIZ OOEZ O6FZ OO'SZ OS‘St™ SB‘St 06ST 0657 00°97 €-“Ld
a = = OFS (0690 O8te TONER ONC = O8Sc OSS —O8SZ O8S¢ O8isc SRS TLE.
oa = = OL’bI SL‘SE O07 OZIZ O07? S67 OS'EC OST OMS~ OL'ST OLS I-La@
Ds Ds Os Os Ds Ds Os Os Ne De Os D5 Os Ds "ON ydeis
‘due, ‘dwoay -dwey ‘dwey -dwoy ‘dwoey -dwoy -dwoy ‘dwoy -dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘duo, ‘dwoy -ouuoyjAyieg
WOSp WOOP WOOE WostT WOOT WOOL Ws. WoO WoC WOr WOE WOT MOI uO yydoq
‘QSINJO pJIY} SY} SULINP sopr[s YdeIsouLIeyIAy}eq WOIS poure}qo se sy}dep pajoejes 1e SomnjerIodwis],
(AGCKAD
195
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
60'7 v9°rT 6c—Ld osuog CIT 06 BLS LT CI8I-€SLI 981 87 60.€€ C691 NS
18 I v9°P7 6c— Ld osuog os 06 BLS LZ 8VLI-ChLl /9'81 87 /£°600€E s69l WS
os‘€ $9°b7 8c—Ld SIN 0-918 008T BLS LT 6Srl O€VI-6SZI ETT /S8T 87 TVILoEE 891 WS
OL‘e SST 8c- Ld SIN O-1601 OSvI 8L'S°L7 Sell OOLI-LS60 [760 SLT 87 /SOLoEE LOT WS
(SI LS‘€7Z 8c— Ld osuog CIZ O0rT 8LS°L7 1$90-6290 6 L187 OLEE C99 NS
877 IS*€Z 8C-Ld osuog os OorT 8L'S LZ £790-8190 /6‘L1.87 OOT EE S99T WS
[MeL
az Ss ulvog Bar = 8L°S'97 ay ~1c60 L060 /£°80.07 0°900€ £ SOI WS
SS re ee ee ee ie ee
espoid
870 96°77 AavoH 06 06 8L'S°97 cv80 Ov”80-9T80 £180 990.87 9 VOEE by9T WS
espo1d
670 SI€Z AxeoH 06 06 8L°S°97 0080-0SL0 SrLO 990.87 /IVOEE €91 WS
espolq
910 CSIEG AaeoH 0£9 0£9 8L°S'ST cS60 SZ60-1260 1060 0 TEo87 /0°SSoTE cot WS
re a
L8‘I [KS L7-Ld osuog (4X6 8L°S°ST 0020-0790 /8°VE8T TSSo%E AIST WS
a2 CLASC L7“L@ osuog os BLS ST T€90-S790 8 VE 87 TSS oTE ST9T WS
a a a ae oe eS a es ew es
6c'V 18°€Z Tuo}snoNy 0 OvIT 8L'S V7 £VTC-STCT 9‘ LY8T SHE NOT WS
ee a ae ee ee
ver 18°€Z 9¢-Ld SINU O-€8S Orit 8L'S V7 6SET B8EET-OETZ YSIT ‘LV 87 /I'SVoTE 09T WS
SS Re es ee
0 89°€Z = INNGE 0 8L'S v7 SSIZ-OLIZ 9‘ LY8T 9 SYOTE f6st WS
06°Z Iv‘€z 97- LE SLINU 0-069 OO0T BLS VT VOIT 6v0C-6r6I EET /8°0S 87 VOboTE 6ST WS
ae ore a Ee ge
s}0uy ae wi uw , ce So
SS SS A et ge OS
"day ‘ON puq SUIYSLT JADIS’ apnyisuoT apniijoT
paads aanfans ydoas dpa yidaq yidaq aj0q “ON
S.dlys pas -OUL2YI BULYSLT wmojjiog Quy, uoljIsog uolnIs
-Ayjog
a I ee ee
“SL6T Sune [Ae pz “OSINIO YIINO} OY} IOJ L}Ep UONLIS
—— SES ee ee re ee ee - a NY BEE TI I IS NTN TF NT EIT Ta ee a a
LV‘ 98°€Z pe “INNATE 0 8L°S°87 00E7 + AS etoLe /SPVEE fLL1 WS
£70 19°€Z ce- Ld SING 0-007 Orit 8L'S°87 €0£~ OSZZ-OSIZ 8EI7 /£°8EoL7 TBEEE LLI WS
€0°€ SI‘Ez ce- Ld SLING 0-80€ OOET 8L°S'87 LSOc vvOC rel tol /S‘SPoLT /TOEEE 9LT WS
ROC OL‘EZ ce“ La osuog CIC O9L 8L°S'87 Te€8I-Lost C6VoLT ESTEE SLI WS
€Vv‘Z TI‘EZ ce-“Ld osuog os OCL 8L'S 87 CO8T-9SLI TOVLT ESTEE SSLIT WS
espold
0 9£°E7 AAvoH O9L O9L 8L°S 87 SISI Ovbl-Ochl ESET VTS oLT 961 EE bLI WS
5 ZOE LI‘v7Z Te-—La SLNU 0-€89 0707 8L°S 87 SEII 9OII-cOOI LE60 LVSoLT TSTEE €LI WS
an
3 4 p8°€Z Te-—Lad osu0g os Osvl 8L'S 87 9790-0790 VES LT MS@oEE STLI INS
z 9r'7 99°€7Z Te-“Ld osu0g CIc OSvT 8L'S'82 €£90-1190 VES LT NS7EE CLI WS
<
= 0 TSH Ss INNGE 0 0097 8L'S°LZ STVC-STET LT 87 MOToEE {ILI WS
P. S8‘€ trv Oc-—Ld SLING 0-C6L 00972 BLS LT OlEC CHCT-EVIT B8IIC OE 1.87 V'OTEE ILI WS
E ore = 09" HZ = TuoysnoN 0 O8sT 8L'S LZ LZ07@-LOOZ BV187 8 O1€€ *NOLI WS
a Ile 79° am Tuo}snoN 0 08st 8LS°LT 100c-Sv6T /8°V1 87 OIE NOLT NS
a SEE 19°PZ 6c~ La INa 0-802 O8ST 8L'S Le LSO@ 6€07-8E61 CC6l 8°V1 87 8 OL€E OLT WS
x
= MSIODA Ds w w Ao So
°
7) “duaj “ON puq Suysty jADIS — apnylsuoT — apnj1jvT
—
< paads aavfans ydpa3 40a yidaq yidaq LL —— ee a) V
Z s.diys bas -OWsOYI SUYSEL wmojjog aul], uolisog uolonjlg
$ ~AYIOg
((1u02) € AITAVL
196
197
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
8L‘¢ TS°ET Le-“Ld SLNU 0-crs OVET 8L Ol Ispl OlvI-80€l CECT /S°800L7 ST Lové 161 WS
66°€ 06°€Z Le-La SLINU 0-859 0002 8L 91 OcIl vvOI-Sv60 7060 /€°800L7 /£ 9000 061 WS
oE'Z 16°€7 Le-~Lad osu0g CIC 8L 91 0v90-S 190 0°01 oLZ 0."E G68l WS
vr‘? 16°€Z Le-La osuog Os 8L 91 8090-090 OO LT /€ POPE S63l NS
aS 89°€7 ar TuojsnoN| 0 OL61 8L 91 9VCO-67700 /8EToLT /S 10ovE N88i WS
9€7 6S°E7 9¢-Ld osuo0g CIC OL6l 8L 91 VCCO-C07CO 18 ECoLT S10.rE C88 WS
(aa6 8S°€7 9¢-Ld osuo0g Os OL61 8L 91 9STO-IS10 /8°€ToLT /S 10ovE S881 WS
She 69°E7 9¢-Ld SLING 0-786 0007 Blo le CEIO ISOO-ISEZ OTET STOLTZ 6°SS EE L81 WS
9OL‘€ 90°rZ 9¢-Ld SLING O-£8S OcLI SLs le 1@CC ESTT-ESOT ~VCOT WLTLT ASHE 981 WS
espoId
€£0 Lv‘0z AavoH 06 06 BLS TE OOZI SSII-6v0I Croll IVT oLT /L6E0EE c8I WS
aspoiq
€r'0 6r'07 AAeoH 98 98 SLO lE 9€0I1 vEOI-EO0! IO00l LWoL@ WV6EEE b8l WS
09*€ IZvz ce-La WLINY OLY 0997 8L'S OE 60ST 8trI-8tel CIEL 6 LVoLT /8°8V0EE est WS
Lee S6°€7 S¢-—Lad SLING O-LIST 0887 8L'S 0£ 6ICI O€II-8cOI O60 C6VoLT T BEE c8T WS
977 €8°E7 ve-“Ld osu0g (46 BLS OF 090-8190 9 6£oLT VEEEE AI8I WS
EST 6L‘ETZ ve-Ld osuog OS 8L°S OF £190-L090 /96EoLT VEEEE ST8I WS
aspolq
v70 18°07 AAvoH 08 08 8L°S'6¢ veSl CrSI-IIst 601 iC WolT V6TEE O8t WS
TABLE 3 (cont.)
es a Ss ey Ba a a es Se Sa) er a er
Bathy-
Station Position Time Bottom Fishing thermo- Sea Ship’s
No. Date Depth Depth Gear graph surface speed
Latitude Longitude Start __ Fishing End No. temp.
piles ees | aS ae eo ee Re ee
°5 °E m m °C knots
er a a ee
SM 170 33°10,8’ 28°14,8’ 1922 1938-2039 2057 27.5.78 1580 708-0 RMT BT-29 24,61 3,35
SM 170N, 33°10,8’ 28°14,8’ 1945-2001 27.5.78 1580 0 Neustony — 24,62 3,11
SM 170N, 33°10,8’ 28°14,8’ 2007-2027 27.5.78 1580 0 Neustonz, — 24,60 3,46
Sigel eos ay ie Se Be Se eee eee eS eee
SM 171 33°16,4’ 28°13,0’ 2118 2143-2242 2310 27.5.78 2600 792-0 RMTs BT-30 24,42 3,85
SM 171J 33°20,0’ 28°12,7’ 2315-2415 27.5.78 2600 0 JDNNL — 24,52 0
; ° , = 23,66 2,46
SM 172D 33°25,1 27°53,4 0611-0633 28.5.78 1450 212 Bongo BT-31 i i
SM 1728S 33°25,1’ 27°53,4’ 0640-0646 28.5.78 1450 50 Bongo BT-31 23,84 2,18
SM 173 33°25,2’ 27°54,7’ 0937 1002-1106 1135 28.5.78 2020 683-0 RMTs BT-31 24,17 3,92
SM 174 33°19,6’ 27°52,4’ 1353 1420-1440 1515 28.5.78 760 760 Heavy 23,36 0
Dredge
é BT-32 23,12 2,43
SM 175S 33°25,3’ 27°49,2 1756-1802 28.5.78 720 50 Bongo ‘ K
SM 175D 33°25,3’ 27°49,2’ 1807-1831 28.5.78 760 212 Bongo BT-32 23,10 2,25
SM 176 33°30,2’ 27°45,5’ 1933 1944-2044 2057 28.5.78 1300 308-0 RMTs BT-32 23,18 3,03
a BT-32 23,61 0,23
SM 177 33°38,2’ 27°38,3 2138 2150-2250 2303 28.5.78 1140 400-0 RMTs ; ,
SM 1775 33°44,5’ 27°33,7’ +2300 28.5.78 0 JDNNL = 23,86 0,17
°. , ° , B BT-33 22,80 3,02
SM ves 38 ae ae. pees ls Bee oan ign Bongo BT_33 22,66 3,00
SM 179 33°30,3° Boy hor 7) Ve 1359 27 min. 1430 29.5.78 8so 80 WMeavy 20,82 O24
‘ Dredge
SM 180 33°29,4’ 27°21,2° 1509 1511-1542 1544 29.5.78 80 80 Heavy 20,81 0,24
Dredge
SM 181S 33°33,4’ 27°39,6’ 0607-0613 30.5.78 50 Bongo BT-34 23,79 2,57
SM 181D 33°33,4’ 27°39,6’ 0618-0640 30.5.78 212 Bongo BT-34 23,83 2,26
SM 182 33°38,2’ 27°49,2’ 0940 1028-1130 1219 30.5.78 2880 1517-0 RMTs BT-35 23,95 3,37
SM 183 33°48,8’ 27°47,9’ 1312 1338-1438 1509 30.5.78 2660 474-0 RMTm BT-35 24,21 3,60
SM 184 33°39,4’ 27°11,7 1001 1003-1034 1036 31.5.78 86 86 Heavy 20,49 0,43
Dredge
SM 185 33°39,3’ 27°11,6’ 1042 1049-1155 1200 31.5.78 90 90 Heavy 20,47 0,33
Dredge
SM 186 33°48, 1’ 27°27,4’ 2024 2053-2153 2221 31.5.78 1720 583-0 RMTs BT-36 24,06 3,76
SM 187 33°55,9’ 27°25,3’ 2310 2351-0051 0132 31.5.78 2000 982-0 RMTs BT-36 23,69 3,48
SM 188S 34°01,5’ 27°23,8’ 0151-0156 1.6.78 1970 50 Bongo BT-36 23,58 2,42
SM 188D 34°01,5’ 27°23,8’ 0202-0224 1.6.78 1970 212 Bongo BT-36 23,59 2,36
SM 188N 34°0O1,5’ 27°23,8' 0229-0246 1.6.78 1970 0 Neuston, — 23,68 5,24
SM 1898S 34°04,3’ 27°10,0’ 0602-0608 1.6.78 50 Bongo BT-37 23,91 2,44
SM 189D 34°04,3’ 27°10,0’ 0615-0640 1.6.78 212 Bongo BT-37 23,91 2,30
SM 190 34°06,3’ 27°08,3’ 0904 0945-1044 1120 1.6.78 2000 658-0 RMTs BT-37 23,90 3,99
SM 191 34°11,5’ 27°08,5’ 1232 1308-1410 1451 1.6.78 2340 542-0 RMTs BTI-37 23552 3,78
WOgasSAW NVOdavY HLNOS JHL 40 STVNNV
SASINNO JaayN ONIMIFW SINNASNW NYOIAV HLNOS AHL
L6l
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
198
els 68'S 109 9€9 €1'8 OOO SIIT OS‘ZI O9PT @78I ILI SEOt OLIZ 787 Bie BI'be
a ies 109 +249 S98 OOOT IZII OS‘ZI OPT OL'8I S8°6E LOOT ITIZ I9°%% B8°Et 68°E7
zs 199 069 O16 00 OCTIE 6S] LOET SST LST ZO ESOT LZIZ 61% G68'ET 86°E7
a — a — UL 8 cEOl CCI PSEL OZLT OS'8E S88 796 ZEOZ OSIZ 8S°E%
se ia —. = rae = coee — [67I Lvl OpOT I8°9T S68 OS‘OZ 8ZIZ O08
= - E= a a = 198 OSI] 7ZEL LIOT S66l THOT IZ Sit O67 SOEZ
a = = — 369 ZL 988 8LOI OL'Zl O69T Ih6E LIOZ SEITZ 961% HET LET
gz‘s_ 89S POL) SCLOTLSsCN'6 =~ LOOT «SEE «(OOET «=bHST «=(LE‘OZ «(OO'EZ «SEZ «II'HZ «LUE «BED OPH HZ
=) ZS) 65 “SUE S78 OCOr acell O9CD= SOP) "CBRE CLIC 00ico. SOC MSOITZ Sse Sor
ogp sis «6 S89SCESL) «OIG = ZL'OL: «SOIT «OMET SOM «I19'8E 0902 SOIT SL'7Z IE'HZ BEH~ CHP
Zip 2S 809 ZL 798 LSOI II SL'ZI SEPT O69T 88st Ep6t OS*6T OLOC SLIT 80°72
=s — O02 S8L 88 OZL0) LUZ) Stel SOS) ZhLI S16) L8i6r ssc Occ 618% Lov
Jo Do Do Do Do Do Do Jo Jo Jo Do Jo Jo Do Do Jo
‘duoy, dway ‘dwoy -dwoy dwoy ‘dwey ‘dwoy ‘dwoy, duo ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoey ‘dwoy
M0001 006 “008 WOOL W009 woos WoOrp Bo0e Wo0c “OO!
ul cL
wo, wo9
ur os
Wop WOE
‘gsInJo YJINOJ oy) BUlINp safyoid ydessowseY3Ay}eq Woy poure}go se ‘syJdep pojoajes 72 soinyeroduis y,
p alav
‘duioy ‘duroy ‘duroy ‘dwoy, ‘dwoy ‘duwioy, -ouloy}
siv~ — I6ec LE-Ld
68°EZ 88°EZ 90PC 9E-LE
86°ET SOET SEHET SE-LE
€6\6C =e EEC PERLE
€s7Z — 99°C £€E-Ld
ZVEZ «BTEZ «OLEZ «(TELE
Te = S9'ec. TELe
Gyre sre CtrpT «(OFLA
6L'v@ 8L'bt 9% 67-LE
(GAG. —— TUSAGG YEA
SOipGe cL OC. aC
ESSEC) te ah SGe OCRLD
ON
Do Oy Do. Ydeis
-Ayyeg
woz WO, WO. Yydeg
ELS v6°7Z €v-La SLNU 991 I-OSLI OCET 6L°9'07 OI8Tl Cy9T-8ESt VOST 6 €0.0€ 6 THLE €0¢ WS
fey)
ron ee
60% $S‘7Z ey-—Lad osuog CIC a 6L:9'02 ae UV ClmeCCl © a /L'VOoOE OOPo1E Az0zZ WS
Ss‘T 8r°CZ tv-Lad osuog €s = 6L'9'07 See SCN) ae /L'VO.0E OOVoTE Scoc WS
SEE 65°77 Cy- La. SLNU OO00I-€€EI OOET 6L°9'07 €OIT 860-8580 O£80 6°€000€ COPE loc WS
n
2 86°C CLee oe Tuojsnen 0 OOTT 6L:9°0¢ — cOLO-cs90 — © €000€ BoE NOOZ WS
L6‘T OL‘7Z cy-La osu0g CIC OOTT 6L°9'07 a COO ms 190s ime /C€000E BWol€ do0e WS
e 8L‘T 69°C cy-Ld osuog €¢ OOTT 6L°9'07 cee O090mS090 aes /C E00 /8 Tol€ s00c WS
9 ‘ 6 “a 6 6
= 89 € C6 CZ Iv-Ld SLING OST O€IZ 6L 9°61 8700 I£00-OFET 8IET 8 80.0€ 6 CLoTE 661 WS
z
g GLAS 96°77 = Tuoj}snoN, 0 O0EZ 6L 961 See (OVGROONG teen /8°TTo0€ VSETE 861 WS
: 8L‘€ L6°CZ Or- Ld SLING OST O0ET 6L°9'61 SIz@Z LOCC-OITT SOIZ 8 T10€ VSEoLE L6t WS
2 wv 00°EZ — TuojisnoN 0 0877 6L 9°61 cp) (LOUCsLSGI- ae /S1L0€ VETTE N96 WS
S 761 €0°€7 Ov-Ld osu0g CIZ 0877 6L9 61 SS OASIS S IL0€ JEVETE C96 WS
CI p9'T €0°EZ Ov-L osuog es 0877 6L°9'61 — 9061-006 — SIL0€ AE VEOTE S96T WS
=)
5s vS‘€ HEC 6£-—La SLNU Orv8-0SOT OVLZ 6L'9'6 8181 IOLI-109l Lbbl C81 00€ AM EEoTE c6l WS
<
5 v6'E 65°77 6€-—La SINU OSTI-9917Z 0082 6L°9'61 CVE G6ECI-8EIT Spor /907.0E OVETE v6l WS
fy
< aa 6E°7Z oa Tuo}snon| 0 ay 6L9'6T — vILO+40L0 — L‘LIOE SOETE NE6I NS
= rr 8E°7Z 8t-—Ld osuog CI? =a 6L 9°61 = VS905CE90 = /L‘LIOE BOLTE AE6I WS
5 = 9€°CZ 8t-—La osuog €s a 6L°9'61 nu S905CIS0) ae /L‘LIOE BOLE Se6l WS
n
I 000 Z9'I7Z = INNCE 0 00cr 6L'9'81 a OSCCSSI3. Sa /T6€.0€ 990.0 col WS
BE Bs
Sjouy Do w ul Ho So
*duay ‘ON puq SUIYSLT JdDIS’ apnylsuoT apnyijoT
paads aavfuns ydoas dDay) yidaq yidaq UPA) Se WING
S.diys’ Das -OUWldOYI SUYSEL wojjog aul J, uoyisog uolDnis
~dyjog
“6LOI UNE gzZ-RT ‘eSINIO YIJY oy} IOJ eep UONLIS
¢ Ala,
i er rg
- -— ee
a er a
AOE Pe Pee OPAL Ona STS © = 6L'9'7Z cael saa 1 MS€67 .S'B1ocE SIZ WS
ore PTET 6¢-—LE osu0g £¢ =, 6L°9° C7 7) SLOGlaccen 3 = /VS€06T /S°81oCE SSIZ WS
IS‘ €T CZ 6b-La SLNU O97I-06€T 44 6L°9°CT SOcI 801I-£001 £260 /V9€.67 /VS10E vIZ WS
== €8°T7 87-—Ld osu0g 097 OOET 6L°9°C — ve90-7190 — 6 VE.6C OE TCE dtizc WS
= vL‘t 8¢p-Ld osuog es OOET 6L:9°C7 — 0190-S090 — 6 VE.6C OE ToCE Stic WS
00°0 10°€Z a “INNGE 0 OS07 6L°9°CT — 0010-0000 — /8°8£.6T VEDTE cI? WS
(ons PE ET Ly-Ld WING civ OOLT 6L°9 IT €77T_ €OCZ-IOIZ + 9VOT /8°0S.67 /8°000TE Tic WS
=
OEE €£ET — Tuo}snoN 0 OPLZ 6L9 17 NVA AWG VES 6T /£ TO0TE NOId WS
5 ss‘T €€°ET 9p-Ld osuog CIT OVLT 6L 9°17 oan LOOGSELOL. ae VES 067 /£ T00CE doliz WS
= or'z EE“ET 9¢-Ld osu0g €S OVLZ 6L'9 IZ 9€61-0E61 WES.6C j#£10CE SOIT WS
‘GZ
S os‘€ ST ET 9p-Ld WIN OSOI-097Z1 O87 6L9 17 SI81 OTLI-ZO9T 7ST MG ATE BSSoLE 60¢ WS
fw
Re Sg‘e 06°77 Sy- La WING OL8-07ET O87Z 6L9 17 ISTtl CpOl-St60 O0S80 887.67 BESTE 8072 WS
2
5 Oe 78°C = Tuo}snant 0 OOLZ 6L 917 an SOL000L0)” ame 9 Lv.6T ISLE NZO0~@ WS
9 Ort 78°C Sy- La osuog CIT OOLZ 6L9 17 =e 9E905LI90) —S 9 LV.6T /OTSolE CaLoc WS
w 9s‘T 78°C Svy-Ld osuog £¢ OOLT 6L9 IC — 0190-£090 — /9° LVo6C ISLE SL0c WS
7
=
be 00°0 LVET ery INNGE 0 0097 6L°9'07 mm SHOOmSILEG, amen 0°6S.67@ 0 6PolE 90¢ WS
4 90° 87ET vr-La SLNU O0S—S8S 0897 6L°9'07 LS@Z ~8ECT-SEIT =ETIT /L10.0€ /LISoTE coc WS
Zi
g IZ€ TEET == Tuoj}sneN 0 O8SZz 6L9'07 CCOC-TLOT /LVOoOE SPITE Nvoc WS
pL‘T LVET vy-Ld osu0g CITC O8SZd 6L 9°07 — O00¢-St6I — /LVOoOE SB SPOLE av0c WS
70°C LV€T vy-Ld osuog €¢ O8S7 6L°9°07 Se SCOleCOl “ae /L'VO.OE 8° SPIE Ssroc NS
sjouy Do uw ul ch So
*dusaj “ON puq SUIYSLT JADIS apnyisuoT apnoy
paads aavfans ydoss spay yidaq yidaq aj0q “ON
5, dys Day -OUldaY} SUlYsiy wojjog OuiLy, UuOl|ISOg uolvis
-AyJog
200
(uo) ¢ ATEVL,
201
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
00‘0 €9°7Z = INNGE 0 Oss 6L'9'V~ im O0&CSl0G = /8°VS 87 OOETE Tec WS
88'T v9°CZ 9S- Ld o3su0g CLI 0£9 6L 9°07 — 9861 re6l — OLS 087 IOETE AOET WS
EL 85°77 9S-Ld osuog 8e 0€9 6L:9'V7 — 8s8c6l-Ic6l — /0°LS 87 /9'OE0CE SO0ez WS
[MP1],
00°0 65°77 9S- LH wreog 149d OVL-OL9 OvVL-OL9 6L°9'V7 OO61 9E8T-9081 srl 685087 8° LToCE 6c¢c WS
espold
00°0 €€°CZ cs-La AAvoH 0S9-00L 0S9-00L 6L9' V7 TE91 GO9T-9EST BIST /VLS 087 S6CoCE 8c WS
[MeLL
L9°0 66 IZ scLa weg [qd O6L-SLL O6L-SLL 6L9°¥Z €vcl IIcl-Ivll 6011 /8°SS 87 iV CEoCE LtT WS
ospo1q
00°0 00°7Z yS-Ld AAeOHCSLL-OIL =e SLL-OIL ~=—s«6L'9'VZ_~—S—s« BOOT «SCLH60-9160 SS80 _,8°8S.82 /9'8ToCE 977 WS
8S°7 717 = TuojsnoNi 0 = 6L'9'VZ — €s$90-€r90 — /£°6S 087 VOCE NS7Z WS
18‘T CI‘% vS-La osuog ZIZ = 6L9'VZ — 9€90-S190 — /€ 65087 WO0%tE UStZ WS
66'I O17 vS-Ld osuog 8E = 6L'9' V7 — 1190-s090 — /€ 6S 087 WOCTE sszz WS
6S‘€ 06°7Z €S-Ld WINY 009-£99 0€07 6L9'7Z 9120 LrlO-vr00 £700 C6006 VELOCE 77 WS
LTE 76°C €s-La WIN 0L9 O8EZ 6L'9°EZ BEEZ TOEZ-LSIZ E€EIZ V€T067 VVETE €7@ WS
c1z 80°€Z == Tuo\snoN 0 OLbZ 6L'9'€Z == (elie = /LV1067 JELECE N27 WS
161 00‘€Z 7S-Ld osuog £61 OLbZ 6L°9°€Z — Olz-6r0~7 — /LV1 06 JE LEtE U~eC WS
€8‘T €0°E7 7S-LA osuog €v OLVZ 6L'9 EZ — -b0c-6£07 — /L V1 067 JE LEOCE S77 WS
STE 66°77 CS-LA WIWa Ov8-OLTT OLVZ 6L'9°€7Z Sv6l 6S8I-8SLI SZLI 0°S 1.67 TVETE Itc WS
L9°€ = 7S-LA WIWA OSZI-9IPI OLIZ 6L9°ET LSOT 8SSI-IvbhI OO0rI 61167 £ TEE 0zz WS
607 9S5‘% = osu0g TIT = 6L°9'€Z Gert 0°L0067@ /ETEotE ©=9BTZ@ WS
PLT 96 ‘7 = osuog 09 = 6L'9'€Z = OSCI=SCCL ae JO'L06T £ CEoCE S617 WS
TE 997 sss WIWA SL8-916 007z 6L9°EZ ESIT 6hOI-9F60 9060 4H'EI.62 /8OEoTE 81z WS
SOE 9E‘7Z —_— Tuo}snoN 0 OS7ZZ 6L'9°€Z — 1g90-Ip90 — 081.67 L'LTCE NLITWS
c6'T LZC — osu0 717 0S7z 6L°9°€Z — 6¢90-0190 — 081.60 L'LttE ALITWS
=i SS omnes ry —— ee ee = ¢ a a i ae 7 ee ory rara
TABLE 5 (cont.)
SM 214
Bathy-
Station Position Time Bottom Fishing thermo- Sea Ship's
No. Date Depth Depth Gear graph surface speed
Latitude Longitude Start Fishing End No. temp.
°s si) m m AO: knots
SM 2048S 31°45,8’ 30°04,7’ — 1921-1928 — 20.6.79 2580 53 Bongo BI-44 23,17 2,02
SM 204D 31°45,8’ 30°04,7’ — 1935-2000 — 20.6.79 2580 212 Bongo BT-44 23,17 1,74
SM 204N 31°45,8 30°04,7’ — 2012-2022 — 20.6.79 2580 0 Neuston, — 23,32 3,21
SM 205 31°51,1’ 30°01 ,7’ 2123 2135-2238 2257 20.6.79 2680 585-500 RMTs BT-44 23,28 4,06
SM 206 31°49,0’ 29°59,0’ — 2315-0045 — 20.6.79 2600 0 JDNNL — 23,17 0,00
SM 2078S 31°51,6’ 29°47,6’ — 0603-0610 — 21.6.79 2700 53 Bongo BT-45 22,82 1,56
SM 207D 31°51,6’ 29°47,6' — 0617-0636 — 21.6.79 2700 212 Bongo BT-45 22,82 1,40
SM 207N 31°51,6’ 29°47,6' — 0700-0705 — 21.6.79 2700 0 Neustony, — 22,82 3,30
SM 208 31°53,8’ 29°48,8’ 0850 0935-1042 1151 21.6.79 2280 1320-870 RMTm BI-45 22,90 3,85
SM 209 31°55,8 29°57,1’ 1522 1602-1710 1818 21.6.79 2820 1260-1050 RMTm BI-46 23,25 3,50
SM 2108S 32°01,3’ 29°53,4’ — 1930-1936 — 21.6.79 2740 53 Bongo BI-46 23,33 2,10
SM 210D 32°01,3’ 29°53,4’ — 1943-2001 — 21.6.79 2740 212 Bongo BI-46 23,33 1,85
SM 210N 32°01,3’ 29°53,4’ — 2014-2021 — 21.6.79 2740 0 Neuston, — 23,33 3,36
SM 211 32°00,8’ 29°50,8’ 2046 2101-2203 2223 21.6.79 2700 415 RMTm BI-47 23,34 3,42
SM 212 32°03,4’ 29°38,8’ — 0000-0100 — 22.6.79 2050 0 JDNNL — 23,01 0,00
SM 213S 32°13,0’ 29°34,9’ — 0605-0610 — 22.6.79 2300 53 Bongo BI-48 22,74 —
SM 213D 32°13,0’ 29°34,9’ — 06140634 — 22.6.79 2300 260 Bongo BT-48 22,83 —
SM 214 S2 esa 29°36,1 0923 1003-1108 1205 22.6.79 2440 1390-1260 RMTs BT-49 22,23 2,51
SM 2158S 32°18,5’ 2Ol35.1¢ 1322-1327 22.6.79 —_— 53 Bongo BT-49 23,24 2,40
SM 21S5D 32°18,5’ 29°35,1° 1333-1351 22.6.79 — 212 Bongo BT—49 23,24 1,82
= te toh Ur AAT Ea tel oF ones ee isteek seis) a ee EASY 200 2. JID MNF __ a 2,00
SM 217S 32°27,7" 29°18,0° — 0559-0605 — 23.6.79 2250 53 Bongo = 22,17 2,01
SM 217D B22 7,0 29°18,0° — 0610—0629 — 23.6.79 2250 212 Bongo — 22,27 1,95
SM 217N S2e2 Tage 29°18,0° — 0641-0651 — 23.6.79 2250 0 Neustonz —_— 22,36 3,05
SM 218 32°30,8’ 29°13,4’ 0906 0946-1049 1153 23.6.79 2200 916-875 RMTm —_ 22,66 3,22
SM 2198 32°32,3’ 29°07,0’ — 1225-1230 — 23.6.79 — 60 Bongo — 22,56 1,74
SM 219D 32°32,3’ 29°07,0’ — 1235-1254 — 23.6.79 — 212 Bongo — 22,56 2,05
SM 220 32°31,3’ 29°11,9’ 1400 1441-1558 1657 23.6.79 2170 1416-1250 RMT BT-52 — 3,67
SM 221 32°34,2’ 29°15,0’ 1725 1758-1859 1945 23.6.79 2470 1170-840 RMTm BT-52 22,99 3,25
SM 2228S 32°37,3' 29°14,7’ — 2039-2044 — 23.6.79 2470 43 Bongo BT-52 23,03 1,83
SM 222D 32°37,3’ 29°14,7' — 2049-2110 — 23.6.79 2470 193 Bongo BT-52 23,00 1,91
SM 222N 32°37,3’ 29°14,7’ — 2117-2127 — 23.6.79 2470 0 Neuston_ _— 23,08 2,15
SM 223 32°34,4’ 29°13,1’ 2133 2157-2301 2338 23.6.79 2380 670 RMTm BTI-53 22,92 3,27
SM 224 32°33,4’ 29°09,2’ 0023 0044-0147 0216 24.6.79 2030 663-600 RMTm BT-53 22,90 3,59
SM 2258S 32°20,4’ 28°59,3’ — 0605-0611 — 24.6.79 _ 38 Bongo BI-54 22,10 1,95
SM 225D 32°20,4’ 28°59,3’ — 0615-0636 — 24.6.79 — 212 Bongo BT-54 22,15 1,81
SM 225N 32°20,4’ 28°59,3’ — 0643-0653 — 24.6.79 _ 0 Neustony — 22,12 2,58
SM 226 32°28,6’ 28°58,8’ 0855 0916-0947 1008 24.6.79 710-775 710-775 Heavy BT-54 22,00 0,00
Dredge
SM 227 32732,1¢ 28°55,8’ 1109 1141-1211 1243 24.6.79 715-790 775-790 Dbl. Beam BT-55 21,99 0,67
Trawl
SM 228 32°29,5’ 28°57,1’ 1518 1536-1609 1631 24.6.79 700-650 700-650 Heavy BT-55 22333 0,00
Dredge 4
SM 229 32°27,8’ 28°58,9’ 1748 1806-1836 1900 24.6.79 670-740 670-740 Dbl. Beam BT-56 22,59 0,00
Trawl :
SM 2308S 32°30,6’ 28°57,0’ — 1921-1928 — 24.6.79 630 38 Bongo BT-56 22,58 1,73
SM 230D 32°30,6’ 28°57,0’ — 1934-1956 — 24.6.79 630 172 Bongo BT-56 22,64 1,88
SM 231 32°30,0’ 28°54,8’ — 2015-2300 — 24.6.79 550 0 JDNNL ~ 22,63 0,00
-—— ——- —————sYX—sw—— sss
00d
WAASAW NVYOIMAV HLNOS FHL 40 SIVNNV
SHSINUO JGAVN ONINIAW SINNASQW NVOIdAv HLINOS aHL
107
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
202
we Bie Spa ee z8 6L'9T — OOfI-O001 — 902.62 8'rS.I€ HZ WS
SOT $017 09-Ld osuog TIT 026 6L'9°97 — 0290-1090 — /S*LT6T HOS1E AI? WS
00°0 IL‘IZ = INNCfE 0 88 6L°9°ST — 002-0077 — /8°8S.87 0°SToTE Ove WS
[MeL
$07 18°17 6s-Ld 9 weog 19d 06 06 6L9'ST €EIT B8IIZ-7SOc 8H07 /8°00.67 BVILoCE 6€¢ WS
OEE S817 = Tuojsnon 0 00T 6L°9°ST — 6707-0707 — /¥°00.67 SPIotE N8E7WS
781 L617 6S-—Ld osuo0g €S 00T 6L'9'S7 — fo0¢-ss6t — 400067 SVE S8ec WS
[Mery
Is‘] 76°17 8s-La weg 19d 09-009 0S9-009 6L°9°ST Ov8I €18I-vPLI vcLt /L*60067 STE LE~ WS
aspolqd
00°0 68°17 8S- Ld Aveo 099-0L9 099-0L9 6L'9'ST LSOT f€€9T-E09T BEST 911.67 VICE 9ET NS
[MPLL
ss‘T €8°IZ 8s-La wieog [qd OIS-08p O1S-08h 6L9S~ 9E€EI HIEI-EIZL STI 9° L067 TILE sec WS
[Mell
y0°C 68°17 Ls-Ld Weog jqd O7zs-00S Ocs-00S 6L°9°SZ — €€II-OOIT SPror 16006 O'SToTE pect WS
[Mery
i) 4 10° LS-L@ 9 weeg 19d O8S—-0rS O8S-0PS 6L9°S7 vOOT €vé0-€160 LS80 /8°60.67 TST oSE cez WS
espoiq
00°0 077 LS-Ld AAeoHy 09S-029 09S-029 6L°9'ST7 — SSLO-VcLO 60L0 V0 067 6 VICE c&éw WS
$}00y Jo uw ul do So
*duaq “ON puq SUIYSLT JADIS’ apnjyisuoT apnjijvT
paeds aanfuns ydosg 4pay yjdaq yidaq SL — SS IM
s,diys Day ~OWAOYI SUIYSLT moog aul, uoyIsog uolns
-Ayjog
((4u02) ¢ ATaV
203
n
{1
gz
5
(4
O
hy
Q
=
z
cS
S
x
Q)
=
a
=
5
WW
n
=
=
Z
<
0
f
fy
<
bs
sal
5
5
“2
w
z
al
ey ne eoguod.... cc
[MeLL
a = ate weoq [94d ag Sol 6L'9'87 ca — ~Ofel Scéel L167 © LEoVE 9S¢@ WS
ospolq
00°0 SS‘1Z ae AAvoH scl scl 6L'9'87 IT€l SOEI-ZOET LST /80F.67 BLETE csc WS
[MeL]
£70 81 IZ e9-La wreog 14d 08-098 08-098 6L'9 87 SEIT LPOI-9IOI 8760 ¥'0b 067 IWol€ vst WS
espoiq
00°0 £717 £9-Ld AavoH O10l Orol 6L'9'87 L060 87280-6080 6£L0 TI Po67 9 bbol€ esc WS
89°7 vEIZ =a Tuo}snoN 0 0s9 6L'9'87 SE ETUSR IO) /LE067 BPVoIE Nts? WS
£9°] SEI €9- Ld osu0g CI? 0S9 6L'9'87 me DC 90mC LOO ae ‘LE 067 SPIE AtS7WS
89°1 SE1Z €9- La osuog €s 0s9 6L9°87 — $090-0090 — VLE067 8 PVE S$csc NS
00°0 Ie“1Z ae INNGE LEI Let 6L9°L7 — 0010-00&C — /IVT6T 09S o1E Isc WS
espoiq
00°0 $807 COL AaeoH §=007-OST 2 ~O0Z-OST "2 = 6L'9'LZ COCZ ~CHIT-OVIT CEI? /S'TTo6T LOSE 0st WS
$9°I 6r'07 c9- Ld osuo0g CIC OS? 6L':9'L7 — 801¢-6r0C — 9 VT6T BBSo1€ A6r7 WS
69'T €£07 c9- Ld osu0g €¢ NS 6L°9'L7Z — SvOc-6t0C — 9 VEo6T /BBSo1E S6r~ WS
[Mer],
850 y9°61 coO-La =6wieog “19d OELIé OELI 6L°9°L7 8781 fOLI-IE9l esl /V'8€.67 6 9So1E 8bc WS
espord
00°0 $s‘6l 19-Ld Tora OS6I-O0081 OS6I-O08I 6L9°L7Z 61ST SIpI-cset T10El /8°8£.67 ASSo1E Lvc WS
espogd
00°0 OL‘61 19-La TOI@ = Ov9T-O099I OP9T-O99T 6L9°L7 vITT LZOI-9001 vz60 /9°SE6T 98S o1€ 9”¢ WS
espeid
00°0 7L‘61 19-La AaeoH Och ocr 6L°9' LZ c160 17280-9080 67L0 O'€£ 067 /L‘0007E Svc WS
S8‘l £86 19-Ld@ osu0g ZL OOOT 6L'9'LZ — €¢€90-7190 — (L876 Y10.tE AUbrt WS
7 ADAAT. mn Wow
L£14Oa° IT ——— J, QAOD—-NOAD. == fom go OorrTn7eo Cbhe7 TAI
707
TABLE 5 (cont.)
Bathy-
Station Position Time Bottom Fishing thermo- Sea Ship’s
O_O 02 Depth Depth Gear graph surface speed
Latitude Longitude Start Fishing End No. temp.
°S °E m m °& knots i
SM 232 32°14,9’ 29°10,4’ 0709 0724-0755 — 25.6.79 620-560 620-560 Heavy BT-57 22,20 0,00
Dredge
SM 233 32°15,2’ 29°09,8’ 0857 0913-0943 1004 25.6.79 540-580 540-580 Dbl. Beam BT-57 22,01 2,16
Trawl
SM 234 32°15,0’ 29°09,1’ 1045 1100-1133 — 25.6.79 500-520 500-520 Dbl. Beam BT-57 21,89 2,04
Trawl
SM 235 32°16,2’ 29°07,6’ 1156 1213-1314 1336 25.6.79 480-510 480-510 Dbl. Beam BT-58 21,83 1,55
_ WNaSsAW NVOIdAV HLNOS AHL AO STVNNV
Trawl
SM 236 32°14,3’ 29°11,6’ 1538 1603-1633 1657 25.6.79 670-660 670-660 Heavy BT-58 21,89 0,00
Dredge
SM 237 32°15,4’ 29°09,7’ 1724 1744-1813 1840 25.6.79 600-650 600-650 Dbl. Beam BT-58 21,92 1,51
Trawl
SM 238S 32°14,5’ 29°00,4’ — 1955-2001 — 25.6.79 100 53 Bongo BT-59 21,97 1,82
SM 238N 32°14,5’ 29°00,4’ — 2020-2029 — 25.6.79 100 0 Neustony — 21,85 3,36
SM 239 32°14,8’ 29°00,8’ 2048 2052-2118 2133 25.6.79 90 90 Dbl. Beam BT-59 21,81 2,05
Trawl
SM 240 32°15,0’ 28°58,8’ — 2200-2400 — 25.6.79 88 0 JDNNL — 21,71 0,00
SM 241D 31°56,4’ 29°27,5’ — 0601-0620 — 26.6.79 920 212 Bongo BT-60 21,05 1,05
SM 242 31°54,8’ 29°20,6’ — 1000—1300 — 26.6.79 82 82 Hand — 20,64 0,00
Lines
———_—— —_ S82 OS SSO oO SS SO TE MM
SM 244S 32°01,6’ 29°28,7’ — 0604-0607 — 27.6.79 1000 53 Bongo BI-61 19,88 1,74
SM 244D 32°01,6’ 29°28,7’ — 0614-0633 — 27.6.79 1000 172 Bongo BT-61 19,83 1,85
SM 245 32°00,7’ 29°33,0’ 0729 0806-0821 0912 27.6.79 1420 1420 Heavy BTI-61 19,72 0,00
Dredge
SM 246 31°58,6’ 29°35,6’ 0924 1006-1027 1114 27.6.79 1660-1640 1660-1640 Biol. BT-61 19,70 0,00
Dredge
SM 247 31°55,1’ 29°38,8’ 1301 1352-1415 1519 27.6.79 1800-1950 1800-1950 Biol. BT-61 19,55 0,00 =
Dredge es
n
SM 248 31°56,9’ 29°38,1’ 1534 1631-1703 1828 27.6.79 1730 21730 Dbl. Beam BT-62 19,64 0,58 S
Trawl 4
xq
SM 249S 31°58,8’ 29°24,6’ — 2039-2045 — 27.6.79 450 53 Bongo BT-62 20,33 1,69 5
SM 249D 31°58,8’ 29°24,6’ — 2049-2108 — 27.6.79 _ 450 212 Bongo BT-62 20,49 1,65 z
>
SM 250 31°59,3’ 29°22,5’ 2132 2140-2142 2202 27.6.79 cc. 150-200 c.150-200 Heavy BT-62 20,85 0,00 2
Dredge 5
a
SM 251 31°56,0’ 29°24,6’ — 2300-0100 — 27.6.79 137 137 JDNNL -- 21,31 0,00 g
SM 2528S 31°44,8’ 29°37,1’ — 0600-0605 — 28.6.79 650 53 Bongo BT-63 21,35 1,68 ©
SM 252D 31°44,8° 29°37,1’ — 0612-0626 — 28.6.79 650 212 Bongo BT-63 21,35 1,63 &
SM 252N 31°44,8’ 29°37,1’ — 0635-0646 — 28.6.79 650 0 Neustony, — 21,34 2,68 $
ro)
SM 253 31°44,6’ 29°41 ,2’ 0739 0809-0828 0907 28.6.79 1010 1010 Heavy BT-63 21,23 0,00 =
Dredge a
5
SM 254 31°42,6’ 29°40,4’ 0928 1016-1047 1136 28.6.79 860-850 860-850 Dbl. Beam BT-63 21,18 0,23 A
Trawl na
¢
an
SM 255 31°37,8’ 29°40,8’ 1257 1302-1305 1311 28.6.79 125 125 Heavy — 21,55 0,00 bY
Dredge
SM 256 S1°37,2" 29°41,7’ 1325 1330—- — — 28.6.79 105 os Dbl. Beam _— _ —
Trawl
£07
ET TENS Hew Ec Ree REC aay “9ESL OLOL OLE CVLi OLLI OF 6l PLIT SLIT LLIt LL It OV It €9-Le
er eal =a a Pan a — St ILO OOLT OTLT SZ7LI OLE LOTT 891% 391% 89% O707 Z9-LA
tb 8S8b 6(9ObS = BLD dIZ8s«OSG SOT ISIT €LEl OOST 99%ST E8‘ST OSOT €8°Or OL6I OL6I LOT SL‘6I O8'61 I19-LE
= = = =e — 006 £801 ZLIL POEL IOP] ILL O6LYI Z6PT B8I'St OOO! OLLI I0I7 101% SOIZ 09-La
=e = TF = = = =a == = — = — OS‘ST 909 88°91 ELL] ZI6l 91% SB‘It 6S-LE
= om = = = = — Tl vibt €9ST S7OL EOL OL‘OT LYLE 8S°LI 678I O€6I E€6'IZ S8IZ 8S-La
ce =F a al — 606 76IE 90°CE O8EL 9S'ST LOOT OTOT LYST I8°9T OZ LI ZS8LE 8°81 Os‘Iz ol'?%z LS-LA
= = — ISL O€9T 67LI ZrLI 90°8E LOST SEOt OFIZ OF GE? 99°77 9S-LE
—5 = — S69 808 76 E€OTL rT Z9EL IP'OT SLE TELE SL'LT Ib'8l SO6I ZL‘6l OL‘OZ FI'%% 70% SS-La
~ = Ta = — 0%6 IOI O@7I GEL ELST OFOT CSOT 88OT SE LT O6S'8I Er6l I8IZ gO? ZI‘%~ +vS-LA
2 = ee — IL vl8 066 EIT LIEL LOFT 69LT O8'8T STG 95°61 8'0c ELEC SITET OL'ET OL'ET B6'%C ES-—LE
am Ey) OOS 21899 f0L 268 stvOl sro OVSr ZiSh cost OGD, S8iok tSi0z- S0°% TNEC IPSZ TISZ OLEC ZOEC Codex
3 oe Oboe coo) Ly COG Gc ON sS0icl SheELe Stl “COSt O9GL Oooh 16900 96g 961 So OCS IC6t CCGG. SEC. 6rd
Zz [Sve LV S909) OY) S8Ree Ol Seis VEE oot) MOSEL OLS) Ceol SS0% 651% OS:%e ‘POC 6O'ee OLee ESce SPALal
o = ae uA re ee SOLO ee ia Dem OPC Cl ami Ol OSS CrOle SGGLmnChOCMmbONG —LUCCe Shc Shee Cate irae
s OV CS 069/81 OGG 0S Ol OS IT 17S cl OS She TOGls G0G cO0G 16a | 0S6C chSe SES pesc Ores Peer SPE
: OS OS VLG OS TGS MONON 61s ba nec Iason EDO aSivelamOP len ticaSile COOL utrOce 9 IommcSee. ES:CG OS CC SPALel
B Rive SOS 985 60/8 OG mse OL (SPIE IOC OS El LaLy . POG Siok ison SG0C Lice. O8te sec Ocse Te tc Pre
9 6fr Ssh £65 OSL IL'8 €L6 LBOL B8LIT ZOPIT LIT 99°91 P69T O8LT O96I Or07 680% LOIZ O6S‘%% EL’? €b-Ld
= coy BGY SCO OS CSS IOOl ae) 11) 00 Clee TL CU moron TLE I COLT wiGLSI) (S0\0GesGbicG OSG CSCC cece. OLice “chale
E Leb 6b 679 69%L SL'S PL LEOL OIL HEHE 8991 ILE 7ST 890% 8zIZ EEC 96°C B67TC B8OCC PEC? IP-Ld
fo) cry 16% 979 008 £88 786 £601 LOI ZEEE LOL PyLE B8L°LE LS 98°07 9EIZ SH~~Z 66°C POET OO'EZ OP-LE
4 Osh 9 ZL OLB 656 €L‘OI £9IT 8O°EE SO'SE ESSE 060% Z7IZ Sv7~ LL TIEZ Piet viet SIEt IGE? GE-LE
zZ on ae Be as a ae ee ats = me — = a= — — — = = _ OF Ces SESE
<
ON
Do Do Oo Jo Do Do Do Jo Oo Oo Oo Do Do Do Oo Oo Jo Do Do ydeis
‘dwej ‘duwiey ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dway ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy ‘dwoy -duay ‘dwoy “dwoy, -owoyy
-Ayeg
wOOdT 006 “O08 WOOL W009 WOODS WOOP WOOE WOOT WOOT WSL WOL WOOD WoOS WOp Woe WOT WOT WOx Wdeq
‘9SInIo Uy oy} SuLINp seyyoid ydessoureyAyjeq Wor, pourejgo se ‘syjdep pojoojes ye Sornje1oduwa],
204
9 ATaVL
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 205
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The South African Museum thanks the following organizations and
individuals for their help during this programme: Government of Republic of
Transkei for permission to fish in territorial waters; South African National
Council for Oceanographic Research for financial assistance; Sea Fisheries
Branch, Oceanographic Research Institute, East London Museum, Captain
G. Foulis and crew of the Meiring Naude, Messrs P. Slevin and D. M. Pim
(National Research Institute of Oceanology), Prof. M. M. Smith and Dr. P. C.
Heemstra (J. L. B. Smith Institute of Ichthyology), Mr G. B. Ross (Port
Elizabeth Museum), and Dr B. Kensley (U.S. National Museum of Natural
History). Mr V. Branco (South African Museum) prepared Figure 1.
REFERENCES
BELYAEV, G. M. 1966. Hadal bottom fauna of the world ocean. Trans. by A. Mercado.
Jerusalem: Israel Program for Scientific Translations, 1972.
Louw, E. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 1. Station data 1975,
1976. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 147-159.
Menzies, R. J. 1964. Improved techniques for benthic trawling at depths greater than
2 000 metres. Antarctic Res. Ser. Washington 1: 93-109.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51). :
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
Nnov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973. ,
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘.... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
’ (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ D
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
ELIZABETH LOUW |
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES ~
PART 10
STATION DATA 1977, 1978, 1979 —
ISSM 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; ros ihe
‘As described (Haughton & Broom ee)
“As described (Haughton ef al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name ard year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGn, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 19602. Ecological Fabre on Conus (Mollusca; Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, pe masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean,
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
Tureve, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. ate eee Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Wahimea R1 Band
August 1980 Augustus
Part 6 Deel
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE
SECTION, UMZAMBA ESTUARY (PONDOLAND,
TRANSKEI), THE AMMONITE CONTENT AND
PALAEOGEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 93 9
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION, UMZAMBA
ESTUARY (PONDOLAND, TRANSKED, THE AMMONITE CONTENT
AND PALAEOGEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
(With 5 figures and 3 tables)
[MS. accepted 6 December 1979}
ABSTRACT
Detailed collecting at the type section was undertaken to determine the exact age of the
Formation and to determine whether more than one faunal zone is present. Faunal analysis
based on ammonites shows that the age of the Formation at the type section ranges from
Middle Santonian to Lower Campanian. The ammonoid faunas at the type section of the
Umzamba Formation in Pondoland were compared with those of the False Bay region of
Zululand, and it was found that certain morphotypes, e.g. oxycones, compressed evolute forms,
and serpenticones are more dominant in the shallower water transgressive environment of
Pondoland, presumably as a reflection of different living conditions in the two areas.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction j : : : : : : : 3 207
Description of the exposures ; j ; : ; - : sy > 208
The age of the Umzamba Formation . : Sees a aac 209
The base of the section . - : : 2 ; : = 209
Top of the succession 5 : ; Be ee ; : > \216
Subdivision of the sequence . e216
Comparison of Pondoland and Zululand ammonoid faunas ney 21S
References . : : ; : ; ; F ? ; : 5 PPR
INTRODUCTION
Although the presence of Cretaceous sediments in the vicinity of the
Umzamba River Estuary (Pondoland, Transkei) has been known since at least
1824, the exact age and the question of whether or not a succession of distinct
faunal associations is recognizable have long been disputed (Baily 1855;
Griesbach 1871; De Grossouvre 1901; Rogers & Schwarz 1902; Woods 1906;
Du Toit 1912, 1920, 1954; Van Hoepen 1920, 1921, 1965; Plows 1921; Spath
1921b, 1922, 1953; Rennie 1930; Haughton 1963, 1969; Kennedy & Klinger
207
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81 (6), 1980: 207-222, 5 figs, 3 tables.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1975). On the basis of the fauna and flora described by Baily (1855), Griesbach
(1871), Chapman (1904, 1923), Woods (1906), Lang (1906), Broom (1907),
Spath (1921la, 1921b), Van Hoepen (1920, 1921, 1965), Rennie (1930, 1935),
Smitter (1956), Little (1957), Madel (1960), Miiller-Stoll & Méadel (1962),
Dingle (1969), and Kennedy & Klinger (1977a, 19776 1979), ages varying from
Albian to Maastrichtian were postulated, the prevalent idea being that the
Formation was of Senonian age (i.e. Coniacian to Campanian).
Failure to arrive at a decisive conclusion may be ascribed mainly to lack of
precise stratigraphic control, and/or lack of current knowledge of the systematic
affinities and stratigraphic ranges of some of the fossil taxa.
Aided by the extensive monographical studies of the Madagascar ammonoid
faunas by Collignon (1928 onwards), his series Atlas des fossiles caracteristiques
de Madagascar (ammonites), and by the authors’ preliminary biozonation for |
southern Africa (Kennedy & Klinger 1975), a new attempt was made to fill
this gap in our current knowledge. For this purpose a detailed sampling
programme was undertaken by one of the authors (H.C.K.) in 1974. However,
due to circumstances beyond the authors’ control, results of this investigation
could not be published earlier and consequently parts thereof were disclosed
elsewhere (Klinger & Kennedy 1977: Cooper 1977).
Finally, the apparent faunal differences between northern Zululand and
Pondoland are examined briefly to determine their extent and probable causes.
DESCRIPTION OF THE EXPOSURES
Descriptions of the exposures at and near the Umzamba Estuary are
provided in varying degrees of detail by Garden (1855), Griesbach (1871),
Rogers & Schwarz (1902), Du Toit (1912, 1920), Plows (1921), Gevers (in
Rennie 1930) and Kennedy & Klinger (1975), that of Plows (1921) being the
most complete. Apart from details of the ammonoid succession at the type
section, little else can be added to these general accounts. The lithologies
encountered may be described briefly as follows:
The Cretaceous strata overlie Ordovician? quartzites belonging te the
Table Mountain Group unconformably with a slight seaward dip of the order
of two to four degrees. The basal beds are conglomeratic, consisting of abundant
sandstone and lydianite pebbles set in an arenaceous matrix. Large logs,
chelonian scutes and other reptilian remains, comminuted shell material,
selachian teeth, and baculitid ammonites are locally common in these basal beds.
Higher up in the sequence, lithologies become finer-grained, consisting essen-
tially of alternating layers of grayish-green, fine-grained silts, and coarser-
grained, shelly or sandy concretionary horizons. Some of the concretionary
layers show traces of cross-bedding and scouring. Both silts and concretionary
layers yield abundant fossils, and sections of gigantic inoceramids, more than a
metre in diameter, are conspicuous. Fossils in the silty horizons are generally
preserved as internal moulds, whereas those in the concretionary horizons retain
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION 209
the original shell material. The majority of ammonites extracted from the
concretionary horizons were embedded horizontally.
The most complete exposure is on the northern side of the estuary (Figs 1-2),
named the Umzamba Cliff by Plows (1921, pl. 8 (fig. 3)). This is Gevers’s
(in Rennie 1930) ‘first locality’ and the authors’ (Kennedy & Klinger 1975)
locality 1. Griesbach’s (1871, fig. 5) locality was probably taken about 100 m
north-east of here (Fig. 3). Details of the section here vary considerably due to
landslides and heavy surf action at the base of the cliff (see Rogers & Schwarz
1902: 40; Plows 1921: 60).
The Umzamba Cliff is here referred to as locality A (see Figs 3-4). Beds A3
and A7 are the levels of the prominent caves remarked upon by the early
workers. These result from the collapse of the soft, silty beds between hard,
concretionary layers. Horizons below Bed A8 can be easily reached from the
base of the cliff by climbing on rubble from landslips. Higher horizons can be
reached by scaling the cliffs or by taking a footpath over the top of the hill and
then climbing down the cliff (see also Gevers 1977 for anecdotal details).
During low tide, foreshore platforms are exposed north-east of locality A
for more than a kilometre along the beach. Due to the abundance of silicified
tree trunks, this locality is known as the ‘Petrified Forest’ and is indicated as such
on tourist and topographic maps. Most of the larger logs appear to be orientated
in an east-north-east direction, presumably paralleling the Cretaceous shoreline.
The exposures are in horizons below those seen at locality A, and are here
referred to as locality B.
Locality C is situated on the southern side of the estuary (Plow’s 1921
Right Bank), and extends for some distance along the coast, but the latter is only
poorly exposed at low tide (see Rogers & Schwarz 1902: 40). Strata even lower
down in the succession than those found at locality A and B are exposed here,
but the actual contact with the underlying basement rocks was not exposed
during the authors’ visits. Large boulders of quartzite derived from the
Ordovician? Table Mountain Group are exposed on the NW side of the
estuary, but one or two metres of sand covered the actual contact. Approxi-
mately 10 m of sediment are exposed at locality C. The highest bed, Bed C11,
probably corresponds to Bed 3 at locality A.
THE AGE OF THE UMZAMBA FORMATION
In determining the age of the Umzamba Formation at the type section, the
ammonoid zonation compiled for Madagascar by Collignon (1966, 1969) and
the provisional one compiled for Natal and Zululand by the authors in a slightly
modified form (Kennedy & Klinger 1975) (Tables 1 and 2 respectively) are
employed.
The base of the section
The lowermost fossiliferous units are Bed C4 and the foreshore outcrops in
the northern part of locality B. Occasional Baculites capensis Woods, rare
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
*A[COS IOF JJl[9 OY} JO JOOF Oy} ye SI OUBAUONY SoUULYOL ITA]
"PL6 Ul paydessojoyd “WD equiezwi~ ‘equiezuip 3e sInsodxo ule oY], *[ “SI
“p INSLEY Ul PUL 4X9} OY} UI 0} PodIajol Se s}TUN o}eIISN]II OF YO equiezw jo Zumelg ‘7 ‘3Ly
oN
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION
212 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. Section at Umzamba about 100 m to the north of the main
exposure shown in Figure 1. This appears to be the site on which
Griesbach (1871 (fig. 5)) based his section.
Gaudryceras varicostatum Van Hoepen, Texanites umzambiense Klinger &
Kennedy and Scaphites sp. occur here.
The authors had originally considered (Kennedy & Klinger 1971, 1975) that ’
the base of the Umzamba Formation was of Coniacian age on the basis of the
reference of Muniericeras cricki Spath (1921b, 1922) (of which Barroisiceras
umzambiensis van Hoepen 1965 (Fig. 7A) is a synonym) to the Coniacian
collignoniceratid genus Subprionotropis. Since most of the above listed species
are typically Santonian forms, this determination became open to question, and
the authors would now suggest that this species is better referred to the homoeo-
morphic genus Lehmaniceras Collignon, 1966 (see also Klinger & Kennedy 1977:
103; Cooper 1977: 16). Van Hoepen’s specimen was collected from an
unrecorded horizon on the southern side of the Umzamba Estuary at locality C.
Apart from Pondoland, Lehmaniceras is known only from Madagascar where it
is relatively abundant in the Middle Santonian.
The association of Texanites umzambiense Klinger & Kennedy with
Baculites capensis Woods is related to that of Plesiotexanites olivetiforme
Klinger & Kennedy and Baculites capensis occurring in the first division of the
Santonian in Zululand. In Madagascar, Baculites capensis occurs in the Lower
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION 213
EXPOSURE AT UMZAMBA ESTUARY PROBABLE AGE CORRELATION
MADAGASCAR ZULULAND
STAGE SUBSTAGE ZONE
CAMPANIAN II
Baculites sulcatus
Hauericeras madagascariense
Anapachidiscus arrialoorensis
Menabites boulei
Baculites sulcatus
Glyptoxoceras subcompressum
Scaphites cf. aquisgranensiformis
CAMPANIAN
CAMPANIAN |!
Submortoniceras condamyi
Eulophoceras spp
Hauericeras gardeni (abundant)
Pseudoschloenbachia umbulazi
(var. spinifera abundant)
Damesites compactus
Heteroceras amapondense
ts 3 Submortoniceras woodsi
Hauericéras gardeni Plesiotexanites stangeri
P. ‘seudoschloenbachia By: tee Saghalinites nuperus
Madrasites afri icanitm. Sore Pseudophyllites indra
Texanites soutoni 5 Hauericeras gardeni
Hauericeras gardeni cae ee Phylloceras woodsi
P>umbulazi umbulazi Ye Echinoids and inoceramids
ae x conspicuous
Texanites soutoni Es Submortoniceras woodsi
Pseudoschloenbathia sp. Texanites soutoni
SN P. umbulazi
Hauericeras gardeni
Anapachydiscus wittekindi
Eulophocerus jacobi
Pseudoschloenbachia
umbulazi
SANTONIAN III
SANTONIAN
Madrasites similis
Baculites capensis
Texanites umzambiense
Mean sea level
Texanites hourcq!
Baculites capensis
Gaudryceras varicostata
Scaphites sp.
LOCALITY B
SANTONIAN II
Interminate molluscs
Table Mountain Group
quartzite boulders
LOCALITY C
Fig. 4. Stratigraphic section at Umzamba, including Umzamba Cliff, here marked A, the
foreshore beach exposures north of A, here marked as B, and the section on the southern side
of the estuary, here marked C.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 1
Ammonoid zonation for Madagascar as compiled by Collignon; after Collignon 1966 and 1969.
Z
=
wm Z
— < Basal zone of Pachydiscus lamberti
RS
a<
ae)
Ss Subzone of
SJ : i Termierella
s Zone of Menabites boulei lenticilnnis
§ and Subzone of
SS Anapachydiscus arrialoorensis Rabeiella
z & SS orthogonia
< = 2 y
=| may Subzone of
Z 3 Scaphites
< coat
& 2 8 Thee GH reesidei
< = Karapadites karapadensis Subzone of
~) mls Maorites
Fa 3| 3 aemilii
= S R Subzone of
S 2 Zone of | Hourcquiella
ke} ere is
S = Anapachydiscus wittekindi WERE,
S a8 and Subzone of
| S 28 Eulophoceras jacobi Besareita
xz s = P J besairici
e |
Q Basal unit with Neogauthiericeras zafimahovai
Zz
Ss
x A Zone of Pseudoschloenbachia umbulazi
Oe
-
Pn
Z
<
—
is A Zone of Texanites hourcqi
Qe
=F
=e.)
ZA
<
Zz, Zone of Texanites oliveti
[a4 i
BS
B4
Hn
SEE OED ts a
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION 215
TABLE 2
Provisional ammonoid succession for Natal and Zululand as compiled by the authors (1975),
here presented in slightly modified form to accommodate new data.
Menabites (Australiclla) abundant in lower part. Some appear
to range throughout together with Bevahites spp.
Baculites sulcatus is abundant throughout while pachydiscids
become common in the higher part, e.g. A. wittekindi,
A. arrialoorensis
CAMPANIAN
II
Submortoniceras woodsi and related forms are common:
other ammonites include Bevahites and Menabites,
Haucericeras gardeni, Pseudoschloenbachia, Bostrychoceras
and diplomoceratids.
CAMPANIAN
I
The local base of the stage is drawn below the level of
abundant Submortoniccras
Hauericeras gardeni is abundant; the remainder of the
fauna is as in Santonian II and is relatively scarce.
SANTONIAN
Ii
Abundant Plesiotexanites stangeri and varieties,
Texanites soutoni, Texanites spp., Hauericeras and
Pseudoschloenbachia occur, as do Eupachydiscus?
Hyphantoceras and diplomoceratids
SANTONIAN
II
Texanites oliveti, Plesiotexanites stangeri densicosta and
sparsicosta, Hauericeras gardeni, Pseudoschloenbachia sp
Pseudophyllites indra, Karapadites?, Eupachydiscus? sp..
Gaudryceras spp., Hyphantoccras sp. and diplomoceratids.
The base of the stage is drawn at the level of the appearance
of Texanites sensu strictu in numbers
SANTONIAN
I
Abundant baculitids ornamented only by growth striae. Also
ammonites resembling Pseudoschloenbachia primitiva Collignon
and Scaphites.
CONIACIAN
Vv
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM |
and Middle Santonian. Gaudryceras varicostatum occurs as low as the second
division of the Coniacian of Zululand, but is also recorded from the Lower
Santonian of Madagascar (Collignon 1966: 3).
On the basis of these ranges, it seems quite certain that the basal beds are of
Santonian age, and probably uppermost Lower to Middle Santonianinthesense
of Collignon (1966) and equivalent to the authors’ first or second divisions,
probably the latter, of the Zululand Santonian.
Top of the succession
The uppermost ammonite-bearing beds exposed, Beds Al4 and A15
(probably the equivalent of Gevers’s (in Rennie 1930) Bed T) yield Baculites
sulcatus (Baily), Hauericeras madagascariense Collignon (Fig. 5B), Glyptoxoceras
subcompressum (Forbes) and Scaphites cf. aquisgranensiformis Collignon.
Hauericeras madagascariense has a very restricted range in Madagascar,
occurring only in the upper part of the Lower Campanian zone of Menabites
boulei and Apapachydiscus arrialoorensis (see Collignon 1961, 1969; and
Table 1 herein). Comparisons with Zululand at this interval are tenuous, but
Baculites sulcatus is comparable with Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, as discussed.
earlier (Klinger & Kennedy 1977: 73-74) and is indicative of the second division
of the Campanian in Zululand. The absence of Menabites s.1. species which
characterize this horizon in Zululand, however, is puzzling.
The uppermost exposed beds at the Umzamba Cliff are thus provisionally
dated as uppermost Lower Campanian in the sense of Collignon (1969) and
tentatively the second division of the Zululand Campanian sensu Kennedy &
Klinger (1975).
Subdivision of the sequence
The ammonites collected in situ from the remainder of the sequence exposed
at the Umzamba Estuary are shown in Figure 4. Apart from a thin zone of
rolled and encrusted clay pebbles and hiatus concretions in Bed A5, which may
represent a very short break in deposition, no evidence could be found of a
major sedimentological interruption within the Umzamba Formation. It may
thus be assumed that deposition was virtually continuous.
Bed A7 yields abundant Pseudoschloenbachia umbulazi umbulazi (Baily),
P. umbulazi (Baily) griesbachi van Hoepen, and P. umbulazi (Baily) spinifera
van Hoepen (all probably conspecific). All three ‘subspecies’ occur together, but
P. umbulazi spinifera appears to become more abundant towards the top of the
Bed. Hauericeras gardeni (Baily) is also very abundant. This association corre-
sponds to the third division of the Santonian in Zululand, and the Upper
Santonian zone of Pseudoschloenbachia umbulazi in Madagascar. Eulophoceras
tenue van Hoepen, FE. umzambiense van Hoepen and other Eulophoceras species
(all probably conspecific) occur together with Submortoniceras condamyi near
the contact of Beds A7 and A8. In Madagascar the base of the Campanian is
drawn immediately below the first occurrence of Eulophoceras, whereas it is
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION 217
Fig. 5. A. Lehmaniceras cricki (Spath, 1921). (= The holotype of Van Hoepen’s 1965: 161,
pl. 6 and text-fig. 2a Barroisiceras umzambiensis. From the southern side of the Umzamba
Estuary (herein locality C) at an unknown horizon (see Van Hoepen 1965: 162). Geological
Survey SAS-P1093. x1.
B. Hauericeras madagascariense Collignon, 1961. This is the specimen collected by Gevers
from his horizon ‘T’ at the Umzamba Cliff (herein locality A), probably horizon A15, being
associated with specimens of Baculites sulcatus Baily on reverse side. South African Museum
SAM-7043. x0,75.
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
drawn in Zululand below the first occurrence of abundant Submortoniceras. It
seems reasonable to draw the contact between the Santonian and Campanian
Stages at the contact between Beds A7 and A8. It should be pointed out,
however, that Submortoniceras appears slightly earlier in Pondoland than in
Madagascar.
The paucity of ammonites from above Bed A7 at the type section appears
to be due more to physical difficulties encountered in collecting in higher
sections of the cliff rather than real differences.
Scaphites cf. aquisgranensiformis in Bed A14 is comparable with S. aquis-
granensiformis Collignon, which occurs in the subzone of Scaphites reesidei at
the boundary between the Zone of Menabites boulei and Anapachydiscus
arrialoorensis and the Zone of Karapadites karapadensis of the Lower
Campanian of Madagascar.
COMPARISON OF THE PONDOLAND AND
ZULULAND AMMONOID FAUNAS
The authors (Klinger & Kennedy 1977: 104; 1980) and Spath (19216: 53)
had previously pointed to the apparent differences between the ammonoid
faunas of Pondoland and those of biostratigraphically equivalent sediments
further north at Umkwelane Hill and in the False Bay region of Zululand.
A detailed comparison of the faunas of Pondoland with those of Durban,
Richards Bay, Umkwelane Hill, and Zululand must await a complete revision
of all the ammonoid faunas, but preliminary results are given here in Table 3.
The paucity of the faunas in the Durban and Richards Bay and to a lesser extent
the Umkwelane Hill regions as shown in the table are primarily due to lack of
sufficient exposures, rather than real differences. Furthermore, the absence of
some Pondoland species in Zululand may be partially due to our inability to
recognize the generally small Pondoland species as the nuclei of larger species
occurring in Zululand. This latter discrepancy is not applicable to the
Texanitinae, which generally grow to very large size, especially in Pondoland.
Despite these shortcomings, the picture that emerges is not one of total
geographic separation, but rather one of concentration of certain shell morpho-
types in specific areas. Very good examples of this are the oxyconic pseudo-
schloenbachiids and Eulophoceras spp., the compressed evolute Hauericeras
gardeni (Baily) and also the serpenticonic rounded Plesiotexanites stangeri
(Baily). Examination of the Van Hoepen Pondoland collections in the Transvaal
Museum (Pretoria) and personal collection at the type section, shows that
Pseudoschloenbachia and Hauericeras can be counted by the thousands, as
compared to numbers well below the hundreds in biostratigraphically equivalent
strata in Zululand. Known specimens of Eulophoceras from Pondoland number
about fifty, whereas the number from Zululand is well below ten. Similarly, only
two tentative specimens of Plesiotexanites stangeri (Baily) are known from the
False Bay region of Zululand, whereas it is relatively common in Pondoland.
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION 219
TABLE 3
Distribution of ammonoid taxa at Umzamba, Durban, Richards Bay, Umkwelane Hill and
northern Zululand.
Abbreviations used in Table
Absent Mabeiistieas Yale) Common =). 9. (©! —10=50
1-5 Abundant . ee (AN) 21100
1
Occasional : ‘ . (O) = 5-10
SPECIES
RICHARDS BAY
UMK WELANE
PONDOLAND
HILL
DURBAN
ZULULAND
Phylloceras (H.) woodsi woodsi van Hoepen
Partschiceras umzambiense (van Hoepen) .
Tetragonites superstes van Hoepen
Saghalinites cala (Forbes)
Saghalinites nuperus (van Hoepen)
Pseudophyllites indra (Forbes)
Pseudophyllites teres (van Hoepen)
Gaudryceras varicostatum van Hoepen
(= G. cinctum Spath 1922)
‘Gaudryceras’ sigcau van Hoepen
Anagaudryceras subsacya (Marshall) .
Anagaudryceras subtilineatum (Kossmat)
Verte brites kayei (Forbes)
Gaudryceras denseplicatum (Jimbo)
(= amapondense van Hoepen)
“Heteroceras’ amapondense van Hoepen
Pseudoxybeloceras amapondense van Hoepen
Glyptoxoceras compressum (Forbes)
Hoploscaphites spp
Baculites capensis Woods
Baculites bailyi Woods .
Baculites sulcatus Baily
Damesites compactum van Hoepen
Desmophyliites simplex van Hoepen .
Desmophyllites crassa (van Hoepen) .
Hauericeras gardeni (Baily) .
Hauericeras madagascariense Collignon
Natalites spp.
(including N. atalensis Spath, N. goutico=
status Spath, N. faku van Hoepen, N. africanus
van Hoepen, N. similis Spath)
Parapuzosia haughtoni Spath
Pachydiscus simplex van Hoepen
Pachydiscus umtafunensis Spath .
Pachydiscus antecursor van ae ;
Eulophoceras spp. . ‘ O-C IR —
(including Pulephoceras atalense Fiyatt,
“Spheniscoceras’ africanum Spath, ‘S’ tenue
Spath, ‘S’ minor Spath, ‘Pelecodiscus’ ama-
pondense van MHoepen, ‘P’ umzambiense
van Hoepen)
Pseudoschloenbachia spp _.. A — O O O-C
(including P. umbulazi (Baily), P. pee
fournieri Spath, P. papillata Spath, P. gries-
bachi Spath)
Texanites umzambiense Klinger & Kennedy
Texanites presoutoni Klinger & Kennedy .
Texanites soutoni (Baily) :
Texanites texanus s.1. . :
Submortoniceras woodsi (Spath) .
Submortoniceras condamyi Collignon .
Plesiotexanites stangeri (Baily)
Plesiotexanites matsumotoi Klinger & Kennedy
Lehmaniceras cricki (Spath) soe .
|
|
| mw] | | |
| 7 |
|
°
on badass Pr| WR PRORORO
|
Ae alae |S
Oo
|
1
O
oO
out ea eles |
Rwy
|
|
|
|
cel)
WRRARZRZXARA
Lee
Le ee
LP eS cee |
| | BOooRnaF|
\ewassaltWworiseit)26 Oh owe asckwsuntsr.hlCO Ke Wceneren wes:
ae
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Other species, such as Texanites soutoni (Baily), Submortoniceras woodsi (Spath)
and S. condamyi (Collignon) are common to both areas, though subtle differences
exist as discussed earlier (Klinger & Kennedy 1980) meriting separation at sub-
specific level. In the smooth lytoceratid forms the picture is somewhat obscure
due to limited numbers (Kennedy & Klinger 1977b). Saghalinites nuperus
(van Hoepen) and Pseudophyllites indra (Forbes) are common to both Zululand
and Pondoland, but are numerically superior in Pondoland. Pseudophyllites teres
(Marshall) is poorly known and has so far been recorded from Pondoland only.
Phylloceratids are also restricted in numbers in Pondoland, but both known
species, Phylloceras (Hypophylloceras) woodsi woodsi van Hoepen and —
Partschiceras umzambiense van Hoepen have so far not been recorded from the
False Bay region of Zululand (Kennedy & Klinger 1977a).
Details on the pachydiscids are still in preparation but show no distinct
trends, neither do the gaudryceratids (Kennedy & Klinger 1979).
Amongst the heteromorphs, Baculites capensis Woods and B. bailyi Woods
are common to both Zululand and Pondoland, whereas the Pondoland species,
B. sulcatus (Baily), has a possible equivalent in Zululand in B. vanhoepeni
Venzo (Klinger & Kennedy 1977). ‘Heteroceras’ amapondense van Hoepen
(= Anaklinoceras stephensoni Collignon 1966) is relatively rare, but is known
from both areas, as also, apparently are species of Pseudoxybeloceras and
Glyptoxoceras. The scaphitids have not been studied sufficiently for detailed
analysis.
The fact that species such as Texanites soutoni, Submortoniceras woodsi,
S. condamyi, Pseudoschloenbachia umbulazi and Hauericeras gardeni occur in
all major outcrop areas, ranging from Umzamba, through Durban, Richards
Bay and Umkwelane Hill to the False Bay region of Zululand, clearly precludes
the presence of an impenetrable physical barrier, and supports the authors’
previous views (Klinger & Kennedy 1977: 104) of open marine connection
between the areas. One of their previous views, however, that the biostrati-
graphically equivalent strata in Zululand were probably not well exposed
(Klinger & Kennedy 1977: 104) now appears erroneous in view of the above
data.
It has been suggested recently (see Cooper 1977: 32) that trophic resources
increase during transgressions, which in turn leads to population explosions of
certain favoured species. In the case of the diachronous southwards-extending
Umzamba Formation Santonian transgression (Klinger & Kennedy 1977), these
favoured species appear to be the oxyconic pseudoschloenbachiids and Eulo-
phoceras spp, the compressed evolute Hauericeras gardeni and the serpenti-
conic Plesiotexanites stangeri.
Due to the abundance of specimens, a high degree of splitting into various
morphotypes was applied to species (see Van Hoepen 1921; Spath 1922).
The authors would suggest that it will be possible to reduce the various
‘species’ or variants of Pseudoschloenbachia and Eulophoceras to a single species
each, as has been done in the case of Plesiotexanites stangeri (Baily) (Klinger &
Kennedy 1980).
|
.
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE SECTION 221
(A comparable situation to that at Umzamba occurs in Zululand following
the Lower Coniacian transgression (Kennedy & Klinger 1971). Here the
sediments are dominated by the oxyconic Proplacenticeras ‘species’
P. umkwelanense (Etheridge), P. subkaffrarium (Spath) and P. kaffrarium
(Etheridge) and very evolute serpenticonic peroniceratids belonging to the
groups of Peroniceras tridorsatum (Schliter), P. dravidicum (Kossmat),
P. westphalicum (Schliiter) etc. Klinger, et al. (in prep.) suggest that the
Proplacenticeras ‘species’ ranging from the completely smooth P. umkwelanense
through P. subkaffrarium with undulating flanks to the distinctly umbilically
spinose P. kaffrarium all belong to one variable species. A similar simplification
of peroniceratid systematics is also envisaged.)
The question which now arises, and for which the authors can find no
satisfactory answer, is why these particular morphotypes (oxycones, e.g.
Pseudoschloenbachia; compressed evolute, e.g. Hauericeras; and serpenticone,
e.g. Plesiotexanites stangeri) proved to be so successful in terms of numbers
in a shallow-water, transgressive environment and tended towards a certain
degree of endemism and great intraspecific variation.
The wide global distribution of Plesiotexanites stangeri (Klinger &
Kennedy 1980) clearly shows that these forms were not restricted to transgres-
sive habitats only and were capable of substantial dispersal, but apparently
preferred a shallower water transgressive milieu. It may be suggested that the
shell types were hydrodynamically suited to this particular type of environment,
but again specific explanations are lacking.
REFERENCES
Baty, W. H. 1855. Description of some Cretaceous fossils, South Africa. Q. J/ geol. Soc. Lond.
11: 454465.
Broom, R. 1907. On some reptilian remains from the Cretaceous Beds at the mouth of the
Umpenyati River. Rep. geol. Surv. Natal Zululand. 3: 95.
CHAPMAN, F. 1904. Foraminifera and Ostracoda from the Cretaceous of East Pondoland,
South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 221-237.
CHAPMAN, F. 1923. On some Foraminifera and Ostracoda from the Cretaceous of the
Umzamba River, Pondoland. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 26: 221-237.
CoLLIGNon, M. 1961. Ammonites néocrétacées du Menabe (Madagascar) VII. Les Desmo-
ceratidae. Annls. géol. Serv. Mines Madagascar 31: 1-115.
CoLLiGNon, M. 1966. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites).
XIV (Santonien). Tananarive: Service Geologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites).
XV (Campanien inférieur). Tananarive: Service Geologique.
Cooper, M. R. 1977. Eustacy during the Cretaceous: its implications and importance.
Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatol., Palaeoecol. 22: 1-60.
DINGLE, R. V. 1969. Upper Senonian Ostracods from the coast of Pondoland, South Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 38: 347-385.
Du Toit, A. L. 1912. The geology of Pondoland. Ann. Rep. geol. Surv. U. S. Afr. 1912:
153-180.
Du Torr, A. L. 1920. The geology of Pondoland and portions of Alfred and lower Umzimkulu
Counties, Natal. An explanation of Cape sheet 28 (Pondoland). Pretoria: Geological
Survey.
Du Torr, A. L. 1954. Geology of South Africa. London: Oliver & Boyd.
222 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GarbkN, R. J. 1855. Notice of some Cretaceous rocks near Natal, South Africa. Q. JI geol.
Soc. Lond. 11: 453-454.
Gevers, T. 1977. Fossils and dynamite. Quart. News Bull. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 19: 10-11.
GrigsBACH, C. L. 1871. On the geology of Natal in South Africa. Q. JI geol. Soc. Lond. 27:
53-72.
GrossouvrE, A. DE 1901. Réchérches sur la Craie Supérieure. 1. Stratigraphie générale.
Mém. serv. Carte géol. dét. Fr. 1013 pp.
HaucutTon, S. H. 1963. The stratigraphic history of Africa south of the Sahara. Edinburgh,
London: Oliver & Boyd.
HauGutTon, S. H. 1969. Geological history of southern Africa, Cape Town: Geological Society
of South Africa.
Kennepy, W. J. & Kuincer, H. C. 1971. A major intra-Cretaceous unconformity in eastern
South Africa. J. geol. Soc. Lond. 127: 183-186.
KENNEDY, W. J. & K1LinGer, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 265-315.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1977a. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite family Phylloceratidae. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 27: —
349-380.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1977b. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite family Tetragonitidae Hyatt, 1900. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 73: 149-197.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1979. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite family Gaudryceratidae. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 31:
121-174.
K.inGer, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from a borehole near
Richards Bay, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 69-107.
K.LinceErR, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 80.
Lane, W. D. 1906. Polyzoa. In: Woops, H. The Cretaceous faunas of Pondoland. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 4: 275-350.
LitTLe, J. DE V. 1957. A new species of Trigonia from the Upper Cretaceous beds near the
Itongazi River, Natal. Palaeont. afr. 4: 117-122.
Maéper, E. 1960. Monimiaceen-HOlzer aus den Oberkretazischen Umzambaschichten yon
Ost-Pondoland, S. Afrika. Senck. leth. 41: 331-391.
MULLER-STOLL, W. R. & MADEL, E. 1972. Fossil woods of Monimiacea and Euphorbiacea
from the Upper Cretaceous Umzamba Beds of East Pondoland, C.P. Trans. geol. Soc.
S. Afr. 65: 93-104.
PiLows, W. J. 1921. The Cretaceous rocks of Pondoland. Ann. Durban Mus. 3: 58-66.
RENNIE, J. V. L. 1930. New Lamellibranchia and Gasteropoda from the Upper Cretaceous of
Pondoland (with an appendix on some species from the Cretaceous of Zululand). Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 28: 159-260.
Rocers, A. W. & SCHWARZ, E. H. L. 1902. General Survey of the rocks in the southern parts
of the Transkei and Pondoland including a description of the Cretaceous rocks of eastern
Pondoland. Rep. geol. Commn Cape Good Hope 1901: 25-46.
SMITTER, Y. H. 1956. Foraminifera from the Upper Cretaceous beds occurring near the
Itongazi River, Natal. Palaeont. afr. 3: 103-107.
SPATH, L. F. 1921a. On Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Zululand. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12:
217-321.
SPATH, L. F. 19216. On Upper Cretaceous Ammonoidea from Pondoland. Ann. Durban Mus.
3: 39-57.
SPATH, L. F. 1922. On the Senonian ammonite fauna of Pondoland. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 10:
113-147.
SpATH, L. F. 1953. The Upper Cretaceous Cephalopod fauna of Grahamland. Scient. Rep.
Falkld. Isl. Dep. Surv. 3: 1-60.
VAN Hoepen, E. C. N. 1920. Description of some Cretaceous ammonites from Pondoland.
Ann. Transy. Mus. 7: 142-147.
VAN Hoepen, E. C. N. 1921. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Pondoland. Ann. Transy. Mus. 8:
1-48.
VAN Hoepen, E. C. N. 1965. New and little known Zululand and Pondoland ammonites.
Ann. geol. Sury. S. Afr. 4: 158-172.
Woops, H. 1906. The Cretaceous fauna of Pondoland. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 275-350.
rd
SF AR A mS OI I NA item A?
rn ne
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51). 4
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110, Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
“not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
' book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ :
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. ;
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
THE UMZAMBA FORMATION AT ITS TYPE
SECTION UMZAMBA ESTUARY (PONDOLAND,
TRANSKEI), THE AMMONITE CONTENT AND
PALAEOGEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
|
| OLUME 81 PART 7 JUNE 1980
(OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
| _ MUSEUM
\CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
“Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; oe me
“As described (Haughton & Broom ie Vi
‘As described (Haughton ef al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name BEN year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konan, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, cee. masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4):
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Bele ahbee: Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270,
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 81 Band
June 1980 Junie
Part dl Deel
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL
IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS FROM
UPPER PLEISTOCENE AND HOLOCENE SITES
IN SOUTHERN AFRICA
By
RICHARD G. KLEIN
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
heskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 91 2
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., ' Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE
MAMMALS FROM UPPER PLEISTOCENE AND HOLOCENE SITES
IN SOUTHERN AFRICA
By
RICHARD G. KLEIN
Department of Anthropology, University of Chicago
(With 5 figures, 7 tables and 1 appendix)
[MS. accepted 13 December 1979]
ABSTRACT
There are now more than seventy-five Upper Pleistocene and Holocene localities in
southern Africa that have provided analysable remains of large mammals. The purpose of this
paper is to summarize the information these remains have provided on past environments, on
the evolution of man-environment relationships, and on the ecology and demise of extinct
species.
For the purposes of discussion, the fossiliferous Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites are
divided among six modern southern African ecozones, distinguished from one another on
climatic, phytogeographic, and zoogeographic grounds. Changes in large mammal distributions
or in species frequencies that probably reflect Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental
change can be demonstrated in all six ecozones, but a well-defined pattern of change in
mammalian faunas that can be correlated with a pattern of long-term environmental change
established on other grounds can be demonstrated in only one ecozone. This is the Cape Zone,
where cooler intervals during the Upper Pleistocene repeatedly witnessed an increase in grazing
ungulates relative to browsers. In part, the failure of comparable patterns to emerge in other
zones may reflect the fact that Upper Pleistocene environmental and faunal change was greater
in the Cape Zone than elsewhere, but in large part it almost certainly reflects the better overall
quality of data from the Cape—more well-dated sites and more relatively large faunal
assemblages for which detailed numerical data are available.
The greater quantity and higher quality of data from the Cape also make it the only
ecozone in which there is a substantive basis to discuss: (i) long-term changes in human ability
to obtain large mammals; and (ii) the reasons for the disappearance of several large mammal
species which were common in various parts of southern Africa during the Upper Pleistocene.
The Cape data suggest: (i) that Middle Stone Age people were less proficient hunter—gatherers
than their Later Stone Age successors; and (ii) that a combination of environmental change and
the greater hunting proficiency of Later Stone Age peoples was responsible for the large
mammal extinctions.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Aims and basic definitions : : 2 : F 5 5 Hs
Materials and problems . : renee Cuaeaice! nay 47)
Mammalian evidence for enviropmental change : . BPI
The Zambesian Ecozone . i : : ‘ i an) eP2BY2
The Transvaalian Ecozone ; ; : j ; 236
The Kalaharian Ecozone . : d ; : : a) (BAY
The Basutolian Ecozone . ‘ : 5 ‘ fo DAS
The Karoo—Namaqualian Ecozone : : ‘ . 246
The Cape Ecozone . : 5 : ; ; : . 250
Conclusions. : : ‘ : > 259
Mammalian evidence for cultural change : ; 5 . 260
223
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81 (7), 1980: 223-283, 5 figs, 7 tables, 1 appendix.
i)
i)
SG
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
The ecology and demise of extinct species . . . . 263
Equus capensis . . . . ee TE Lae gtk 264,
Metridiochoerus sp... Sib he aah a ae cae OS
Pelorovis antiquus . j ‘ - ; : 3 . 268
Megalotragus priscus ; a : ‘ ‘ ‘ . 269
Antidorcas bondi j ; i i ; : ; “1 PATA)
Antidorcas australis . ; . ; ‘ ; : nu AL
The causes of extinction . F 4 5 ‘ ; se era
Conclusions Sealed cate | ana es Bt eters ae
Acknowledgements . é , i : ‘ 3 , . 2714
References . i : i ‘ ; i : ; : rue 2
Appendix. Vernacular and scientific names of the extant
mammalian species mentioned in the text . 5 Be Aye
AIMS AND BASIC DEFINITIONS
As a result of research undertaken mainly in the 1960s and 1970s, there are
now more than seventy-five Upper Pleistocene and Holocene localities in
southern Africa that have provided analysable remains of large mammals. This
paper aims to summarize the information these remains have provided on past
environments, on the evolution of man—environment relationships, and on the
ecology and demise of extinct species.
For the purposes of this paper, southern Africa is defined relatively broadly
to include the Zambesian, Transvaalian, Kalaharian, Basutolian, Karoo—
Namaqualian, and Cape Ecozones of Devred, as presented in De Vos (1975)
(Fig. 1 here). The ecozones themselves are defined on the basis of climatic,
phytogeographic, and zoogeographic features which are summarized below
(based mainly on information in De Vos (1975) and Brown (1965)). The zones
are of course abstractions in the sense that they grade into one another rather
than being sharply bounded, and within each there is important climatic,
phytogeographic, and zoogeographic variation, as determined for example by
great differences in altitude, subsurface drainage, or proximity to permanent
water. However, the zones clearly reflect gross differences in the historic distri-
bution and relative abundance of large mammal species and therefore have
definite value as a first basis for gauging the palaeoenvironmental significance of
fossil mammal faunas.
In modern political terms, southern Africa, as defined here, comprises
especially the countries of Angola, Zambia, Malawi, Mozambique, Zimbabwe
Rhodesia, Botswana, South West Africa (Namibia), South Africa, Lesotho, and
Swaziland. The approximate locations of the principal fossiliferous Upper
Pleistocene and Holocene sites within these countries are shown in Figure 2,
from which it is clear that the overwhelming majority are located in South
Africa, South West Africa, Zimbabwe Rhodesia, and Zambia. In general, blank
spots on the map reflect the absence of interested researchers as much or more
than any other factor. Undoubtedly, many pertinent sites especially wait to be
discovered or excavated in Angola, Botswana, Mozambique, and Malawi.
For the purposes of this paper, the Upper Pleistocene and Holocene have
been taken to comprise the time interval represented by stages 1 through 5 of the
\ Burchell's eland oes ees ay
zebra Pr Burcnel ‘s
‘ he } ere Ae,
me KALAHARIAN is ;
gemsbok gf 3]
we
~~ ee
KAROO- i
MAN } eas
Ted Fa ingbok blesbok Xx
hartebeest if
southern
roedbuck
: Se
a melt
bonte-
elond
bie
red antelope
artebeest
blue
Ryle Lied ie bac)
a lgrysbok
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS
t
t
; hy xy
GUINEAN \ -
ea Tho
a=
okap/
wo (aN ee bushbuck ae
‘
ae a eo
-—-
{7-~~ Seer
\ \ eed
\ h H Wer Spee grate
ay \/ So
{ —/
|
\
\ ZAMBESIAN
\ greater
| kudu
7
/
/
{ / Sharpe's
. / grysbok
i
|
| pola /echwe
Lichtenstein's
harteboest 4D
il bushbuck
i Wee TS, eland iy) Burchall's
| TRANSVAALIAN ee Se ae
N eland
~~
= =~
Isessebe
| ape a gre)
ue wie beest
“Bing? wilde
duiker
== Goering
} YN
we
Ny 5 jhe worthog
\ eest
| (OMe seater
\ oN) ye a EE os
\ Ce) buffalo
/ yo
( stoenbok
worer-
buck
myn hs EN
zebra pay
ne a te
ae buffalo
225
EASTERN
Grant's gazelle
mm son’s
gorelle
blue
wildebeest
buffalo
waterbuck
ZAMBESIAN
ortb/
Fig. 1. Southern African ecozones, with the most prominent suid, bovid, and equid species
found in each. The outlines and names of the zones are from De Vos (1975). Information on
species distributions was obtained primarily from Ansell (1971a, 19715), Ellerman er al. (1953),
Joubert & Mostert (1975), Smithers (1966, 1971), and Smithers & Lobao Tello (1976).
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
deep-sea core oxygen-isotope stratigraphy, that is, approximately the last
130 000 years. These stages are listed in Table 1, along with the temperature
conditions they are believed to reflect and their dates, in so far as these have been
established. In conventional terms, stage 1 may be equated with the Holocene,
stages 2-4 with the ‘Last Glacial’, and stage 5 with the ‘Last Interglacial’,
though some authorities would prefer to restrict the Last Interglacial to sub-
stage Se, the only part of stage 5 that compared in overall warmth with the
Holocene. In so far as it is possible below, the oxygen-isotope stage numbers are
used in preference to the terms ‘Last Interglacial’ and ‘Last Glacial’, since the
stages more fully reflect the true complexity of Upper Pleistocene and Holocene
climatic change, particularly in the latitudes of southern Africa (roughly
10°S to 35°S).
‘Large mammal’ has been defined very loosely to include all mammalian
species in which adults weigh at least 0,7-0,9 kg. The principal creatures
excluded by this definition are bats, insectivores (except hedgehogs), and rodents
(except primarily springhare, cane rats, the largest of the mole rats, and, of
course, porcupines). The rationale for excluding ‘small mammals’ is that this
paper is mainly concerned with mammalian remains as reflections of past human
ecology, and it seems unlikely that people have ever systematically exploited
mammals weighing less than 0,7-0,9 kg. Circumstantially, this proposition is
supported by the fact that where small mammal remains have been found in large
quantities in southern African sites (for example, at Redcliff Cave, Wonderwerk
Cave, Die Kelders Cave 1, Byneskranskop Cave 1, Boomplaas Cave A, and
Nelson Bay Cave), they are clearly concentrated in layers where artefacts and
bones of large mammals are rare. This suggests that the small mammals were
TABLE 1
Upper Pleistocene oxygen-isotope stages defined in deep-sea cores
(based mainly on Shackleton & Opdyke (1973, 1976)).
Approximate
years B.P. Oxygen-isotope stage Inferred world climate
(0 ee ence eer FS ie
1 very warm
12000 - - - -- -- - --- = -- ----------
2 very cold
32000 - - - -- - -- —- -- -- -- ---------
3 cold with warmer oscillations
64000 —- - -- - - ------ ------------
4 very cold
75000 - - ----------------------
Sa warm
92 000 5b cold
Se warm
109 000 5d cold
Se very warm
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 227
brought in mainly by predatory birds who occupied the sites when people were
absent.
Of course, even though (or in part because) small mammal remains are
generally not a product of human activity, they constitute a potentially valuable
source of information about past environments, and their value in this regard is
enhanced by the fact that it is often possible to obtain very large samples from
relatively small excavations. Pertinent examples of palaeoenvironmentally
oriented small mammal studies in southern Africa are those of Brain (1974a;
Brain & Brain 1977) in the Namib Desert, and of Avery (1977 and in prep.) in
the southern Cape Province. Brain has pointed out that fluctuations in the
abundance of the principal species represented in the relatively simple micro-
faunas of the Namib can be used to monitor past changes in the amount of grass
cover and of sand v. gravel in the vicinity of a site. In the more complex situation
of the southern Cape, with a wider variety of well-represented microfaunal
species, Avery is using sophisticated statistical procedures to detect relatively
subtle changes in microfaunal communities, with the goal of checking and
amplifying inferences on Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental
change drawn from parallel studies of large mammal bones, palaeobotanical
remains, and sediments.
MATERIALS AND PROBLEMS
The basic materials on which this paper is based are lists of large mammal
species reported from Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites in southern Africa.
Both archaeological ana uon-archaeological sites have been surveyed, but
among the archaeological ones, the focus is almost exclusively on sites occupied
by Stone Age (v. Iron Age) people. People making stone artefacts were the only
human occupants of southern Africa during the Pleistocene and most of the
Holocene, and they persisted into the historic period over much of the sub-
continent, especially in the Cape, Karoo—Namaqualian, and large parts of the
Basutolian and Kalaharian Ecozones.
In the Zambesian and Transvaalian Zones, Stone Age people were pro-
gressively displaced by Iron Age agriculturists, beginning in the first centuries A.D.
The Iron Age people were immigrants from further north, who subsequently also
penetrated into those parts of the Basutolian and Kalaharian regions where their
system of mixed farming was practicable. Iron Age faunas have been analysed
from sites in Zambia by Fagan (1967; also Fagan et al. 1969), in Malawi by
Voigt (1970, 1973, 1977), in Rhodesia by Brain (19745) and Huffman (1974,
1975), in Botswana by Welbourne (1975), in the Transvaal by Voigt (1978) and
Welbourne (1971, 1973), in Natal by Klein (as reported in Maggs & Michael
1976), and in the Orange Free State by Maggs (1975), but for the purposes of
this paper the utility of the samples is limited, because most of them are small
and they tend to be dominated by introduced domesticates (cattle, sheep and/or
goats). However, the Iron Age lists have been scanned carefully for evidence they
may contain on the distribution of indigenous mammals in relatively recent
228
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
\
\ 1 K
“ on cant -——
Secor } Peas Vex
\ / Se
\ RSs
H \ Sst
N | \ *Fingira
\
! ? 1
) H ( t
“ ia NY ar ( { eer eae
oe nN ~ \ \ U
1 ~~/\ \ eNachikufu | 1
1 Sa, NO / \
1 ~ ¢
» \ 1 Kalemba , ‘
BeeeF \-s) Thandwe | 4 Bee
\ Makwee* S. Chencherare .
-
\ *Broken Hill ==" amy \
| Mumbwa ae | |
| Leopard's Hill | } |
| Twin Riverse ever ( 7
1 a ‘i a 3 Se \ 2
i Gwisho W = a ny 1
~ 2
=X oa 1 PS
\ Vi \
AS Sa yn eee 7 /
SS SQ Ssoe= Sess Inyangae ‘
er ~ I
c N 7
NI .
le \ *Redcliff 1
gi \ i
a SSK Chelmer | By /awayo Waterworks J
1 \ Pomongwe /
1 Ney lA
H 1 /
e@Frandberg Sites 1 AS Se HH
eFackeltrager ool YS ye G
. Ald BEEN
Gig Elephant & Striped | -- A
Giraffe Shelters 2 BA Kalkbank. \
O \
Gobabis 1 Ve Fs \
! Zs Cave of uy
aBh - lushman Rock &
hilitee i Ee Hearths Heuningsneskrans
eNos ry — / H
Haalenberg 1 \ Gee Miaula Aah
| Namtib ee ae Embabeni @ Onin .
Sees ! ‘ a Powerhouse Cave, Equus Gave, “ ‘° ee
‘Pockenbank Ip eeZ Black Earth Cave, Witkrans @ Little \__ 6
| Wonderwerk, Witkrans, Ochre Cave a4]
eApolio I} | ered *Oppermansdrif Border Cave
a " Boetsop. © Florisbad@
GBD » Qoorntontein® —« pease) 4 Viakkraal Fane:
Swe-a7 Burchell's® =(79r0c! Con oSbe 7“, Séhonghong
¢
SMT Koffiefontein® ve eMoshebi's
. Venfers-\ eMelikane
Zaayfontein hoek® . + *Belleview,
G Riversmead. ~/ Shongweni
Glen Elliot#H—% Holm: sgrove o
Pe ee Bay Blydefontein—* pighjands @
lernoster 4 A
Duiker Eiland De Hangen atetberg als PA
fe 7) 2 Hl poann a Wa wi *Fairview
Hoedjies Ble e0 Harvest 13 E/andsfontein ene acl Wilt Uniondale
4 Langebaan Lagoon ; 'Bloembos 2° eKangkara piggs \~
Ysterfontein ‘¢Duinefontein oe Le <Arn Shaw MAJ)
Paers' CavesteGordon's en A\ oo Melkhoutboom
Swarthlip hi Ah ‘ \ wats eriectral & Scott's Cave
lakhurs: son Ba) ies Ri
Byneskranskop | Glentyre Groenvlei Y Klasies River Mouth
Die Kelders Syanforg Herolds Bay
Fig. 2. Approximate locations of the Upper Pleistocene and Holocene fossiliferous
sites
mentioned in the text.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 229
times. For the most part, the lists support the distributional information that
can be gleaned from early European travellers’ reports or more recent historical
sources, the most important exception being the presence of a possible gazelle in
Malawi (Voigt 1973) and Natal (Klein unpub. in regard to the bovid listed as
‘incertae sedis’ in Maggs & Michael 1976).
The non-archaeological and Stone Age sites which have provided the faunal
lists on which this paper is based are listed in Tables 2-7. Since there are many
sites and many of them are multilevel, it was not practical to reproduce the actual
faunal lists here, but the overwhelming majority of them have been or soon will
be published in sources listed in the tables.
In analysing the lists for palaeoenvironmental and palaeoecological
information, the writer encountered two basic kinds of problems—ones that
involved dating and ones that involved sample size and description. With regard
to dating, the writer’s major goal in most instances was to correlate a fauna with
the appropriate oxygen-isotope stage as an important prerequisite to gauging
its palaeoenvironmental implications. The isotope stage assignments on which
the writer settled are presented in Tables 2-7, but even a rapid reading of the
tables will show that in many instances no precise stage assignment was possible.
The most secure stage (or substage) assignments are based on radiocarbon dates
or on dates inferred from associated artefact assemblages whose radiocarbon
ages are fairly well established. In particular, even where accompanying radio-
carbon determinations were absent, the writer assumed that any southern
African artefact assemblage that contained potsherds postdates 2000 B.P.
(that is, belongs to ‘isotope stage 1, late’), that all assemblages which are readily
assignable to the Wilton Industrial Complex of the Later Stone Age postdate
10000 B.P. (belong to isotope stage 1), and that all assemblages which are
classically Middle Stone Age antedate 30 000 B.P. (antedate isotope stage 2).
The principal dating difficulty stems from limitations inherent in the radio-
carbon method, at least as practised by most laboratories, which make it
relatively unreliable for dating sites that are older than 25 000 years, and of little
or no utility for the precise placement of sites that are older than 40 000 years.
For the moment, the most practical method of placing sites more precisely
within the interval between 25 000—40 000 and 130 000 years is to correlate the
sequence of climatic events they sometimes record with the general sequence of
Upper Pleistocene climatic stages presented in Table 1. There are many sites to
which such a dating procedure may never be applicable, and it has so far been
applied only to a handful (especially to Border Cave (Butzer, Beaumont & Vogel
1978), Klasies River Mouth (Butzer 1978a), and various Cape coastal sites
stratified in long aeolianite sequences (Butzer pers. comm.)). As a result, most
southern African sites that are of earlier Upper Pleistocene age cannot at present
be dated more precisely, even relative to one another, and this is a major obstacle
to reconstructing patterns of environmental and cultural change. It is even
possible that some supposedly earlier Upper Pleistocene localities actually date
from the later part of the Middle Pleistocene (before 130000 years ago), an
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
interval of time within which more precise dating is also extremely difficult.
Neither artefacts nor fauna are very helpful in this context, since sites which
have been dated on geological grounds to the late mid-Pleistocene (especially
the lower levels of Border Cave (Butzer, Beaumont & Vogel 1978), the principal
faunal occurrence at the Florisbad spring site (Butzer, Beaumont & Vogel 1978;
Butzer pers. comm.), and Duinefontein 2 (Butzer, Beaumont & Vogel 1978;
Butzer pers. comm.) contain artefact and/or faunal assemblages which are not
easy to distinguish from those found at undoubted earlier Upper Pleistocene
localities.
The problems with sample size and description are as serious as those with
dating, though they are perhaps more easily avoidable in future research, since
they generally stem from obvious deficiencies in excavation and analysis. The
principal difficulty is that for many faunas, particularly those excavated prior
to 1950, species lists have often been presented with little or no indication of
absolute or relative species abundance, and, even where such indications are
available, their utility is often vitiated by the fact that overall sample size is
either not presented or is clearly very small. The absence of species frequency
estimates and/or small sample size make it difficult, if not impossible, to deter-
mine in most instances if the differences between one faunal sample and another
could be due simply to chance or if the differences are more likely to reflect
differences in palaeoenvironments or in the agencies that accumulated the
samples. It was, of course, to establish differences in palaeoenvironment or in
agency of accumulation that the writer examined the faunal lists in the first place.
A further problem is that even where indices of species abundance have
been presented and sample sizes are reasonable, the indices are not always
strictly comparable. Because of limited experience, a lack of adequate com-
parative materials, or a shortage of time, some analysts have confined their
identifications and counts only to the most diagnostic bones (usually teeth),
while others have identified and counted a much wider range of skeletal parts.
Further, in estimating species abundance, some investigators have presented the
numbers of identifiable bones by which each species in a fauna is represented,
while others have calculated the minimum numbers of individuals from which
the bones are derived.
Even minimum individual counts are not necessarily comparable among
sites because of differences in the kinds of provenience units to which counts
have been attached or possible differences in the way in which the counts were
calculated. At many sites, the provenience units are arbitrary spits that do not
necessarily represent discrete occupations, and the minimum individual counts
for any spit may well include individual animals that are also represented by
bones in adjacent spits. In such a case, the counts may well be ‘biased’ versus
counts from another site where the provenience units are natural layers that
represent discrete occupations in which bones from the same individuals are very
unlikely to occur. As an example of how methods of calculation may affect
minimum individual counts, some investigators sort paired elements into lefts
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 231
and rights and take the minimum number of individuals represented by the
element to be the higher number, left or right. Others simply divide the total
number for the element by two. This and other differences in method of
calculation are particularly likely to affect results in samples that are relatively
small, as most southern African ones are.
Problems of sample size and description are more acute for sites in some
areas than in others, and the best, most complete information, expressed in terms
that make it possible to compare samples fairly rigorously, is available for the
Cape Ecozone. The Cape Zone is also relatively rich in sites that are reasonably
well dated, including several that sample the same time intervals, so that
inferences about environmental or cultural change may be based on patterns
which have been established at several localities. In other ecozones, the overall
quality of the data is generally less satisfactory, and the palaeoenvironmental
and palaeoecological inferences they allow are consequently more limited.
MAMMALIAN EVIDENCE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CHANGE
In most cases, it is impossible to assume that the relative abundance of the
mammalian species in a fossil assemblage reflects their relative abundance in the
live community from which they were derived. By and large, it is far more
reasonable to assume that their relative frequencies were altered in the process
of bone accumulation (site formation), and generally speaking, the extent of
alteration is impossible to determine. This makes it difficult to use most fossil
faunas for the detailed reconstruction of an environment at any particular point
in time.
On the other hand, there are instances of faunal samples that were accumu-
lated by essentially the same agency (for example, Middle Stone Age people),
whose effect in altering or ‘biasing’ species frequencies was probably more or less
the same for all the samples. Differences in species frequencies between samples
are then most likely to reflect a difference between the palaeoenvironments from
which the samples were derived, and the nature of the environmental difference
may be reasonably clear, even if the exact nature of the separate environments is
not. More concretely, it may be possible to say, for example, that one environ-
ment contained more grazing animals than another, even if it is not possible to
say precisely how many grazers were present in either environment.
And even if species frequencies in fossil faunas are not directly comparable
to ones in living faunas, sometimes fossil faunas contain species which were
never observed in the region of a site and which seem inappropriate to the
region, given the known habitat preferences of the species elsewhere. In such
instances, the mere presence of a species may be indicative of past environmental
difference or change.
The purpose in this section is to present and interpret the available evidence
for environmental change during the Upper Pleistocene and Holocene of
southern Africa, as it is reflected in former large mammal distributions and in
————
—
— os
——)) ee ee ee he
wT
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
changes through time in large mammal species frequencies. In so far as it is
possible, an attempt has also been made here to determine the extent of con-.
gruency between environmental change reflected in large mammal faunas and
change that has been established from other lines of evidence or that was perhaps
predictable, given the placement of faunas in different global climatic (oxygen-
isotope) stages.
The discussion will proceed ecozone by ecozone, starting with the most
northern and ending with the most southern. For obvious reasons, the opening
descriptions of the ecozones will emphasize the larger mammals they contain,
particularly the species of bovids, equids, and suids. These species are the most
common large mammals in the fossil faunas and also the ones whose past
distributions or frequencies seem to have altered most dramatically. Least useful
from a palaeoenvironmental point of view are the carnivores, both because they
tend to be relatively rare in the fossil faunas and because most species, particu-
larly the larger ones, are much less tied to particular habitats than the herbivores
they prey on. They are therefore palaeoenvironmentally much less informative.
THE ZAMBESIAN ECOZONE
The Zambesian Zone is approximately coincident with the ‘miombo
woodlands’, a vast stretch of wooded grassland extending more than 2 500 km
from west to east and 1 200-2 000 km from north to south. In modern political
terms, the Zambesian Zone comprises southern Tanzania, southern Zaire, most
of Angola, Zambia, Malawi, northern Mozambique, and northern Zimbabwe
Rhodesia.
Rainfall throughout the Zambesian region averages more than 500 mm/a,
but it is almost entirely restricted to the summer months (December to May). On
relatively well-drained ridges, hills, or interfluves, the vegetation tends to consist
of tall grass interspersed with deciduous trees (especially Brachystegia and
Julbernardia) that lose their leaves in the dry season. In river valleys and along
drainage lines (called dambos), trees, consisting mainly of acacias, are less
common, and tall grasses predominate. Along the margins of river valleys, and
especially in the southernmost part of the Zambesian Zone, the predominant
tree in the savanna tends to be mopane (Colophospermum mopane). In typical
miombo woodland (dominated by Brachystegia and Julbernardia), the grasses
are of the ‘sour’ type that lose most of their nutritive value in the dry season.
However, in mopane woodland, ‘sweet’ grasses that maintain their palatability
throughout the year are more common, and as a consequence, mopane country
tends to maintain a higher biomass of large grazing animals. It is only on the
floodplains of the large rivers, however, that the Zambesian Zone supports
numbers of large grazers to rival the numbers that occur or occurred on east and
South African grasslands (in the Eastern and Basutolian regions of Figure 1).
Although the number of large mammals per unit area was generally less in
the Zambesian Zone than in some others, the opportunities that it offers both
browsers and grazers have led to unrivalled species diversity. In terms of biomass,
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 233
browsers were probably secondary overall, but at least locally, bushpig, bush-
buck, Sharpe’s grysbok, greater kudu, and grey duiker were (and in places still
are) numerous in areas where browse and good cover are readily available. The
principal grazers were Burchell’s zebra, Lichtenstein’s hartebeest, tsessebe, blue
wildebeest, and warthog, occurring both in open woodland and in more open
dambo areas. They shared the open woodland with sable antelope, roan antelope,
and impala, which also tended to frequent more closed woodland. Southern
reedbuck, waterbuck, puku, sitatunga, and especially lechwe and buffalo occur-
red on floodplains or floodplain margins. Eland, giraffe, elephant, and black
rhinoceros occurred more or less throughout. White rhinoceros were locally
common, and hippopotamus were present in all the large rivers. Among the
smaller mammals, vervet monkey, baboon, hyraxes, hares, porcupine, cane rat,
and springhare were all common, as were a wide range of carnivores, including
all the top predators found elsewhere in Africa.
The pattern of Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental change in
the Zambesian Zone is far from being established. The best available palyno-
logical and geomorphic data probably come from the Lunda area of north-
eastern Angola (Clark 1963) and Kalambo Falls in north-eastern Zambia
(Clark 1969) (also summaries of both areas in Butzer 1971a: 341-345). It is now
clear that major parts of both sequences which were formerly assigned to the
earlier Upper Pleistocene in fact date from the Middle Pleistocene, and also
that there are problems with the precise chronological placement of parts of the
sequences which are Upper Pleistocene in age. But the Lunda and Kalambo data
still show that the later Pleistocene locally witnessed a succession of cooler and
warmer phases, as well as a succession of wetter and drier ones. During the
cooler periods, average yearly temperatures may have been as much as 3—5°C
below what they are today. The major cool episodes probably correspond to the
world-wide periods of colder climate reflected in deep-sea cores, but there was
not necessarily correspondence between cooler periods and wetter ones. In fact,
it is even possible that as it became wetter in one part of the Zambesian Zone, it
became drier in another. It is now clear that Upper Pleistocene and Holocene
periods of greater precipitation to the south-west of the Zambesian Zone (in the
Kalaharian one) were often contemporaneous with drier ones to the north-east
(in the Eastern one) (Butzer 19785), and the situation in various parts of the
Zambesian Zone must be investigated empirically before any generalizations
may be made.
The Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites in the Zambesian Zone that have
provided remains of large mammals are listed in Table 2, along with the
probable or suggested correlation of the sites (or of levels within them) with
various oxygen-isotope stages. It is clear that faunal remains are available from
sites correlated with several different stages, though precise stage placement is
problematic in several instances (see Table 2 and below).
As a group, regardless of age, isotopic stage placement, or cultural associa-
tions, the various Zambesian sites tend to be dominated by large grazing
VSN
VSN
VST
VST
VSI
VST
asV uoly ‘VST
VSI
VST
VSI
VSI
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
<
n
=)
SNOLLVIDOSSY
TVYOIDOTOAVHOUV
234
294009 ‘§ ‘ad ‘H
(OS61) 21909 *S ‘€ “H
(6561) 4e4R9T * (0561)
2400) *§ ‘AH : (8761) poomdoyy
sey “f
(8161) UPIM “DU
(28261) UPA “DU
(©8261) WM Da
uly “Da
siieyy “f
(8561) 94009 ‘S ‘a ‘H
(0S61) 24005 “§ ‘a “H Swoo1g “y
(0S61) 24905 ‘S ‘€ “H
uel Da
aor
sae H
H
"FI
‘d
yw
‘d
f
f
(pu) Jepeip ‘a
AqMeyy “A ‘£
ANY JI ‘NOILVOITaNd ALVUVdas
ANY YNONVA ONIASILNACI NOSUad
(TL61) 4RID
(Zr61) 14RD
(OS61) ‘72 42 yARID,
(9161) uosdiy[iud
Cd" 000 ZE-000 ZI *?)
(8261) 94909 “I'D
*(L961T) 2400D 2%» UleIg ‘ (06961) UleIg
(8261) 24909 “I'D
*(L961) 9XOOD % uUlesg ‘(Y6961) Ulelg
(8261) 94909 “I'D
*(L961) 9YOOD 2% uleIg ‘(¥696T) UleIg
(TL6I “6961) JINN
(9L61) uosdi[1yd
(8561) siowung
(Zr61) AIPIO
(TL6T “6961) 2911 *(OS6T) RIO
afdoy SIOATY UIM TL,
(S[PA2] WSIN) SoARD PAQUIN
(aed ut) [1H ueyorg
(I-D s[eae}) 199]}94§ Yoo equiere>y
pajoyuadaffipun ‘¢ 4o/pup p ‘¢ sasvjs adojosy
(S[eAe] eyEquIeg Jol1eq,) 2AeD YOpoy
(df 000 #9-000 SZ *2) # a8v1g adojosy
(S[SAq] .PIEquUIeg 10}e7T,) SAPD JI[Opoy
Cd" 000 ZE-000 09 *9) € asvig: adojosy
(s[oao] ,ejnsuvysl,) aed Yopoy
(OP-LT Siids) 9AeD [ITH S.predooT
(NT S[?42]) Joy9YS§ Joy equisjey
Cd“ 000 ZI-000 ZE *9) Z a8v1§| adojosy
(SoAvd WSJ) esuPAUT
(S[PAR] WSJ) soAeD eAQquINIy
ABD NJNYIYORNE
Cd‘€ 0-000 ZI ‘2) pajpuuadaffipun ‘7 asvjg adojosy
(TL6I “6961) J°1N
(S961) leqeD
(TL6T) UPION UeA 2 ULsey
(TL6T 6961) JOIN
(9L61) wosdiiyd
(9L61) wosdii4d
(9L6T) Uosdiyyd
(€L61) XRD
(8961) uosuIqoy 2 AysMojepues
aOUNOS TyaaNAD
(AC GCKAD
(91-6 siids) 2AeD IIH S.predooT
Cd“ 000 $-000 ZI °9) 4j4va “7 asnjig adojosy
V ssulids j0F{ OYSIMH
D ‘q ssulidg 10H OYsIMy
(8-1 Suds) eAeD [ITH S.predoaT
Jo}[OUS YOY MARA
(S-0 S[9A2]) JerEYyS Yoo equisjey
JoJoys yoy eMpuey LT
II JaveyS yoy s1ersyousyD
Jaoys YoY, PIusULy
(‘d'& 0-000 § *2) 240] ‘[ a8v1g adojosy
aLIs
‘QUOZODT ULISEQUILZ OY} Ul S[PUIWeUT OBIE] Jo SUILUIOI papIAoId SALY 1eY} SoS OUDDO[OFY pue aUEd0)SIO[q Joddy
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 235
ungulates, particularly Burchell’s zebra, warthog, and alcelaphine antelopes
(blue wildebeest, hartebeest, and bastard hartebeest). These are the creatures
which were predominant in most parts of the Zambesian Zone historically,
suggesting definite limits to overall Pleistocene and Holocene environmental
change, particularly as compared to the Cape Zone (discussed below) in which
historically abundant mammals disappeared or became very rare on several
occasions during the same interval.
Where there is deviation from the general pattern of dominance by zebra,
warthog, and alcelaphines, it is toward an emphasis on other large grazing
ungulates whose local abundance was predictable from the location and dating
of a site. Thus, lechwe and buffalo are especially well represented at the late
mid-Holocene (‘isotope stage 1, late’) spring sites at Gwisho, located on the
margin of the Kafue floodplain on which these creatures were quite common
historically (large herds of lechwe still occur near by). Zebra, warthog, blue
wildebeest, and impala are also well represented in the Gwisho sites, presumably
reflecting their prominence in the typical miombo woodland that flanks the
Kafue floodplain at Gwisho. The long-term persistence of adjoining Kafue
floodplain and miombo woodland habitats is clearly suggested by the much
earlier (Middle Stone Age) fauna from Twin Rivers Kopje, which, like the
Gwisho sites, is located on the margin of the Kafue floodplain, and which has
also provided a fauna in which lechwe, wildebeest, and zebra are abundant,
although precise numerical estimates are not available.
A further site in which creatures favouring near-water situations are very
common is Kalemba Rock Shelter which has provided a relatively large number
of bushpig and waterbuck remains. It is not clear that these creatures (at least
waterbuck) were so abundant near Kalemba historically, and since their remains
come principally from layers that probably belong in isotope stage 3 or 4, they
may reflect once moister conditions near by.
The best evidence for environmental change in the Zambesian Zone, as
reflected in mammalian fauna, comes from Redcliff Cave, where three species are
present which did not occur in the Zambesian region in historic times, and which
are so far unknown in any fauna clearly postdating isotope stage 2. These
species are the blesbok, the common springbok, and the mountain reedbuck.
In an earlier publication on the Redcliff fauna, the writer suggested that the
‘Tshangula’ industry at the site was a late Middle Stone Age manifestation,
similar perhaps to the Howieson’s Poort variant of the Middle Stone Age
further south (Klein 1978a). However, with the appearance now of a more
complete report on the artefacts (C. K. Cooke 1978), the writer believes the
‘Tshangula’ industry is more likely to be an early Later Stone Age variant, dating
to between 30 000 and 20 000 years B.P., as is in fact suggested by the single
available radiocarbon date. This would place the ‘Tshangula’ industry and as-
sociated fauna in isotope stage 2.
The underlying Bambata levels, which are undoubtedly Middle Stone Age,
are clearly beyond the range of radiocarbon dating, and their placement in one
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
or another isotope stage is not straightforward. However, Brain’s (1969a)
analysis of the Redcliff sediments is helpful in this regard. This shows that
CaCO, concentration is relatively low and the matrix is relatively coarse in the
earlier Bambata and especially in the Tshangula levels, perhaps reflecting
stronger water flushing of the deposits, in turn reflecting moister climate. During
accumulation of the intervening later Bambata levels, with a higher CaCO,
content and finer matrix, conditions may have been generally drier.
If the Tshangula horizons are properly placed in isotope stage 2 and this
was a relatively moist time near Redcliff, it seems most reasonable to place the
earlier Bambata horizons, indicating comparable moistness, in the next oldest
isotope stage that was generally comparable to ‘2’ world-wide. This would be ‘4’
(= early ‘Last Glacial’). The intervening later Bambata levels, with their
sedimentologic evidence for relative dryness, would then date from stage 3, —
during which world climates were generally less different from present ones than
during stages 2 and 4. It is interesting in this context that the three ‘exotic’
species found at Redcliff are significantly more common in the Tshangula and
earlier Bambata levels than in the later Bambata ones, suggesting that these
species were locally most abundant during relatively moist intervals. All three
presumably extended their ranges to Redcliff from regions much further south
where they were common historically. Range extension Equatorwards (pre-
sumably as a result of vegetational change) might itself be taken as evidence for
cooler conditions, moister conditions, or both.
The presence of common springbok in the Zambesian Zone is confirmed for
stage 2 at Leopard’s Hill Cave, where both radiocarbon dates and well-described
associated (early Later Stone Age) artefacts leave no doubt about stage place-
ment, although the overall Leopard’s Hill faunal sample is too small for detailed
palaeoenvironmental interpretation. There is no evidence that springbok
survived into stage 1 (the Holocene) in the Zambesian region, but during this
interval, a close east African relative of the springbok, the Thomson’s gazelle,
apparently penetrated the Zambesian Zone at least as far south as Kalemba
Rock Shelter and perhaps also into Malawi, where a possible gazelle has been
recorded in Iron Age sites (Voigt 1973) and in the broadly contemporaneous
Later Stone Age deposits of Chencherere Rock Shelter II (Crader n.d.). In fact,
the ‘tommie’ may have extended through the eastern portion of the Zambesian
Zone into the Transvaalian one, if the writer’s tentative identification of material
from the Iron Age site of Ntshekane in the Tugela Basin of Natal is correct
(Maggs & Michael 1976). Why the species did not occur in the Zambesian and
Transvaalian Zones historically is not clear, but perhaps its absence is related in
some way to the introduction and proliferation of domestic stock in Iron Age
times.
THE TRANSVAALIAN ECOZONE
On the southern margin of the Zambesian Zone, mopane woodland tends
to give way to shrubby acacia steppe or bushveld in a semi-arid setting. This
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 237)
semi-arid country, running more or less across the continent, constitutes the
Transvaalian Ecozone. As in the Zambesian Zone, rainfall is restricted almost
entirely to summer, but the average is generally less than 500 mm/a, and there
are great differences in total amount from year to year.
Of all the ecozones considered here, the Transvaalian one is the least
satisfactory as a unit. It might well be better to consider it as three zones:
(i) a western one, comprising the northern Transvaal, southern Zimbabwe
Rhodesia, northern Botswana, northern South West Africa, and southern
Angola; (ii) an eastern one, comprising the eastern Transvaal, adjacent south-
western Mozambique, and eastern Swaziland; and (iii) a narrow southern
extension comprising the Natal and south-eastern Cape coastal strips and their
immediate hinterlands as far south-west as Port Elizabeth.
The western portion of the Transvaalian Zone, from the northern Transvaal
westwards, is the driest part. The vegetation is typically grassland with inter-
spersed shrubby trees, among which acacias are often most prominent. In a
sense, the area is not so much a distinct ecozone as a transitional region between
the Zambesian Zone to the north and the Kalaharian one to the south. Grazers
(including blue wildebeest, Cape hartebeest, tsessebe, Cape buffalo, springbok,
gemsbok, Burchell’s zebra, and warthog) are most common, but browsers
(greater kudu, bushbuck, giraffe, black rhinoceros ef al.) and mixed feeders
(eland and impala) are also prominent. Some of the large grazers incorporate
parts of the Kalaharian Zone in their seasonal movements, and the transition to
the Kalaharian region is clearly indicated by the presence of both gemsbok and
springbok.
The eastern portion of the Transvaalian Zone, known in South Africa as the
‘eastern Lowveld’, is moister than the western. Bush and tree cover is much
denser, and the term ‘bushveld’ is clearly appropriate. The overall variety of
large mammal species is basically the same as to the west, but browsers and
mixed feeders are more prominent numerically, as are grazers that prefer more
wooded country (roan antelope, sable antelope, and buffalo). Springbok and
gemsbok are absent.
The southern extension of the zone is covered by subtropical thornbush and
scrub-forest in a subhumid rather than semi-arid setting. In the north, the fauna
is very similar to that of the eastern Lowveld. Further to the south, beyond
Zululand (KwaZulu), many of the Lowveld species drop out, and the fauna
becomes essentially indistinguishable from that of the adjacent part of the Cape
Ecozone.
Geomorphic evidence of former very large lakes in the Makarikari and
Makgadikgadi Depressions (Street & Grove 1976; Grey & Cooke 1977), as well
as interstratified evaporites and aeolian sands in a cave in the Kwihabe Hills of
northern Botswana (Grey & Cooke 1977) demonstrate alternation between
wetter and drier periods during the Upper Pleistocene and Holocene in the
western part of the Transvaalian Zone. Data presented by Heine (1978) suggest
that conditions were particularly wet 30 000 to 18 000 and again 11 000 years
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ago, with arid conditions in between. If this is correct, then long-term pre-
cipitation trends in the western part of the Transvaalian Zone may have been.
out of phase with those immediately to the south in the Kalaharian Zone, where
much of the interval between 18 000 and 11 000 B.P. appears to have been very
wet (see Heine 1978 and below).
Levels of éboulis secs formed by frost weathering in Bushman Rock Shelter
and Border Cave in the eastern part of the Transvaalian Zone (Butzer, Beaumont
& Vogel 1978) document the intervals of much reduced Upper Pleistocene
temperatures apparent in the deep-sea record. The sedimentary fills are not so
informative about past precipitation changes, but it appears that there was no
one-to-one correspondence between cooler and wetter periods. Sedimentation
rates extrapolated from the radiocarbon-dated portion of the Border Cave
sequence provide a basis for correlating the temperature fluctuations it records
with ones established in the global marine record. The extent of temperature
depression involved has not been established, but to the north, at Wolkberg Cave
in the north-central Transvaal, the oxygen-isotope ratios of Upper Pleistocene
cave carbonates have been used to suggest very tentatively that average tempera-
tures during cold episodes were as much as 8,5-9°C below present ones (Talma
et al. 1974).
Pollen recovered from peat deposits at Wonderkrater near Naboomspruit
in the central Transvaal, indicates that, during at least some cooler phases,
Transvaalian bushveld was replaced by open grassveld (Scott & Vogel 1978).
It was presumably this kind of vegetational change which encouraged the spread
of springbok and blesbok to the Cave of Hearths and Kalkbank, as discussed
below.
The Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites in the Transvaalian Zone that
have provided remains of large mammals are listed in Table 3, along with the
probable or suggested correlation of sites (or levels within them) with various
oxygen-isotope stages. The Transvaalian Zone is second only to the Cape Zone
in the number of sites correlated with various stages, but the available faunal
samples are mainly small, incompletely described, or both.
The most dramatic changes through time in large mammal species
frequencies have been recorded at Melkhoutboom Cave, located at the extreme
south-western margin of the Transvaalian Zone, in an area that is transitional
to the Cape Zone. Historically, the vegetation near Melkhoutboom was
dominated by forest, closed bush, and sclerophyllous scrub, and the most
common large mammals were various browsing ungulates—notably bushbuck,
kudu, blue duiker, grysbok, and bushpig. The only prominent grazer was the
Cape buffalo, which, in spite of its dietary preferences, is known to be very
much at home in closed, bushy environmental settings.
The deposits at Melkhoutboom have provided a semi-continuous series of
large mammal assemblages dating from approximately 15 400 to 2 000 years ago.
The principal species in deposits dated to younger than 7600 B.P. are the
historically prominent browsers and the buffalo. However, in deposits older than
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 239
7 600 years, and particularly in ones older than 10 500 years, the browsers and
buffalo are rare or absent, and the fauna is dominated by alcelaphine antelopes
(black wildebeest, Cape hartebeest, blesbok/bontebok) and equid (either
mountain zebra or quagga or both). This assemblage is more reminiscent of the
fauna of the Basutolian Zone to the north than of the Transvaalian one in which
Melkhoutboom is presently located. More generally, the pre-10 000 B.P. fauna
from Melkhoutboom clearly suggests that the environs of the site were grassier
in the terminal Pleistocene (late stage 2) than during most of the Holocene
(stage 1). The same sort of vegetational change—from grassier to bushier or
scrubbier—is reflected in faunal change within late Pleistocene to Holocene
sequences at several sites in the near-by Cape Zone, as discussed below. The fact
that the faunal change at Melkhoutboom and in the Cape Zone sites is so
clear-cut probably reflects their position near the southern margin of the
continent where Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental changes were
perhaps more dramatic than in many areas nearer the Equator.
The basal levels at both Wilton and Uniondale, located not far east of
Melkhoutboom, also perhaps date from a time (very early Holocene or terminal
Pleistocene) when large grazers were relatively common near-by, but the faunal
samples are far too small to document this. At both sites, the bulk of the fauna
comes from mid to late Holocene levels, and the principal species represented are
the same ones that dominate the contemporaneous deposits at Melkhoutboom—
bushpig, bushbuck, duiker, grysbok or steenbok, and Cape buffalo.
An earlier Upper Pleistocene interval broadly comparable to the terminal
Pleistocene at Melkhoutboom may be reflected in the fauna from Aloes, also in
the transitional area between the Transvaalian and Cape Zones. Land-snail
shells associated with the bones at Aloes yielded a radiocarbon age of greater
than 37 000 years. The relatively large sample has provided no identifiable bones
of browsers, though large grazers (quagga, ‘giant Cape horse’, wildebeest,
common springbok, and warthog) are well represented.
In the heartland of the Transvaalian Zone, far to the north, the available
evidence suggests that faunal change related to more general environmental
change was more subtle than at Melkhoutboom, but such change did occur. This
is particularly clear at Border Cave, which has provided analysable faunal
remains from deposits correlated with deep-sea isotope stages 5d through 3.
Using the number of squares in which bones of a species occur as an index of its
abundance in each Border Cave level, the writer has been able to show that levels
in which bushpig, Cape buffalo, tragelaphine antelopes (kudu, nyala, bushbuck,
and eland), and impala are relatively common, alternate with levels in which
warthog, Burchell’s zebra, and alcelaphine antelopes are more prominent.
Warthog, zebra, and alcelaphines were probably more common near by in
historic times, and the writer has suggested that levels in which bushpig and
buffalo are relatively abundant reflect Upper Pleistocene intervals in which the
vegetation contained more bush than in recent times. This conclusion is
supported by analysis of the sediments (Butzer, Beaumont & Vogel 1978),
VSW pue VST
VST
VST
VST
VSI
VST
VSI
VST
VSI
VST
VSI
VST
VST
VSI
VSI
VSI
VST
VST
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SNOLLVIDOSSY
TVYOIDOTOAVHOUV
(LL61) UPI “DU
(LL61) UIA “DU
uPplTy “Da
We) “Td Y UPI Da
Bury “f
up “Oa
(vL61)
uosdwieg ul poiodal sv ulelg yO
up OD a
urelg “IO
uP OD a
SUIYOIIY “f
Bnfd “I $(96961) Weg “AO
uLpTy DU
ulvig “SIO
oumogeM *D “A
ANY AI ‘NOILVOIIENd JLvVuvdas
GNYV YNNVA ONIAALLNAGI NOsudd
(8261) 930A 29
yuownvog “19z1nNg ‘(8/6]) 72 72 JuOUNog
(8L6T) 930A
yuouInesg “1ozjng ‘ (8/61) 72 72 yuounvog
(9L61) uooeed “f “H
(SL61) Sole
(@ecisd core)
*slod) yuounvag ‘(TL6]) SIeIe 2 [e30A
(‘wu0d ‘sisd) Joyoolg “WH
(€961) 24909 “IO
(0 ‘G1ISd Z) eed Jopi0og
Cd‘ 000 $9-000 SZ *2) ¢ a8vIS' adojos]
(VITSAZ—-ATSAT) PARD Jopsog
Cd‘ 000 ZE-000 #9 *9) € adds adojosy
(q [9A9]) Woog noYy[a AL
(uolyedn550 JeMO]) TUaMSUOYS
({ JoAe]) sueTysoussuruneyy
(d“ 000 ZI-000 ZE *?) Z asvig adojosy
ojepuoiy
(S[SAQ] UOIIAA PUe UPMSUOWOd) sMsuOWIOg
(d'@ 0-000 ZI °2) paiwiuasaffipun ‘7 asvjg' adojosy
(961) wove ‘f “H
(CL61) Uoseved “ft
(‘Wwu0d ‘siod) JUOWNeEg
(‘WIUI0D
*siod) yuounveg ‘(TL6]) SlereW] 2 [930A
(qndun) 3njq (6961) HOI * (6961) MnOT
(9261) uooeed ‘f “H
(CL61) UOoRe ‘f
(LL61) }4NOSTAIEq
(‘WIIOD “sied) MeYs}19qoOxY
(SL61) seed
(WIUIOS ‘sied) JUOWUNeEg
(‘wiuw0d ‘sied) yUoWNvog
aOUNOS TvaaNAS
(AU-AIN S[PAe]) Woogynoy ya
(P-DE SIPA2]) WOITAA
Pinel
(Z “€ Siohv]) SUBIYSOUSSUTUNSFT
Jayays yoy uewysng
(d’@ 000 S-000 ZI *?) 4]4va ‘T asvig adojosy
(GINO “AVO S[PA9]) Woog noyy[s]
(AE-T S[SA9]) WOT
(LV) Meys uuy
MOIAIIC-T
(uonednsso Jaddn) tuasmMsuoys
Tuaqequig
yuu
Cd 0-000 § °2) ain] ‘[ asvIS' adojosy
aLis
“QU0ZODq ULI[PRASULI] SY) Ul S[EWUIEUT ode] JO SUIeUIOI poprAoId oALY Jey} So}Is QUSDO[OH{ pue oUed0}sIE[q Jedd p)
240
€ a1avL
241
~”a
a
<
=
=
<
=
w
16)
%
<
4
a
°
wn
Zi
ie)
A
<
e
=|
A
2
4
<
oO
_
le)
[e}
=
e)
oO
a
Qa
v4
<_<
c
Z
a
=
(4
°
4
>
Zz
a
euou
VSW
VSW
auou
9suou
VSI
VSW
VSN
VSI
VSN
SNOILVIOOSSV
TVOISOTOAUVHOUVY
(POL6T) SIP “H “I
(2961) 94909 ‘§ “dH
(TL61) SUINOgPA *D “A
‘(Z961) 24909 'S “‘@ “H
uoyysney *§ 7 A21|P9Z “A “AV
(€961) 24009 *§ ‘A °H :(1S61)
SIM ‘H “1 24909 ‘S ‘dH
(pL61)
uosdwieg ul pojiodol se ulelg “yy ‘O
(LL61) USI “DU
(LL61) UPI “DU
(LL61) UPI “DU
8nd “I (96961) WeIg “I'D
ANV dI ‘NOILVOIIdNd ALVUVdAS
GNY VNOVa ONIAALLNAGI Nosaddd
(6961) sseD
(7961) uoseW
(8561) 72 12 UoSseI *(L96T 7961) UOSRIN
(9161) Ae[e9Z
(IS61) Slowing 2 puog
(€961) 24909 “I'D
sooly
SUJIPOFT JO OARS
yueqg yey
SYIOMIOVeAA OAPMEING
JowyjeyO
(SIOAP] WSJ) OMSUOWOg
Cd’ 000 2-000 8ZI *2) paroijuasaffipun “¢ so/puv “p ‘¢ sasnjg adojosy
(8261) [930A 29
yuowmnrog “1ozing ‘(8/6]) 72 72 JUOUINvOg
(8L61) 1930, 29
quOUINvog “IozIng °(8/6]) 72 42 yuOUNLSg
(8L61) 980A 29
quounvog ‘1ozjng ‘(8L61) 72 42 yuouNvog
(‘doid ul) Jezjng
-(qndun) 3njd *(696T) HOI (6961) AnoT
(aq ‘dngg5]) sAvD Jopi0g
PG asvjS adojosy
(VME “ITSAE) PAD Jepiog
q¢ aspjs adojosyT
(dng@eé “VA\Z) 2A2D Jopiog
DG asvjs adojosy
(S[SA9T WS 197k]) YOoY, UewYysng
Cd“ 000 ZE-000 SZ *2) paioijuadaffipun “p puv ¢ sasoig adojosy
qaOUNOS TyyudNao
aLis
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
which establishes a general correspondence between apparently colder episodes,
as reflected in sediments, and “bushier’ fauna. Unfortunately, the faunal samples |
from various levels are too small for a truly detailed study of the relationship
between changes in sediment parameters and species frequencies.
Yet further north, environments different at one or more times during the
Upper Pleistocene from modern ones are probably implied by the presence of
common springbok and of blesbok/bontebok at the Cave of Hearths and
especially at Kalkbank. Both sites are located north of the areas in which these
species were distributed in historic times (Kettlitz 1962). In the vicinity of both
sites, the impala apparently fills the niche occupied by the springbok elsewhere,
yet in the fossil fauna from Kalkbank, for which species frequency estimates are
available, springbok is actually more common than impala. The occurrence of
springbok and of bontebok/blesbok in earlier Upper Pleistocene contexts at the
Cave of Hearths and Kalkbank was perhaps to be expected in view of their
presence in broadly contemporaneous deposits at Redcliff yet further north, and
probably reflects the same vegetational change (less bush, more grass) as at
Redcliff.
THE KALAHARIAN ECOZONE
This ecozone corresponds broadly to that part of the southern African
interior plateau that is often known as the Kalahari desert, though it is not
really a desert in either climatic or vegetational terms. With regard to modern
political units, the Kalaharian Zone covers eastern South West Africa, the
western two-thirds of Botswana, and a large portion of the adjacent (northern)
Cape Province of South Africa.
Rainfall in the Kalaharian Zone is erratic and comes almost entirely in
summer. The average decreases from roughly 500 mm/a in the north-west to as
little as 200 mm in the south-west. Highly porous, sandy soils soak up rainfall
rapidly, so that surface water is relatively rare, even in areas where the average
rainfall is fairly high. Vegetation cover is highly variable, from relatively
luxuriant acacia savanna with an important grass component in the better
watered parts (particularly in the north) to sparse shrub acacia savanna and
bushveld in the more arid parts (particularly in the south).
At least historically, the grass cover over much of the Kalaharian region was
sufficient to support fair numbers of gregarious, migratory grazing ungulates,
particularly ones which are capable of obtaining their moisture requirements
largely from plants. Springbok and gemsbok were especially common, and blue
wildebeest, hartebeest, Burchell’s zebra, and warthog were at least locally
abundant. Browsing animals, including especially giraffe and greater kudu, were
generally less common. Among mixed feeders, eland and steenbok were wide-
spread. Bushbuck (a browser), Cape buffalo and roan antelope (grazers), and
impala (a mixed feeder) occurred in some areas of denser bush. Among non-
ungulate herbivores, hare(s), springhare, porcupine, baboon, and rock hyrax
were (and in some cases still are) widespread and abundant. The principal
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 243
carnivores preying on these creatures or scavenging on their carcasses were lion,
leopard, cheetah, brown hyena, spotted hyena, Cape hunting dog, and jackals.
Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental change within the
Kalaharian Zone has been best documented by geomorphic research at its
south-eastern margin, particularly along the Gaap Escarpment in the northern
Cape Province (Butzer, Stuckenrath et al. 1978). Alternation of subhumid and
semi-arid climatic phases is apparent in the Gaap sequence, with the earliest
radiocarbon-dated subhumid phase fixed between >21 000 and 14000 years
ago. Subsequent subhumid phases are dated between 9 700 and 6 500 B.P. and
between 4 500 and 400 B.P. Long-term fluctuations in precipitation appear to
be broadly in phase with those recorded in the Basutolian Zone to the east, but
not necessarily with those in the Transvaalian Zone to the north (see above and
Heine 1978).
Beds of cryoclastic rubble document several past episodes of relatively
intense cold along the Gaap Escarpment and presumably throughout the
Kalaharian Zone. The most recent very cold interval clearly coincided with
deep-sea stage 2. The greatest cold appears to have preceded and followed the
marked subhumid phase between >21 000 and 14 000 B.P., indicating that the
relationship between past temperature and precipitation change was a complex
one.
The Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites in the Kalaharian Zone which
have provided remains of large mammals are listed in Table 4, along with the
probable correlation of the sites (or of levels within them) with various oxygen-
isotope stages. Most of the sites are located on the south-eastern margin and
date from the late Holocene. The late Holocene faunal samples are dominated
by hare(s), springhare, rock hyrax, Burchell’s zebra or quagga, warthog, black
wildebeest and/or Cape hartebeest, springbok, and steenbok. The mountain
reedbuck is also relatively common, reflecting the relatively rugged topography
surrounding many of the sites. In no case is there any clear suggestion of an
environmental setting that differed significantly from the historic one.
With the important exception of the fauna from Equus Cave, which has
been sorted and identified, but not yet analysed, the faunas from Kalaharian
sites of Pleistocene age are either small, poorly excavated, incompletely reported,
or all three. Most of them are also very imprecisely dated. All this makes it
difficult to assess their palaeoenvironmental significance. However, the occur-
rence of blesbok/bontebok at Black Earth Cave, Witkrans Cave, and especially
at Gobabis far to the north-west of the species’ historic range, suggests a
vegetation cover in which perennial grasses may have played a greater role than
they did historically in the Kalaharian region. The occurrence of vaalribbok at
Black Earth Cave, Ochre Cave, and Boetsap may have broadly similar implica-
tions, depending upon how common it was in the deposits (the samples presently
available for study are all highly selected and therefore not suitable for estab-
lishing species frequencies). The vaalribbok occurred near all the sites in historic
times, but was not especially common. It has so far not been recorded in local
VST
VSI
VST
VST
VSI
VST
VSTI
VST
VSI
VST
VST
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SNOLLVIOOSSY
TVOIDOTOAVHOUV
244
suINOGPM “D W
(TL6T) 2UINOG|EM “D “A
Lic)p: arom: t
*(qndun) 24005 ‘§ “‘€ "“H
Lic)p: aro lest
-(qndun) 93005 ‘§ ‘€ “H
UP Da
up[xa “Da
(-qndun) 24000 ‘s ‘a “H
(-qndun) 24005 ‘s§ ‘a ‘H
SIISM “H “TI 9400) °§ “a “H
suINOg PM “D “aX
peyuepran
suryoy “£
(6L61) USM “DU
(6L61) USI “Da
(6L61) UPI DU
(P6L61) USI “DU
Ue DO U:(PU)2ex000 Sa H ¢
(PU) 9400) ‘§ “dH
ANY Al ‘NOILVOIIaNd ALVUuvdas
GNV VNNVA ONIAAILNACI NOSadd
(6L61) UTA 2
SyOOIg ‘(8/61) UoIs[OH =(1L61) USTIPA ([2A2] VSIA) 184
(6961) uose, (Ajl[eoo] Jeunes jiupsueurodd¢) ar1g s,osunyy
(F561) Apoqeod desjaog
(ps61) Apoqeed SAR) Ye YOR
(d'@ 000 ZE-000 82I *?) parwyuasaffipun *¢ 10/puv p “¢ sadvjg' adojosy
(‘WIUIOD ‘sied) Jozing ‘(0g/6]) UOsqooer sIquqod
(8L61) 72 12 YyeIUEyonIG “Iezjng
‘(wos ‘sied) Aeppoeysg 2 JUOUINvEg aAeD snnby
(8261) 72 42 qyeIUSyoNIg
‘Iozing =(TL61) ALBIO :-S6t) Apoqeod (S[SA°] VSIA) PAD sUBIIITAN
Cd“ 000 ££-000 8ZI *?) ¢ asv1g adojosy
(pS61) Apoqeod Sina NU
Cd’ 0-000 ZI °2) paiviuasaffipun ‘7 a8vj5' adojosy
(‘uiur09 ‘sied) Jezing
‘(‘wiuI09 ‘sied) jUOUINeeg ‘(¢F61)
SIPM 8% URTV «(TH6T) OOD 7% uryey (.PISgurUg Jorres,) SARD YoOMIOpuo AA
Cd‘ 000 $-000 ZI *9) Aj4va ‘7 asvig adojosy
(6L61) UPT19A 7 Syooig (PA2] VST) IBF
(‘wu05
*sied) Jozing ‘(‘WwUuIOS “sied) yuouNeeg (PJoeyUIMUWIS 10}e],) SAVD YIOMIOpPUO MA
(PL6]) F981YSsog 3 JUOWINeogG = Ulo}UOJUIOOG
(S161) skeryduinyy Jay[9Y§ s.[[eyoing
(deid ur pure ‘p/61) skeryduinyy 7 “I yosoqgyig
(‘deid ur) skeryduinyy Z ‘T yoor9swry
(8261) Skosrydunyy {(ps61) Apoqrog SARD SSNOyIEMOg
WIUIOD “sIod) JuOUINvEg *(7S61) Apoqred SUPDIUM 31T
(ps61) Apoqeod ([PA9] ,UOIIAA,) SARD SUBIAITAA
Cd‘@ 0-000 £ *2) ain] ‘T asvig' adojosy
aOUNOS TyuwaNad ALIS
*QUOZOOW ULIILYL[ey 9} Ul S[eUIWIUT oSIe] JO SUIPUIOI PepIAOId SAY 3eU} SO}IS SUDDO;OF{ pue ouUad0}sSI0;q IeddqQ
p A1EvL
—
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 245
late Holocene faunas (unless the fauna from Ochre Cave dates from this interval).
It is a hillside grazer which is most at home in the Basutolian and Cape Zones,
where its frequency in both live communities and archaeological sites tends to
be highly correlated with and subequal to that of mountain reedbuck. Moister
conditions may well be implied if it were as frequent as mountain reedbuck in a
Kalaharian fossil fauna.
THE BASUTOLIAN ECOZONE
This zone comprises the Drakensberg Mountains and the high plateau
country adjacent to them. In modern political terms, it covers the southern
Transvaal, the western quarter of Swaziland, the highlands of western Natal, all
of Lesotho, most of the Orange Free State, and a portion of the adjacent eastern
Cape Province. The area is characterized by warm, relatively moist summers
(average precipitation generally between 620 and 750 mm) and cold, dry
winters. East of the Drakensberg, the historic vegetation of the Basutolian Zone
was primarily open grassland with patches of temperate forest at the heads of
river valleys and areas of acacia savanna at lower altitudes. West of the Drakens-
berg, in the area known in South Africa as the ‘highveld’, the vegetation was
nearly pure grassveld with trees largely confined to the river valleys.
Historically, the fauna of the Basutolian region was dominated over-
whelmingly by large, migratory, gregarious grazers, especially Burchell’s zebra,
the recently extinct quagga, black wildebeest, blesbok, and springbok. Their
numbers may even have exceeded those of their counterparts in the east African
grasslands, and it is probable that they were interdependent in a grazing
succession similar to that recently observed in east Africa. They probably
migrated with the seasons in search of good pasture, and it is likely the migrations
took in the eastern part of the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone into which the
Basutolian one merges imperceptibly.
In keeping with the open nature of the vegetation, browsers (greater kudu,
bushbuck, etc.) and grazers favouring wooded country (roan, sable, Cape
buffalo) were rare or absent in the Basutolian Zone. The impala was completely
displaced by the springbok, but eland and steenbok, also mixed feeders, were
widespread. Warthogs were numerous, but bushpigs were generally absent.
Mountain reedbuck, vaalribbok, and to a lesser extent klipspringer were
common in areas of high relief. Among smaller mammals, hares, springhare,
and rock hyrax are still abundant in many places.
Pollen-analytical studies undertaken at Florisbad by Van Zinderen Bakker
(1957) and at Aliwal North by Coetzee (1967), both located near the western
margin of the Basutolian Zone, reveal that the local grassveld was replaced at
various times in the later Pleistocene by semi-desert shrub of the Karoo-
Namaqualian Zone. At Aliwal North, where the sequence is reliably dated
between approximately 13 200 and 9 600 B.P., a replacement of grassveld by
Karoo shrub (and the reverse) occurred three times, reflecting relatively rapid
fluctuations between cooler/moister and warmer/drier conditions similar to the
———
24" FO™M
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
kind of relatively rapid climatic fluctuations that are known to have characterized
the contemporaneous terminal Pleistocene/Holocene transition in Europe.
At Florisbad, the pollen spectra are all much older and precise dating is a
problem, though a grassveld phase indicating relatively moist conditions occurs
in deposits that probably correlate with deep-sea isotope stage 2. Studies of
alluvial cut-and-fill sequences in the Upper Orange drainage by Butzer (1971b)
also indicate that stage 2 times were generally wet in the Basutolian Zone, as
they were in the neighbouring Kalaharian one. Yet earlier wetter and drier phases
are difficult to date, and it is clear that the ones reflected in pollen spectra at
Florisbad are beyond the range of radiocarbon. The earliest part of the Florisbad
sequence, in fact, probably dates from the later mid-Pleistocene.
The Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites in the Basutolian Zone which
have provided remains of large mammals are listed in Table 5, along with the
probable correlation of the sites (or of levels within them) with various oxygen-
isotope stages. Most of the sites are located near the western margin of the zone and
either date very clearly from the late Holocene or are difficult to date precisely.
The late Holocene faunas are dominated by hare(s), rock hyrax, Burchell’s
zebra and/or quagga, black wildebeest, springbok, and steenbok, suggesting an
environment broadly similar to the historic one. Faunas coming from sites
located in more rugged topography are clearly marked by a higher frequency of
mountain reedbuck and vaalribbok, as would be expected.
The pre-Holocene faunas are also dominated by large gregarious grazers,
suggesting general limits to the extent of later Pleistocene environmental change.
However, the presence of lechwe or waterbuck at Vlakkraal and Koffiefontein,
of Cape buffalo at Koffiefontein and Driefontein, of impala at Koffiefontein, and
of roan at Driefontein, may reflect moister conditions at one or more times
during the earlier Upper Pleistocene. The lechwe is also present at Florisbad,
but its stratigraphic provenience within the site is unknown. It may have come
either from Upper Pleistocene levels, from levels that probably date to the late
mid-Pleistocene, or from both. The same problems of provenience, reflecting
relatively uncontrolled excavations, make it impossible to relate various elements
in the Florisbad fauna to the palynological and geomorphic observations that
have been made at the site, but the fauna is further interesting for the presence of
hippopotamus, suggesting a time(s) when the pan next to the site may have
contained a lake. The occurrence of water mongoose and clawless otter may
reflect the same moist interval(s). Perhaps even more intriguing is the occurrence
of giraffe, which must indicate that trees once grew near by, though the area was
treeless historically, and Van Zinderen Bakker found virtually no arboreal
pollen in any of the samples he examined from the site.
THE KAROO—-NAMAQUALIAN ECOZONE
This zone has two major components: (1) the Namib Desert, a narrow strip
up to 160 km wide along the Atlantic coast, extending from the mouth of the
Orange River through South West Africa to beyond Mossamedes in Angola;
— ———— Sw
247
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS
VSWE
VST
VST
VST
VST
VST
VSI
VSI
VST
VSI
VST
VST
VST
VST
VST
SNOILVIOOSSV
TYOISOTOAVHOUV
(PL6T) USI “D “A ‘SPM “HT
JONIeD “Td
Joe) “Td
2400) 'S ‘a “H
(€961) 93909 ‘§ ‘€ “H
*SIIPM 2 29D *§ “€ “H
(€961) 94909 '§ ‘€@ “H
‘SIIPAA 7% 2400D ‘§ ‘€ 'H
(€961) 91909 "S “@ "H
‘SIEM 9Y00D 'S ‘A “H
Joep “I'd
UPI Da
é
(06161) UTA “DU
(P6161) UI “DU
(76161) WIM "DU
SUIYuY “f
peynueprun
(P6L61) UIA “DU
peynueprun
Joe) “I'd
JOM’ “Td
Joe “I ‘d
Joe) “Td
UP “OD “a
ANV dI ‘NOILVOITaNd ALVUVdaS
GNV VNOVd ONIASILNACI NOsddd
(G0L61) SIIPAA
(PLET) [P80A 2 J0}IBD *(LL61) 199IeD
(LL61) 19348)
Cd" 000 ZE-000 8ZI
(‘WIUIOS ‘sod puv
“91L61) 10ZIN ‘(8P61) 40D ‘S ‘A ‘H
(‘WIWIOD *sied
pure <q1L61) 10zINg *(ZP6T) 7? 72 SISA
(‘uIWIOD ‘sied
pure 9161) Jozing *(9¢61) Sule
*(CS61) UBWYOH *(8E61) 19h01q
(‘wiu09 ‘sied
pur II L61) Jezng °(9¢61) SUIIIEW
*(SS6T) URWIYOH * (E61) Joho
(PL6T) [PSO 7 JO}IBD *(LL61) JoeD
(9L61) wooeed ‘f ‘H
(TE61) HIMOH
(0L61) uosduieg
(7L961) uosduieg
(L961) uosduies 2p uosduesg
(OL6I ‘PL961) Uosduies
(0161) uosdureg
(0L61) uosduieg
(‘WIUW0D “siad) Jozjng *(Z7S61) URRY
(LL61) JouIeD
(PLOT) 930A 2P JOIIeD *(LLET) 1011eD
(LL61) 401185
(pL61)
[930A F JOMVD <(LL6T “6961) JoueD
(‘WiWI0d ‘sied) ss3vjy
FOUNOS TyasINAD
UIN}UOJOIIG
suoysuoyas
suey
‘2) paioyjuadaffipun ‘¢ Ao/puv p ‘¢ sadvjig adojosy
UlN}UOJOLOH
[Be IeTA
(II 10d) peqsi10].4
Cd“ 000 $Z-000 8ZI *?) § 281g: adojos]
(III 389d) peqsiopy
suoysuoyes
(‘d"@ 000 ZI-000 Zé 2) Z 281g adojosy
Joyous spuelysry
I@H S19qjayeL
uloyUOJopA_
TOYSYS VOM UH
PPROWISIOATY
uloyUOsAeeZ
SAOISSWI[O}T
YSoysio}UsA,
SABD 988}]0D dSOY
MOIAST[O
suoysuoyss
oueyTSIN
TOES S,1qoyso
JOEY [S4q
Cd‘ 0-000 § °2) ain] ‘T advig' adojosy
ALIS
*QUOZOOY URI[ONsSeg ol} Ul s[eUIUIeUT OBIe] JO sUIeUIOI popIAOId ALY Je} SozIS OUSDO[OF{ pue sUD00}sIO[q Jedd,
¢ aTavL
LSS era
rent ie
Fa eN ”. - WAA™S
ma”
SP wgen
24 NON
248 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and (ii) the Karoo, a great plain stretching across the Cape Province from the
Orange River on the north to the Cape Folded Mountains on the south.
The Namib is the most extreme desert in southern Africa. Average rainfall
within it nowhere exceeds 130 mm/a, and there are many places where it is less
than 25 mm. Vegetation is largely confined to the major river valleys, except
after occasional rains when stands of annual grasses briefly appear. The
southern part of the Namib (south of the Kuiseb River) is a dune sea, while the
northern part consists primarily of gravel plains and barren, rocky hills. The
principal large mammals in the desert proper are gemsbok and springbok,
supplemented by rock hyrax, hares, steenbok, klipspringer, and mountain zebra
in some hillier parts and on the dissected escarpment that separates the desert
from the Kalaharian Zone to the east.
The Karoo is less arid than the Namib, with average rainfall varying
between 130 and 400 mm/a, depending on the place. Over most of the Karoo,
rain comes primarily in summer, but in the south-western parts, as much as half
may come in winter. Typical Karoo vegetation is low scrub with much bare
ground in between and a sparse scattering of grasses. Trees, consisting mainly of
acacias, are confined to the river valleys. The density of grass increases towards
the east, until the Karoo merges more or less imperceptibly with the grassveld of
the Basutolian region. The most common large mammals in the Karoo were
probably rock hyrax, hare(s), springbok, gemsbok, black wildebeest, steenbok,
grey duiker, and quagga.
Hard evidence for Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental change
in the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone is sparse and has been summarized by Coetzee
(1978a). Geomorphic features pointing to once wetter conditions, even in the
Namib, are relatively widespread, but the dates of the wetter periods remain
unestablished.
The Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites in the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone
that have provided remains of large mammals are listed in Table 6, along with
the probable correlation of the sites (or of levels within them) with various
oxygen-isotope stages. The sites are divisible into two basic groups: to the north,
a series of rock shelters in hilly areas adjacent to the Namib Desert, and to the
south, Elands Bay Cave in a part of the Karoo that is transitional to the Cape
Zone. Fossiliferous Upper Pleistocene or Holocene sites within the Karoo or
Namib proper are virtually unknown so far, excepting some very recent coastal
middens yielding mainly remains of pinnipeds (Jacobson & Klein unpub.;
Thackeray 1975, 1979), Mirabib Rock Shelter, from which only the microfauna
has been identified (Sandelowsky 1974, 1977; Brain & Brain 1977), and
‘Namib 2’, a locality just south of the Kuiseb recently discovered by Shackley
(pers. comm.).
The hilly, rocky topography surrounding the sites located on the margins
of the Namib is clearly reflected in their faunas, in which rock hyrax and klip-
springer are very common. Hares, an equid that is probably mountain zebra,
springbok, and steenbok are also relatively well represented. Although some
249
VSI (6L6T “SL61) Aerox9ey TL, “A (QL6I ‘ZL61) PUPAA = (WS JOPIO PUue .VSIN }Ue0SeID,) TT Of1ody
(df 000 §Z-000 8ZI 2) § adn1g adojosy
n
q VSI (6L61 “SL61) AeroyoeyL, “4 (ZL61) }PUSMA. (VSI) Auequeys0g
s VSW (6L61 “SL61) AerOyOeyL, “A (QL6I “ZL61) 3PUSM (VSI 9PPId,) If O1ody
zi (d'@ 000 ZE-000 SZ °2) paroljuasaffipun “p 40/pun ¢ saspjg adojosT
a VST Uy SD (PU “8261 “OL6I “CL61) UOsULAeg (81-02 S[2A9]) 9ABD Avg spurl
g VSI (6L61 ‘SL6T) AeioyoeyL, “4 (OL6I “ZL61) IPUSM (VST Aled.) TT oflody
et (‘df 000 ZI-000 ZE§ °) asvigs' adojosy
6 VSI uly DU (PU *8L61 “OL6T “ZL61) WoIsuTyIeg (OT-LI S[eAe]) oARD Avg spurlg
Z VSI (6L60 “SL6T) AeroyoeyL, “4 (9L60 “ZL6T) 1PUOM (UO}I,) TT Ofody
eS (dG 000 $-000 ZI *9) 4p4va *T asvig adorosy
= VST UI OD a (pu “SL6T “9L6T “ZL61) BOYsUDAeT (6-I S[PA9]) 2ARD Avg spurl”
a VST (6L61 “SL61) AesoyoryL, “A (ZL61) PUSAA (WS 410110d,) TT offody
$ VST (6L61 “SL61) APIO9eYL “A (ZL61) 3PUSAA (VST) Yuequeyxs0d
S VSI (6L61 “SL61) AvroyoeyL, “A (ZL61) #PUSM IJ pue [ 1ey
s VSI Ul “DU (6L61) AesoxoeyL -Cqndun) ypuspA siaquojeeHy
a VSI (6L61 “SL61) AesoyoeyL, “4 (ZL6T) }PUSAA ¢ SPILL,
) VSI (6L61 “SL6T) AerexoeyL, “4 (ZL61) }PUSA qnuuen
9 VSI (6L61) AeroyoreyL, “4 (‘qndun) ipus,\ SON
a VST (6L61) 30{d ‘TI (6461) AeIPEM Jayays eyeuH pedis
S VSI Ulery DU (6L61 ‘9L61) Ae1PRAA Jayfoyg yueydel” sig
a VST ulelg “Sf ‘O (6L61) AeroxoeyT, *(ZL61) 1PUSAA JOSE IIOyOey
ql (491194 [OOYSS
i= [AID “1919S eICILL “p Ja1jsyqs soqeiO
‘4 VS1 Uy SD (G8L61) Uosqooer SAR SPUINNY JOMOT) SozS Sloqpurig
8 Ca’ 0-000 § ‘9) arn] *[ 28015 adozosy
& SNOILVIOOSSY ANY dl ‘NOILVOITENd ALVUVdds AOUNOS TVUINAD ALIS
5 TVOIDOTOAUVHOUV GNV YVNOVa DNIASILNAGI NOsddad
[ea}
“QuOZODq ULIjENbeWeN—OO1ey oy} Ul s[PUIUTeU OBIE] JO SUIeUIOI PoprAOId oALY Jey} SoS SUSDO[OH{ PUL oUED0}sSIE[q Jodd-,
9 aTaV.L
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of the samples clearly date from Upper Pleistocene intervals in which climatic
conditions were certainly different from modern ones, there is no faunal
evidence for a significantly different past environment. The reason is perhaps
small sample size more than a real lack of Upper Pleistocene faunal and
environmental change.
Elands Bay Cave is located on the Atlantic coast, far south of the other
sites, in an area that is transitional between the Karoo—-Namaqualian and Cape
Zones. The cave has provided relatively large faunal assemblages bracketed
between roughly 17 000 B.P. and the historical present, though there is a major
gap in the sequence from approximately 8 000 to 4000 B.P. Large grazing
ungulates are relatively more common in levels ante-dating 9000 B.P., suggesting
that grasses were relatively more important near by in the late Pleistocene than
in the Holocene. The same kind of faunal change, probably also reflecting a -
reduced role for grasses in the Holocene, is even more apparent at sites located
within the near by Cape Zone. An increase in the frequency of steenbok relative
to grysbok in Elands Bay levels postdating 9 000 B.P. perhaps reflects subtle, but
locally significant, changes in the nature of the non-grass component of the
vegetation near the site.
Like coastal sites in the Cape Zone that contain a comparable late
Pleistocene/Holocene sequence, Elands Bay further records the terminal
Pleistocene/early Holocene rise in sea-level. During the period of much depressed
sea-levels between 17 000 and 12 000 years ago, the coastline was always more
than 10 km from the site, and remains of marine creatures are very rare in
deposits dating from this interval. By 11 000 B.P., the coastline had probably
moved to within 4 km of the site, and most kinds of edible marine creatures,
prominently including the Cape fur seal, first appear in deposits of about this
age. By 9 000 B.P. or so, the coast was in approximately its present position, and
remains of marine species are superabundant in all the younger levels.
THE CAPE ECOZONE
By far the smallest of the ecozones considered here, this zone consists of
the Cape Folded Mountains and the adjacent coastal plains. The mountains set
it off from the Karoo—-Namaqualian Zone to the north, and a spur of the
mountains reaching the sea at Cape Hangklip separates the coastal plain into
two usefully distinguished parts—the south-western Cape and the southern
Cape. The south-western Cape has a typically Mediterranean climate, with wet,
cool winters and hot, dry summers. The southern Cape is also marked by strong
seasonal contrasts in temperatures, but rainfall tends to be more evenly
distributed throughout the year, especially to the east.
The vegetation typical of much of the Cape Ecozone is known locally as
fynbos and bears a broad resemblance to the macchia of the Mediterranean
region. Typical fynbos plants are shrubs of various kinds with smali, hard
leaves that are capable of withstanding summer drought. The principal families
are reeds (Restionaceae), heaths (Ericaceae), and proteas (Proteaceae). Irises
SE
Se — Oe, re a a — a er a
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 251
and orchids (sensu lato Iridaceae and Orchidaceae) are common, but grasses
(Gramineae) are relatively rare. At least historically, the higher slopes of the
mountains in the western part of the region bore forests of ‘cedar’
(Widdringtonia), while the lower mountain slopes and adjacent coastal plain in
the south-eastern part of the zone, centred roughly on the town of Knysna,
- carried a mixed forest of yellowwood and evergreen broadleaf trees. Smaller
stands of essentially the same kind of mixed forest occurred in relatively moist,
sheltered microenvironments elsewhere in the Cape Zone as well.
Reflecting the nature of the vegetation, at least historically the fauna of the
Cape Ecozone was dominated by browsing ungulates. In the southern Cape, the
principal browsers were bushpig, bushbuck, blue duiker, grey duiker, and Cape
grysbok. Among the grazers, only the Cape buffalo was common more or less
throughout. Hartebeest was locally fairly numerous. Bontebok and blue
antelope, though entirely restricted (endemic) to this region were rare, and the
blue antelope became extinct about 1800 4.D. Roan antelope occurred in small
numbers in the forests of the south-east. Eland and steenbok (mixed feeders)
occurred more or less throughout, though the steenbok was probably completely
replaced by the grysbok in areas of dense fynbos, bush, or forest. Vaalribbok
and mountain reedbuck were common in suitably hilly locales, particularly in
the flanking Cape Mountains, where they were joined by the mountain zebra.
The most common non-ungulate herbivores were baboons, rock hyraxes,
porcupines, and hares. On the west, a large endemic mole-rat (Bathyergus
suillus) was also abundant in sandy, mainly coastal areas. Cape fur seal was
common in coastal waters, and rookeries even occurred on the mainland.
The fauna of the south-western Cape was similar, but more impoverished,
lacking bushpig, bushbuck, blue duiker, buffalo, mountain reedbuck, blue
antelope, roan, bontebok, and other species found in the southern Cape. Grey
duiker was relatively abundant and steenbok was generally more common than
grysbok. The available faunal evidence suggests less contrast between the south-
western and southern Cape during the late Pleistocene, probably in part because
of greater climatic similarity and in part because faunal interchange was
facilitated by exposure of the continental shelf during periods of lowered
sea-level.
In the southern Cape, colder intervals during the Upper Pleistocene are
clearly recorded in layers of frost-fractured debris at Nelson Bay Cave (Butzer
1973) and Die Kelders Cave 1 (Tankard 1976; Tankard & Schweitzer 1976),
near both of which frost is unknown at present. Butzer’s geomorphic research
(Butzer & Helgren 1972; Butzer, Stuckenrath ef al. 1978) suggests that the
colder intervals were mainly drier, perhaps in large part because of the greater
atmospheric stability promoted by weakening of the warm Agulhas Current off
the southern Cape coast. A drier climate during colder intervals in the southern
Cape is also indicated by Avery’s (in prep.) analysis of the microfauna from
Boomplaas Cave A.
Butzer has further detected a shift in geomorphic processes in the southern
\%Y «eer Ah mew A Sf
Se iti n”. NAAN
F eee 7
Mt
oY Non
252 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cape at about 4200 B.P., reflecting relatively drier conditions in the early
Holocene and more mesic ones subsequently. Pollen analysis of a Holocene
sedimentary sequence at Groenvlei on the coastal fringe of the evergreen forest
near Knysna may be read to support generally drier conditions in the early
Holocene (Martin 1968).
The nature of Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental change in
the south-western Cape is much less clearly established, and at least one of the
Upper Pleistocene cold intervals may have been significantly moister, permitting
the growth of yellowwood forest in areas today covered by sclerophyllous scrub
(Schalke 1973; Coetzee 1978D).
The Upper Pleistocene and Holocene sites that have provided remains of
large mammals in the Cape Ecozone are listed in Table 7, along with the
probable correlation of the sites (or of levels within them) with various oxygen- —
isotope stages. Although it is the smallest of the southern African ecozones
discussed here, the Cape Zone contains the largest number of large, reasonably
well-dated Upper Pleistocene and Holocene faunal samples, permitting a much
more penetrating search for relationships between faunal change and environ-
mental change established on other grounds.
In every Cape site that has provided large, thoroughly analysed late
Pleistocene and Holocene faunal assemblages (Byneskranskop 1, Buffelskloof,
Boomplaas, and Nelson Bay), the late Pleistocene assemblages contain a
significantly higher proportion of large grazing ungulates, particularly alcela-
phine antelopes and equids, suggesting that grasses were substantially more
important in the regional vegetation during the late Pleistocene. The contrast is
especially stark at Nelson Bay Cave, located on the coastal margin of the
Knysna Forest, in an area where the principal ungulates recorded historically
were bushpig, bushbuck, grysbok, and Cape buffalo. These are also the principal
ungulate species in the Nelson Bay deposits postdating 11 000-10 000 B.P.
Wildebeest, bontebok, springbok, quagga, and warthog were not present
historically near the site and have not been found in deposits there that are
younger than 11 000 years, yet they are the dominant species in deposits dating
between 18 500 and 12 000 B.P. (the oldest fossiliferous ones at the site). This
is probably the least equivocal faunal evidence for environmental change so far
found at any Quaternary site in southern Africa. The presence of grassland
interspersed with or largely in place of forest at Nelson Bay in the terminal
Pleistocene is entirely compatible with Butzer’s inference, based on geomorphic
observations, that the terminal Pleistocene climate of the southern Cape was
drier than the present one.
The faunas from earlier Upper Pleistocene cool or cold intervals also
suggest a vegetation cover in which grasses were far more important than they
were historically or than in intervening warmer intervals. The most important
earlier Upper Pleistocene sites are the complex of caves at Klasies River Mouth,
occupied by Middle Stone Age people shortly after a high sea-level which may
be correlated with isotope stage Se. This sea-level is clearly recorded in a beach
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 258
deposit on bedrock at Klasies Cave 1. On the basis of an analysis of the over-
lying Klasies sediments, especially the sand component, Butzer (1978a) has been
able to establish the relationship between subsequent earlier Upper Pleistocene
changes in sea-level (as reflected in the fluctuating distance between the sea and
the site) and successive Middle Stone Age occupations. The sea-level changes
were presumably of glacio-eustatic origin and therefore reflect global climatic
events that are also reflected in the deep-sea oxygen-isotope stratigraphy.
Oxygen-isotope determinations on (culturally accumulated) marine shells from
various Klasies layers in fact indicate the expected correlation between higher
off-shore water temperatures and higher sea-levels, as inferred by Butzer, and
between cooler off-shore waters and lower sea-levels.
The Klasies sites are located on the eastern edge of the Knysna Forest,
where the historic vegetation was a mosaic of evergreen forest, fynbos, and scrub
in which the principal ungulates were Cape grysbok, blue duiker, bushbuck,
bushpig, and Cape buffalo, much the same as at Nelson Bay, though unlike at
Nelson Bay, the Cape hartebeest probably also occurred near by in fair numbers.
In any case, the historically common ungulates clearly dominate the late
Holocene deposits at Klasies and are also abundant in those earlier Upper
Pleistocene layers formed when sea-level was high. In those earlier Upper
Pleistocene levels formed when sea-level was low, wildebeest, bontebok, and an
equid that is probably quagga are proportionately much more abundant,
recalling the terminal Pleistocene fauna at Nelson Bay. Unfortunately, there is
a large gap in the Klasies sequence from perhaps 65 000 to 5 000 B.P., so that
the record of Upper Pleistocene faunal fluctuations near the site is not complete.
Still, the fact that the faunal fluctuations which have been established correlate
closely with environmental fluctuations established on other grounds and that
they occur in a cultural context very different from that of Nelson Bay, clearly
indicates that it was environment and not culture which was ultimately
responsible for the faunal changes.
At Die Kelders Cave 1, the oldest stratigraphic unit is a boulder beach
recording a sea-level not very different from the modern one. The beach is over-
lain by sterile quartzose sands overlain in turn by the first Middle Stone Age
occupation. This earliest Middle Stone Age layer and a sterile layer immediately
above it contain numerous angular, spalled flakes of roof rock that resulted
from alternate freezing and thawing under much cooler climatic conditions than
the modern ones (Tankard & Schweitzer 1976; Tankard 1976). Frost-fractured
debris is also present in higher-lying Middle Stone Age layers, though less
common, perhaps because fissures suitable for moisture penetration in the roof
were largely removed by the initial freeze-thaw episode. Whatever the case, it is
clear that much, if not all of the occupation of Die Kelders by Middle Stone Age
people coincided with a distinctly cold interval, correlated here with oxygen-
isotope stage 4 and perhaps part of 3, and the faunal sample is relatively rich in
gregarious grazers, including some that were not recorded near the site histori-
cally and that have not been found in local Holocene faunas, including the one
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
254
VSI
SNOLLVIDOSSV
TVOIDOTOAVHOUV
(ssoid Ul) UIP “DH “Y
(°9L61) UPI “DU
(PLET) ODS “M7 UPD DU
(S961
Iasulg 2 Aapusx) AespusH{ “g °O
(S96T
IOSUIS 2% Aopusy{) AspusHx{ ‘g ‘O
é
UPI “Da
(28261) Urey
(98L61) UIP]
(ssoid Ul) Urey
eM gu
11095 “SI 29 UIE]
Jonne
wat “DU
upl[y “Oa
‘KIOAY *D ‘AapuoH] ‘g ‘O
ANY dI ‘NOILVvOIIand ALvuvdas
GNVY YNOVd ONIAAILNACI NOSuddd
(8261) UOSTIA, 2 JozIEMYoS
(08161) 19z1Ng *(ZL6T) JOBUIg 2p IOWA
(L961) Uooved ‘f ‘H
“(€961) Wooved “f[ 7 uosvEq ‘f "H
(S961) uooeeq *f
($961) Uooved "f
(0961) MnoT
(ZL6I “S961) deoysuy
(8261 ‘9L61)
‘7/9 Ja wooed “fH * (961) 1oyoorg
we wooed ‘f "H :(6L61) Uooveq ‘f ‘H
(8L6]) uewseddo
(8261) UOSTIAA 2P JozioMYoS
(EL61) 1109 2p Joz}IOMYOS
“(SL6I “PLOT “OL6T) JezeMYOS
(PL61) USION UeA
(8L61) MeYys}oqoy
(‘doid ul) Meys}Iegoy
(LL61) “eysiaqoy
(IL61) [s0duessog 2 u0jsulyAeg
aOUNOS TyaaNAD
ECCCAD
(9-61 S[9A9]) [| doysuvrysoukg
(d‘@ 000 $-000 ZI *2) java ‘] a8vig' adojosy
(Z-T/s aAeD
CI PA8D *ZI-[/T SBD) YINO| JOATY soisepy
2ABD S,31005
Z [eerysoupuy
] [eer ysoripuy
(qf ‘V SJOAP]) YINOP, JOATY sofeyy
(suoneAvoxe deoysuy) sAvD Aeg uOs|aN]
(1d4-TOq) seejdwoog
(108) Joopisjeyng
(S-T S[PeAs]) [ SAVD doysueiysoudg
(S[9A2] VST) I SIOPlom eI
uspplI Aeg s,uopI0yH
uooseyT uveqosurT
puelig soying
Jo}souIN}eg
uosueH od
Cd 0-000 § °9) an] ‘7 asn1g adojosy
aLIs
‘QUOZODA sdeD oY} UI s[eUIUIeUI e31L[ JO SUIeUIOI PopIAOId SALY 3eY} SojIS SUDDO[OF{ pue dUa00;SIa[q 1eddqQ
255
AsuION “T
9suou SUNT “D “Y :AopusyH{ “g@ 'O (6L61) A°UJION ‘(~L61) AOpucH SoIjI[BOO] [euNvZ JSOAIeHY BOG
VSI (Y9L61) UIA “DU (P8L61) 19zINg *(ZL6T) JOSUIS 7 IOWA (TZ-O1/VI 9A8D) YINO|| JOATY solsep yy
q¢ aspjgs' adojosy
(6-1/VI 948) “€T/T 94RD)
VSW (P9L61) UPI “DU (M861) 10zINg :(ZL6T) JOBUIS F IOWA YINO|| JOATY solsepy
DG asvjs adojosy
(9L6I “PL61) JozHEMYIS
paeyuey ‘(doid ur) uewyjo, “d “L
n
2
=
:
ia
oO
%
<
=)
ee
°
n
Z
g
B
6 VSW (YSL6T) UPI “OU *(WIWOD “sied) JOZ}EMYIS "Y “A (s1oKe] WSN) T 9ARD SIOP[OM PIG
B (dA 000 ZE-000 SZ *?) paiwyuadaffipun “p 4o[puv ¢ sadvig adojos]
a VST UPI “OD “a (8L61) Wooead “f *(9ZL6I “7L61) UPI (ISA-I1DA) 2AvD Avg UOS|SN
S suou us D “a % ANE “£ (6L61) Uooeaqd ‘f Z ‘I 1yoepes}IOON
o} (8L61 “9L61)
9° ‘]p Ja wOdeEq] “f *H ‘(9L61) 194001g
9 VSWEé pure VST (28261) UT DU 7 used “f “H *(6L61) UOoREd ‘f “H (ALTAd-d) seejduoog
ad (‘d‘@ 000 ZI-000 ZE *?) Z a8b1g adojosy
E VST UD OD UW (qndun) ulepy 2 uooved ‘f ‘H DARD PILYSULy
s VSI (0961) SIP “HT (0961) uesey Jaypoyg e14u9[
< (7961) 2112495
rs VST Ula “D “A (0967) SIIPAA “HT *(0961) ueseyz (E61) 72 12 UIMpooH SAB) ISINYYLO
S (‘d’F 0-000 ZI °2) paivuuasaffipun ‘7 aspjs adojos]
(ec)
fs VST é (0961) MNOT (A-D sioce]) YNOW JoATY sofyey
Z VST ue “OD “a (8L61) Uooved “f *(FZL6T “PZL6T) UI (OI-TSD) 2AvD Avg uosjeN
co (8261 ‘9L61)
‘jo Ja UodeEq ‘ff “H ‘(9L61) 19xO01g
VST (98261) UPI “DU 3 uoseed ‘f "H (6461) UOored ‘f “H (Tad-VALTU@ seejdwuoog
VST (98161) UPI "DU (8L61) ueweddo (VGIN-dH) JOoPsieyng
S55
SS ————— SSS
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
256
(j1ed ul) suou
Gued ul) VSINé
suou
ouou
auou
VSW
euou
VSN
SNOILYIDOSSY
TVOIDOTOAVHOUY
(861) UPI “D *
ABYVION “T ‘UPD °
(Apnjs 9}39[dwWo0our) ulepy *D
ABUVON “T ‘USD “D
ABYWON “TJ ‘Usp “D
UPI “D “A +9400D '§ “a”
‘7 1a WBUIS “A UPS OA
*eqIA “§ “A *ANUSD “MV
‘SPA “H “I ‘SepusH “a “O
yung “¢ 9 SepueH “€ ‘O
UPI “Da
UPD "a % AepucH “a ‘O
(P9L61) UPI “OU
UIT ‘DY :9400D '§ ‘a 'H
(P9L61) UPI “DU
ANY dl ‘NOILVOITANd JLVuVdas
GNY YNO V4 ONIAAILNACI NOSudd
(8261 ‘9L6T)
‘]0 12 UodeE “tf *H ‘(9L6]) 194001g
3 uoseed ‘f "H :(6L61) wove ‘f ‘H
(6L61) AeUMION ‘(-qndun) urepy *D “yf
(qndun) uly “5 “a
(6L61)
ABYWON ‘(qndun) 309g 2 AIsAy °D
(6L6T) AoujION
(SS61) 24005 ‘S§ “‘€ “H
(9961)
Aapusy 79 deoysuy §(pL61) SopucH “@ °O
(6L61) uooevaq “f
‘(qndun) uewouurg 29 yurg
(@.20100 (o}s)
*sied) Jozing °(ZL6]) uolsjey 2 Jozing
(‘doid ut) 1ezjing
*(OSL61) UST + (8961) SepusH 7% AopuczHy
(O8L6T) 19ZINg :(ZL6]) 1OBUIS 2 IOWA
(wuI0S
‘sted) Jozjng :(¢¢61) 24900 ‘S “a ‘H
(P8L61) 19z1Ng = (LET) J9BUIS 7 IOWA
gOUNOS TyAANAS
(HOT-d10) see[duoog
p ulo}uoJouInG
[ UleyuoJoulnq
UIO}U0JI0}S
Z ‘T yung soifpeoH
(s-91d A[qissod) yosoquisog
Qued ut) urloyuojspuelq
(df 000 ZE-000 SCI '?) paroyuasaffipun ‘¢ 10/pun p ‘¢ sadnig adojosy
Aeg Sp[Oloyy
papiaipqnsun ‘¢ aspjis adojosy
(Ig[AUSOID) JURSeITG OxeT
a¢ asvjgy adojosy
T dippaemg
(6€-8E/T SAD) YNOW JoATY saisepy
PS asvj5 adojosy
(projue}s)
JOANOYpuIAA pue jseq-jesspueyIoyUIT
(L-S/§ 2A8D *LE-9E/DI PAR
*SI-I/A1 2A8D © LE-F1/T 2AeD)
YINO| IJOATY soisepyy
2¢ asDjS adojosy
aLIs
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 257
from Die Kelders. As at Klasies, the Holocene fauna from Die Kelders dates
from the later Holocene, and is unfortunately separated from the Middle Stone
Age fauna by an occupation gap spanning several tens of thousands of years.
Finally, analysis of the aeolianite sequences at both Swartklip and Sea
Harvest (Butzer pers. comm.) has indicated that the bone accumulations at both
sites were formed during periods of lowered sea-level, in each instance probably
reflecting major cool intervals within isotope stage 5. In historic times, the
principal ungulates near each site were browsers and mixed feeders, but their
fossil faunas are heavily dominated by grazers, many of which did not occur in
the Cape Zone historically. The implication of a greater role for grasses is clear
once again, and the fact that the faunal accumulations at both sites result from
carnivore (v. human) activity further supports the notion that the long-term
changes in the grazer/browser ratios described for Klasies, Nelson Bay, and
other Cape Zone archaeological sites basically reflect changing environments
and not changing cultural preferences and practices.
Besides Swartklip and Sea Harvest, there are several other probable
carnivore sites in the south-western Cape in which the faunas are dominated by
large grazers (Duinefontein 1 and 4, Elandsfontein ‘bone circle’, Ysterfontein,
Hoedjies Punt | and 2), but these sites have not been firmly dated on independent
grounds. They have therefore not been considered in greater detail here. The
fact that grazer-dominated fossil faunas should be so common probably reflects
the fact that climatic conditions cooler than present ones occupied much more of
Upper Pleistocene time than conditions similar to present ones.
In the southern Cape, there is also one probable carnivore site (at Lake
Pleasant) in which the fauna comes from deposits correlated with a warmer
interval on independent geomorphic grounds, and although the faunal sample is
small, it is probably significant that it contains no alcelaphine antelopes or
equids, but that Cape buffalo is represented and dolphin is present, indicating
proximity of the sea. The fauna from Bloembos near Darling in the south-
western Cape may also date from a warmer interval(s), though possibly a mid
rather than Upper Pleistocene one. The Bloembos fauna is especially interesting
because it contains the only Pleistocene record of a giraffe in the Cape Zone,
and Bloembos is presently located in an area where trees were unknown
historically. By itself, giraffe implies a very different environment from the
recent one.
One apparent anomaly in all the Upper Pleistocene faunas of the Cape
Zone that are especially rich in grazing ungulates is the rarity or absence of
steenbok, though grysbok is always present (Klein 19755). Steenbok is much
better represented in the browser-dominated Holocene and historic faunas of the
region, especially in the south-western Cape, where it often outnumbers grysbok
locally. This seems the opposite of what would be expected, since, between the
two, it is the steenbok which eats more grass and which might therefore have
profited more from grassier vegetation. However, the steenbok is also highly
dependent on browse, and the answer to the puzzle is probably the nature of the
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
available browse during cooler, grassier intervals. The grysbok is basically a
Cape Zone endemic, and its evolutionary origins and history may well be linked
to its ability to make maximum use of those browse plants which remained
during the substantial periods when grasses became more common as a result of
climatic change. Details of the browse preferences of grysbok vy. steenbok in
areas where they overlap today might well provide clues as to what browse
plants disappeared or became much rarer during Pleistocene cold intervals.
More generally, when they can be distinguished osteologically, fluctuations in
the relative frequencies of closely related pairs of species such as steenbok and
grysbok probably have considerable potential for providing fine detail on past
environmental changes.
Klasies, Nelson Bay, Die Kelders, Swartklip, and Sea Harvest are all
coastal sites whose faunal contents could be expected to reflect Upper Pleistocene
and Holocene changes in sea-level. The late Pleistocene/early Holocene rise in
sea-level is, in fact, very clearly reflected in the Nelson Bay sequence in which
shells or bones of marine animals do not occur in the deposits dating to between
18 500 and 12 000 B.P. Marine creatures, including the Cape fur seal, appear
only in deposits dated to about 12 000, when the coastline had moved to within
10 km of the site, and they become especially abundant in deposits younger than
10 000 B.P., after which the sea was always within easy striking distance. The
same phenomenon is recorded in the terminal Pleistocene/early Holocene
sequence at Byneskranskop 1, though seal bones are less common throughout,
presumably because the site has never been directly on the coast (it is presently
about 6 km away).
The marine regressions that occurred during the earlier Upper Pleistocene
(Middle Stone Age) occupations at Klasies River Mouth are known to have been
less dramatic than the terminal Pleistocene one, and this is apparently reflected
in the presence of seal bones and other marine food debris throughout the
Klasies sequence. There is, however, a tendency for seals to be less well repre-
sented in layers formed during regressive phases. Less dramatic regression, in
combination with a steeply sloping continental shelf immediately off shore at
Die Kelders, is perhaps also responsible for the occurrence of seal bones
throughout the Middle Stone Age occupation there. It is probably significant
that seal bones are less common in the Middle Stone Age levels than in the late
Holocene ones, formed when the sea lapped virtually at the mouth of the cave,
as it does today.
At Swartklip, marine creatures are completely absent, perhaps implying a
more substantial regression than at Sea Harvest where seals and other marine
creatures are represented in small quantities. Again, the continental shelf
immediately off Sea Harvest is relatively steep, so that substantial regression
would be necessary to remove the sea completely from the rounds of its (?)hyaena
inhabitants. It is interesting that where seal bones do occur in Cape Zone
deposits apparently dating from a relatively cool interval, antarctic and sub-
antarctic seals (especially elephant seal, but also gazelle seal and crab-eater)
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 259
appear to be relatively better represented than in deposits from warmer intervals
in which Cape fur seal is often the only pinniped present.
The relatively large faunal samples available from the Holocene levels at
Nelson Bay are less different from one another than are any of them from the
late Pleistocene samples, but they are still characterized by significant change
through time. Thus, in addition to grysbok, bushbuck, Cape buffalo, and
bushpig, the early Holocene samples dating between roughly 10000 and
5 000 B.P., are relatively rich in remains of vaalribbok, mountain reedbuck, and
roan antelope. In deposits postdating 5 000 B.P., remains of these creatures are
much rarer, and the blue duiker, well known in the area historically, makes its
first appearance. The precise timing of the faunal shift will probably become
clearer as a result of excavations recently completed by R. R. Inskeep in Nelson
Bay deposits dating between 5 000 and 3 000 B.P. The implications of the shift
are not entirely clear, but broad coincidence with the change in geomorphic
processes identified by Butzer at c. 4 200 B.P. suggests that it reflects an environ-
mental change, perhaps the establishment of the Knysna Forest in essentially its
historic form.
Environmental differences between the earlier and later Holocene are also
suggested by differences between the faunal samples from the corresponding
levels of Boomplaas Cave A. The faunal differences are at least broadly corre-
lated with differences in the proportions of tree species represented by charcoals
(H. J. Deacon 1979). In recent times, the most important source of firewood in
the vicinity has been the thorn tree, Acacia karroo. It is also the principal tree
represented by charcoals in the late Holocene deposits of the site, but it is far
less common in the earlier Holocene levels, and it is not represented at all in the
late Pleistocene levels, where the principal trees providing charcoal were
olive spp. Both olive and thorn trees have dense wood that produces good
charcoal, and the change through time almost certainly reflects long-term change
in the vegetation rather than changing cultural preferences. Studies of pollens
currently under way should shed more light on the nature of the vegetational
change and its relationship to contemporaneous faunal changes at Boomplaas.
CONCLUSIONS
Changes in large mammal distributions or species frequencies that probably
reflect Upper Pleistocene and Holocene environmental change can be demon-
strated to some extent in all the ecozones of southern Africa. However, a pattern
of change in mammalian faunas that can be compared to patterns of long-term
environmental change established on other grounds can be demonstrated only
in the Cape Zone, where cooler intervals repeatedly witnessed an increase in
grazing ungulates relative to browsers. In part, the failure to demonstrate
comparable patterns in other zones may reflect the fact that Upper Pleistocene
environmental and faunal change was greater in the Cape Zone than elsewhere,
but in part it almost certainly also reflects the better overall quality of data from
the Cape—more well-dated sites and more relatively large faunal assemblages
_ fas -—_~ SAA CSE oe
> 1.) eee tek oe
wen
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
for which detailed numerical data are available. Some authorities believe that it
is not really possible to use fossil faunas to document environmental change |
because it is rarely possible to know the relationship between relative species
abundance in a fossil fauna and relative abundance in the live fauna from which
the fossils were derived. However, the Cape data show that this is not an insuper-
able problem, and the contrast between the Cape Zone and others indicates that
widespread deficiencies in dating, sample size, and sample description are far
more serious obstacles to the palaeoenvironmental interpretation of faunal data.
MAMMALIAN EVIDENCE FOR CULTURAL CHANGE
In archaeological sites, changes in environment and changes in culture are
the principal causes of shifts in relative species abundance through time. In
situations where the intervals between shifts represent thousands of years, where
the shifts are repetitive or cyclical, where they appear to be correlated with
changes in environment suggested by other lines of evidence, and where they
occur in the absence of evidence for any significant cultural change or innovation,
the writer feels it is most economical to ascribe the species fluctuations to
environmental change. Most of the fluctuations in large mammal frequencies
that can be documented through Upper Pleistocene and Holocene time in
southern Africa seem to the writer to occur in circumstances such as the ones
that have just been listed, and they have therefore been discussed in the previous
section on ‘Mammalian Evidence for Environmental Change’. There are,
however, some instances of mammalian frequency changes which are not clearly
related to environmental change, which are not repetitive or cyclical, and which
occur in contexts where there is evidence for major cultural change or innovation.
The most obvious instance of a culturally determined species frequency
change is the introduction of domestic stock to southern Africa by Iron Age
mixed farmers, beginning about 2 000 years ago (Phillipson 1977). The stock
were diffused far beyond the areas ever occupied by Iron Age farmers themselves
(H. J. Deacon et al. 1978, with references), and some of the late Holocene faunas
listed in the last section may be used to establish the route(s) of diffusion
(Klein 1979a) or the impact the stock may have had on the abundance of some
indigenous wild species (Klein 19745). For the open grasslands of the Basutolian
region, Maggs (1975) has documented faunal differences that probably reflect
major social and technological differences between Iron Age people and broadly
contemporaneous Stone Age ones in the same area. The Iron Age faunal samples
are richer in large gregarious grazing ungulates, probably because Iron Age
peoples could mobilize more manpower for surrounds and drives and could more
easily dig game pits that, combined with drives, would constitute the most
effective means of obtaining large ungulates in the Basutolian Zone.
The principal concern in this section, however, is not with changes in species
frequencies that reflect the introduction of domestic stock or of Iron Age
technology and social organization, but rather with a much earlier, more subtle
|
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 261
shift in mammal species frequencies that the writer believes may reflect important
differences between Middle Stone Age and Later Stone Age peoples in their
ability to hunt.
In southern Africa, the term Middle Stone Age (MSA) is currently applied
to artefact assemblages dominated by large stone flakes and blades, sometimes
altered by retouch into side-scrapers, end-scrapers, points, denticulates, notches,
backed pieces, and other tool types conventionally recognized by archaeologists.
Handaxes are absent, and microlithic tools are rare. Bone artefacts are also rare,
and items of personal adornment or art objects are unknown. Typological and
technical variability through space and time is relatively limited, and many
differences in typology or flaking technique among MSA assemblages in
different regions or at different times may reflect differences in raw material
availability more than anything else. The earliest Middle Stone Age assemblages
in southern Africa may be as much as 200 000 years old (Butzer, Beaumont &
Vogel 1978), while the latest are probably all older than 30 000 years, on the
basis of a large series of recently obtained radiocarbon dates (see especially
Vogel & Beaumont 1972; Beaumont ef al. 1978; H. J. Deacon 1979; Klein
1974a).
It is presently impossible to characterize the Later Stone Age (LSA)
succinctly, in part because the artefact assemblages involved are more variable
in time and space than Middle Stone Age ones and in part because only Later
Stone Age assemblages post-dating 20000 B.P. are reasonably well known.
LSA assemblages ante-dating 20 000 years have been found at only a handful of
sites in southern Africa (Kalemba, Leopard’s Hill, Redcliff, Heuningsneskrans,
Border Cave, Apollo 11, Elands Bay, and Boomplaas; with references in
Tables 2-7), where the samples are either small or remain incompletely described
or both. In most LSA assemblages post-dating 20 000 B.P., microlithic tools are
a prominent component, but this is not universally true, and, in the Cape
Ecozone, there is clear evidence for a ‘macrolithic’ industry sandwiched between
two ‘microlithic’ ones (J. Deacon 1978). Generally speaking, LSA peoples
appear to have produced ‘macrolithic’ flakes and blades with less care than many
MSA peoples. At least the better known LSA assemblages younger than
20 000 B.P. also regularly include standardized bone artefact types (such as
‘awls’, ‘points’, ‘needles’, ‘hide-burnishers’, and ‘fish-gorges’), as well as easily
recognizable items of personal adornment or art objects (ostrich egg-shell beads,
incised or engraved pieces of ostrich egg-shell or bone, shell pendants, etc.).
On the evidence from Border Cave, it seems likely that the manufacture of
beads and standardized bone artefacts was practised from the very beginning of
the Later Stone Age, more than 30 000 years ago. People making Later Stone
Age artefacts of various kinds were still living in much of southern Africa at
time of historic contact.
The available evidence suggests strong parallels between the Middle Stone
Age and Later Stone Age of southern Africa, as outlined here, and the Middle
Palaeolithic (Mousterian) and Upper Palaeolithic of Europe, as they have long
—
—
se ivarr se _ 2 a E ae SAA CS ee
TT An _ a Fa
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
been known. Although the Middle Stone Age may have begun somewhat
earlier than the Middle Palaeolithic, throughout much of their existence the two’
were clearly contemporaneous and their terminal dates are very similar. Both
exhibit less temporal and spatial variability than the culture-stratigraphic units
that succeed them, and both are characterized by the absence of art objects and
standardized bone artefact types. One major point of non-comparability may
be in the kinds of people associated with them. While the makers of Middle
Palaeolithic artefacts were Neanderthals (Homo sapiens neanderthalensis),
clearly distinct from modern people, the makers of MSA tools may have been
anatomically modern (Homo sapiens sapiens) (Rightmire 1979), though a
pattern of well-documented associations between MSA artefacts and diagnostic
human remains will be necessary to show this with reasonable certainty. The
makers of Upper Palaeolithic artefacts were certainly anatomically modern, as
were at least those Later Stone Age people who lived after 20 000-18 000 B.P.
In Europe, there is substantial evidence to argue that the Upper Palaeolithic
represents a quantum advance over what preceded it (Klein 1973), and at least
for the moment, the writer feels it is reasonable to hypothesize that the Later
Stone Age represents basically the same phenomenon in southern Africa. Under
these circumstances, differences between MSA and LSA faunas from sites
occupied under broadly similar environmental conditions could be interpreted
to reflect cultural evolution. In orde1 to establish such faunal differences, it is of
course necessary to have large MSA and LSA faunal samples whose palaeo-
environmental context has been reasonably well established on independent
grounds, and these conditions are so far met only in the Cape Ecozone, especially
by the Middle Stone Age faunas from Klasies River Mouth and Die Kelders 1
and the Later Stone Age ones from Nelson Bay Cave and Byneskranskop 1.
At all four sites, in levels that were formed when the coast was at or near its
present position, bones of seals and penguins are common, but only in the two
Later Stone Age sites are they accompanied by large numbers of bones from fish
and from flying marine birds. The writer believes this indicates that Later Stone
Age people were capable of active fishing and fowling, while Middle Stone Age
people were not. With regard to the terrestrial mammal remains that are the
principal focus of this paper, there is also an interesting contrast. Comparing
layers at Nelson Bay formed during the Holocene to ones that appear to have
formed during broadly similar portions of the Last Interglacial at Klasies, the
Nelson Bay deposits are significantly richer in remains of pigs and poorer in
remains of eland. The LSA levels of Byneskranskop 1 contrast with the MSA
ones at Die Kelders in essentially the same way (the comparisons here are
restricted to pairs of sites which are located in very similar environments today),
though the extent of past environmental comparability is less certain than in the
Klasies/Nelson Bay case. In any event, the writer has suggested that the higher
frequency of wild pig and lower frequency of eland in the LSA sites reflects the
enhanced ability of LSA people to deal with prey that are likely to mount an
effective counter-attack on the hunter. Using data on the ages of animals
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 263
represented in the Nelson Bay and Klasies faunas in addition to the contrasts in
relative species frequencies, the writer has further suggested that even when
MSA people hunted basically the same species as their LSA successors, they
were less effective, that is, they took a smaller proportion of the available
animals (Klein 19796).
Clearly, the hypothesis that LSA hunters were more effective than MSA
ones would be more secure if it could be demonstrated at additional sites in the
Cape Zone and also at sites outside it. The writer has examined the available
faunal data from all the other ecozones considered in the previous section of this
paper, and only in the Zambesian Zone are there sufficient numerical data for
even a preliminary test. Pigs (especially warthog) are more common in both
MSA and LSA sites in the Zambesian Zone than in contemporaneous Cape
sites, probably reflecting the fact that pigs have always been more abundant in
the Zambesian Zone, as they were historically. At the same time, in those
Zambesian sites for which numerical data are available, pigs are relatively more
frequent in LSA levels (Kalemba, Redcliff, Gwisho, Leopard’s Hill, and Makwe)
than in MSA ones (Kalemba and Redcliff). However, at Redcliff and Kalemba,
where MSA and LSA pig frequencies may be compared within the same sites,
the relative increase in pigs is not statistically significant, and it remains possible
that the observed differences in pig frequencies between the MSA sites and
various LSA ones reflect differences in local environment rather than cultural
evolution. Sorting out the alternatives will be possible only with better palaeo-
environmental controls and larger faunal samples. More generally, as in the
case of environmental change, the principal obstacle to documenting cultural
change from large mammal remains is the shortage of appropriately large, well-
described, and well-dated samples.
THE ECOLOGY AND DEMISE OF EXTINCT SPECIES
Not very long ago, it was widely believed that Acheulean cultures had
survived into the Upper Pleistocene and that faunas associated with later
Acheulean artefacts could even be as recent as 40000 B.P. The richest such
fauna in southern Africa is the one from Elandsfontein (Hopefield) in the south-
western Cape Province (Hendey 1974 with references), which is characterized by
at least 19 extinct large mammal species out of approximately 50 that have been
identified. The extinct species include a giant gelada baboon (Theropithecus
(Simopithecus) sp.), a sabre-toothed cat (Megantereon sp.), an elephant
(Loxodonta atlantica), a large horse or zebra (Equus capensis), two different kinds
of pigs (Mesochoerus sp. and Metridiochoerus sp.), a sivathere (Sivatherium
maurusium), a small kudu (Tragelaphus (Strepsiceros) sp.), a giant buffalo
(Pelorovis sp.), a giant hippotragine antelope (Hippotragus gigas), the ancestor
(Rabataceras arambourgi) of the modern hartebeests, an extinct bastard harte-
beest (Damaliscus niro), a giant alcelaphine antelope (Megalotragus sp.), a large
grysbok (Raphicerus sp.), a gazelle (Gazella sp.), springboks (Antidorcas recki
GANA oo.
YY CS ty i 4g
Tet r 7.3 1
om ams
Se Le
7”
Ferran
Sl
34 NoN
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and A. australis), and some peculiar antelopes whose affinities will perhaps be
clarified following E. S. Vrba’s current detailed study of the Elandsfontein bovids.
It is now very clear that the Acheulean did not survive into the Upper
Pleistocene, and it seems increasingly probable that it was replaced by the
Middle Stone Age within the later part of the Middle Pleistocene, more than
130 000 years ago (Klein 19766; Butzer, Beaumont & Vogel 1978; Szabo &
Butzer 1979). Furthermore, the overwhelming majority of extinct species repre-
sented at Elandsfontein and other Acheulean sites are not represented in Middle
Stone Age faunas and in non-archaeological faunas that are contemporaneous
with them (see the lists of sites in Tables 2—7 above). Particularly striking in this
context is the absence of most of the extinct Elandsfontein species in large earlier
Upper Pleistocene faunas in the (same) Cape Ecozone, especially in the very
large samples from Klasies River Mouth, where dating of the MSA artefacts
and associated fauna to the early Upper Pleistocene is secure. In fact, it appears
increasingly likely that most of the extinct species present at Elandsfontein and
other Acheulean sites disappeared well before the early Upper Pleistocene, since
they are not represented in the large faunal sample from Florisbad, most of
which probably comes from a later mid-Pleistocene horizon at the site (Butzer
pers. comm.).
The Florisbad fauna contains five extinct species of large mammals—the
‘giant Cape horse’ (Equus capensis), a large warthog (Metridiochoerus sp.), a
giant buffalo (Pelorovis antiquus), a giant alcelaphine (Megalotragus priscus),
and Bond’s springbok (Antidorcas bondi). With the addition of the southern
springbok (Antidorcas australis), these are also the only extinct species which
have been found in Upper Pleistocene contexts in southern Africa. Some
dentitions assigned to the extant Damaliscus dorcas (bontebok/blesbok) in
Upper Pleistocene faunas may actually belong to the extinct form Damaliscus
niro, but horn-cores to prove the presence of D. niro are lacking. Additionally,
in contrast to Gentry (1978), the writer believes that D. niro may be ancestral to
Upper Pleistocene and recent D. dorcas, in which case it is not extinct in the same
sense as the other species considered here. Extinct forms of wildebeest and reed-
buck are common in Upper Pleistocene sites in the Cape Ecozone, but were
probably just local variants (subspecies) of the black wildebeest and southern
reedbuck that survived elsewhere.
The purpose in this section is to present the information that is available on
the distribution and ecology of the extinct species followed by a brief considera-
tion of the causes of extinction. Teeth of the various extinct forms are illustrated
in Figures 3-5.
EQUUS CAPENSIS
The writer has followed Churcher & Richardson (1978; also Churcher 1970)
in assigning all large later Pleistocene horses in southern African sites to the
species Equus capensis (including ‘E. helmei’, ‘E. plicatus’, et al.) Upper Pleisto-
cene specimens assignable to Equus capensis have been found in all six ecozones
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 265
Metridiochoerus sp. Equus capensis
(RC VII EE 1) (RC VI S)
Fig. 3. A fragmentary third molar of Metridiochoerus sp. and a lower third molar of Equus
capensis. Both specimens come from Redcliff Cave, Zimbabwe Rhodesia, and are reproduced
natural size. (Drawings by K. Scott.)
considered earlier: at Redcliff in the Zambesian Zone; at Pomongwe, Chelmer,
Kalkbank, the Cave of Hearths, Bushman Rock Shelter, Border Cave, and Aloes
in the Transvaalian Zone; at Equus Cave, Black Earth Cave, and gi in the
Kalaharian Zone; at Florisbad, Vlakkraal, and Koffiefontein in the Basutolian
Zone; at Apollo 11 and Elands Bay Caves in the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone;
and at Sea Harvest, Hoedjies Punt, Swartklip, Bloembos, Duinefontein,
Byneskranskop 1, and Boomplaas in the Cape Zone.
On the evidence from Apollo 11, Elands Bay, Byneskranskop 1, and
Boomplaas, Equus capensis probably made its last appearance in the Karoo—
Namaqualian and Cape Zones between 12000 and 10000 years ago. In the
Zambesian Zone, it is known from the “Tshangula’ horizons at Redcliff, where
it may be as young as 20 000 B.P. In other zones, it cannot be shown to have
survived 40 000-30 000 B.P., but this probably reflects the very small number
and small size of faunal samples that date between 40 000-30 000 and 10 000 B.P.
ee
‘> la . — +. eo
_— ~ 24
- Ctr,
Rass
a — KS fo
a ~ [-j een (9)
ey,
2 ¥om™N
266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in these zones. In essence, the time when E£. capensis made its last appearance
outside the Karoo—Namaqualian and Cape Zones remains to be established.
In most Upper Pleistocene sites in southern Africa and in all those which
have provided large samples, Equus capensis is accompanied by one or more of
its smaller, historic relatives—Burchell’s zebra, quagga, or mountain zebra. In
most sites, it is much less common than the smaller form(s), but in Karoo-
Namadqualian sites, located in what is and perhaps always has been the driest of
the southern African ecozones, and in sites in the drier, western portion of the
Cape Ecozone, it is relatively more common (versus smaller equids).
Additionally, in the Zambesian Zone, at Redcliff, where E. capensis is not
particularly frequent overall, it is most frequent in the ‘later Bambata’ horizons,
which sedimentological evidence suggests were formed under comparatively
arid conditions. The possibility that E. capensis preferred or was relatively well .
adapted to arid environments is especially interesting, since some authorities
believe it was ancestral to the living Grevy’s zebra of northern Kenya, southern
Ethiopia, and Somalia (Churcher & Richardson 1978). Among the living zebras,
Megalotragus priscus
(RC ND)
Pelorovis antiquus
(RC 15'B)
Fig. 4. Lower molars of Megalotragus priscus and Pelorovis antiquus. Both specimens come from
Redcliff Cave, Zimbabwe Rhodesia, and are reproduced natural size. (Drawings by K. Scott.)
f~ een ew
267
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS
_ — SA As LS ee eee lee eee — a aetlUm6RE
(‘nosg “yy Aq s8UIMeI) “9ZIS [eInyeu poonpoider ore suounioads yJog “eIsepoyy eMqequulZ “oAvD Pyopoy Wor
[ dippeMg Woy syossnv sposopyup JO e{QIpueUl VW °¢
1puog SvI4OpYUp JO Te[OUI IaMO] & pue “eOTIFY YINOG “soUlACI adea U10}seM-43N0s
(a SZ Ou)
ipuog soo2s0pijuy/
«
iG
‘31d
(28 MZ) syo4snD
spo40pnuy
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Grevy’s appears to be the least dependent upon water. It inhabits some of the
most arid country in east Africa, overlapping Burchell’s zebra on the margins of
its range, but occurring alone in the arid core.
METRIDIOCHOERUS SP.
The writer has followed*White and Harris (1977) in assigning all large
warthog-like pigs of the later Pleistocene to the genus Metridiochoerus (including
“Stylochoerus’, ‘Tapinochoerus’, et al.), though not all specialists agree with their
taxonomy (Cooke 1978). In any case, the large pigs involved are so far very rare
in Upper Pleistocene contexts, having been recorded only at Koffiefontein,
Vlakkraal, and Florisbad in the Basutolian Ecozone (the Florisbad specimens
may be largely or wholly of mid-Pleistocene age), and at Redcliff Cave in the
Zambesian Zone. Among these occurrences, the latest is perhaps at Redcliff,
where a large warthog-like pig is still present in the “Tshangula’ horizons, —
tentatively dated to between 30 000 and 20 000 B.P. in discussion above.
Estimates of Metridiochoerus abundance are available only from Redcliff
where the creature is very rare, too rare to search for frequency covariation with
extant species that might indicate shared habitat preferences. Its highly
hypsodont molars, similar in structure to those of the warthog, plainly indicate
it was a grazer, which is in keeping with the predominance of grazers at Redcliff
and in the Basutolian faunas in which Metridiochoerus has been identified.
PELOROVIS ANTIQUUS
The writer has followed Gentry (1978) in assigning all the ‘giant’, long-
horned Upper Pleistocene buffaloes of southern Africa to this species (including
especially material formerly assigned to ‘Homoioceras baini’). Fossils of Pelorovis
antiquus have been found at Redcliff in the Zambesian Zone; at Kalkbank and
the Cave of Hearths in the Transvaalian Zone; at #gi in the Kalaharian Zone;
at Florisbad, Vlakkraal, Koffiefontein, and Driefontein in the Basutolian Zone;
at Elands Bay Cave in the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone; and at Sea Harvest,
Hoedyjies Punt, Ysterfontein, Bloembos, Swartklip, Die Kelders, Nelson Bay,
Boomplaas, and Klasies River Mouth in the Cape Zone. The species was thus
very widespread, but it is generally not common in fossil faunas, except in the
Basutolian Zone, where it has also been recorded as an apparently isolated fossil
at various localities, for example, in the alluvium of the Modder River, which
provided the first giant buffalo fossil to be scientifically recorded in southern
Africa (Cooke 1955).
Finds at Nelson Bay and Elands Bay Caves suggest P. antiquus made its last
appearance in the Cape and adjacent parts of the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone
between 12 000 and 10000 years ago. Elsewhere, it cannot be shown to have
survived beyond 40 000-30 000 B.P., but, as in the case of Equus capensis, this
probably reflects the absence of large faunal samples from the interval between
40 000-30 000 and 10 000 B.P. The date of its last appearance outside the Cape
and Karoo—Namaqualian Zones thus remains to be established.
The hypsodont teeth and exceptionally long horns of P. antiquus (spanning
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 269
2-3 m) both point to a preference for relatively open, grassy environments, also
perhaps suggested by the relative abundance of the species in Basutolian sites.
It seems likely that P. antiquus was more at home in open settings than its
closest living relative, the Cape buffalo. Ecological distinction from the Cape
buffalo is implied at Klasies River Mouth, where the frequencies of the two
species vary independently of one another from level to level within the deposits.
At Klasies, the frequency of giant buffalo is correlated most closely with that of
eland, which may suggest a common environmental preference. Eland, as
studied by Hillman (1974), appear to favour open country with large islands and
galleries of tree and shrub growth. The Basutolian sites at which giant buffalo
are common are all located near streams or springs where such islands or
galleries probably occurred. The giant buffalo may have gravitated to them for
shade rather than for food.
At Klasies, there are enough giant buffalo dentitions for an analysis of the
ages at which individual animals died or were killed by the Middle Stone Age
occupants of the site (Klein 1978d, 19796). Most of the individuals present were
within the first 10 per cent of potential lifespan (many were newborn), while
among older animals, prime adults (between 20% and 50% of lifespan) were
especially rare. The Klasies giant buffalo age distribution is very similar to the
natural (attritional) mortality pattern in all free-ranging large ungulates, to the
age distribution in recently observed Cape buffalo killed by lions, and to the age
distribution of Cape buffalo in the same Klasies MSA levels. Recent observations
indicate that it is large size and membership in large herds that make Cape
buffalo prime adults largely immune to lion predation. The age distribution of
Cape buffalo at Klasies suggests that the MSA occupants were constrained by
the same features as lions in dealing with Cape buffalo, and the similarity
between the Cape buffalo and giant buffalo distributions suggests that large size
and herd membership may also be the reasons that giant buffalo prime adults
are rare at Klasies. Given the resemblances between the giant buffalo age profile
at Klasies and the probable natural (attritional) mortality pattern in giant
buffalo, it is even conceivable that the Klasies people did not prey on giant
buffalo at all, but scavenged individuals which had died naturally or been killed
by other predators.
MEGALOTRAGUS PRISCUS
The writer has followed Gentry (1978) in assigning all the later Pleistocene
‘giant alcelaphines’ of southern Africa to the single species Megalotragus priscus
(including ‘Pelerocerus’ spp, ‘Lunatoceras mirum’, “Alcelaphus helmei’, et al.).
Upper Pleistocene fossils of M. priscus have been found at Leopard’s Hill and
Redcliff in the Zambesian Zone; at Chelmer and Kalkbank in the Transvaalian
Zone; at Equus Cave, Black Earth Cave, Gobabis, and “gi in the Kalaharian
Zone; at Florisbad, Viakkraal, K offiefontein, and Driefontein in the Basutolian
Zone; and at Hoedjies Punt, Boomplaas, and Nelson Bay Cave in the Cape
Zone. Outside the Basutolian Zone, M. priscus is generally not a common
a
rr tay...
ya.
BAAN
Sea, = 123. —_ - ae
a
270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
element in fossil faunas; within this zone, it is not only well represented at the
sites listed above but has been found as an isolated fossil or with presently |
unclear associations at a variety of other sites, including especially the alluvium
of the Modder River, which provided the holotype specimen.
Its hypsodont teeth, the dietary preferences of all its closest living relatives
(hartebeests, wildebeests, and bastard hartebeests), its former distribution, and
its clear tendency to be most common in fossil faunas heavily dominated by
grazers, indicate beyond all doubt that M. priscus was a grazer. Its latest known
occurrence is in deposits at Nelson Bay Cave radiocarbon-dated to approxi-
mately 16 000 B.P., but it is a rare element in the Nelson Bay fauna, and the
possibility is good that it persisted, like Equus capensis and Pelorovis antiquus, in
the Cape Zone somewhat later, perhaps to between 12 000 and 10 000 B.P. At
Leopard’s Hill in the Zambesian Zone, its provenience within the site is
uncertain, but it is almost certainly younger than 24 000 radiocarbon years (the
approximate age of the oldest fossiliferous deposits at the site). Elsewhere, it
cannot be shown to have survived beyond 40 000-30 000 B.P., but again, as in
the case of Equus capensis and Pelorovis antiquus, this may well reflect the rarity
of large faunal samples from the interval 40 000-30 000 to 10 000 B.P., rather
than the absence of the species.
ANTIDORCAS BONDI
Cooke and Wells (1951) initially described this hyperhypsodont antilopine
antelope as Gazella bondi. However, Vrba (1973) has demonstrated that the
frontals of this species were inflated below the horn-cores, a feature that is
characteristic of Antidorcas and not of Gazella. For this and other reasons, the
species is better placed in Antidorcas (Gentry 1978).
Upper Pleistocene fossils of A. bondi are known from Redcliff in the
Zambesian Zone; from Chelmer, the Cave of Hearths, and Border Cave in the
Transvaalian Zone; from Gobabis, Witkrans, Equus Cave, and Black Earth
Cave in the Kalaharian Zone; and from Florisbad, Vlakkraal, and Driefontein
in the Basutolian Zone. Its absence so far in the Karoo-Namaqualian Zone may
be a result of inadequate sampling, but its failure to occur in Cape faunas may
reflect true absence, since the Cape samples in which it might be expected are
relatively large.
The latest record of A. bondi is at Border Cave in a level radiocarbon-dated
to approximately 38 000 B.P. However, the date of its last appearance remains
unestablished, since large samples dating to between 38 000 and 10 000 B.P. are
unknown in those ecozones where the species was most common.
Its hyperhypsodonty, geographic distribution, and the species with which it
occurs all indicate clearly that A. bondi was primarily a grazer. This is shown
particularly well at Border Cave, where there is alternation between levels
dominated by grassland species and ones dominated by species that prefer
bushier settings. A. bondi is plainly most common in those levels where grassland
animals are most abundant.
—
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 271
ANTIDORCAS AUSTRALIS
Hendey and Hendey (1968) originally described this species as a subspecies
of the common springbok, Antidorcas marsupialis. However, Hendey (1974)
concluded it was more likely to be a separate species, since, at the mid-
Pleistocene locality of Elandsfontein, it was apparently sympatric with A. recki,
the probable ancestor of the common springbok. Upper Pleistocene fossils of
A. australis have been found only in the Cape Ecozone where it was widespread.
Its last recorded occurrence is in deposits at Nelson Bay Cave dated to between
12 000 and 10 000 B.P.
A. australis had horn-cores that were more mediolaterally compressed than
those of A. marsupialis and that did not bend sharply backwards and outwards.
It was also somewhat smaller on average than A. marsupialis, but in most other
important respects, including the morphology of the dentition, it was very
similar to A. marsupialis. A. marsupialis is not known to have occurred in the
Cape Zone in Upper Pleistocene (or recent) times, except on the peripheries, and
it seems likely that A. australis filled the niche for a small selective grazer also
capable of some browsing that A. marsupialis filled and still fills in neighbouring
ecozones. Like the frequency of A. marsupialis, that of A. australis in fossil sites
is closely linked to the frequency of ‘plains’ species, such as wildebeest, bastard
hartebeest, and zebra.
THE CAUSES OF EXTINCTION
As in other parts of the world, the causes of late Pleistocene mammalian
extinctions in southern Africa are a subject of considerable interest, particularly
given the very real possibility that early people were involved. The other major
‘cause’ which has been postulated is environmental change.
The writer believes that environmental change played a role in late Pleisto-
cene extinctions, but it can nowhere be the sole reason, since the species that
became extinct repeatedly survived the same kinds of environmental change
earlier on in the Pleistocene. This can be shown especially clearly in the Cape
Ecozone where the extinction of the giant Cape horse, giant buffalo, southern
springbok, local subspecies of the black wildebeest and southern reedbuck, and
probably also the giant alcelaphine occurred roughly 12 000—10 000 years ago,
at a time when it is clear that fynbos, bush, and forest were replacing much of the
grassland that had existed previously. The species that disappeared were all
primarily grazers, which probably did suffer a shrinkage in both numbers and
range as a result of the vegetational change. However, the same kind of vege-
tational change characterized similar climatic shifts earlier on in the Cape Zone
(that is, earlier transitions from ‘glacial’ to ‘interglacial’ conditions). During
these earlier shifts, at least some of the extinct species appear to have become
less numerous, but they all survived.
Environmental change is thus not a sufficient explanation for extinctions in
the Cape Zone, and the principal factor which differentiated the period of
extinction, 12000-10000 years ago, from earlier periods of comparable
—_
wool = “he ee
\cowe |
a Ay Be 0 |
— \"' we.
RAS _|
Os..vwsi = \w,..\ws zo
Die ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
environmental change was perhaps the presence of more proficient hunters, as
discussed in the previous section of this paper. The writer believes that it is
entirely possible that Stone Age people in the Cape, faced with a decline in the
‘plains’ game on which they had depended for generations, intensified their
pursuit of those that were left, perhaps through technological innovation
driving the numbers of some species below a critical threshold and impairing
their reproductive capacity. Extinction would follow, even if people were not
responsible for killing the very last animal.
Outside the Cape Ecozone, the hypothesis that people were responsible for
late Pleistocene extinctions is much more tenuous. It seems likely that the
extinctions occurred after Later Stone Age peoples had replaced Middle Stone
Age ones in other ecozones, but evidence that these Later Stone Age peoples
were more proficient hunters is so far lacking. Additionally, the timing of
extinctions outside the Cape Zone remains unclear, mainly because there are no
large faunal assemblages elsewhere dating from the critical period between
40 000-30 000 and 10 000 B.P. Finally, even if it is assumed that the extinctions
outside the Cape Zone took place 12 000-10 000 B.P., as they did inside it, the
nature of environmental change in this interval is not as well established as in
the Cape, and it is far from certain that it would have adversely affected the
extinct species in the way it probably did in the Cape. This is important, because
the hypothesis offered above requires an environmental stimulus for any human
role in extinction.
Clearly, further elucidation of the causes of late Pleistocene extinctions in
southern Africa will require the recovery of large late Pleistocene faunal samples
from various ecozones. These are necessary not only for more precise estimates
of the timing of extinctions and of the nature of any environmental change that
may have accompanied them, but also for determining if the extinct species
experienced long periods of decline or if they disappeared rather abruptly, as
appears to be the case in the Cape Zone. Additionally, large samples may allow
the construction of age/sex profiles to determine if the extinct species underwent
demographic changes through time that might indicate impaired reproductive
capacity or changing patterns of human predation. In sum, as in the case of
demonstrating environmental and cultural change from faunal remains,
elucidating the causes of extinction is not so much a theoretical problem as it is a
practical one of obtaining large, well-excavated, and well-described faunal
assemblages from contexts where good data on artefacts, sediments, pollen, and
so forth provide controls for comparisons designed to separate the cultural and
environmental variables responsible for assemblage composition.
CONCLUSIONS
In the overwhelming majority of cases, it is impossible to assume a one-to-
one relationship between the relative abundance of species in a fossil mammal
assemblage and their relative abundance in the live community from which they
were drawn. Almost always, it is far safer to assume that the agency of accumu-
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 273
lation has altered the original frequency relationships, and it is usually impossible
to say how much. Thus, for example, the fact that a particular archaeological
faunal assemblage consists three-quarters of grazers and one-quarter of browsers
does not mean that the grazer/browser ratio in the ancient environment was 3 : 1
or even that grazers were more numerous than browsers. It may be that the
people responsible for the bones found it easier to obtain grazers, or that grazers,
since they are often larger, provided a higher return for time and effort in the
hunt. Whatever the case, the extent to which the people may have altered or
‘piased’ the original grazer/browser ratio is probably unknowable.
Superficially then, detailed interpretation of fossil mammal assemblages
may appear impossible from the outset. However, this is only the case if the goal
is to make precise statements about the live abundance of various species or
about the subsistence behaviour of people at single instants in past time. It is not
true if the focus is on changes in live abundance or in cultural practices through
time, since, in this case, it is possible to introduce controls for the effects of
environment or culture. As an example, take two faunas of different ages from
neighbouring archaeological sites or from different levels within the same site.
If there is evidence from pollen, sediments, oxygen-isotope ratios in associated
marine shells, etc., that the faunas were accumulated under very similar environ-
mental circumstances, it seems reasonable to suppose that any differences in
species frequencies between them reflect differences in human behaviour.
Similarly, if there is sound associated evidence for differences in past
environment and no artefactual evidence for significant differences in culture,
then it is probably most reasonable to conclude that any differences in species
frequencies between faunas reflect differences in past environments. As a more
concrete example, take two faunas from successive levels in the same site
containing broadly similar artefacts, but in sedimentary contexts suggesting
important differences in palaeoenvironment. If the fauna of one level contains
relatively more grazers than the fauna of the other, it seems most reasonable to
conclude that grazers were more common on the hoof at the time the first level
formed, even though the live abundance of grazers in the ancient environment of
either level remains unknown or unknowable.
Basically then, faunal samples are far more useful for establishing changes
in environment or culture through time than for reconstructing environments or
cultural practices at particular points in time. However, it is obvious that
changes may be determined only through comparisons among samples, with
controls provided by accompanying pollen, sediments, artefacts, and so forth, as
well as by detailed characteristics of the bone assemblages themselves. From this,
it follows, first, that faunal analysis is inextricably dependent upon other fields —
conventional archaeology, palynology, sedimentology, isotope geo-chemistry,
etc.—if interpretations are to be secure. Second, it is obvious that no single
sample is ever likely to be very informative. Rather, it is necessary to have many
samples to permit as wide a range of controlled comparisons as possible. It is,
of course, also important that the samples be large, well described, and well
<a ae
a= tt wea.
AAS SE
= y |
—. Aw
—) 2.9 ee ee”) hee
wo] = OW, ws nw ROR!
"Pa
om = ees
274 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
excavated, to enhance the chances that significant patterns will emerge in the
process of comparison.
Among the six southern African ecozones considered in this paper, only the
Cape Zone has provided a sufficient number of large, well-described, and well-
excavated faunal samples, accompanied by sufficient contextual information, to
isolate patterns of mammalian frequency change that probably reflect systematic
changes in environment and culture during the Upper Pleistocene and Holocene.
The Cape data suggest (i) that Upper Pleistocene intervals of cooler climate
locally witnessed the expansion of grass at the expense of fynbos, bush, and
forest; (ii) that local Middle Stone Age peoples, living prior to 40000-
30 000 B.P., were less proficient hunter—gatherers than their Later Stone Age
successors; and (iii) that a combination of environmental change and the
greater hunting proficiency of Later Stone Age peoples was responsible for the
extinction of several large mammal species in the Cape Zone 12 000-10 000 B.P.
The last two hypotheses are clearly of broad anthropological or evolutionary
interest and certainly deserve investigation in other ecozones, as well as further
testing in the Cape Zone. Ultimate demonstration of the likelihood that they are
correct is not basically a theoretical problem, but a practical one of obtaining
numerous large faunal samples from carefully documented contexts.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
A draft of this paper was presented at the Southern African Association of
Archaeologists Workshop in Stellenbosch in June 1979. The author thanks
K. W. Butzer, J. Deacon, Q. B. Hendey, and T. P. Volman for helpful comments
on the draft. The National Science Foundation (Washington) and the Lichtstern
Fund of the University of Chicago provided financial support for the author’s
own research reported here. The research was conducted in facilities kindly
provided by the Department of Cenozoic Palaeontology at the South African
Museum.
REFERENCES
ANSELL, W. F. H. 1971la. Order Artiodactyla. In: MEESTER, J. & SETzeER, H. W. eds. The
mammals of Africa: an identification manual. Part 15. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian
Institution Press.
ANSELL, W. F. H. 19716. Order Perissodactyla. In: MEESTER, J. & SETZER, H. W. eds. The
mammals of Africa: an identification manual. Part 16. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian
Institution Press.
AvERY, D. M. 1977. Past and present distribution of some rodent and insectivore species in the
southern Cape Province, South Africa: new information. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 74: 201-209.
BEAUMONT, P. B. & BosHiEr, A. K. 1974. Report on test excavations in a prehistoric pigment
mine near Postmasburg, northern Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 29: 41-59.
BEAUMONT, P. B., DE VILLIERS, H. & VOGEL, J. C. 1978. Modern man in sub-Saharan Africa
prior to 49,000 years B.P.: a review and evaluation with particular reference to Border
Cave. S. Afr. J. Sci. 74: 409-419.
Bonp, G. & Summers, R. 1951. The Quaternary succession and archaeology at Chelmer, near
Bulawayo, Southern Rhodesia. S. Afr. J. Sci. 47: 200-204.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 275
BRAIN, C. K. 1969a. New evidence for climatic change during Middle and Later Stone Age
times in Rhodesia. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 127-143.
Brain, C. K. 19695. Faunal remains from the Bushman Rock Shelter, eastern Transvaal.
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 52-55.
Brain, C. K. 1974a. The use of microfaunal remains as habitat indicators in the Namib.
S. Afr. archaeol. Soc. Goodwin Ser. 2: 55-60.
Brain, C. K. 19746. Animal remains from the Iron Age at Zimbabwe. S. Afr. J. Sci. 70:
303-309.
Brain, C. K. & BRAIN, V. 1977. Microfaunal remains from Mirabib: some evidence of
palaeoecological changes in the Namib. Madoqua 10: 285-293.
Brain, C. K. & Cook, C. K. 1967. A preliminary account of the Redcliff Stone Age Cave site
in Rhodesia. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 21: 171-182.
Brooks, A. S. & YELLEN, J. E. 1979. Archaeological excavations at ~gi: a preliminary report
on the first two field seasons. Botswana Notes Rec. 9: 21-30.
Brown, L. 1965. Africa: a natural history. New York: Random House.
Butzer, K. W. 1971a. Environment and archaeology. Chicago: Aldine-Atherton.
Butzer, 19715. Fine alluvial fills of the Orange and Vaal River Basins of South Africa. Proc.
Ass. Am. Geogr. 3: 41-48.
BurTzer, K. W. 1973. Geology of Nelson Bay Cave, Robberg, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 28: 97-110.
Burzer, K. W. 1978a. Sediment stratigraphy of the Middle Stone Age sequence at Klasies
River Mouth. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 141-151.
Butzer, K. W. 19785. Climate patterns in an unglaciated continent. Geogr! Mag. Lond. 51:
201-208.
Butzer, K. W., BEAUMONT, P. B. & VOGEL, J. C. 1978. Lithostratigraphy of Border Cave,
KwaZulu, South Africa: a Middle Stone Age sequence beginning c. 195 000 B.P. J. archaeol.
Sci. 5: 317-341.
Butzer, K. W. & HELGREN, D. M. 1972. Late Cenozoic evolution of the Cape coast between
Knysna and Cape St Francis, South Africa. Quaternary Res. N.Y. 2: 143-169.
BuTzeEr, K. W., STUCKENRATH, R., BRUZEWICZ, A. J. & HELGREN, D. M. 1978. Late Cenozoic
paleoclimates of the Gaap Escarpment, Kalahari Margin, South Africa. Quaternary
Res. N.Y. 10: 310-339.
CaRTER, P. L. 1969. Moshebi’s Shelter. Lesotho Notes Rec. 8: 13-23.
CarTER, P. L. 1977. The prehistory of eastern Lesotho. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation,
University of Cambridge.
CARTER, P. L. & VOGEL, J. C. 1974. The dating of industrial assemblages from stratified sites in
eastern Lesotho. Man 9: 557-570.
CHURCHER, C. S. 1970. The fossil Equidae from the Krugersdorp Caves. Ann. Transy. Mus. 26:
145-168.
CHURCHER, C. S. & RICHARDSON, M. L. 1978. Equidae. In: MAGLIio, V. J. & Cooke, H. B. S.
eds. Evolution of African mammals: 379-422. Cambridge (Massachusetts): Harvard
University Press.
CxiarK, J. D. 1942. Further excavations (1939) at the Mumbwa Caves, Northern Rhodesia.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 29: 133-201.
CiarK, J. D. 1950. The Stone Age cultures of Northern Rhodesia. Claremont (Cape): South
African Archaeological Society.
CLARK, J. D. 1963. Prehistoric cultures of north-east Angola and their significance for tropical
Africa. Museu do Dundo Publ. Culturais 62 (2 vols).
CiarK, J. D. 1969. Kalambo Falls prehistoric site 1. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
CiarK, J. D. 1971. Human behavioral differences in southern Africa during the later Pleisto-
cene. Amer. Anthrop. 73: 1211-1236.
CiarK, J. D. 1973. Archaeological investigation of a painted rock shelter at Mwana wa
Chencherere, north of Dedza, Central Malawi. J. Soc. Malawi 26: 28-46.
CLARK, J. D., OAKLEY, K. P., WELLS, L. H. & MCCLELLAND, J. A. C. 1950. New studies on
Rhodesian Man. J/ R. anthrop. Inst. 77: 7-32.
CoeTzEE, J. A. 1967. Pollen analytical studies in east and southern Africa. Palaeoecol. Afr. 3:
1-146.
Coetzee, J. A. 1978a. Climatic and biological changes in south-western Africa during the late
Cainozoic. Palaeoecol. Afr. 10: 13-30.
— SS
— oe ee ee ee
aw Cl =< “Gian Wry
— \Ww, .Wws/ mn \cw..
wa FS Mee: Be SSNS
=
oO
C,,..ws/ =
Pe 2 PY
276 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Coetzee, J. A. 19785. Late Cainozoic palaeoenvironments of southern Africa. In: ZINDEREN
BAKKER, E. M. VAN ed. Antarctic glacial history and world palaeoenvironments: 115-127.
Rotterdam: A. A. Balkema.
Cooke, C. K. 1963. Report on excavations at Pomongwe and Tshangula Caves, Matopo Hills,
Southern Rhodesia. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 17: 73-151.
Cooke, C. K. 1978. The Redcliff Stone Age site, Rhodesia. Occ. Pap. natn. Mus. Rhod. (A) 4:
45-73.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1948. The Fowler collection of fossils from Koffiefontein, O.F.S. S. Afr. Sci. 2:
96-98.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1950. Quaternary fossils from Northern Rhodesia. In: CLARK, J. D. The Stone
Age Cultures of Northern Rhodesia: 137-139. Claremont (Cape): The South African
Archaeological Society.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1955. Some fossil mammals in the South African Museum collections.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 42: 161-168.
Cooke, H. B.S. 1958. Fossil animal remains from Inyanga. Jn: Summers, R. Inyanga: 152-158.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1962. Notes on the faunal material from the Cave of Hearths and Kalkbank.
In: Mason, R. J. Prehistory of the Transvaal: 447-453. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand
University Press.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1963. Pleistocene mammalian faunas of Africa, with particular reference to
southern Africa. In: Howe, F. C. & BOURLIERE, F. eds. African ecology and human
evolution: 65-116. Chicago: Aldine.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1978. Suid evolution and correlation of African hominid localities: an alter-
native taxonomy. Science 201: 460-463.
Cooke, H. B. S. n.d. The faunal remains from Witkrans 2. Unpublished manuscript, Dalhousie
University, Nova Scotia.
Cooke, H. B. S. & WELLS, L. H. 1951. Fossil remains from Chelmer, near Bulawayo, Southern
Rhodesia. S. Afr. J. Sci. 47: 205-209.
CRADER, D. n.d. Preliminary report on the faunal remains from Chencherere Rock Shelter II,
Malawi. Unpublished manuscript, University of California, Berkeley.
Davies, O. 1975. Excavations at Shongweni South Cave: the oldest evidence to date for
cultigens in southern Africa. Ann. Natal Mus. 22: 627-662.
Deacon, H. J. 1967. Two radiocarbon dates from Scott’s Cave, Gamtoos Valley. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 22; 51-52.
DEACON, H. J. 1976. Where hunters gathered: a study of Holocene Stone Age people in the
eastern Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Soc. Monogr. Ser. 1: 1-231.
DEACON, H. J. 1979. Excavations at Boomplaas Cave—a sequence through the Upper Pleisto-
cene and Holocene in South Africa. World Archaeol. 10: 241-257.
DEACON, H. J. & BRooKER, M. 1976. The Holocene and Upper Pleistocene sequence in the
southern Cape. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 7: 203-214.
DEACON, H. J. & DEACON, J. 1963. Scott’s Cave: a Late Stone Age site in the Gamtoos Valley.
Ann. Cape Prov. Mus. 3: 96-121.
DEACON, H. J., DEACON, J. & BROOKER, M. 1976. Four painted stones from Boomplaas Cave,
Oudtshoorn District. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 31: 141-145.
DEACON, H. J., DEACON, J., BROOKER, M. & WILSON, M. L. 1978. The evidence for herding at
Boomplaas Cave in the southern Cape, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 39-65.
DEACON, J. 1965. Cultural material from the Gamtoos Valley shelters (Andrieskraal I).
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 20: 193-200.
DEACON, J. 1972. Wilton: an assessment after fifty years. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 27: 10-48.
DEACON, J. 1978. Changing patterns in the late Pleistocene/early Holocene prehistory of
southern Africa as seen from the Nelson Bay Cave stone artifact sequence. Quaternary
Res. N.Y. 10: 84-111.
DEACON, J. 1979. Guide to archaeological sites in the southern Cape. Stellenbosch: Department
of Archaeology, University of Stellenbosch.
DERRICOURT, R. M. 1977. Prehistoric man in the Ciskei and Transkei. Cape Town: Struik.
Dreyer, T. F. 1938. The archaeology of the Florisbad deposits. Argeol. Navors. nas. Mus.
Bloemfontein 1: 21-23. ,
ELLERMAN, J. R., Morrison-ScorT, T. C. S. & HAYMAN, R. W. 1953. Southern African
mammals 1758 to 1951: a reclassification. London: British Museum (Nat. Hist.).
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS PallTf
ExorrF, J. F. 1969. Bushman Rock Shelter, Eastern Transvaal: excavations, 1967-8. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 24: 60.
FAGAN, B. M. 1960. The Glentyre shelter and Oakhurst re-examined. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 59:
80-94.
FAGAN, B. M. 1967. Iron Age cultures in Zambia 1. Kalomo and Kangila. Robins Series No 5.
London: Chatto & Windus.
FAGAN, B. M., PHILLIPSON, D. W. & DANILES, S. G. H. 1969. Iron Age cultures in Zambia
2. Dambwa, Ingombe Ilede, and the Tonga. Robins Series No. 6. London: Chatto &
Windus.
FAGAN, B. M. & NortEN, F. VAN. 1971. The hunter—gatherers of Gwisho. Annales du Musée de
l’ Afrique Centrale (Tervuren) 8: 1-229.
GaBEL, C. 1965. Stone Age hunters of the Kafue: the Gwisho A site. Boston: Boston University
Press.
GenTrY, A. W. 1978. Bovidae. In: Macuio, V. J & Cooke, H B S. eds. Evolution of African
mammals: 540-572. Cambridge (Massachusetts): Harvard University Press.
Gess, W. H. P. 1969. Excavation of a Pleistocene bone deposit at Aloes near Port Elizabeth.
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 31-32.
Goopwin, A. J. H., DRENNAN, M. R. & SCHOFIELD, J. F. 1938. Archaeology of the Oakhurst
Shelter. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 25: 229-234.
Grey, D. R. C. & Cooke, H. J. 1977. Some problems in the Quaternary evolution of the
landforms of northern Botswana. Catena 4: 123-133.
Heine, K. 1978. Jungquartare Pluviale und Interpluviale in der Kalahari (Stidliches Afrika).
Palaeoecol. Afr. 10: 31-39.
HEtGrREN, D. M. 1978. Environmental history in the northwest Kalahari: preliminary report.
Palaeoecol. Afr. 10: 65-66.
HeEnpDeY, Q. B. 1974. The Late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. & HENDEY, H. 1968. New Quaternary fossil sites near Swartklip, Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 52: 43-73.
HENDEY, Q. B. & SINGER, R. 1965. The faunal assemblages from the Gamtoos Valley shelters.
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 20: 206-213.
Hewirt, J. 1931. Discoveries in a Bushman cave at Tafelberg Hall. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 19:
185-196.
HiLimANn, C. 1974. Ecology and behaviour of the wild eland. Afr. Wildlife Leadership Foundation
News 9(3): 6-9.
HorrMaNn, A. C. 1955. Important contributions of the Orange Free State to our knowledge of
primitive man. S. Afr. J. Sci. 51: 163-168.
Hopwoop, A. T. 1928. Mammalia. In: PycrAFT, W. P. Rhodesian Man and associated remains:
70-73. London: British Museum (Nat. Hist.).
HurFEMAN, T. N. 1974. The Leopard’s Kopje Tradition. Mus. Mem. natn. Mus. Monuments
Rhod. 6.
HuFFMAN, T. N. 1975. Cattle from Mabveni. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 30: 23-24.
Humpureys, A. J. B. 1974. A preliminary report on test excavations at Dikbosch Shelter 1,
Herbert District, northern Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 29: 115-119.
Humpureys, A. J. B. 1975. Burchell’s Shelter: the history and archaeology of a northern Cape
rock shelter. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 30: 3-18.
Humpnreys, A. J. B. 1978. The re-excavation of Powerhouse Cave and an assessment of
Dr Frank Peabody’s work on Holocene deposits in the Taung area. Ann. Cape Prov. Mus.
(Nat. Hist.) 11: 217-244.
INSKEEP, R. R. 1965. University of Cape Town excavations at Plettenberg Bay. Scient. S. Afr.
2: 575-577.
INSKEEP, R. R. 1972. Nelson’s Bay Cave, Robberg Peninsula, Plettenberg Bay. Palaeoecol. Afr.
6: 247-249.
INSKEEP, R. R. & HENDEY, Q. B. 1966. An interesting association of bones from the Elands-
fontein fossil site. In: Actes du V- Congrés Panafricain de Préhistoire et de l’Etude du
Quaternaire: 109-124. Tenerife: Museo Arqueologico.
JACOBSON, L. 1978a. Report on archaeological and palaeoecological studies in the Gobabis
District, South West Africa. Palaeoecol. Afr. 10: 93-94.
7 oe |
ee ONO Ne,
RiasSs_.
oo... ws] = \CWw, . wt an
oon ao ws on™
Swit
Sets
tu
30 NaN
278 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Jacosson, L. 19786. A study of functional variability in the Later Stone Age of western
Damaraland, Namibia. Unpublished B.A. Honours Thesis, University of Cape Town.
JouUBERT, E. & Mostert, P. K. N. 1975. Distribution patterns and status of some mammals in
South West Africa. Madoqua 9: 5-44.
KetrT_itz, W. K. 1962. The distribution of some of the larger game mammals in the Transvaal
(excluding the Kruger National Park). Ann. Cape Prov. Mus. 2: 118-137.
Kein, R. G. 1972a. A preliminary report on the June through September 1970 excavations at
Nelson Bay Cave, Cape Province, South Africa. Palaeoecol. Afr. 6: 177-208.
Kein, R. G. 19726. The late Quaternary mammalian fauna of Nelson Bay Cave (Cape
Province, South Africa): its implications for megafaunal extinctions and environmental
and cultural change. Quaternary Res. N.Y. 2: 135-142.
KLEIN, R. G. 1973. Ice-Age hunters of the Ukraine. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
KEIN, R. G. .1974a. Environment and subsistence of prehistoric man in the southern Cape
Province, South Africa. World Archaeol. 5: 249-289.
KLEIN, R. G. 19746. On the taxonomic status, distribution and ecology of the blue antelope,
Hippotragus leucophaeus (Pallas, 1766). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 65: 99-143.
KEIN, R. G. 1975a. Middle Stone Age man—animal relationships in southern Africa: evidence
from Die Kelders and Klasies River mouth. Science 190: 265-267.
KLEIN, R. G. 19755. The fossil history of Raphicerus H. Smith, 1827 (Bovidae, Mammalia) in
the Cape Biotic Zone. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 71: 169-191.
KEIN, R. G. 1975c. Paleoanthropological implications of the non-archaeological bone
assemblage from Swartklip 1, south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Quaternary
Res. N.Y. 5: 275-288.
KLEIN, R. G. 1976a. The mammalian fauna of the Klasies River mouth sites, southern Cape
Province, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 31: 75-98.
KLEIN, R. G. 19765. A preliminary report on the ‘Middle Stone Age’ open-air site of Duine-
fontein 2 (Melkbosstrand, south-western Cape Province, South Africa). S. Afr. archaeol.
Buil. 31: 12-20.
Kien, R. G. 1977. The mammalian fauna from the Middle and Later Stone Age (later
Pleistocene) levels of Border Cave, Natal Province, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull.
32: 14-27.
KLEIN, R. G. 1978a. Preliminary analysis of the mammalian fauna from the Redcliff Stone Age
cave site, Rhodesia. Occ. Pap. natn. Mus. Rhod. (A) 4: 74-80.
KLEIN, R. G. 1978b. Vertebrate fauna from the Buffelskloof Rock Shelter. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 33: 35-38.
KLEIN, R. G. 1978c. A preliminary report on the larger mammals from the Boomplaas Stone
Age cave site, Cango Valley, Oudtshoorn District, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull.
33: 66-75.
Kein, R. G. 1978d. Stone Age predation on large African bovids. J. archaeol. Sci. 5: 195-217.
KLEIN, R. G. 1979a. Paleoenvironmental and cultural implications of late Holocene archaeo-
logical faunas from the Orange Free State and north-central Cape Province, South Africa.
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 34: 34-49.
K1LEIN, R. G. 1979b. Stone Age exploitation of animals in southern Africa. Am. Scient. 67:
151-160.
KieIn, R. G. In press. Archaeological implications of the mammalian fauna from the Later
Stone Age cave site of Byneskranskop 1, southern Cape Province, South Africa. In:
TELEKI, G. & HARDING, R. S. O. eds. Hominization via Predation. New York: Columbia
University Press.
Kien, R. G. & Scott, K. 1974. The fauna of Scott’s Cave, Gamtoos Valley, south-eastern
Cape Province. S. Afr. J. Sci. 70: 186-187.
LEAKEY, L. S. B. 1959. A preliminary re-assessment of the fossil fauna from Broken Hill,
Northern Rhodesia. J/. R. anthrop. Inst. 89: 201-232.
Louw, A. W. 1969. Bushman Rock Shelter, Ohrigstad, eastern Transvaal: a preliminary
investigation. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 39-51.
Louw, J. 1960. Prehistory of the Matjes River rock shelter. Mem. natn. Mus. Bloemfontein
1: 1-143.
Maacs, T. M. O’C. 1975. Faunal remains and hunting patterns from the Iron Age of the
southern highveld. Ann. Natal Mus. 22: 449-459.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 279
Macacs, T. M. O’C. & MicHAEL, M. A. 1976. Ntshekane: an early Iron Age site in the Tugela
Basin, Natal. Ann. Natal Mus. 22: 705-740.
MAtan, B. D. 1952. The final phase-of the Middle Stone Age in South Africa. In: LEAKEY,
L. S. B. ed. Proceedings of the First Pan-African Congress on Prehistory (Nairobi, 1947):
188-194. New York: Philosophical Library.
MaALAn, B. D. & Cooke, H. B. S. 1941. A preliminary account of the Wonderwerk Cave,
Kuruman District. S. Afr. J. Sci. 37: 300-312.
MaAtAN, B. D. & WELLS, L. H. 1943. A further report on the Wonderwerk Cave, Kuruman.
S. Afr. J. Sci. 40: 258-270.
Martin, A. R. H. 1968. Pollen analysis of Groenylei Lake sediments, Knysna. Rev. Palaeobotan.
Palynol. 7: 107-144.
Mason, R. J. 1962. Prehistory of the Transvaal. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University
Press.
Mason, R. J. 1967. Prehistory as a science of change—new research in the South African
interior. Occ. Pap. archaeol. Res. Unit Univ. Witwatersrand 1: 1-19.
Mason, R. H. 1969. The Oppermansdrif Dam archaeological project—Vaal Basin. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 24: 182-192.
Mason, R. J., DART, R. A. & KITCHING, J. W. 1958. Bone tools at the Kalkbank Middle Stone
Age site and the Makapansgat australopithecine locality, central Transvaal. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 13: 85-116.
MeEminG, A. J. D. 1956. The macrolithic culture of Florisbad. Navors. nas. Mus. Bloemfontein
1: 205-237.
MILER, S. F. 1969. The Nachikufan Industries of the Later Stone Age in Zambia. Unpublished
Ph.D. Dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.
Miter, S. F. 1971. The age of the Nachikufan industries in Zambia. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull.
26: 143-146.
Nortuey, L. D. 1979. An analysis of non-archaeological faunal assemblages from southern
Africa, with particular reference to the discrimination of hominid and non-hominid agents
of bone accumulation. Unpublished M.A. Thesis, University of Chicago.
NoTEN, F. L. vAN. 1974. Excavations at the Gordon’s Bay shell midden, south-western Cape.
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 29: 122-141.
OPPERMAN, H. 1978. Excavations in the Buffelskloof Rock Shelter, near Calitzdorp, southern
Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 18-24.
PARKINGTON, J. E. 1972. Seasonal mobility in the Late Stone Age. Afr. Stud. 31: 223-243.
PARKINGTON, J. E. 1976. Coastal settlement between the mouths of the Berg and Olifants
Rivers, Cape Province. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 31: 127-140.
PARKINGTON, J. E. 1978. Follow the San. Unpublished Ph.D. Dissertation, University of
Cambridge.
PARKINGTON, J. E. n.d. The effects of environmental change on the scheduling of visits to the
Elands Bay Cave, Cape Province, S.A. Unpublished manuscript, University of Cape Town.
PARKINGTON, J. E. & POGGENPOEL, C. 1971. Excavations at De Hangen, 1968. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 26: 3-36.
PEABODY, F. E. 1954. Travertines and cave deposits of the Kaap Escarpment of South Africa
and the type locality of Australopithecus africanus. Bull. geol. Soc. Am. 65: 671-706.
PHILLIPSON, D. W. 1976. The prehistory of eastern Zambia. Mem. Br. Inst. east. Afr. 6: 1-229.
PHILLIPSON, D. W. 1977. The later prehistory of eastern and southern Africa. New York:
Holmes and Meier.
Piua, I. 1979. Striped Giraffe Shelter faunal report. Cimbebasia (B) 3: 71-72.
RIGHTMIRE, G. P. 1979. Implications of Border Cave skeletal remains for later Pleistocene
human evolution. Curr. Anthrop. 20: 23-35.
ROBERTSHAW, P. T. 1977. Excavations at Paternoster, south-western Cape. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 32: 63-73.
ROBERTSHAW, P. T. 1978. Archaeological investigations at Langebaan Lagoon, Cape Province.
Palaeoecol. Afr. 10: 139-148.
SAMPSON, C. G. 1967a. Excavations at Zaayfontein Shelter, Norvalspont, northern Cape.
Navors. nas. Mus. Bloemfontein 2: 41-124.
Sampson, C. G. 1967b. Excavations at Glen Elliot Shelter, Colesberg District, northern Cape.
Navors. nas. Mus. Bloemfontein 2: 125-210.
Va, “LOY
eI] as 4
a ~ LS eo) \ Neer,
Lea \ oh
Qa
\OW, ws ao
S..ws/ —
uae
nth bo
A ATT os
Sasi
Ww
30 NAN
280 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Sampson, C. G. 1970. The Smithfield industrial complex: further field notes. Mem. natn. Mus.
Bloemfontein 5: 1-172.
Sampson, C. G. 1974. The Stone Age archaeology of southern Africa. New York: Academic
Press.
Sampson, C. G. & Sampson, M. E. 1967. Riversmead Shelter: excavation and analysis.
Mem. natn. Mus. Bloemfontein 3: 1-111.
SANDELOWSKY, B. H. 1974. Archaeological investigations at Mirabib Hill Rock Shelter.
S. Afr. archaeol. Soc. Goodwin Ser. 2: 65-72.
SANDELOWSKY, B. H. 1977. Mirabib—an archaeological study in the Namib. Madogua 10:
221-283.
SANDELOWSKY, B. H. & Rosinson, K. R. 1968. Fingira preliminary report. Malawi Govt.
Dept. Antiquities Publ. 3: 1-7.
SCHALKE, H, J. W. G. 1973. The Upper Quaternary of the Cape Flats area (Cape Province,
South Africa). Scr. geol. 15: 1-57.
ScurirE, C. 1962. Oakhurst: a re-examination and vindication: S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 67:
181-195.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1970. A preliminary report of excavations of a cave at Die Kelders. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 25: 136-138.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1974. Archaeological evidence for sheep at the Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull.
29: 75-82.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1975. The ecology of post-Pleistocene peoples on the Gansbaai coast,
south-western Cape. Unpublished M.A. Thesis, University of Stellenbosch.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1979. Excavations at Die Kelders, Cape Province, South Africa. The
Holocene deposits. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78: 101-233.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. & Scott, K. 1973. Early occurrence of domestic sheep in sub-Saharan
Africa. Nature, Lond. 241: 547-548.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. & WILSON, M. L. 1978. A preliminary report on excavations at Byneskrans-
kop, Bredasdorp District, Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 35: 134-140.
Scort, L. & VoGEL, J. C. 1978. Pollen analysis from the thermal spring deposit at Wonderkrater
(Transvaal, South Africa). Palaeoecol. Afr. 10: 155-162.
SHACKLETON, N. J. & OppyKE, N. D. 1973. Oxygen-isotope and palaeomagnetic stratigraphy
of Equatorial Pacific Core V28—238: oxygen isotope temperatures and ice volumes on a
10° and 10° year scale. Quaternary Res. N.Y. 3: 39-55.
SHACKLETON, N. J. & OppykeE, N. D. 1976. Oxygen-isotope and palaeomagnetic stratigraphy
of Pacific core V28—239. Late Pliocene to latest Pleistocene. Mem. geol. Soc. Am. 145:
449-464.
SMITHERS, R. H. N. 1966. The mammals of Rhodesia, Zambia, and Malawi. London: Collins.
SmiTHERS, R. H. N. 1971. The mammals of Botswana. Mus. Mem. natn. Mus. Monuments
Rhod. 4: 1-340.
SMITHERS, R. H. N. & LasBAo TELLO, J. L. P. 1976. Checklist and atlas of the mammals of
Mozambique. Mus. Mem. natn. Mus. Monuments Rhod. 8: 1-184.
STREET, F. A. & Grove, A. T. 1976. Environmental and climatic implications of late Quaternary
lake level fluctuations in Africa. Nature Lond. 261: 385-389.
Summers, R. 1958. Inyanga. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Szaso, B. J. & Butzer, K. W. 1979. Uranium-series dating of lacustrine limestones from pan
deposits with final Acheulean assemblage at Rooidam, Kimberley District, South Africa.
Quaternary Res. N.Y. 11: 257-260.
TALMA, A. S., VOGEL, J. C. & PARTRIDGE, T. C. 1974. Isotopic contents of some Transvaal
speleothems and their palaeoclimatic significance. S. Afr. J. Sci. 70: 135-140.
TANKARD, A. J. 1976. The stratigraphy of a coastal cave and its palaeoclimatic significance.
Palaeoecol. Afr. 9: 151-159. d
TANKARD, A. J. & SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1974. The geology of Die Kelders Cave and environs:
a palaeoenvironmental study. S. Afr. J. Sci. 70: 365-369.
TANKARD, A. J. & SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1976. Textural analysis of cave sediments: Die Kelders,
Cape Province. In: Davipson, D. A. & SHACKLEY, M. L. eds. Geoarchaeology: 289-316.
London: Duckworth.
THACKERAY, F. 1975. An analysis of faunal remains from late Pleistocene and Holocene
archaeological sites in southern South West Africa. Unpublished B.Sc. Thesis, University
of Cape Town.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 281
THACKERAY, F. 1979. An anlysis of faunal remains from archaeological sites in southern South
West Africa (Namibia). S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 34: 18-33.
VoGEL, J. C. & BEAUMONT, P. B. 1972. Revised radiocarbon chronology for the Stone Age in
South Africa. Nature Lond. 237: 50-51.
VOGEL, J. C. & Marais, M. 1971. Pretoria radiocarbon dates I. Radiocarbon 13: 378-394.
VoIGT (SPEED), E. A. 1970. Specialist’s report on the Nkope faunal remains. Malawi Govt.
Dept. Antiquities Publ. 8: 104-115.
VoicT, E. A. 1973. Faunal remains from the Iron Age sites of Matope Court, Namichumba,
and Chikumba, southern Malawi. Malawi Govt. Dept. Antiquities Publ. 13: 135-167.
VoicT, E. A. 1977. Faunal remains from pottery filled pit, Banda Hill, Mulanje North. Malawi
Govt. Dept. Antiquities Publ. 17: 32-33.
VoicT, E. A. 1978. The faunal remains from Greefswald as a reflection of Iron Age economic
and cultural activities. Unpublished M.A. Thesis, University of Pretoria.
Vos, A. DE 1975. Africa, the devastated continent ? The Hague: Junk.
VrBA, E. S. 1973. Two species of Antidorcas Sundevall at Swartkrans (Mammalia, Bovidae).
Ann. Transv. Mus. 28: 287-352.
Wap _ey, L. 1976. Radiocarbon dates from Big Elephant Shelter, Erongo Mountains, South
West Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 31: 146.
WADLEY, L. 1979. Big Elephant Shelter and its role in the Holocene prehistory of central South
West Africa. Cimbebasia (B) 3: 1-76.
WELBOURNE, R. G. 1971. Prehistoric environment, animals and man in the Vaal—Limpopo
Basins. Unpublished M.A. Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand.
WELBOURNE, R. G. 1973. Identification of animal remains from the Broederstroom 24/73 Early
Iron Age site. S. Afr. J. Sci. 69: 325.
WELBOURNE, R. G. 1975. Tautswe Iron Age site: its yield of bones. Botswana Notes Rec. 7:
1-16.
WELLS, L. H. 1960. Mammalian remains from Late Stone Age sites in the George—Knysna area.
S. Afr. J. Sci. 56: 306.
WELLS, L. H. 1970a. The fauna of the Aloes bone deposit: a preliminary note. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 25: 22-23.
WELLS, L. H. 19706. A late Pleistocene faunal assemblage from Driefontein, Cradock district,
C.P. S. Afr. J. Sci. 66: 59-61.
WELLS, L. H., Cooke, H. B. S. & MALAN, B. D. 1942. The associated fauna and culture of the
Vlakkraal thermal springs, O.F.S. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 29: 203-233.
WENDT, W. E. 1972. Preliminary report on an archaeological research programme in South
West Africa. Cimbebasia (B) 2: 1-61.
WENDT, W. E. 1976. ‘Art mobilier’ from the Apollo 11 Cave, South West Africa: Africa’s
oldest dated works of art. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 31: 5-11.
Wuite, T. D. & Harris, J. M. 1977. Suid evolution and correlation of African hominid
localities. Science 198: 13-21.
Wyner, J. J. & SINGER, R. 1972. Middle Stone Age settlements on the Tzitzikama coast,
eastern Cape Province, South Africa. In: Ucko, P. J., TRINGHAM, R. & DIMBLEBY, G. W.
eds. Man, Settlement and Urbanism: 207-210. London: Duckworth.
YELLEN, J. E. 1971. Archaeological excavations in Western Ngamiland. Botswana Notes Rec.
3: 276.
ZEALLEY, A. E. V. 1916. A breccia of mammalian bones at Bulawayo Waterworks Reserve.
Proc. Trans. Rhod. scient. Ass. 15: 5-16.
ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M. VAN. 1957. A pollen analytical investigation of the Florisbad deposits.
In: CxarK, J. D. ed. Proceedings of the Third Pan-African Congress of Prehistory
(Livingstone, 1955): 56-57. London: Chatto & Windus.
————
SS J ee ea Po
—- > en _
eel ae 444... “He
\ Wor,
> {7 oe
— \OW, |
Css,
\oW, w2/ =a
wy, ws] =
282 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
APPENDIX
VERNACULAR AND SCIENTIFIC NAMES OF THE EXTANT MAMMALIAN SPECIES
MENTIONED IN THE TEXT
VERNACULAR NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME
hedgehog Erinaceus frontalis
Cape hare Lepus capensis
scrub hare Lepus saxatilis
red rock hare Pronolagus crassicaudatus
sptinghare Pedetes capensis
cane rat Thryonomys swinderianus
porcupine Hystrix africae-australis
Cape mole-rat Bathyergus suillus
chacma baboon Papio ursinus
yellow baboon Papio cynocephalus
vervet monkey Cercopithecus aethiops
side-striped jackal Canis adustus
black-backed jackal Canis mesomelas
Cape hunting dog Lycaon pictus
ale Sisece'S
-™
A awl iite™
aN News
spotted hyena
brown hyena
lion
leopard
cheetah
Cape fur seal
gazelle seal
elephant seal
-crab-eater seal
rock hyrax
tree hyrax
elephant
Grevy’s zebra
Burchell’s zebra
quagga
mountain zebra
black rhinoceros
white rhinoceros
hippopotamus
warthog
bushpig
giraffe
okapi
eland
Crocuta crocuta
Hyaena brunnea
Panthera leo
Panthera pardus
Acinonyx jubatus
Arctocephalus pusillus
Arctocephalus gazella
Mirounga leonina
Lobodon carcinophagus
Procavia capensis
Dendrohyrax arboreus
Loxodonta africana
Equus grevyi
Equus burchelli
Equus quagga
Equus zebra
Diceros bicornis
Ceratotherium simum
Hippopotamus amphibius
Phacochoerus aethiopicus
Potamochoerus porcus
Giraffa camelopardalis
Okapia johnstoni
Taurotragus oryx
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS 283
VERNACULAR NAME
bongo
greater kudu
nyala
sitatunga
bushbuck
gemsbok
roan antelope
sable antelope
waterbuck
puku
lechwe
southern reedbuck
mountain reedbuck
Cape (= red) hartebeest
Lichtenstein’s hartebeest
tsessebe
bontebok and blesbok
bastard hartebeest
blue wildebeest
black wildebeest
impala
Grant’s gazelle
Thomson’s gazelle
springbok
blue duiker
common (= grey) duiker
oribi
klipspringer
steenbok
Sharpe’s grysbok
Cape grysbok
vaalribbok
domestic sheep
domestic goat
Cape buffalo
domestic cattle
SCIENTIFIC NAME
Boocercus euryceros
Tragelaphus strepsiceros
Tragelaphus angasi
Tragelaphus spekei
Tragelaphus scriptus
Oryx gazella
Hippotragus equinus
Hippotragus niger
Kobus ellipsiprymnus
Kobus vardoni
Kobus leche
Redunca arundinum
Redunca fulvorufula
Alcelaphus buselaphus
Alcelaphus lichtensteini
Damaliscus lunatus
Damaliscus dorcas
Damailiscus spp.
Connochaetes taurinus
Connochaetes gnou
Aepyceros melampus
Gazella granti
Gazella thomsoni
Antidorcas marsupialis
Cephalophus monticola
Sylvicapra grimmia
Ourebia ourebi
Oreotragus oreotragus
Raphicerus campestris
Raphicerus sharpei
Raphicerus melanotis
Pelea capreolus
Ovis aries
Capra hircus
Syncerus caffer
Bos taurus
See
a [eae es A
a > <7 ee en ee
cS Om, .
Qa,
\OW, .ws/ ao
w,...ws/ =
eaecnnnie
et pen
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. noy., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text __
e.g. ‘.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman’ numerals should be conyerted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ ees
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. ;
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
~~ ARAA Se coo
lan?) ae _—— 7 2
Sh Ty
‘> wer.
ewe] = %,
w,...\.w2/ =m \ te.
\o
Ww. .wes > WSOC
%,.,..ws/ =—
etltind
RICHARD G. KLEIN
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL
IMPLICATIONS OF LARGE MAMMALS FROM
UPPER PLEISTOCENE AND HOLOCENE SITES
IN SOUTHERN AFRICA
SF on ed _. 5) lees SOA SFR AON Ish Al CAE? Lv. tiles “AT "2 f2z—S “AU et - SAS = FR aN a Ee
- z —- ove ~ ~- a“
= re an ape
— ~S”
GQ m Soy ~ = SUS faa
)
FHSON,
é
°
ral
ILNL!
NS
wo
s\ az
js] >
= »,
we
et.
=
tH \9
:)
ANotiTy
ie
. #£O
PS i
= \s'
wy
=
=
rs
nti
ANSTITL
<iSUN,
ETP,”
z
4 eee
a
3
4
% |
SS
= ;
w
s c
t
i” oe oe ee ee ee “A a C8 eo eh Se ee eee ee ee ee ee oe eo ee a Se Nef eo Oe oe ee
A
NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIC
=f x a
= = i 5 5
be ; = be] —
Pe) = a 5 nw =
> = Py > i > “ ee)
e) = 2 = — =
& Z o Z i 2
= = 77) ae
NOILNLILSNI LIBRARIES. SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT
2] = on =z oa w m4
= =< = .< K. = <= 4g
=| Zz oq z \ Ss 5 > SN
a6 Oo poe °, O WSs . ag [@) \
g 2 g 2X 2 3 |
z = = E x = Ee
> , Ss > = ne =
&, = 7) = ” yam ” y
1yvVYsIT LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS Ssalyuvug
o Gh). ile ws = ws :
= «.t# gpa a w = a
a zs = <x = <
= an Wg a 5 co
$ = ee hee = a 2 eee |
TITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3SIYVYdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT
S may Fe Ss Re S a = =
e = = w = o
= = . =) 2 > ae
E 0 WYN = = ey z
- = WAN ae a =
al BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS, S3 1uy
ae = aS = < =
z sj Ne Sj Zz i GY
9 x re} \ =e ZO =z y
2 ve 2 win 2 ig g
= z \S 2 = =
2 SS = = > S = > it |
TITUTION OT OEIISNT_NVINGSHLINS) Sa 1YvVYaiT LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITU "IC
& = a a = 4
a a= x
< Cc ~ <= c < “Ee
fae a a 4 [aad =
p 2 (e) = o ae 5
1 iar] za a! =z =) = hi
vu LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN LINSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3!Y¥Vus
i z =
S = S = 6 >
= x0 ie 2 - »
Es > = Cade = ‘
- a - a = ys
w m w m ”
= w < 7) =
7)
=
=
Es
w
oO
2
>
oa
NVINOSHLINS S3tuvugtity
z Ea 2 z |
= ar z z |
oO =. Oo ; ro) :
a w ; a a
= oO % = =
= 2 E c
_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S3 1yVUd
= Ww Ne us
& - KEE
4 < Se <
S o Ne
= o a
[e) -_ ~
z | |
‘ITUTION. NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3INVYGIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTIC
~ “
Sg
Nu
SSIUYVUGITLIBRARIES
s31uYVUaIT
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
NSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
NSTITUTION
sJINVUSIT
NVINOSHLINS S31uvudalt
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
s
NVINOSHLINS
SONIAN
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEITLIBRARIE
NVINOSHLINS
NOILNLILSNI
BRARIES_ SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
were
LIBRARIES
DILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS
LE aa
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION
= = 5 & ae
a) = ow ° ow
a 5 ee) - x0
> res > = >
= F a a
5 Z p bie: Z
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALIL
wn = or 2) 2 RO n
= Se NG OE =< G@. =
4 = \\ : cn z +
= oO WY BY ro) x
g 2Ne 2 3 | z
= = x 2 = z
z ee ae
INSTITUTION NOILNJILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31uWvuaIy
‘ 2 A @& &
& : x
fo = =
= ro) =
ol za ¢ |
NOILNLI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
E 5 3 =
ow — Yr ow
: 5 43
a EO >
m ” m
wo = wo
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saiuvugit_LIBRAR
zs 7) 2 7) t Zz
< = < = <<. O
z . =i z = Zz Y\y
Oo : x EO =e se) Ws
2 AW ‘2 g 2
E vr" 2 : 2 EN
Bt ee ; : 5}
pot dVuaIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNL1!
a VS « sd
.< a x x S <x
om fed «
faa) = oa = a
= 2 a ES a
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31yu¥VYaIT_LIBRAR
i = - z -
= = ao
; = Sy 5 = a
> fe > = >
vA — a) — Po)
= & sins od =
a Z i Z a
S3JIUVUGIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALI.
Z Be ak = Sg pres
ae y 2 : \\ *: S na 2
g - \. z = z
z Nee aoa By he
INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS Sa1uVua1T_
& wi = ie! &
ee. ao = tc =
E < = < a
= oO = o =
Oo = (oe) -_
= 2 Se aod z
~Saluvud mou BRARI ES_ SMITHSONIAN” INSTITUTION | NOILQLL.
2) aU = EL, 2) Z wo Kaa wor =)
EGE WIESE Bye Uy Vie WS) OE
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIO
"WOO
01206 6734
7 i. tat ee ‘ . iy . ' ¥
rian mifSge rats veg wt VSM Brey s mri .
Era piesoa ree an Cid aa as Ge aie . ‘ ‘
ety Sane ete rae A ; 2 .
i hon ‘ wend = ‘ ‘ a:
Nate ee Ure oe teen ‘ ‘ . 2 ‘ siren
UAE ay vow won wg ges E es s : y
VO Usne eta) ogi, wee , & go : A ;
, ' i i : '
, a ia a . %,
rhea 2 igs ee ‘ Rats ' ‘
eas eh Le oa ta ae A “ =
47%, "4 Wlega ey ais “ , i 3 x ekg ’
vores : ‘oe : ‘ d % ves
aM ey wr ‘ ey . uy